Professional Documents
Culture Documents
User Manual 20855 (Manymanuals.com)
User Manual 20855 (Manymanuals.com)
8400 E84AVSCxxxxx...
L
Overview of technical documentation for Inverter Drives 8400
________________________________________________________________
Parameterisation
BA keypad
SW 8400 BaseLine
SW 8400 StateLine This documentation
SW 8400 HighLine
SW 8400 TopLine
KHB for the communication module
Drive commissioning
SW 8400 BaseLine/StateLine/HighLine/TopLine
chapter "Commissioning"
chapter "Diagnostics & error management"
Remote maintenance manual
Networking
KHB for the communication medium used
________________________________________________________________
3 Commissioning _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 44
3.1 Safety instructions with regard to commissioning _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 45
3.2 Notes on motor control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 46
3.3 Preconditions for commissioning with the »Engineer« _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 47
3.4 Trouble-shooting during commissioning _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 48
3.5 Commissioning wizard 8400 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 48
3.6 Manual motor direction of rotation check (manual control) _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 50
3.7 Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 51
3.7.1 Prepare controller for commissioning _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 52
3.7.2 Creating an »Engineer« project & going online _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 53
3.7.3 Parameterising the motor control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 54
3.7.4 Parameterise application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 55
3.7.5 Saving parameter settings safe against mains failure _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 57
3.7.6 Enable controller and test application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 57
3.8 Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 59
3.8.1 Prepare controller for commissioning _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 61
3.8.2 Creating an »Engineer« project & going online _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 62
3.8.3 Parameterising the motor control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 63
3.8.4 Parameterise application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 64
3.8.5 Saving parameter settings safe against mains failure _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 66
3.8.6 Enable controller and test application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 66
3.9 PC manual control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 67
3.9.1 Activate PC manual control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 67
3.9.2 Speed control _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 70
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
17.1.29
L_NSet_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 952
17.1.29.1 Main setpoint path _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 956
17.1.29.2 JOG setpoints _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 956
17.1.29.3 Setpoint inversion _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 957
17.1.29.4 Value range of the input signal _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 957
17.1.29.5 Skip frequency function _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 957
17.1.29.6 Ramp function generator for the main setpoint _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 959
17.1.29.7 S-shaped ramp _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 961
17.1.29.8 Additional setpoint _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 962
17.1.29.9 Application example for the additional load function _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 962
17.1.30 L_OffsetGain_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 963
17.1.31 L_OffsetGain_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 964
17.1.32 L_OffsetGainP_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 965
17.1.33 L_OffsetGainP_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 966
17.1.34 L_OffsetGainP_3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 967
17.1.35 L_Or_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 968
17.1.36 L_Or_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 969
17.1.37 L_Or_3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 970
17.1.38 L_Or_4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 971
17.1.39 L_PCTRL_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 972
17.1.39.1 Control characteristic _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 976
17.1.39.2 Ramp function generator _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 977
17.1.39.3 Operating range of the PID process controller _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 977
17.1.39.4 Evaluation of the output signal _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 978
17.1.39.5 Comparison function "Actual value = setpoint" _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 978
17.1.39.6 Control functions _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 979
17.1.40 L_PT1_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 980
17.1.41 L_RLQ_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 981
17.1.42 L_SignalMonitor_a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 982
17.1.43 L_SignalMonitor_b _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 983
17.1.44 L_Transient_1 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 984
17.1.44.1 Function 0: Evaluate rising signal edges _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 985
17.1.44.2 Function 1: Evaluate falling signal edges _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 985
17.1.44.3 Function 2: Evaluate rising and falling signal edges _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 986
17.1.45 L_Transient_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 987
17.1.46 L_Transient_3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 988
17.1.47 L_Transient_4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 989
17.2 System blocks _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 990
17.2.1 LS_AnalogInput _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 992
17.2.2 LS_CANManagement _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 992
17.2.3 LS_DataAccess _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 992
17.2.4 LS_DeviceMonitor _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 992
17.2.5 LS_DigitalInput _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 992
17.2.6 LS_DigitalOutput _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 992
17.2.7 LS_DisFree _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 993
17.2.8 LS_DisFree_a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 994
17.2.8.1 Display of internal process factors in application units _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 995
17.2.9 LS_DisFree_b _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 996
17.2.10 LS_DriveInterface _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 996
17.2.11 LS_Keypad _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 997
17.2.12 LS_MotionControlKernel _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 998
17.2.13 LS_MotorInterface _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 998
________________________________________________________________
Index _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1011
________________________________________________________________
Danger!
The controller is a source of danger which may lead to death or severe injury of persons.
To protect yourself and others against these dangers, observe the safety instructions
before switching on the controller.
Please read the safety instructions provided in the 8400 mounting instructions and in
the 8400 hardware manual. Both documents are supplied with the controller.
Target group
This documentation addresses to all persons who would like to parameterise, configure and
diagnose the 8400 StateLine with the Lenze engineering software »Engineer« and the X400 keypad.
Validity
The information in this documentation are valid for the following standard devices:
Screenshots/application examples
All screenshots provided in this documentation are application examples. Depending on the
software version of the controller and the version of the installed »Engineer« software, the
screenshots in this documentation may differ from the representation in the »Engineer«.
Tip!
Information and tools for Lenze products are provided in the download area at
http://www.lenze.com Download
Version Description
12.0 06/2014 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 StateLine C V15.00.00
11.0 11/2013 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 StateLine C V14.00.00
10.0 11/2012 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 StateLine C V13.00.00 and converted to
new layout.
9.1 09/2012 TD05 Error corrections & supplements
9.0 08/2012 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 StateLine C V12.00.00
8.0 10/2011 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 StateLine C V11.00.00
7.1 02/2011 TD05 Error corrections & supplements
7.0 11/2010 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 StateLine C V06.00.00 and V10.00.00
________________________________________________________________
This documentation uses the following conventions to distinguish between different types of
information:
All information that only applies to a certain controller software version or higher is identified
accordingly in this documentation.
________________________________________________________________
Term Meaning
Engineering Tools Software solutions for simple engineering at all stages
»EASY Navigator« – Ensures easy operator guidance
• All practical Lenze engineering tools at a glance
• Tools can be selected quickly
• Clearly arranged, simplifying the engineering process from the start
»EASY Starter« – Simple tool for service technicians
• Especially developed for the commissioning and maintenance of Lenze
devices
• Graphical user interface with few buttons
• Simple online diagnostics, parameterisation and commissioning
• No risk of accidentally changing the application
• Ready applications can be loaded to the device
»Engineer« – Multi-device engineering
• For all products from our L-force portfolio
• Practice-oriented user interface
• Easy handling due to graphical user interfaces
• Suitable for all project stages (configuration, commissioning, production)
• Parameter setting and configuration
Application block Block for a technology application (e.g. actuating drive speed)
A technology application is a drive solution based on the experience and know-how of Lenze
in which function blocks interconnected to a signal flow form the basis for implementing
typical drive tasks.
ASM Abbreviation for asynchronous motor
CAN Abbreviation for Controller Area Network. CAN is an asynchronous, serial fieldbus system.
CANopen® is a communication protocol based on CAN. The Lenze system bus (CAN on board)
operates with a subset of this communication protocol.
CANopen® is a registered community trademark of the CAN user organisation CiA® (CAN in
Automation e. V.).
System bus "CAN on board"
Code Parameter used for controller parameterisation or monitoring.
The term is usually called "index".
Display code Parameter that displays the current status or value of an input/output of a system block.
Emergency brake The emergency brake serves to shutdown rotary or translatory masses in motion in
emergency situations. Emergency situations are exceptional situations that only occur
sporadically.
EtherCAT® is a real-time capable Ethernet system with maximum performanc.
EtherCAT® is a registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by the Beckhoff
Automation GmbH, Germany.
Ethernet POWERLINK is a real-time capable fieldbus system based on Ethernet. For user data
exchange, Ethernet POWERLINK specifies a communication protocol based on CANopen.
Ethernet POWERLINK is a patented technology licensed by the Ethernet POWERLINK
Standardization Group (EPSG), Germany.
EtherNet/IP™ (EtherNet Industrial Protocol) is a fieldbus system based on Ethernet which
uses the Common Industrial Protocol™ (CIP™) for data exchange.
EtherNet/IP™ and Common Industrial Protocol™ (CIP™) are trademarks and patented
technologies licensed by the user organisation ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association),
USA.
FB Editor Abbreviation for function block editor. Graphic interconnection tool which is available in the
»Engineer« for function block interconnections on the FB Editor.
Working with the FB Editor
________________________________________________________________
Term Meaning
Function block General designation of a function block for free interconnection in the FB Editor.
A function block (short: FB) can be compared with an integrated circuit that contains a
specific control logic and delivers one or several values when being executed. Example:
"L_Arithmetik_1" (FB for arithmetic operations)
Many function block are available several times (e.g. L_And_1, L_And_2 and L_And_3).
Function blocks
Holding brake The holding brake serves to statically hold e.g. a position during the downtimes of a
robot/travelling/synchronous/hoist drive.
INTERBUS was developed as sensor/actuator/bus system for transmitting process data.
Today, maintenance activities for the INTERBUS technologies are carried out by the user
organisation PROFIBUS & PROFINET International (PI).
Keypad The keypad is an alternative to the PC for the local operation, parameterisation, and
diagnostics in a simple manner.
LA Abbreviation for Lenze Application block
Example: "LA_NCtrl" (block for the "Actuating drive speed" application)
Lenze setting This setting is the default factory setting of the device.
LP Abbreviation for Lenze Port block
Example: "LP_CanIn1" (CAN1 port block)
LS Abbreviation for Lenze System block
Example: "LS_DigitalInput" (system block for digital input signals)
MCI Abbreviation for Motionbus Communication Interface (fieldbus interface)
The Inverter Drives 8400 can accommodate plug-in communication modules and can
therefore take part in the data transfer of an existing fieldbus system.
Fieldbus interface (MCI)
Port block Block for implementing the process data transfer via a fieldbus
PROFIBUS® (Process Field Bus) is fieldbus system used worldwide for automating machines
and production plants.
PROFIBUS® is a registered trademark and patented technology licensed by the user
organisation PROFIBUS & PROFINET International (PI).
PROFINET® (Process Field Network) is a real-time capable fieldbus system based on Ethernet.
PROFINET® is a registered trademark and patented technology licensed by the user
organisation PROFIBUS & PROFINET International (PI).
PSM Abbreviation for permanently excited synchronous motor
QSP Abbreviation for quick stop
SC Abbreviation for Servo Control
Service brake The service brake serves to shutdown rotary or translatory masses in motion in a controlled
manner. The energy to be dissipated in this process is produced in the form of friction
energy. Unlike emergency braking, this process is a regular and recurring operating mode.
SLPSM Abbreviation for sensorless control of synchronous motors
SLVC Abbreviation for SensorLess Vector Control
Subcode If a code contains several parameters, these are stored in "subcodes".
This Manual uses a slash "/" as a separator between code and subcode (e.g. "C00118/3").
The term is usually called "subindex".
System block System blocks provide interfaces to basic functions, to "free codes" and to the hardware of
the controller in the FB editor of the »Engineer« (e.g. to the digital inputs). Each system block
is only available once.
System blocks
USB diagnostic The USB diagnostic adapter is used for the operation, parameterisation, and diagnostics of
adapter the controller. Data are exchanged between the PC (USB connection) and the controller
(diagnostic interface on the front) via the diagnostic adapter. Order designation: E94AZCUS
VFCplus Abbreviation for Voltage Frequency Control
________________________________________________________________
The following signal words and symbols are used in this documentation to indicate dangers and
important information:
Safety instructions
Layout of the safety instructions:
Application notes
________________________________________________________________
Danger!
In general, changing a parameter causes an immediate response in the controller!
An enabled controller can cause an unwanted behaviour at the motor shaft! For
instance, setpoint sources can change over abruptly (e.g. when the signal source is
configured for the main setpoint).
Certain device commands or settings which may cause critical states of drive behaviour
constitute exceptions. Such parameter changes are only possible if the controller is
inhibited. Otherwise, a corresponding error message will be issued.
________________________________________________________________
L-force Engineer
Keypad
Parameterisation Fieldbus
0 2
Signal 1 ... Signal
inputs Switch-off positioning outputs
Actuating drive speed
Setpoint Motion
M generator Control
Kernel
ç è
n
Process t
controller
Device Motor M
control control
________________________________________________________________
The following technology applications integrated in the drive controller 8400 StateLine provide the
main signal flow for the implementation of a general or a special drive solution:
Note!
Please note that the "StateLine", "HighLine" and "TopLine" device types differ with regard
to the number, functional range, and flexibility of the technology applications offered.
Detailed information on each technology application can be found in the main chapter
"Technology applications". ( 296)
________________________________________________________________
The stepped Inverter Drives 8400 series provides solutions for simple to complex applications –
depending on the user's experience and knowledge about the handling of drives and drive tasks.
On the one hand, a great scope of standard drive tasks for frequency inverters is covered by the
technology applications offered by Lenze, and on the other hand, the user is relieved from time-
consuming programming activities. In practice, some drive tasks are alike so that minor
modifications of the corresponding technology applications lead to quick results.
Other important features of technology applications are:
• Direct implementation of drive tasks without recreating a function block interconnection inside
the device
• Operation via keypad and/or operation via convenient operator dialogs in the «Engineer».
• Commissioning via few operating and diagnosing parameters (local keypad operation).
• Achieving a transparency as high as possible via the integrated functionality of the device by
representing signal flow diagrams.
• Provision of a basic functionality suitable and often sufficient for many applications.
Tip!
If the end customer of the machine does not want to use ready-made Lenze functions, it is
also possible to implement individual drive solutions with the "StateLine C", "HighLine C"
and "TopLine C" versions in the form of "free interconnections". (In case of "StateLine C2,
free interconnection is only possible from version 12.00.00 and »Engineer« V2.17.)
Here, a technology application can be used as starting basis, which has to be adapted to the
requirement by a change or extension via function block editor (see the following chapter).
________________________________________________________________
In case of the 8400 device version, each technology application is connected to a "function block
interconnection" ("FB interconnection"). This FB interconnections serve to implement signal
interconnections. Various FBs are available for digital signal processing, signal conversion and logic
modules.
For special drive tasks it has proved of value to use the integrated technology applications as a basis
for modifications or extensions of the available FB interconnections.
________________________________________________________________
There are several possibilities for commissioning the 8400 StateLine controller:
Tip!
The engineering tools »EASY Starter« and »Engineer StateLevel« are provided free of charge
in the internet:
http://www.lenze.com Download Software Downloads
For communication between PC and controller, the USB diagnostic adapter can be used for
instance (see the following subchapter).
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
All parameters for controller parameterising or monitoring are saved as so-called "codes".
• The codes are numbered and indicated by the prefix "C" before the code, e.g. "C00002".
• Moreover, each code has a name and specific attributes, as for example access type (reading,
writing), data type, limit values and default setting ("Lenze setting").
• For the sake of clarity, some codes contain "subcodes" for saving parameters. This Manual uses
a slash "/" as a separator between code and subcode, e.g. C00118/3".
• According to their functionality, the parameters are divided into three groups:
• Setting parameters: For specifying setpoints and for setting device / monitoring functions.
• Configuration parameters: For configuring signal connections and terminal assignments.
• Diagnostic/display parameters: For displaying device-internal process factors, current actual
values and status messages. These are read-only parameters.
________________________________________________________________
/&'GLVSOD\
+HDGOLQH
7ULSOHOLQHGLVSOD\
'HYLFHVWDWH
&XUUHQWIXQFWLRQ &XUUHQWIXQFWLRQ
OHIWIXQFWLRQNH\ ULJKWIXQFWLRQNH\
LCD display
Headline
In the menu level: Menu name
In the parameter level: Parameter name
Three-part display
In the menu level: List of available menus
In the parameter level: Code/subcode and setting or actual value
Device status
Controller is switched on Pulse inhibit active
________________________________________________________________
LCD display
Function - left function key Function - right function key
Change parameter setting Accept change in the controller
(change to editing mode) (no saving with mains failure protection )
Back to main menu Abort (discard change)
Save all parameter settings in the memory module safe against mains failure
Control elements
Execute the function assigned to the function key (see LCD display)
Execute the stop function set in C00469 (Lenze setting: Inhibit controller)
Menu structure
In the keypad, the parameters are classified into various menus and submenus.
• The USER menu includes a selection of frequently used parameters.
• The Code list contains all parameters.
• The Go to param function enables you to reach the corresponding parameter directly.
• The Logbook logs all errors and their chronological history.
• The Diagnostics menu contains diagnostic/display parameters for displaying device-internal
process factors, current actual values and status messages.
Userlevel
From version 12.00.00 onwards, the extent of menus, submenus an codes shown in the keypad can
be adapted by selecting the "Userlevel" in C00001/1:
• Userlevel Standard (Lenze setting): Only the most important menus and codes are shown in the
keypad.
• Userlevel Expert: All menus and codes are shown in the keypad.
• Userlevel Service: For service purposes only (Lenze service).
The the Userlevel has been changed, the menus are restructured in the keypad according to the
selected Userlevel. The parameters of a plugged in communication module are always displayed
completely independent of the set Userlevel.
________________________________________________________________
General operation
60.00 %
ESC OK
6.
Multilingualism
All texts displayed in the keypad are in English.
From version 11.00.00 onwards, the most important menus as well as diagnostic and configuration
parameters can are also available in German and French. To set a different language, select the
Language selection menu item in the main menu of the keypad.
________________________________________________________________
The USB diagnostic adapter, for instance, can be used for the communication between the PC
(including the »Engineer« software) and the controller, see the following illustration. The USB
diagnostic adapter is the connection between the PC (free USB port) and the controller (X6
diagnostic interface).
The All parameters tab in the »EASY Starter« and the »Engineer« provides a quick access to all
parameters of the controller.
The given categories and subcategories correspond 1:1 to the menus and submenus of the keypad:
Category
Subcategories
Moreover, the »Engineer« provides a commissioning interface on the Application parameters tab
where you can commission the application in a few steps.
Detailed information on how to handle the »Engineer« can be found in the integrated
online help that you can call with the [F1] function key.
________________________________________________________________
2.3.3 Save parameter settings in the memory module safe against mains failure
Controller parameter changes via the EASY Starter /»Engineer«, the keypad, or a master control via
fieldbus communication will be lost after mains switching of the controller unless the settings have
been explicitly saved to the integrated memory module.
General information
• In the delivery state, the Lenze setting of the parameters has been saved to the integrated
memory module. These parameters are
• the parameters of the controller
• the parameters of the communication module plugged into the MCI interface
• the parameters of the possibly existing safety module (device variant)
• When the device or the external 24 V voltage supply is switched on, all parameters are
automatically loaded from the memory module into the main memory of the controller.
• Full functionality of the memory module is even provided if the power supply has been switched
off and only the electronic components of the controller are externally supplied by a 24 V DC
voltage, e.g. via the X4/24E terminal.
• The memory module can be preconfigured with customised data.
• The memory module is available as a spare part - without any data.
During operation
• Parameter sets can be saved and loaded manually.
• Using the keypad, you can press function key to save the parameter settings.
• The »EASY Starter«/»Engineer« serves to execute the saving via the icon in the toolbar or via
the device command "Save all parameter sets" (C00002/11 = "1: On / start").
• The storage process may take a couple of seconds. After the device command has been called
in C00002/11, dynamic status information ("Work in progress 20%" "Work in progress
40%" "Work in progress 60%", etc.) is returned.
Note!
In order to prevent data inconsistencies during the saving process:
• Do not switch off the supply voltage!
• Do not remove the memory module from the device!
Automatic saving of changed parameter settings is explicitly not supported because this
significantly reduces the service life of the memory module.
________________________________________________________________
StateLine HighLine
TopLine
________________________________________________________________
When a system is installed, parameters must be changed time and again until the system runs
satisfactorily. The user menu of the controller contains a selection of frequently used parameters to
be able to access and change these parameters quickly:
Tip!
The user menu can be freely configured in C00517.
In the »Engineer«, you can configure the user menu comfortably via the User menu tab (see
»Engineer« online help).
The password protection serves to restrict the access to parameters of the user menu. Then,
all other parameters cannot be accessed without knowing the password and are thus
protected against unwanted changes.
________________________________________________________________
Various tasks can be executed via the functions of the device access protection:
• Password protection
• Only authorised persons (with password knowledge) may read/change all parameters of the
controller.
• Non-authorised persons (without password knowledge) can only access the max. 32
parameters of the user menu.
• Device personalisation
• Only controller personalised with a specific binding ID and memory modules can be used in
the system.
Note!
If password protection/device personalisation is used:
• Inform the end customer that Lenze can only provide restricted service for the devices
with access protection.
• It is not possible for Lenze to modify a replacement device via special accesses in such
a way that it cooperates with a personalised memory module.
• The keypad does not support the alpha-numeric entry of a password, thus the keypad
cannot be used for entry.
________________________________________________________________
When the password protection is active, only write/read access to the parameters of the user menu
is possible.
• From version 15.00.00, the password protection can be configured individually for every single
communication channel. Individual password protection for single communication channels
( 38)
Note!
The password protection serves to only limit the access to parameters of the standard
device. The access to parameters of a plugged-in communication module is not
concerned.
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
The 8400 StateLine can be parameterised via the following "communication channels":
• Internally via system blocks (LS_ParReadWrite1-6 and LS_WriteParamList)
• externally via
• Diagnostics interface X6 ("DIAG")
• CANopen interface X1 ("CAN on board")
• Fieldbus interface (MCI)
As in some applications, only certain communication channels have to be protected, the parameters
described in the following serve to configure individual access restrictions for each communication
channel.
In the Lenze setting, all access restrictions are active for all communication channels when the
password is set. This corresponds to the previous behaviour with a set password, i.e. only one
write/read access to the parameters of the user menu is possible.
Note!
The configuration can only be changed if no password has been set!
• This means that even if the password has been deactivated temporarily by the "check
password" device command, the configuration cannot be changed.
• As long as a password is set, the "Load Lenze setting" device command does not
change the configuration either.
The password protection is activated by setting a password.
Activate the password protection ( 37)
Deactivate password protection/change password ( 38)
________________________________________________________________
Short overview of the relevant parameters for configuring the password protection:
When the password is set, the respective restriction is active if the corresponding bit has been set:
The parameter set must be saved to the device safe against mains failure to prevent password
protection configured in the device from getting lost due to mains switching.
Save parameter settings in the memory module safe against mains failure ( 32)
________________________________________________________________
The controller and the memory module are married via the device personalisation by means of a
binding ID. When the device personalisation is active, all write/read actions between controller and
memory module are only executed if both components have the same binding ID.
Lenze delivery status: Procedure carried out by the Impermissible replacement by the
customer: end user:
ABC ---
--- --- ABC ABC
123 ABC
No binding ID is set. Customer sets binding ID for device When device personalisation is
personalisation. active:
The replacement of the controller or
memory module causes an error
message if the binding ID is incorrect
or not available.
If, for instance, a parameter set has been loaded from the memory module with an active device
personalisation, saving of this parameter set on another memory module with a different or non-
existent binding ID is not possible.
• Thus, copying the parameter set from a personalised memory module to a non-personalised
memory module is not possible!
Two types of checks are distinguished:
• If a differing binding ID is detected when the controller is switched on (during device
initialisation):
• the "Fault" error response is returned.
• The "PS10: Invalid memory module binding" error message is entered into the logbook.
• If a differing binding ID is detected while a device command for loading/saving the parameter
set is executed:
• Loading/saving is not executed.
• A corresponding status for the device command is output in C00003.
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
Every controller has an individual master password called "MasterPin". By entering the MasterPin, a
controller inhibited by the password mechanisms can be reset to the delivery status.
Stop!
When the MasterPin is used, the parameter set is reset to the Lenze setting both in the
controller and in the memory module!
• This results in a permanent loss of the customised parameterisation that must be
recreated!
• A reset to the Lenze setting can result in unforeseen level changes at the I/O terminals
(e.g. brake control)!
________________________________________________________________
For device identification, any device name (e.g. wheel drive) with max 32 characters can be set in
C00199/1 for the controller and saved in the memory module with mains failure protection.
If a device name is stored in C00199/1 and the controller is added to the project in the »Engineer«
via the Einfügen Insert device detected online... function, the device name stored in
("8400 StateLine") C00199/1 (here: wheel drive) is used as device name instead of the type:
In C00199/2...5, four texts à max. 32 characters can be set for item designation and saved in the
memory module safe against mains failure. These additional subcodes are not dependent on the
previously described text acceptance mechanism in the »Engineer« for the device name (C00199/1).
________________________________________________________________
3 Commissioning
Danger!
Unexpected motor movements can occur
Under certain conditions the motor may rotate after mains connection.
Possible consequences:
• Persons in the vicinity of the machine or plant risk getting hurt.
• Unexpected starting action may damage the machine or plant.
Protective measures:
• Commissioning with external 24 V supply and without mains voltage. In this case, the
controller can only be parameterised and diagnosed during commissioning.
• Ensure that setpoints are not active.
Tip!
• Information on some of the operating statuses can quickly be obtained via the LED
status displays on the front of the controller. ( 421)
• Check firmware: Particularly with regard to the use of older controllers (e.g. if the
customer is using one from stock) it makes sense to check the software (firmware)
version. The software version of the controller can be seen on the nameplate in the "SW"
line and can be determined by reading out code C00099.
• Restore delivery status: Set code C00002/1 to "1: On / start" to reset all parameter
settings of the device to the Lenze setting. This leaves you with a defined device
configuration. Load Lenze setting ( 77)
________________________________________________________________
Danger!
• For thermal reasons, continuous operation of self-ventilated motors at a low field
frequency and rated motor current is not permissible!
• In the Lenze setting, the Motor temperature monitoring (PTC) is activated. ( 242)
• Activate the Brake resistor monitoring (I2xt) if necessary. ( 243)
• C00015 must be used to select 87 Hz operation if a delta-connected asynchronous
motor (nameplate data: 400 V /230 V ) is to be operated in conjunction with a
drive controller for a mains voltage of 400 V.
________________________________________________________________
In the Lenze setting, the V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) as motor control is set in C00006 with
a linear characteristic.
• V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) is a motor control mode for classic frequency inverter
applications on the basis of a simple and robust control procedure for the operation of machines
with a linear or quadratic load torque characteristic (e.g. fans).
• The presettings of the parameters ensure that the controller is immediately ready for operation
and the motor works adequately without further parameterisation if a controller and a 50 Hz
asynchronous machine with matching performances are assigned to each other.
Note!
Check the nameplate data against the motor data set in the controller. Further
information is provided in the chapter "Motor selection/Motor data". ( 105)
Related topics:
Motor control (MCTRL) ( 104)
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
How to obtain/update the »Engineer« software:
• Download from the internet: The full version of the »Engineer StateLevel« is provided
free of charge in the internet:
http://www.Lenze.com Download Software downloads
• Requesting the CDYou can also request the »Engineer« separately on CD free of charge
at your Lenze representative. See the "About Lenze" area on our homepage for e.g. the
corresponding German address.
________________________________________________________________
When the »Engineer« is used, trouble during commissioning can be detected and eliminated
conveniently. Proceed as follows:
• Check whether error messages appear in the »Engineer«.
• On the Diagnostics tab, relevant actual states of the controller and pending error messages
are displayed in a well-arranged visualisation.
• Check the input terminals for their corresponding setpoints.
• The Terminal assignment tab displays the current input/output signals.
• Check the signal flow of the application.
• For this purpose, click the Signal flow button on the Application parameter tab. The displayed
signal flow shows active setpoints and their further processing.
Related topics:
Diagnostics & error management ( 420)
LED status displays ( 421)
Error messages of the operating system ( 444)
This function extension is supported by the »Engineer« from version 2.15 onwards!
The commissioning wizard 8400 serves to carry out a guided commissioning of the controller based
on the Lenze setting of the parameters. The set parameters can then be saved in the controller with
mains failure protection.
Note!
Take all the necessary safety precautions before you carry out the following
commissioning steps and switch the device on!
Safety instructions with regard to commissioning ( 45)
________________________________________________________________
2. Go online.
After a connection to the controller has been established, the following status is displayed
in the Status line:
3. Click the icon to open the commissioning wizard 8400 dialog box.
• Now the commissioning wizard guides you step by step through the setting of the
important parameters for a quick commissioning.
• The Next button can only be activated again after all parameter settings in the device
have been reset via the Load Lenze setting button.
Related topics:
Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application ( 51)
________________________________________________________________
The »Engineer« function "Manual control" easily allows for controlling the direction of rotation of
the motor. The manual control serves to let the motor connected to the controller with an
adjustable speed for an adjustable time.
Note!
Take all the necessary safety precautions before you carry out the following
commissioning steps and switch the device on!
Safety instructions with regard to commissioning ( 45)
How to carry out a manual motor direction of rotation check using the »Engineer«:
1. In the Project view, select the 8400 StateLine controller.
2. Go online.
After a connection to the controller has been established, the following status is displayed
in the Status line:
6. Click the icon to open the Manual motor rotation indication dialog box.
Note: If the "not ready for operation" status is displayed, check whether all conditions
mentioned before (see steps 3 ... 5) have been met.
8. Click the button to let the motor rotate with the set speed for the set runtime.
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Take all the necessary safety precautions before you carry out the following
commissioning steps and switch the device on!
Safety instructions with regard to commissioning ( 45)
System constellation
X3 X4 X6
U V W AR A1U GA 24I RFR DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4
M
3~ X6
[3-1] Block diagram for wiring the commissioning example for the "Actuating drive speed" application
Commissioning steps
Find a description of the commissioning steps of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application
below.
Please observe the sequence of the steps in the following chapters and follow them through
carefully. This will help you to commission your controller quickly and as safely as possible:
Prepare controller for commissioning ( 52)
Creating an »Engineer« project & going online ( 53)
Parameterising the motor control ( 54)
Parameterise application ( 55)
________________________________________________________________
Abbreviations used:
JOG Selection of fixed setpoints 1 ... 3 parameterised in C00039/1...3
DCB Manual DC-injection braking
Cw/Ccw CW/CCW rotation
QSP Quick stop
MPotUp Motor potentiometer: Increase speed
MPotDown Motor potentiometer: Reduce speed
Cw/QSP Fail-safe selection of the direction of rotation in connection with quick stop
Ccw/QSP
If the green "DRV-RDY" LED is blinking and the red "DRV-ERR" LED is off, the controller is ready for
operation and commissioning can proceed.
Related topics:
Automatic restart after mains connection/fault... ( 95)
LED status displays ( 421)
________________________________________________________________
You can find detailed information on the general use of the »Engineer« in the online help
which you can call with [F1].
• The chapter "Working with projects" describes, among other things, all options of the
Start-up wizard which are available to create a new »Engineer« project.
The following steps serve to describe a general method for creating a project with the Select
component from catalogue option. For this purpose, individual components (controller, motor, etc.)
are selected from selection lists.
1. Start the »Engineer«.
2. Create a new project with the Start-up wizard and the Select component from catalogue option:
• In the Component step, select the 8400 StateLine controller.
• In the Device modules step, select the available communication module.
• In the Application step, select the "Actuating drive speed" application. (The application can
also be selected any time afterwards via the Application parameter tab or C00005.)
• Select the other components (motor/gearbox) to be added to the project in the Other
components dialog step.
3. In the Project view, select the 8400 StateLine controller.
4. Go online.
After a connection to the controller has been established, the following status is displayed in the
Status line:
________________________________________________________________
2. In the Motor control list field (C00006), select the desired motor control.
3. Adapt the motor control parameters:
V/f base frequency 50.0 Hz Adapting the V/f base frequency ( 133)
(C00015)
Imax in motor mode 47.00 A Optimising the Imax controller ( 136)
(C00022)
Vmin boost 1.60 % Adapting the Vmin boost ( 135)
(C00016)
Related topics:
Notes on motor control ( 46)
Motor control (MCTRL) ( 104)
________________________________________________________________
The application parameters can be found on the right side of the Application parameter tab:
1. In the Control mode list field (C00007), select the control mode suitable for the wiring of the
terminals.
• The corresponding wiring diagram is displayed in a pop-up window if you click the button
right to the list field.
• For a detailed description, see the chapter "Terminal assignment of the control modes".
( 309)
________________________________________________________________
Accel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s The setpoint is led via a ramp function generator with
(C00012) linear characteristic. The ramp function generator
converts setpoint step-changes at the input into a ramp.
Decel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s
L_NSet_1 ( 952)
(C00013)
Reference speed 1500 rpm All speed setpoint selections are provided in % and
(C00011) always refer to the reference speed set in C00011.
The motor reference speed is indicated on the motor
nameplate.
Decel. time - quick stop 2.000 s If quick stop is requested, motor control is decoupled
(C00105) from the setpoint selection and, within the deceleration
time parameterised in C00105, the motor is brought to
a standstill (nact = 0).
Activate/deactivate quick stop ( 81)
Fixed setpoint 1 40.00 % A fixed setpoint for the setpoint generator can be
(C00039/1) activated instead of the main setpoint via the digital DI1
and DI2 inputs.
Fixed setpoint 2 60.00 %
• Fixed setpoints are selected in [%] based on the
(C00039/2) reference speed (C00011).
Fixed setpoint 3 80.00 % L_NSet_1 ( 952)
(C00039/3)
Tip!
• Click the Signal flow button to go down one dialog level to the signal flow of the
application with further possible parameter settings. See chapter "Basic signal flow".
( 299)
• The preconfigured I/O connection in the selected control mode can be changed via
configuration parameters. See chapter "User-defined terminal assignment". ( 289)
________________________________________________________________
The parameter set must be saved to the device safe against mains failure to prevent parameter
settings becoming lost due to mains switching.
Save parameter set.
Stop!
Before stipulating a speed setpoint, check whether the brake in the form of a holding
brake on the motor shaft has been released!
Note!
If the controller is enabled and the "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option is activated in
C00142 (Lenze setting) when the mains is connected, the controller remains in the
"ReadyToSwitchOn" state.
To be able to change to the "SwitchedOn" status, the controller enable must be
deactivated first: set terminal X4/RFR to LOW level.
Note!
Observe the actual speed value (display in C00051) as well as the LED status displays.
( 421)
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
Other control functions in the "Terminal 0" control mode:
• DI3: HIGH level ≡ Request DC-injection braking
• DI4: HIGH level ≡ Request a change of direction of rotation
Related topics:
"Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option ( 95)
Trouble-shooting during commissioning ( 48)
Diagnostics & error management ( 420)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Take all the necessary safety precautions before you carry out the following
commissioning steps and switch the device on!
Safety instructions with regard to commissioning ( 45)
System constellation
X3 X4 X6
U V W AR A1U GA 24I RFR DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4
0 0 QSP
1 0 Cw X61
0 1 Ccw
1 1 -
DI1 X6
Ccw
Cw
M
3~
DI1 DI2
DI2
v [m/s]
C00039/3
i
C00013 Ccw
C00012
Cw C00012 t [s]
C00013
C00039/3
[3-2] Block diagram for wiring of the commissioning example for the "Switch-off positioning" application
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
• In order to avoid positioning inaccuracy due to signal propagation delays, the initiators
can be directly evaluated by the drive controller. Limit switch evaluation can be
configured in the drive controller. In code C00488/x you can change the method of
detecting position signals from level evaluation to edge evaluation.
• In order to prevent unintended movements of the load in the target position, the use of
a holding brake is recommended as an alternative to DC-injection braking (limited
torque).
• The device terminals and their function assignment do not appear in the FB Editor. The
assignment of (hardware) terminals to (software) functions is explained in the chapter
"Terminal assignment of the control modes". ( 369)
Commissioning steps
As shown in illustration [3-2], below find a description of the commissioning steps of the "Switch-
off positioning" application without pre-switch off.
Please observe the sequence of the steps in the following chapters and follow them through
carefully. This will help you to commission your controller quickly and as safely as possible:
Prepare controller for commissioning ( 61)
Creating an »Engineer« project & going online ( 62)
Parameterising the motor control ( 63)
Parameterise application ( 64)
Saving parameter settings safe against mains failure ( 66)
Enable controller and test application ( 66)
________________________________________________________________
External 24 V DC X4
supply + 24E
=
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Stop function 1 DI1
Stop function 2 DI2
CW rotat. quick stop / selection: switch-off pos. 1 DI3
CCW rotat. quick stop / selection: switch-off pos. 2 DI4
DO1
GIO
If the green "DRV-RDY" LED is blinking and the red "DRV-ERR" LED is off, the controller is ready for
operation and commissioning can proceed.
Related topics:
Automatic restart after mains connection/fault... ( 95)
LED status displays ( 421)
________________________________________________________________
You can find detailed information on the general use of the »Engineer« in the online help
which you can call with [F1].
• The chapter "Working with projects" describes, among other things, all options of the
Start-up wizard which are available to create a new »Engineer« project.
The following steps serve to describe a general method for creating a project with the Select
component from catalogue option. For this purpose, individual components (controller, motor, etc.)
are selected from selection lists.
1. Start the »Engineer«.
2. Create a new project with the Start-up wizard and the Select component from catalogue option:
• In the Component step, select the 8400 StateLine controller.
• In the Device modules step, select the available communication module.
• In the Application step, select the "Switch-off positioning" application. (The application can
also be selected any time afterwards via the Application parameter tab or C00005.)
• Select the other components (motor/gearbox) to be added to the project in the Other
components dialog step.
3. In the Project view, select the 8400 StateLine controller.
4. Go online.
After a connection to the controller has been established, the following status is displayed in the
Status line:
________________________________________________________________
2. In the Motor control list field (C00006), select the desired motor control.
3. Adapt the motor control parameters:
V/f base frequency 50.0 Hz Adapting the V/f base frequency ( 133)
(C00015)
Imax in motor mode 47.00 A Optimising the Imax controller ( 136)
(C00022)
Vmin boost 1.60 % Adapting the Vmin boost ( 135)
(C00016)
Related topics:
Notes on motor control ( 46)
Motor control (MCTRL) ( 104)
________________________________________________________________
The application parameters can be found on the right side of the Application parameter tab:
________________________________________________________________
Accel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s The setpoint is led via a ramp function generator with
(C00012) linear characteristic. The ramp function generator
converts setpoint step-changes at the input into a ramp.
Decel. time - main setpoint 2.000 s
Note: These settings only apply if no other ramp times
(C00013) have been selected at the L_NSet FB!
Reference speed 1500 rpm All speed setpoint selections are provided in % and
(C00011) always refer to the reference speed set in C00011.
The motor reference speed is indicated on the motor
nameplate.
Decel. time - quick stop 2.000 s If quick stop is requested, motor control is decoupled
(C00105) from the setpoint selection and, within the deceleration
time parameterised in C00105, the motor is brought to
a standstill (nact = 0).
Activate/deactivate quick stop ( 81)
Fixed setpoint 1 40.00 % Fixed setpoints are selected in [%] based on the
(C00039/1) reference speed (C00011).
Fixed setpoint 2 must be smaller than fixed setpoint 3!
Fixed setpoint 2 60.00 %
Otherwise, the drive will be started with a low speed
(C00039/2) and accelerated after the pre-switch off.
Fixed setpoint 3 80.00 %
(C00039/3)
Tip!
• Click the Signal flow button to go down one dialog level to the signal flow of the
application with further possible parameter settings. See chapter "Basic signal flow".
( 360)
• The preconfigured I/O connection in the selected control mode can be changed via
configuration parameters. See chapter "User-defined terminal assignment". ( 289)
• Low-jerk traversing profiles can be implemented by means of S-shaped ramps.
• In the case of high breakaway torques combined with horizontal motion sequences,
"Sensorless vector control (SLVC)" can be used as motor control (C00006).
• For reversal of rotation direction (bidirectional motion), comprehensive configuration
options are available in the drive controller (e.g. by means of the L_DFlipFlop function
block).
________________________________________________________________
The parameter set must be saved to the device safe against mains failure to prevent parameter
settings becoming lost due to mains switching.
Save parameter set.
Stop!
Before stipulating a speed setpoint, check whether the brake in the form of a holding
brake on the motor shaft has been released!
Note!
If the controller is enabled and the "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option is activated in
C00142 (Lenze setting) when the mains is connected, the controller remains in the
"ReadyToSwitchOn" state.
To be able to change to the "SwitchedOn" status, the controller enable must be
deactivated first: set terminal X4/RFR to LOW level.
Note!
Observe the actual speed value (display in C00051) as well as the LED status displays.
( 421)
Related topics:
"Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option ( 95)
Trouble-shooting during commissioning ( 48)
Diagnostics & error management ( 420)
________________________________________________________________
This function extension is available from version 06.00.00 onwards and is supported by the
»Engineer« from version 2.13 onwards!
For the purpose of testing and demonstration and when an online connection has been established,
the PC manual control enables the manual control of various drive functions from the »Engineer«.
Diagnostic functions:
• Display of the actual speed value and motor current (as time characteristic)
• Display of the current device status
• Display of the status determining error
• Display of the status of the digital/analog inputs (in preparation)
Stop!
PC manual control must be explicitly activated by the user.
If PC manual control is activated, the controller is inhibited via device command
(C00002/16) first.
________________________________________________________________
Note!
With active PC manual control:
The online connection between PC and controller is monitored by the controller.
• If the online connection is interrupted longer than the timeout time set (Lenze
setting: 2 s):
• The error response "Fault" takes place, i.e. the motor becomes torqueless and
coasts, if it has not yet been in standstill.
• The "Ck16: Time overflow manual control" error message is entered into the
logbook.
PC manual control provides the Motion Control Kernel and the motor interface with all
required control signals and setpoint signals.
• The available application (function block interconnection) is now decoupled from
these interfaces, but is continued to be processed and remains unchanged.
• It does not matter what type of motor control is set in C00006.
• Click the Cancel button to abort the action and close the dialog box.
• The Timeout monitoring input field serves to adapt the timeout for monitoring the
connection between the PC and the controller.
4. To acknowledge the note and activate PC manual control:
Click the Connect PC manual control button.
• The controller is inhibited via device command (C00002/16).
• The PC manual control operator dialog is displayed.
________________________________________________________________
Note!
PC manual control can be exited any time by clicking the Close button.
If you exit PC manual control or change to another tab, the controller is inhibited via
device command (C00002/16), i.e. the motor becomes torqueless and is coasting unless
it already is at standstill.
________________________________________________________________
Via the Speed control tab, simply make the drive rotate in the "Speed follower" operating mode
without the need to set control parameters or feedback systems:
________________________________________________________________
Further functions:
• If the Set quick stop (QSP) button is clicked, the motor is braked to a standstill within the
deceleration time parameterised in C00105.
• Via the Deactivate quick stop (QSP) button, the quick stop can be deactivated.
• Via the << Left and Right >> buttons, the direction of rotation can be changed.
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The device statuses of the controller are based on the operating statuses of the CiA402
standard. Device state machine and device states ( 84)
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
This chapter describes the device commands which are provided in the subcodes of C00002 and can
be carried out using the keypad or, alternatively, the »Engineer« when an online connection has
been established.
The device commands serve, among other things, to directly control the controller, to organise
parameter sets, and to call diagnostic services.
Regarding the execution of the device commands, a distinction is drawn between:
• Device commands which have an immediate effect on control (e.g. "Activate quick stop")
• After being called in C00002/x, these device commands provide static status information
("On" or "Off).
• Device commands with longer execution duration (several seconds)
• After being called in C00002/x, these device commands provide dynamic status information
("Work in progress 20%" "Work in progress 40%", etc.).
• The execution of the device command has not finished successfully until the "Off / ready"
status information is provided in C00002/x.
• In the event of an error, the "Action cancelled" status information is provided in C00002/x . In
this case, further details can be obtained from the status of the device command executed
last which is displayed in C00003.
Stop!
Before the supply voltage is switched off after a device command has been transmitted
via C00002/x, the device command must be checked for successful completion on the
basis of the status information provided in C00002/x!
• This is of particular importance for device commands which save data to the memory
module of the device. Incomplete storage processes may lead to data inconsistencies
in the memory module.
Note!
• Before activating device commands by a master control, wait for the "Ready" signal of
the controller.
• The device will reject a write process to C00002/x if the value is >1 and issue an error
message.
• C00003 displays the status of the device command that was executed last.
________________________________________________________________
Icon Function
Enable controller
Inhibit controller
Note!
Device commands that can be executed via the Toolbar of the »Engineer« always affect
the element currently selected in the Project view including all subelements!
• If no controller but a system module is selected in the Project view, the corresponding
device command will be activated in all lower-level controllers having an online
connection with the »Engineer«.
Before the desired action is carried out, a confirmation prompt appears first, asking
whether the action is really to be carried out.
________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________
The C00002/1 = "1: On / start" device command resets the parameters to the Lenze setting which
are saved in the controller firmware.
• Can only be executed if the controller is inhibited; otherwise, the feedback C00002/1 = "6: No
access - controller inhibit" will be returned.
• All parameter changes made since the last saving of the parameter set will get lost!
• This device command has an effect on the settings of the parameters of the operating system,
application and module.
________________________________________________________________
The C00002/6 = "1: On / start" device command reloads all parameter settings from the memory
module to the controller.
• Can only be executed if the controller is inhibited; otherwise, the feedback C00002/6 = "6: No
access - controller inhibit" will be returned.
• All parameter changes made since the last saving of the parameter set will get lost!
• This device command has an effect on the settings of the parameters of the operating system,
application and module.
Note!
The controller is currently provided with one data record for all parameters, i.e. every
parameter has a value. Several data records per controller are in preparation.
From version 04.00.00 onwards, the basic function Parameter change-over provides a
change-over between four sets with different parameter values for up to 32 freely
selectable parameters. ( 577)
________________________________________________________________
If parameter settings are changed in the controller, those changes will be lost after mains switching
of the controller unless the settings have been saved explicitly.
The C00002/11 = "1: On / start" device command saves the current parameter settings safe against
mains failure to the memory module of the controller.
Note!
When the device is switched on, all parameters are automatically loaded from the
memory module to the main memory of the controller.
Observe the following to avoid data inconsistencies which cause errors when the
parameters are loaded from the memory module:
During the storage process:
• Do not switch off the supply voltage!
• Do not remove the memory module from the device!
The controller is currently provided with one data record for all parameters, i.e. every
parameter has a value. Several data records per controller are in preparation.
Tip!
• This device command can also be activated via the icon in the Toolbar.
• The "Load Lenze setting" device command (C00002/1 = "1: On / start") resets the
parameter settings to the delivery status of the device.
________________________________________________________________
The C00002/16 = "1: On / start" device command enables the controller, provided that no other
source of a controller inhibit is active.
The C00002/16 = "0: Off / ready" device command inhibits the controller again, i.e. the power
output stages in the controller are inhibited and the speed/current controllers of the motor control
are reset.
• The motor becomes torqueless and coasts, if it has not yet been in standstill.
• When the controller is inhibited, the status output bCInhActive of the LS_DriveInterface system
block is set to TRUE.
• When the controller inhibit request is reset, the drive synchronises to the actual speed. For this
purpose,
• If the flying restart circuit is activated in C00990, the flying restart function parameterised in
C00991 is used for the synchronisation to the rotary or standing drive. Flying restart
function ( 208)
• In the case of an operation with feedback, the actual speed is read out by the encoder system.
• In the case of a sensorless vector control (SLVC), the actual speed from the motor model of
the motor control is used for the synchronisation.
• C00158 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources/triggers of a controller inhibit:
Tip!
The controller can also be enabled or inhibited via the and toolbar icons.
________________________________________________________________
The C00002/17 = "1: On / start" device command activates the quick stop function, i.e. the motor
control is separated from the setpoint selection, and within the deceleration time parameterised
inC00105 the motor is brought to a standstill (nact = 0).
________________________________________________________________
The C00002/19 = "1: On / start" device command acknowledges an existing error message if the
error cause has been eliminated and thus the error is no longer pending.
• After the reset (acknowledgement) of the current error, further errors may be pending which
must also be reset.
• The status determining error is displayed in C00168.
• The current error is displayed in C00170.
Tip!
An error message can also be acknowledged by activating the Reset error button in the
Diagnostics tab.
Detailed information on error messages can be found in the "Diagnostics & error
management" chapter. ( 420)
The C00002/21 = "1: On / start" device command deletes all logbook entries.
Tip!
To display the logbook in the »Engineer«, click the Logbook button on the Diagnostics tab.
In the Logbook dialog box, it is also possible to delete all logbook entries by clicking the
Delete button.
Detailed information on the logbook can be found in the "Diagnostics & error
management" chapter. ( 420)
________________________________________________________________
In some applications where controllers are installed in control cabinets or are positioned in a
spacious plant, it is often difficult to locate a device connected online for e.g. maintenance work.
There is an established online connection with the device but you do not know where the controller
is located physically.
The C00002/27 = "1: On / start" device command serves to carry out an "optical location":
• For the time set in C00181/1, all four status LEDs at the front of the controller flash. Afterwards,
the function is turned off automatically.
• If the device command is executed again within the set time period, the duration is extended
accordingly.
• The setting C00002/27 = "0: Off / ready" serves to abort or switch off the function.
• Adjustable time period: 0 ... 6000 s (Lenze setting: 5 s)
Tip!
The device search function can also be activated via the toolbar icon.
________________________________________________________________
The behaviour of the controller is mainly determined by the current device status within the device
state machine. Which device status is active and which device status is next depends on certain
control signals (e.g. for controller inhibit and quick stop) and status parameters.
0
Power on
Init SystemFault
1 11
0
Firmware
SafeTorqueOff
Update
10
0
0
ReadyTo Fault
SwitchON 8
3
Operation
SwitchedOn Ident
Enabled
4 2
5
1
Trouble TroubleQSP
Warning
7 9
• The arrows between the device states mark possible state changes.
• The digits stand for the status ID (see table below).
________________________________________________________________
• The change from one status to the other is carried out within a 1-ms cycle. If within this time
there are several requests for status changes, the status with the higher priority is processed
first (see table below).
• The C00137 displays the current device status.
• C00150 (status word) provides a bit coded representation of the current device status via bits
8 ... 11 (see table below).
[4-1] Device statuses, priorities, and meaning of the status bits in the status word
4.2.1 FirmwareUpdate
Note!
This function may only be executed by qualified Lenze personnel!
________________________________________________________________
4.2.2 Init
"DRV-RDY" LED "DRV-ERR" LED Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
The controller is in this status immediately after switching on its 24 V supply voltage.
In the "Init" status, the operating system is initialised and all device components (communication
module, memory module, power section, etc.) are identified. When identifying the power section, it
is checked first if it is switched on or if the required voltage lies within the tolerance zone,
respectively.
• The inverter is inhibited, i.e. the motor terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter are deenergised.
• The digital and analog inputs are not yet evaluated at this time.
• The bus systems (CAN, PROFIBUS etc.) do not work yet, i.e. communication is not possible.
• The application is not yet processed.
• The monitoring functions are not active yet.
• The controller cannot be parameterised yet and no device commands can be carried out yet.
Note!
If the 24V voltage supply is in the valid range (>19V) and the initialisation is finished, the
device changes automatically to the "ReadyToSwitchOn" status.
If only the 24V voltage supply is available during the mains connection, the error
message "LU: Undervoltage in the DC bus" is also entered into the logbook of the drive
controller.
________________________________________________________________
4.2.3 Ident
"DRV-RDY" LED "DRV-ERR" LED Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
OFF Ident 0 0 1 0
The controller has been provided with the "Motor parameter identification" function for automatic
identification of the motor parameters. If the motor parameter identification is active, the
controller is in the "Ident" device status.
The "Ident" device status can only be reached from the "SwitchedOn" device status, i.e. the
controller must be inhibited first so that identification can be started afterwards via the
corresponding device command:
Stop!
During the identification of the motor parameters
• the controller does not respond to setpoint changes or control processes, (e.g. speed
setpoints, quick stop, torque limitations),
• the application remains active,
• all system interfaces (IO, bus systems, etc.) remain active,
• error monitoring remains active,
• the inverter is controlled independently of the setpoint sources.
After the motor parameter identification is completed, the status changes back to "SwitchedOn".
________________________________________________________________
4.2.4 SafeTorqueOff
"DRV-RDY" LED "DRV-ERR" LED Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
OFF SafeTorqueOff 1 0 1 0
Note!
Up to and including version 13.xx.xx the following applies:
This device status is only possible in connection with an integrated safety system and if
a power section supply is available!
From version 14.00.00 the following applies:
This device status is only possible in connection with an integrated safety system!
Safety state
If the drive controller is switched off by the safety system, the device changes to the
"SafeTorqueOff" status.
If the safety system deactivates the "Safe torque off (STO)" request, the device changes to the
"ReadyToSwitchOn" status.
Detailed information on the integrated safety system can be found in the hardware
manual!
The hardware manual contains important notes on the safety system which must be
observed!
The hardware manual has been stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied
with the 8400 drive controller.
________________________________________________________________
4.2.5 ReadyToSwitchOn
"DRV-RDY" LED "DRV-ERR" LED Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
OFF ReadyToSwitchOn 0 0 1 1
The controller is in this device status directly after the initialisation has been completed!
• The bus systems are running and the terminals and encoders are evaluated.
• The monitoring functions are active.
• The controller can be parameterised.
• The application is basically executable.
Note!
• The "ReadyToSwitchOn" state is not only activated after the mains connection, but
also after the deactivation of "Trouble", "Fault" or "SafeTorqueOff".
• If C00142 activates the autostart option "Inhibit at power-on" (Lenze setting), explicit
deactivation of the controller inhibit after mains connection is always required for the
controller to change from the "ReadyToSwitchOn" status to the "SwitchedOn" status.
• If only the 24V voltage supply is available during the mains connection, the error
message "LU: Undervoltage in the DC bus" is entered into the logbook of the drive
controller and the drive controller remains in the "ReadyToSwitchOn" status.
Danger!
If the "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option has been deactivated in C00142, the
"ReadyToSwitchOn status switches directly to the "SwitchedOn" status after mains
connection.
Automatic restart after mains connection/fault... ( 95)
________________________________________________________________
4.2.6 SwitchedOn
"DRV-RDY" LED "DRV-ERR" LED Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
OFF SwitchedON 0 1 0 0
The drive is in this device status if the DC bus voltage is applied and the controller is still inhibited
by the user (controller inhibit).
• The bus systems are running and the terminals and encoders are evaluated.
• The monitoring functions are active.
• The application is basically executable.
If the controller inhibit is deactivated, the devices changes to the "OperationEnabled" status and the
motor follows the setpoint defined by the active application.
Tip!
C00158 provides a bit coded representation of all active sources/triggers of a controller
inhibit.
Depending on certain conditions, a status change takes place based on the "SwitchedOn" device
status:
Related topics:
wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 101)
________________________________________________________________
4.2.7 OperationEnabled
"DRV-RDY" LED "DRV-ERR" LED Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
OFF OperationEnabled 0 1 0 1
The drive controller is in this device status if the controller inhibit is deactivated and no error
("Trouble" or "TroubleQSP") has occurred.
If the operation is enabled and the magnetisation in case of sensorless vector control (SLVC) has
been completed, the motor follows the setpoint determined by the active application.
Depending on certain conditions, a status change takes place based on the "OperationEnabled"
device status.
Related topics:
wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 101)
________________________________________________________________
4.2.8 TroubleQSP
"DRV-RDY" LED "DRV-ERR" LED Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
TroubleQSP 1 0 0 1
This device status will be active as soon as a monitoring mode responds the error response
"TroubleQSP" has been parameterised for.
• The drive is decelerated to standstill with torque within the deceleration time parameterised for
quick stop independently of the defined setpoint and can be kept there.
• The device status can only be abandoned by acknowledging the error if the error cause is
removed.
• When the controller is inhibited, it is possible to jump to the "SwitchedOn" status even during
the error status since the controller inhibit function has a higher priority. As long as the error is
pending and has not been acknowledged, the status is changed back to the "TroubleQSP" status
when the controller is enabled afterwards.
Depending on certain conditions a status change takes place based on the "TroubleQSP" device
status.
Related topics:
wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 101)
Basics on error handling in the controller ( 420)
Error messages of the operating system ( 444)
________________________________________________________________
4.2.9 Trouble
"DRV-RDY" LED "DRV-ERR" LED Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
OFF Trouble 0 1 1 1
This device status becomes active as soon as a monitoring mode responds for which the error
response "Trouble" has been parameterised.
• The motor has no torque (is coasting) due to the inhibit of the inverter.
• The "Trouble" device status is automatically abandoned if the error cause has been removed.
Note!
If in C00142 the "Inhibit at trouble" is activated, explicit deactivation of the controller
inhibit is required before this status can be abandoned.
Depending on certain conditions a status change takes place based on the "Trouble" device status.
Related topics:
wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 101)
Basics on error handling in the controller ( 420)
Error messages of the operating system ( 444)
________________________________________________________________
4.2.10 Fault
"DRV-RDY" LED "DRV-ERR" LED Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
OFF Fault 1 0 0 0
This device status will be active as soon as a monitoring mode responds the error response "Fault"
has been parameterised for.
• The motor has no torque (is coasting) due to the inhibit of the inverter.
• The error must explicitly be reset ("acknowledged") in order to exit the device status, e.g. by the
device command "Reset error" or via the control bit "ResetFault" in the control word
wCanControl or wMCIControl.
Note!
If an undervoltage in the DC bus of the drive controller occurs (error message "LU"), the
device changes to the "Trouble" status.
An additional error of higher priority leads the device into the "Fault" status.
According to the Device state machine, the device changes to the "ReadyToSwitchOn"
status after acknowledging the error although the undervoltage is still available!
If the "Inhibit at fault" auto-start option has been activated in C00142, explicit
deactivation of the controller inhibit is required before the status can be abandoned.
Related topics:
wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 101)
Basics on error handling in the controller ( 420)
Error messages of the operating system ( 444)
4.2.11 SystemFault
"DRV-RDY" LED "DRV-ERR" LED Display in C00137 Display in status word 1 (C00150)
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
OFF SystemFault 1 0 1 1
________________________________________________________________
Bit 5 Reserved 0
Bit 6
Bit 7
Note!
In the Lenze setting , automatic restart after mains connection, undervoltage, and
loading of the Lenze setting is inhibited.
The auto-start option "Inhibit at power-on" prevents the change to the "SwitchedOn" status after
mains connection if the controller is already enabled at mains connection.
Danger!
If the "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option has been deactivated in C00142, (bit 0 = 0),
the motor can directly start to run if the controller is enabled after mains connection!
The following three cases describe the behaviour of the controller after mains connection
depending on whether the controller is enabled and the set auto-start option. Here, it is assumed
that after mains connection, no errors and trouble occur in the controller and the "EnableOperation"
control bit in the wDriveControl is set to "1".
________________________________________________________________
5)5
W
&
2SHUDWLRQ(QDEOHG
6ZLWFKHG2Q
5HDG\7R6ZLWFK2Q
,QLW
W
5)5
W
&
2SHUDWLRQ(QDEOHG
6ZLWFKHG2Q
5HDG\7R6ZLWFK2Q
,QLW
W
5)5
W
&
2SHUDWLRQ(QDEOHG
6ZLWFKHG2Q
5HDG\7R6ZLWFK2Q
,QLW
W
________________________________________________________________
The "Inhibit at Lenze setting" auto-start option configurable via bit 4 of C00142 prevents the
change to the "SwitchedOn" status after the Lenze setting has been loaded and the controller is
enabled.
For a change to the "SwitchedOn" status, the controller enable must first be deactivated after the
Lenze setting has been loaded. Only if the controller is enabled again afterwards, the status changes
to "OperationEnabled":
5)5
W
o q r
/$B1&WUOE&,QK
W
n p
&
W
& W ORDG
2SHUDWLRQ(QDEOHG
6ZLWFKHG2Q
5HDG\7R6ZLWFK2Q
,QLW
W
Loading of the Lenze setting not possible since controller inhibit not set.
Controller inhibit via signal change by the user
Loading of the Lenze setting via device command C00002/1 = "1"
Controller enable via signal change by the user
Controller inhibit and subsequent controller enable via signal change by the user
tload = time required for loading the Lenze setting
[4-1] Example 1: Behaviour with activated auto-start option "Inhibit at Lenze setting" (C00142: Bit 4 = "1")
5)5
W
o q
/$B1&WUOE&,QK
W
n p
&
W
& W ORDG
2SHUDWLRQ(QDEOHG
6ZLWFKHG2Q
5HDG\7R6ZLWFK2Q
,QLW
W
Loading of the Lenze setting not possible since controller inhibit not set.
Controller inhibit via signal change by the user
Loading of the Lenze setting via device command C00002/1 = "1"
Controller enable via signal change by the user
tload = time required for loading the Lenze setting
[4-2] Example 2: Behaviour with deactivated auto-start option "Inhibit at Lenze setting" (C00142: Bit 4 = "0")
________________________________________________________________
The LS_DriveInterface system block displays the device control in the FB Editor.
/6B'ULYH,QWHUIDFH
Z&$1&RQWURO & Z6WDWH'HWHUP)DLO1R/RZ
%LW 6ZLWFK2Q
Z0&,&RQWURO & Z6WDWH'HWHUP)DLO1R+LJK
%LW 'LVDEOH9ROWDJH &
%LW 6HW4XLFNVWRS
48,&.6723 Z6WDWH'HWHUP)DLO1R6KRUW
E,QLW
%LW (QDEOH2SHUDWLRQ
& E6DIH7RUTXH2II
%LW 0RGH6SHFLILFB (1$%/(',6$%/(
&21752/:25'
E5HDG\
%LW 0RGH6SHFLILFB 5)5
E5HDG\7R6ZLWFK2Q
%LW 0RGH6SHFLILFB &
%LW 5HVHW)DLO
5(6(7)$,/
E2SHUDWLRQ(QDEOH
E:DUQLQJ
%LW 6HW+DOW
E7URXEOH
%LW UHVHUYHGB
E)DLO
%LW UHVHUYHGB
& E&ROOHFWHG)DLO
%LW /HQ]H6SHFLILFB E6DIHW\,V$FWLYH
%LW /HQ]H6SHFLILFB
E,PS,V$FWLYH
%LW /HQ]H6SHFLILFB
E&,QK,V$FWLYH
%LW 6HW)DLO
6SHHG & " E&Z&FZ
%LW /HQ]H6SHFLILFB
E&,QK E1DFW&RPSDUH
E)DLO5HVHW
Z'HYLFH6WDWXV:RUG
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
E6WDWXVB%LW &
%LW 3RZHU'LVDEOHG
E6WDWXVB%LW
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
E6WDWXVB%LW
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
E6WDWXVB%LW
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
E6WDWXVB%LW
67$786:25'
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
E6WDWXVB%LW
%LW $FW6SHHG,V=HUR
E6WDWXVB%LW
%LW &RQWUROOHU,QKLELW
%LW 6WDWXV&RGH%LW
%LW 6WDWXV&RGH%LW
%LW 6WDWXV&RGH%LW
%LW 6WDWXV&RGH%LW
%LW :DUQLQJ
%LW 7URXEOH
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
%LW )UHH6WDWXV%LW
________________________________________________________________
Inputs
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
bCollectedFail TRUE Group error: A device status according to the group error
BOOL configuration in C00148 has occurred, the drive is not able to follow
(from version 04.00.00) the setpoint selection.
bSafetyIsActive TRUE In preparation
BOOL
100 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
4 Device control (DCTRL)
4.4 Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block
________________________________________________________________
The controller is controlled by a master control (e.g. IPC) via the wCanControl or wMCIControl control
word, respectively.
• wCANControl: Control word via system bus (CAN)
• The process data word is provided at the wCanControl input via the upstream LP_CanIn1 port
block.
• Display parameter: C00136/2
• wMCIControl: Control word via a plugged-in communication module (e.g. PROFIBUS)
• The process data word is provided at the wMCIControl input via the upstream LP_MciIn1 port
block.
• Display parameter: C00136/1
• The bit assignment for the wCanControl/wMCIControl control words can be seen from the table
below.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 101
4 Device control (DCTRL)
4.4 Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The assignment of bits 11 ... 13 and bit 15 depends on the technology application
selected in C00005!
• See description of the corresponding technology application.
Bit 13 LenzeSpecific_3
Bit 14 SetFail 1 ≡ Set error (trip set)
Bit 15 LenzeSpecific_4 Assignment depends on the selected technology application
• See description of the corresponding technology application.
Tip!
If a bus control is not wanted (e.g. in case of control via terminals):
Connect both control word inputs with the wDriveCtrl output signal of the LS_ParFix
system block. This output signal has the fixed value "9", which corresponds to the following
assignment:
• Bit 0, SwitchOn = 1
• Bit 3, EnableOperation = 1
• All others: 0
102 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
4 Device control (DCTRL)
4.4 Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block
________________________________________________________________
The wDeviceStatusWord status word provided by the control system contains all information
relevant for controlling the controller.
• The status word is sent as a process data word to the master control via a port block:
• The LP_CanOut1 port block if "CAN on board" is used or
• the LP_MciOut1 port block if a plugged-in communication module is used (e.g. PROFIBUS).
• Display parameter: C00150
• The bit assignment of the wDeviceStatusWord status word can be seen from the table below.
Bit 10 StatusCodeBit2
Bit 11 StatusCodeBit3
Bit 12 Warning 1 ≡ A warning is indicated
Bit 13 Trouble 1 ≡ Controller is in the "Trouble" device status
• E.g. if an overvoltage has occurred.
Bit 14 FreeStatusBit14 Free status bit 14 (not assigned, freely assignable)
Bit 15 FreeStatusBit15 Free status bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 103
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
________________________________________________________________
Topics:
Basic settings:
Motor selection/Motor data
Selecting the control mode
Defining current and speed limits
Description of the motor control types:
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)
V/f control (VFCplus + encoder)
Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
Parameterisable additional functions:
Selection of switching frequency
Operation with increased rated power
Flying restart function
DC-injection braking
Slip compensation
Oscillation damping
Phase sequence reversal for correcting misconnected UVW motor phases
Further topics:
Encoder/feedback system
Braking operation/brake energy management
Monitoring
Internal interfaces (process signals):
Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotorInterface"
Internal status signals | System block "LS_DeviceMonitor"
104 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
The motor data term comprises all parameters that only depend on the motor and that only
characterise the electrical behaviour of the machine. The motor data are independent of the
application in which the controller and the motor are used.
Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor data:
1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 StateLine controller.
2. Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace.
3. Go to the Overview dialog level and click the following button:
• Via the From Motor Catalogue button, the motor catalogue can be opened to select another
motor. Selecting a motor from the motor catalogue in the »Engineer« ( 109)
• Via the From drive... button, the motor data set in the controller can be copied to the »Engineer«
when an online connection has been established.
• When an online connection has been established to the controller, the Identification in
progress... button serves to automatically identify different motor data. Automatic motor
data identification ( 111)
• The Encoder/feedback system... button serves to get to the settings for the encoder/feedback
system, if available.Encoder/feedback system ( 220)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 105
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
Stop!
Motors with electronic nameplates (ETS) must not be operated on 8400 controllers!
Note!
Sensorless vector control (SLVC) and sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
in particular requires the motor data parameters to be set. The motor data comprise the
data of the motor nameplate and the data of the motor equivalent circuit.
If the motor has been selected via the motor catalogue of the »Engineer« or the motor
data have been adapted offline using the »Engineer«, all motor data must then be
copied to the controller and saved power-failure-proof to the memory module (device
command: C00002/11) when an online connection has been established.
Note!
Setting a rated motor frequency with a decimal position
If the motor has a rated motor frequency with a decimal position (e.g. motor nameplate
data "23.7 Hz"):
• Up to and including version 11.xx.xx, the following motor nameplate data must be
increased by a factor of 10:
• C00089: Rated motor frequency
(a value of "23.7 Hz", for instance, must be increased to 237 Hz.)
• C00081: Rated motor power
• C00087: Rated motor speed
• C00090: Rated motor voltage
• From version 12.00.00, the rated motor frequency must be entered without decimal
position to clearly identify the right motor type. (a value of "23.7 Hz", for instance,
must be set to 23 Hz in C00089)
• C01000 displays the set motor type (ASM or PSM).
• C00969 displays the set number of motor pole pairs.
• From version 14.00.00 onwards, the motor type (ASM or PSM) can also be set
manually in C01001/1 for a clear identification.
Note!
If a rated motor speed is set for an asynchronous motor (ASM) in C00087 which
corresponds to a very high slip speed, the number of pole pairs is identified incorrectly.
Moreover, a synchronous motor (PSM) is detected instead of an asynchronous motor
(ASM) at certain slip speeds. Detailed information and possible remedies can be found
here:
Application notes for asynchronous motors with high slip speed ( 117)
106 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
Motor data
In the parameterisation dialog, the data of the motor nameplate for the selected motor are
displayed under "Motor data".
Parameter Info
C00081 Rated motor power
C00087 Rated motor speed
C00088 Rated motor current
C00089 Rated motor frequency
C00090 Rated motor voltage
C00091 Motor cos ϕ
Actual values
When an online connection to the controller has been established, the following actual values are
displayed in the parameterisation dialog under "Actual values":
Parameter Info
C00051 Actual speed value
C00052 Motor voltage
C00053 DC-bus voltage
C00054 Motor current
C00066 Thermal motor load (I2xt)
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
Tip!
For a better concentricity factor, we recommend to perform motor parameter
identification of the third party manufacturer's motor first. The motor parameters can be
manually adapted afterwards.
Improving the concentricity factor includes
• the adjustment of the inverter error characteristic to the drive system and
• the knowledge of the motor cable resistance.
Both factors are determined in the course of motor parameter identification.
Automatic motor data identification ( 111)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 107
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
• From version 12.00.00 onwards, C01000 displays the set motor type (ASM or PSM).
• Generally, a synchronous motor without speed feedback can also be operated with the V/f
characteristic control (VFCplus) control mode. The parameters for this control mode (e.g. V/f
base frequency) thus also have an according influence on synchronous motors.
108 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
If you, when inserting the controller into the project in the dialog step "Other components", put a
checkmark in the control field Motor, you can select as a further dialog step the motor for the
controller from the motor catalogue:
• Alternatively, the motor can be inserted into the project at a later time via the Insert a
component command.
• Go to the Application parameters tab in the Overview Motor data dialog level and click the
From motor catalogue... button to also reach the motor catalogue for the selection of another
motor.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 109
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
• The listed motor parameters are already optimally preset for the selected Lenze motor. An
adaptation is not required.
• The "plant parameter" term comprises all parameters that result from the combination of
motor and load. These characterise the transfer behaviour of the entire controlled system.
• The plant parameters depend on the application in which the controller and motor are used.
• When a Lenze motor is selected in the »Engineer«, plant parameters are suggested for this
motor for a load-free operation.
Tip!
If a third party manufacturer's motor is used, select a Lenze motor from the motor
catalogue first which is similar in terms of current, voltage and speed rating. Adapt the
preselected motor data exactly to the real motor afterwards.
110 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
The motor parameter identification serves to automatically identify the inverter characteristic, the
influences of the motor cable and various motor parameters.
Note!
We strongly recommend motor parameter identification before the initial
commissioning of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) and the sensorless control for
synchronous motors (SLPSM).
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 111
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
• Care must be taken that the constant mass inertia of the drive (mass inertia of motor, gearbox,
shaft and constant load) is entered as exactly as possible in C00273 to calculate the speed
controller parameters as dynamically as possible.
• Mass inertias that are not constant (e.g. changing loads of reels or different loads of hoists)
must be entered in C00919/1.
• If the mass inertia set in C00273 is too low, the speed controller parameters are calculated
less dynamically.
• If the mass inertia set in C00273 is too high, speed controller operation is unstable.
• If the mass inertia in C00273 is set to "0", the setting of bit 5 in C02865 has no effect on the
speed controller parameter calculation. In this case, the speed controller parameters will not be
calculated automatically after motor parameter identification.
112 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
In the Lenze setting, a setting of "0: automatic" is selected in C02867/1. This setting ensures
that the controller automatically selects the optimum procedure for motor parameter
identification.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 113
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
• The motor parameters listed in the table below are excluded from automatic identification and
must therefore be adapted to the used motor before motor parameter identification is carried
out (see motor nameplate).
Parameter Info
C00081 Rated motor power
C00087 Rated motor speed
C00088 Rated motor current (according to the connection method /)
NoteThe amplitude of the rated motor current (C00088) is injected to identify the stator
resistance. If the rated motor current amounts to less than 60 % of the rated inverter current,
at least 60 % of the rated inverter current will be injected to ensure sufficient motor
parameter identification accuracy.
C00089 Rated motor frequency (according to the connection method /)
C00090 Rated motor voltage (according to the connection method /)
C00091 Motor cos ϕ
• If the motor nameplate data are entered in the »Engineer« motor catalogue instead of selecting
a motor, it is recommendable to use the extended motor parameter identification
(C02867/1 = "2: extended identification").
• Especially for third-party motors, it is also recommendable to carry out the slip calculation with
the motor equivalent circuit diagram data (C02879/1). If the slip calculation is derived from the
motor nameplate data, this can negatively affect the stability and accuracy of the drive
behaviour because the rated speed specified on the motor nameplate often is rather inaccurate.
114 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
• The available motor cable must be specified in terms of length and cross-section:
Parameter Info
C00915 Motor cable length
C00916 Motor cable cross-section
The motor cable resistance resulting from these settings is displayed in C00917.
• For the measurement of the required variables, the motor is energised via the controller
terminals U, V and W during the motor parameter identification. The corresponding current
controller is preset in the Lenze setting so that a optimal controller behaviour is achieved with
an asynchronous motor power-adapted to the controller.
Thanks to optimisation, the current controller can be set via the following parameters:
Stop!
If motor parameter identification is aborted, unstable drive behaviour may be the result!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 115
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
Danger!
During motor parameter identification, the motor is energised via the outputs U, V and
W of the controller!
• Observe the corresponding safety instructions!
• With an idling motor, a small angular offset may occur at the motor shaft.
• During the motor parameter identification, rotations occur in case of a synchronous
motor.
116 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.1 Motor selection/Motor data
________________________________________________________________
5.1.3 Application notes for asynchronous motors with high slip speed
Note!
If a rated motor speed is set for an asynchronous motor (ASM) in C00087 which
corresponds to a very high slip speed, the number of motor pole pairs is identified
incorrectly.
Moreover, a synchronous motor is (PSM) is detected instead of an asynchronous motor
(ASM). In this case, the "Id7" error message can occur since motor and motor control type
do not match.
Examples, possible impacts and remedies are described in the following sections.
Examples:
Number of Mechanical Rated motor frequency Incorrect number of pole pairs if the
pole pairs synchronous speed (C00089) rated motor speed (C00087) is lower:
1 3000 rpm 50 Hz 1986 rpm
2 1500 rpm 50 Hz 1195 rpm
3 1000 rpm 50 Hz 854 rpm
4 750 rpm 50 Hz 665 rpm
Remedies:
• For version 12.xx.xx and version 13.xx.xx the following applies:
Limit the rated motor speed: C00087 = C00089 * 60 / (number of pole pairs + 0.5)
• From version 14.00.00:
Set the motor type ("ASM" or "PSM") manually in C01001/1. The rated motor speed does not
need to be limited since the number of pole pairs can be detected safely when the motor type
has been set manually.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 117
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.2 Selecting the control mode
________________________________________________________________
The 8400 StateLine controller supports various modes for motor control (open loop or closed loop).
• V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) with linear characteristic for asynchronous motors is preset.
• The control mode can be selected in the »Engineer« on the Application parameter tab via the
Motor control (C00006) list field:
• A click on the Motor control... button leads you to the parameterisation dialog of the selected
motor control. (The button is labelled according to the selected motor control.)
Tip!
In order to make the selection of the motor control easier, we provide a selection help with
recommendations and alternatives for standard applications in the subchapter entitled
"Selection help". ( 122)
The following section briefly describe the control modes. A reference to more details can be found
at the end of each section.
118 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.2 Selecting the control mode
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 119
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.2 Selecting the control mode
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
If a high torque without feedback is to be provided at small speeds, we recommend the
"Sensorless vector control" motor control mode.
120 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.2 Selecting the control mode
________________________________________________________________
Speed feedback
As shown in the following graphics, the drive systems with feedback have, independently of the
motor control, more advantages than systems without feedback.
M M
1 0 1 0
MN MN
-nN nN n -nN nN n
-MN -MN
2 3 2 3
9300vec092 9300vec093
Operation in motor mode (CW rotation), Operation in generator mode (CCW rotation),
Operation in motor mode (CCW rotation), Operation in generator mode (CW rotation)
Sensorless vector control (SLVC) Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
M M
1 0 1 0
MN
-nN nN n n
-MN
2 3 2 3
9300vec095
Operation in motor mode (CW rotation), Operation in generator mode (CCW rotation),
Operation in motor mode (CCW rotation), Operation in generator mode (CW rotation)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 121
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.2 Selecting the control mode
________________________________________________________________
To ease the selection of the motor control mode, the two following tables contain
recommendations and alternatives to standard applications.
122 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.3 Defining current and speed limits
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
For reasons of achievable resolution and the accuracy involved, the reference speed should
be geared to the speed range required for the respective application.
Lenze recommendation: Reference speed (C00011) = 1500 ... 3000 rpm
Irrespective of the selected motor control, there are more limitation options:
Note!
In the torque-controlled operation (bTorquemodeOn = TRUE), the limitation of the speed
setpoint set in C00909/x has no impact!
For the torque-controlled operation, a permissible speed range can be defined via the
speed limitation (inputs nSpeedHighLimit_a and nSpeedLowLimit_a at the
SB LS_MotorInterface).
For a correct function of the speed limitation in both direction, the following applies:
The speed limitation operates with a internal hysteresis of 50 min-1. The upper or lower
speed limit resulting from the settings has to be higher than this hysteresis!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 123
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.3 Defining current and speed limits
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Highly dynamic applications
(that have e.g. too short acceleration/deceleration times or excessively changing loads)
The overcurrent disconnection may respond (fault message oC1 or oC11) if the setting of
the maximum current in motor mode in C00022 approximately corresponds to the
maximum permissible value of the respective inverter.
Remedies:
• Increase of the acceleration and deceleration ramp times
• Reduction of the maximum current in motor mode (C00022)
• Reduction of the maximum current in generator mode (C00023)
• Adaptation of the indirect peak current limitation (procedure depends on the selected
motor control mode, see below)
• Reduction of the reset time of the current limiting controller (C00074/1)
124 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.3 Defining current and speed limits
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 125
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
In case of the V/f characteristic control (VFCplus), the motor voltage of the inverter is determined by
means of a linear or quadratic characteristic depending on the field frequency or motor speed to be
generated. The voltage follows a preselected characteristic.
Stop!
• The V/f characteristic control is only suitable for asynchronous motors.
• The following must be observed when operating drives with quadratic V/f
characteristic:
• Please always check whether the corresponding drive is suitable for operation with
a quadratic V/f characteristic!
• If you pump or fan drive is not suitable for operation with a square-law V/f
characteristic, we recommend using the energy-saving V/f characteristic control
(VFCplusEco). Alternatively, you can use the V/f characteristic control with linear
V/f characteristic or the sensorless vector control (SLVC).
• For adjustment, observe the thermal performance of the connected asynchronous
motor at low output frequencies.
• Usually, standard asynchronous motors with insulation class B can be operated for
a short time with their rated current in the frequency range 0 Hz ... 25 Hz.
• Contact the motor manufacturer to get the exact setting values for the max.
permissible motor current of self-ventilated motors in the lower speed range.
• If you select square-law V/f characteristics, we recommend setting a lower Vmin or
using the energy-saving V/f characteristic control (VFCplusEco).
• The nameplate data of the motor (at least rated speed and rated frequency) must be
entered if, instead of a standard motor, an asynchronous motor is used with the
following values:
• rated frequency ≠ 50 Hz (star) or
• rated frequency ≠ 87 Hz (delta) or
• number of pole pairs ≠ 2
Note!
When the auto DCB threshold (C00019) is set > 0 rpm, there is no torque at the motor
shaft in the lower speed range!
Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) ( 212)
126 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control:
1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 StateLine controller.
2. Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace.
3. Select the motor control from the Overview dialog level in the Motor control list field:
• "6: VFCplus: V/f linear" for linear characteristic or
• "8: VFCplus: V/f quadr" for square-law characteristic
More available V/f characteristic control modes:
• "10: VFCplus: U/f definable" (from version 04.00.00 onwards).
With this motor control, the V/f characteristic can be freely defined. Defining a user-
defined V/f characteristic ( 140)
• "11: VFCplusEco: V/f energy-saving" (from version 10.00.00 onwards).
With this motor control, the motor is always operated in an optimal efficiency range via
a cosϕ control and the resulting voltage reduction (reduced copper losses in the
asynchronous motor). V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco) ( 144)
4. Click the Motor control V/f button to change to the Overview Motor control V/f dialog
box.
• This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important
parameters.
• When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with
more details/parameters is displayed.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 127
128
________________________________________________________________
5.4
5
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
Motor control (MCTRL)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
________________________________________________________________
The "Initial commissioning steps" listed in the table below are sufficient for a simple characteristic
control.
• Detailed information on the individual steps can be found in the following subchapters.
Tip!
Information on the optimisation of the control mode and the adaptation to the real
application is provided in chapter "Optimising the control mode". ( 132)
Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter
"Parameterisable additional functions". ( 202)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 129
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
Uout Uout
100 % 100 %
Umin Umin
0 0
0 1 n 0 1 n
nN nN
[5-3] Principle of a linear V/f characteristic (on the left) and a quadratic V/f characteristic (on the right)
4. Linear V/f characteristic with voltage reduction (from version 10.00.00 onwards):
For drives which often work in partial load operation, the energy-saving V/f characteristic
control (VFCplusEco) offers the opportunity to reduce the voltage at low load in order to save
energy. At higher loads, the voltage reduction is cancelled and a linear characteristic is caused.
The V/f characteristic shape is defined by selecting the corresponding motor control mode in
C00006:
Tip!
• You can find detailed information on freely definable V/f characteristics in the
subchapter entitled "Defining a user-defined V/f characteristic". ( 140)
• You can find detailed information on the linear V/f characteristic with voltage reduction
in the chapter entitled "V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)". ( 144)
130 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 131
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
The V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) is generally ready for operation. It can be adapted
subsequently by adapting the characteristic and/or the drive behaviour.
Note!
Following successful motor parameter identification, the V/f base frequency (C00015)
and the Vmin boost (C00016) as well as the slip constant for slip compensation (C00021)
are calculated automatically.
From version 12.00.00:
• Following successful motor parameter identification, the gain of the Imax controller
(C00073/1) is calculated automatically.
• If these parameters are not to be calculated, bit 4 of C02865/1 must be set to "1".
• Following successful motor parameter identification, other controller parameters
(C00011, C00022, C00966) can be calculated automatically.
• If these parameters are to be calculated, bit 6 of C02865/1 must be set to "6".
Adapting characteristic
For the linear and quadratic characteristic, it is also possible to match its curve to different load
profiles or motors by adapting the V/f base frequency (C00015) and the Vmin boost (C00016).
Adapting the V/f base frequency ( 133)
Adapting the Vmin boost ( 135)
132 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
U FI [V]
C00015 [Hz] = ---------------------------------- ⋅ f Rated Hz
U Ratedmot [V]
VFI: Mains voltage 400 V or 230 V
Vratedmot: Rated motor voltage depending on the connection method
frated: Rated motor frequency
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 133
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
87-Hz operation
4-pole asynchronous motors which are designed for a rated frequency of f = 50 Hz in star
connection can be operated in delta connection when being constantly excited up to f =
87 Hz.
• Advantages:
• Higher speed-setting range
• 73% higher power output in case of standard motors
• Motor current and motor power increase by the factor 3 .
• The field weakening range starts above 87 Hz.
• Generally, this process can also be used with motors which have different numbers of
pole pairs. In case of 2-pole asynchronous motors, the mechanical limit speed must be
maintained.
134 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
Stop!
Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting
current!
Note!
The Vmin boost has an effect on output frequencies below the V/f base frequency
(C00015).
The general linear and quadratic V/f characteristics are shown in the illustrations below. The
illustrations show the impacts of the parameters used to adapt the characteristic shape.
V rmot V rmot
(100 %) (100 %)
1/N/PE AC 180 V 1/N/PE AC 180 V
3/PE AC 100 V 3/PE AC 100 V
3/PE AC 320 V 3/PE AC 320 V
C00016 C00016
C00016
2
C00015 C00015 f [Hz] C00015 f [Hz]
2
[5-5] Representation of the linear V/f characteristic (on the left) and quadratic V/f characteristic (on the right)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 135
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Vmin boost is automatically calculated by the motor parameter identification using the
data specified on the motor nameplate so that a no-load current of approx. 0.8 Irated
motor results at the slip frequency of the machine.
136 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
We recommend to keep the Lenze setting (0 Hz).
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 137
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
• The actual torque (C00056/2) is directly calculated from the current slip speed of the
machine. This requires correct entry of the motor data. Motor selection/Motor data
( 105)
• To avoid instabilities during operation with active slip compensation, the torque limit
values are internally processed as absolute values.
• If slip compensation is deactivated (C00021 = 0), indirect torque limitation
(differential signal between apparent motor current and nTorqueMotLimit_a or
nTorqueGenLimit_a) occurs. Above the no-load current of the motor, the accuracy of
the indirect torque limitation is limited.
138 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
[5-6] Extract from the signal flow of the V/f control (VFC + encoder)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 139
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
For individual adaptation of the motor magnetisation to the actual application, the motor control
"10: VFCplus: V/f definable" with a freely definable characteristic can be selected in C00006 as an
alternative if the linear and quadratic characteristics are not suitable.
Note!
The V/f base frequency (C00015) and the Vmin boost (C00016) no longer exert an
influence if this motor control is chosen.
• The 11 grid points (voltage/frequency values) of the characteristic are selected via the 11
subcodes of C00967 and C00968.
• It is necessary to set all 11 grid points by means of corresponding subcodes.
• If fewer grid points (voltage/frequency values) are needed, this can be achieved indirectly by
ascribing the same voltage and frequency values to consecutive grid points.
Example: C00967/3 = C00967/4 and C00968/3 = C00968/4
• The grid points can be specified in any sequence. Internally, they are automatically ordered
from the minimum to the maximum frequency value.
• Above the maximum and below the minimum frequency, the previous rise is continued until
the maximum output voltage.
• In the Lenze setting, the 11 grid points represent a linear characteristic.
• 3-phase devices: Output voltage 400 V at f = 50 Hz
• 1-phase devices: Output voltage 230 V at f = 50 Hz
U [V]
C00967/1 C00967/11
C00968/1 C00968/11
P1 C00967/2 400 P11
C00968/2
P3 240 P9
P4 160 P8
P5 80 P7
P6
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 f [Hz]
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11
V 400 V 320 V 240 V 160 V 80 V 0V 80 V 160 V 240 V 320 V 400 V
f -50 Hz -40 Hz -30 Hz -20 Hz -10 Hz 0 Hz 10 Hz 20 Hz 30 Hz 40 Hz 50 Hz
140 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.4 V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
Cases of application for this function:
• Operation of reluctance motors or synchronous motors during controlled acceleration
(reduction of natural frequencies caused by wrong excitation).
• Adaptation of the voltage requirement for the motor, depending on specific load
conditions.
Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control:
1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 StateLine controller.
2. Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace.
3. Select the motor control "10: VFCplus: V/f definable" from the Overview dialog box in the
Motor control list field:
4. Click the Motor control V/f definable button to change to the Overview Motor control V/f
dialog box.
• This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important
parameters.
• When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with
more details/parameters is displayed.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 141
142
________________________________________________________________
5.4
5
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)
Motor control (MCTRL)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 143
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.5 V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)
________________________________________________________________
With the energy-saving V/f characteristic control mode (VFCplusEco), the motor voltage of the
inverter is detected by means of a linear characteristic depending on the field frequency to be
created or the motor speed. Moreover, a cosϕ control and the resulting voltage reduction causes the
motor to be always operated in the optimum efficiency range (reduction of copper losses in the
asynchronous motor).
• Hence, these are the advantages of this motor control mode:
• Good robustness
• Easy parameter setting
• High energy efficiency (lower heating of the motor in partial load operational range)
• Same speed accuracy and maximum torques as with VFCplus
• Less noise generation of the motor with active voltage reduction
• Predestinated application areas of this motor control mode are materials handling technology
and pump and fan systems.
• This motor control mode serves to improve efficiency of standard asynchronous motors with
efficiency class IE1 (standard IEC 60034-30 2008) in the range 0 … Mefficiency_max between
0 … 20 % (Ø 5 … 10 %).
• For asynchronous motors with energy efficiency class IE2 the potential for efficiency
improvement is reduced to approx. 0 ... 15 %.
• Description of Mefficiency_max: Indicates the torque [%] of Mrated_motor, where the motor has
the max. efficiency.)
• In case of asynchronous motors with a higher energy efficiency class (IE2 and IE3), the absolute
energy saving of the motor control mode is lower due to improved efficiency of the machine.
However, energy saving is still achieved in a higher load range.
• Mefficiency_max is performance-related and listed in the following table for some power values
of the energy efficiency class IE1 and IE2:
MEfficiency_max
(related to Mrated_motor)
Power IE1 IE2
0.25 kW 75 %
0.75 kW 65 % 75 %
2.2 kW 55 % 85 %
7.5 kW 30 % 45 %
22 kW 23 %
45 kW 21 %
144 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.5 V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)
________________________________________________________________
Stop!
• For adjustment, observe the thermal performance of the connected asynchronous
motor at low output frequencies.
• Usually, standard asynchronous motors with insulation class B can be operated for
a short time with their rated current in the frequency range 0 Hz ... 25 Hz.
• Contact the motor manufacturer to get the exact setting values for the max.
permissible motor current of self-ventilated motors in the lower speed range.
• The nameplate data of the motor (at least rated speed and rated frequency) must be
entered if, instead of a standard motor, an asynchronous motor is used with the
following values:
• rated frequency ≠ 50 Hz (star) or
• rated frequency ≠ 87 Hz (delta) or
• number of pole pairs ≠ 2
Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control:
1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 StateLine controller.
2. Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace.
3. Select the motor control"11: VFCplusEco: V/f energy-saving" from the Overview dialog box
in the Motor control 11list field:
4. Click the Motor control V/f Eco button to change to the Overview Motor control V/f dialog
box.
• This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important
parameters.
• When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with
more details/parameters is displayed.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 145
146
________________________________________________________________
5.5
5
V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)
Motor control (MCTRL)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
________________________________________________________________
The following characteristics show the impact of the energy-saving V/f characteristic control
(VFCplusEco) compared to the standard V/f characteristic control (VFCplus).
• The characteristics were recorded with a standard asynchronous motor 2.2 kW with energy
efficiency class IE1 at speed = 600 rpm.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 147
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.5 V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)
________________________________________________________________
The "Initial commissioning steps" listed in the table below are sufficient for the V/f characteristic
control - energy-saving (VFCplusECo).
• Detailed information on the individual steps can be found in the following subchapters.
Tip!
Information on the optimisation of the control mode and the adaptation to the real
application is provided in chapter "Optimising the control mode". ( 149)
Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter
"Parameterisable additional functions". ( 202)
148 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.5 V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)
________________________________________________________________
The V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplus) is generally ready for operation. It can be
adapted subsequently by adapting the characteristic and/or the drive behaviour.
Note!
Following successful motor parameter identification, the V/f base frequency (C00015)
and the Vmin boost (C00016) as well as the slip constant for slip compensation (C00021)
are calculated automatically.
From version 12.00.00 onwards:
• Following successful motor parameter identification, the gain of the Imax controller
(C00073/1) is calculated automatically.
• If these parameters are not to be calculated, bit 4 of C02865/1 must be set to "1".
• Following successful motor parameter identification, other controller parameters
(C00011, C00022, C00966, C00982) can be calculated automatically.
• If these parameters are to be calculated, bit 6 of C02865/1 must be set to "6".
Adapting characteristic
For the linear characteristic as part of the V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco), it
is also possible (like in case of the standard V/f characteristic control) to match its curve to different
load profiles or motors by adapting the V/f base frequency (C00015) and the Vmin boost (C00016).
Adapting the V/f base frequency ( 133)
Adapting the Vmin boost ( 135)
Torque limitation
Limit the torque to a lower value.Torque limitation ( 138)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 149
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.5 V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)
________________________________________________________________
2
U Motor(t)
M Max(t) = M Stalling ⋅ ------------------------------------------------------------- with M Stalling = 1.6 ... 2.5 ⋅ M Rated_motor
2
( U Motor(t) – U Reduction )
VMotor = display in C00052
VReduction = display in C00978
It generally applies that when the output voltage is divided in halves, the maximum torque is
approx. reduced by the factor 4. A reduction by the factor 5 reduces the torque to approx. 15 ... 50 %
of the rated torque.
The minimum voltage and thus the maximum influence access of the Eco function on the output
voltage can be defined in C00977. With full influence of the Eco function, the following stalling
torque can be ensured depending on the setting in C00977:
An adaptation of the minimum voltage V/f (C00977) improves the stability in case of load impulses.
• In the Lenze setting, the minimum voltage V/f is set to 20 % for the highest energy optimisation.
This setting serves to respond to load torques if these amount to approx. 25 % of the rated
torque or occur with low dynamics.
• An increase of the minimum voltage V/f to 70 % permits to apply a dynamic load impulse from
0 to 100 % rated motor torque without the motor stalling. This reduces the energy optimisation
to be achieved by approx. 75 %.
• A further increase of the stability at still higher dynamic load impulses can be achieved by a
further increase of the minimum voltage V/f, but means a further loss in energy optimisation.
Note!
In case of applications with very high dynamic sudden load variations from the unloaded
operation, this motor control mode should not be used or the energy optimisation
should be switched off, since a motor stalling cannot be excluded.
• The energy optimisation can be switched off by setting the minimum voltage V/f
(C00977) to 100 %. Then, the behaviour corresponds to the V/f characteristic control
(VFCplus) with linear characteristic.
• From version 13.00.00, the energy optimisation can be switched off via the
bVfcEcoDisable process signal if a dynamic load change is known to take place.
150 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.5 V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)
________________________________________________________________
5.5.4.2 Adapting the slope limitation for lowering the Eco function
The ramp set in C00982 for voltage reduction serves as slope limitation in order to prevent that
voltage is suddenly applied to the motor when the Eco function is deactivated. Otherwise, the
overvoltage limitation (Imax, Clamp) would be activated.
• This ramp is, depending on the device, pre-initialised to approx. the triple rotor time constant.
An adaptation of this parameter is not required.
When the Eco function is switched off, a quick reaction (high dynamic performance) is required, but
with a low current overshoot and a small torque jump. Thus, the Lenze setting of C00982 is a
compromise regarding the switch-off of the Eco function (voltage reduction = 0).
• To increase the dynamics when switching off the Eco function:
Reduce setting in C00982.
(Current compensation actions increase when the Eco function is switched off.)
• In order to reduce current compensation actions when switching off the Eco function:
Increase setting in C00982.
(The dynamics when switching off the eco function is reduced)
Behaviour Remedy/recommendation
The cosϕ actual value (C00979/1) varies greatly. Reduce gain Vp (C00975) and reset time Ti (C00976).
The cosϕ actual value (C00979/1) is permanently lower Increase gain Vp (C00975) and reset time Ti (C00976).
than the cosϕ setpoint (C00979/2).
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 151
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.5 V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)
________________________________________________________________
152 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.5 V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 153
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.6 V/f control (VFCplus + encoder)
________________________________________________________________
The V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) described above can be operated with a speed feedback.
This has the following advantages:
• Steady-state accuracy of the speed
• Less parameterisation effort compared to the sensorless vector control (SLVC)
• Improved dynamics compared to V/f characteristic control without feedback or to sensorless
vector control (SLVC).
• Suitability for group drives
Stop!
The V/f control requires a speed feedback!
• The speed sensor used has to be set in C00495. This setting is not made automatically
with the selection of the motor from the »Engineer« motor catalogue!
• If no speed sensor is set in C00495 and the controller is enabled, an impermissibly
high motor current occurs which may destroy the motor thermally!
• From version 14.00.00, the error response set in C00571/2 (Lenze setting: "Fault")
takes place if in case of controller enable it is detected that a motor control type with
feedback is set in C00006 but no speed encoder is set in C00495.
Stop!
V/f emergency operation
From version 15.00.00 , it is internally switched to the encoderless V/f characteristic
control in case of an encoder open circuit in order to avoid impermissible motor
movements.
• In order that this "V/f emergency operation" works properly, the parameters relevant
for the V/f characteristic control (base frequency, Vmin boost, slip compensation, etc.)
have to be set correctly. As an alternative, a motor parameter identification can be
executed as well.
• The change-over to "V/f emergency operation" is reported via bit 4 in C01000 and via
the bWirebreakUfLinearActive status signal at the SB LS_DeviceMonitor.
• The change-over to "V/f emergency operation" can be suppressed by setting bit 8 to
"1" in C02864/1.
Note!
• Make sure that, when the motor control with speed feedback is in use, the maximum
input frequency of 10 kHz is not exceeded. Using DI1 and DI2 as frequency inputs
( 266)
• As the slip is calculated in the feedback V/f operation and injected through the slip
regulator, the slip compensation (C00021) is deactivated with V/f control.
154 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.6 V/f control (VFCplus + encoder)
________________________________________________________________
The descriptions in chapter "V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)" also apply to the V/f
control. ( 126)
Detailed information on the speed feedback can be found in the chapter
"Encoder/feedback system". ( 220)
Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control:
1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 StateLine controller.
2. Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace.
3. Select the motor control from the Overview dialog level in the Motor control (C00006) list
field:
• "7: VFCplus: V/f linear +encoder" for linear characteristic or
• "9: VFCplus: V/f quadr +encoder" for quadratic characteristic
4. Click the Motor control V/f encoder button to change to the Overview Motor control V/f
dialog box.
• This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important
parameters.
• When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with
more details/parameters is displayed, as shown in the following subchapter.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 155
156
________________________________________________________________
5.6
5
V/f control (VFCplus + encoder)
Motor control (MCTRL)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
________________________________________________________________
In order to protect the drive system, carry out the commissioning of the V/f control and the slip
regulator in several steps.
• Detailed information on the single steps can be found in the following subchapters or in the
corresponding subchapters for V/f characteristic control.
Tip!
Information on the further optimisation of the control mode and the adaptation to the real
application is provided in the "Optimising the control mode" chapter for the V/f
characteristic control (VFCplus). ( 132)
Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter
"Parameterisable additional functions". ( 202)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 157
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.6 V/f control (VFCplus + encoder)
________________________________________________________________
158 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.6 V/f control (VFCplus + encoder)
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 159
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.6 V/f control (VFCplus + encoder)
________________________________________________________________
Controller limitation
Max. intervention of the controller is limited by the controller limitation (C00971/1).
• The controller can be limited depending on the application.
• We recommend to limit the max. intervention to twice the rated slip of the motor.
• The rated slip is calculated as follows:
n Motor [ rpm ]
f Slip [ Hz ] = f Rated [ Hz ] – -----------------------------------------
Rated
- ⋅ p Number of pole pairs
Rated 60
Note!
A setting of C00971/1 = 0 Hz deactivates the slip regulator. In this case, the structure of
the V/f control corresponds to the structure of a V/f characteristic control without
feedback.
Slip limitation
In addition to limiting the slip regulator, the field frequency to be injected can also be limited by
another limiting element, the slip limitation (C00971/2).
• If the slip is e.g. limited to twice the rated slip of the motor, a stalling of the motor during very
dynamic processes can be avoided.
• Motor stalling is caused by:
• a high overcurrent at very steep speed ramps
• very fast speed changes due to load, e.g. abrupt stopping of the drive due to an encounter
with a stop or a load that is not moving.
160 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
Sensorless vector control (SLVC) is based on a better motor current control according to a field-
oriented control mode by Lenze.
Stop!
• The sensorless vector control (SLVC) is only suitable for asynchronous motors.
• The connected motor may be maximally two power classes lower than the motor
assigned to the controller.
• Operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) is only permissible for one single
drive!
• Operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) is not permissible for hoists!
• The Lenze setting permits the operation of a power-adapted motor. Optimal
operation is only possible if either:
• the motor is selected via the »Engineer« motor catalogue,
• the motor nameplate data are entered and motor parameter identification is
carried out afterwards
- or -
• the nameplate data and equivalent circuit data of the motor (motor leakage
inductance and mutual motor inductance, slip compensation and motor stator
resistance) are entered manually.
• When you enter the motor nameplate data, take into account the phase connection
implemented for the motor (star or delta connection). Only enter the data applying to
the selected connection type.
• In this context, also observe the instructions in chapter "Adapting the V/f base
frequency" relating to V/f characteristic control. ( 133)
Note!
Optimal operation of the sensorless vector control (SLVC) can be achieved from a
minimum speed of approx. 0.5-fold slip speed. At lower speed values below the 0.5-fold
slip speed, the maximum torque is reduced.
The maximum field frequency with this motor control mode is 650 Hz.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 161
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
In comparison to the V/f characteristic control without feedback, the following can be achieved by
means of sensorless vector control SLVC:
• A higher maximum torque throughout the entire speed range
• A higher speed accuracy
• A higher concentricity factor
• A higher level of efficiency
• The implementation of torque-controlled operation with speed limitation
• The limitation of the maximum torque in motor and generator mode for speed-controlled
operation
Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control:
1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 StateLine controller.
2. Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace.
3. Select the motor control "4: SLVC: Vector control" from the Overview dialog level in the
Motor control list field (C00006):
4. Click the Motor control vector button to change to the Overview Motor control vector
dialog box.
• This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important
parameters.
• When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with
more details/parameters is displayed, as shown in the following subchapter.
162 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
________________________________________________________________
5.7
5
Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
Motor control (MCTRL)
Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info
1 C00909/2 Max. neg. speed 16 C00275 Setpoint feedforward control filtering 24 C00073/2 SLVC: Vp torque controller
2 C00909/1 Max. pos. speed 17 C00273 Moment of inertia 25 C00074/2 SLVC: Ti torque controller
3 C00830/22 Speed setpoint 18 C00022 Imax in motor mode 26 C00084 Motor stator resistance
4 C00105 Decel. time - quick stop 19 C00023 Imax in generator mode 27 C00085 Motor stator leakage inductance
5 C00074/2 SLVC: Ti torque controller 20 C00074/2 SLVC: Ti torque controller 28 C00092 Motor magnetising inductance
6 C00074/2 SLVC: Ti torque controller 21 C00833/69 MCTRL: bSpeedCtrlPAdaptOn 29 C00830/88 MCTRL: nSpeedHighLimit_a
7 C00071/1 SLVC: Ti speed controller 22 C00074/2 SLVC: Ti torque controller 30 C00830/23 MCTRL: nSpeedLowLimit_a
8 C00070/1 SLVC: Vp speed controller 23 C00074/2 SLVC: Ti torque controller 31 C00910/1 Max. pos. output frequency
9 C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode 32 C00910/2 Max. neg. output frequency
10 C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode 33 C00051 Actual speed value
11 C00830/24 MCTRL: nSpeedCtrlI_a 34 C00058 Output frequency
12 C00833/31 MCTRL: bSpeedCtrlIOn 35 C00018 Switching frequency
13 C00830/25 MCTRL: nSpeedCtrlPAdapt_a 36 C00830/32 MCTRL: nPWMAngleOffset_a
14 C00833/69 MCTRL: bSpeedCtrlPAdaptOn 37 C00830/31 MCTRL: nVoltageAdd_a
15 C00985 SLVC: Field current controller gain 38 C00052 Motor voltage
163
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
From version 13.00.00, the torque setpoint nSpeedSetValue_a is set to 0 by quick stop
(QSP) device-internally and the torque limit values nTorqueMotLimit_a and
nTorqueGenLimit_a are set to 100 % to stop the drive quickly and safely anytime. The
previous behaviour can be set in C2865/1 via bit 12 and bit 13.
Note!
To avoid instabilities during operation, the torque limit values are internally processed
as absolute values.
164 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
Slip compensation
The slip of the machine is reconstructed using the slip model. An influencing parameter is the slip
constant (C00021). Slip compensation ( 215)
Note!
• Absolute speed limitation to speed 0 min-1 (nSpeedLowLimit_a or
nSpeedHighLimit_a = 0) is only possible from version 12.00.00.
• Quick stop (QSP) is used to switch over to Speed control with torque limitation.
• From version 13.00.00, the torque setpoint nSpeedSetValue_a is set to 0 by quick
stop (QSP) device-internally and the two torque limit values nTorqueMotLimit_a
and nTorqueGenLimit_a are set to 100 % to stop the drive quickly and safely
anytime. The previous behaviour can be set in C2865/1 via bit 12 and bit 13.
• From version 13.00.00, the bLimSpeedTorquemodeOn status signal is used to show that the
speed limitation is active.
• The speed is defined by the process.
• The torque setpoint is calculated directly from nTorqueSetValue_a.
• From version 12.00.00 onwards, the torque limitation is active via nTorqueMotLimit_a and
nTorqueGenLimit_a in this control mode, too, for the torque setpoint to be limited. The
torque limitation can be deactivated in C2865/1 via bit 0 to obtain the previous function.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 165
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
The following "Initial commissioning steps" must be performed to commission the sensorless vector
control:
Tip!
Information on the optimisation of the control mode and the adaptation to the real
application is provided in chapter "Optimising the control mode". ( 167)
We recommend to use the flying restart function for connecting/synchronising the inverter
to an already rotating drive system.Flying restart function ( 208)
Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter
"Parameterisable additional functions". ( 202)
166 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
From version 12.00.00:
• Following successful motor parameter identification, the current controller
parameters (C00075, C00076) are calculated automatically.
• If these parameters are not to be calculated, bit 4 of C02865/1 must be set to "1".
• Following successful motor parameter identification, the speed controller parameters
(C00070/1, C00071/1) can be calculated automatically.
• If these parameters are to be calculated, bit 6 of C02865/1 must be set to "5".
• Following successful motor parameter identification, other controller parameters
(C00011, C00022) can be calculated automatically.
• If these parameters are to be calculated, bit 6 of C02865/1 must be set to "6".
Note!
During the starting action, a jerk may occur in the machine due to the temporarily
increased motor current!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 167
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
TM [ s ]
V P ≈ 1.5 ... 3 ⋅ -------------------
0.01 [ s ]
2 ⋅ π ⋅ n N [ rpm ] 2
T M [ s ] = -------------------------------------- ⋅ J Drive, total [ kgm ]
M N [ Nm ] ⋅ 60
P N [ W ] ⋅ 60
M N [ Nm ] = -------------------------------------
-
2 ⋅ π ⋅ n N [ rpm ]
[5-10] Recommendation for the setting of the gain of the speed controller
Tip!
Values recommended by Lenze for the setting of the (proportional) gain:
• For drive systems without feedback: Vp = 6 … 25
• For drive systems with a good disturbance behaviour: Vp > 15
In this case, we recommend the optimisation of the dynamic performance of the torque
controller.
168 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
Value range recommended by Lenze for the setting of the reset time:
Ti = 20 ms … 150 ms
A greater dynamic performance of the sensorless vector control can be achieved by reducing time
constant Ti of the speed controller (C00074/2).
A greater dynamic performance of the field weakening function can be achieved by setting a time
constant ≤ 15 ms. This means for actual speeds above rated speed a better torque-speed-
characteristic in the field weakening range:
M M
0 1
MN MN
nN n nN n
Torque controller time constant Ti > 15 ms
Torque controller time constant Ti ≤ 15 ms
• For Ti > 15 ms (see ), the actual speed value slightly drops in the field weakening range if the
load torque increases in the motor mode.
• For Ti ≤ 15 ms (see ), the speed remains stable in the field weakening range if the torque is
within the M/n characteristic field highlighted in grey.
Tip!
For applications with high dynamic performance and speed/torque accuracy requirements
in the field weakening range, we recommend a time constant Ti ≤ 15 ms.
In this case, the maximum torque should be limited via the nTorqueMotLimit_a and
nTorqueGenLimit_a process input signals to 1.5 x MN to ensure stable operation in the field
weakening range.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 169
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
We recommend to keep the Lenze setting (0 Hz).
Note!
A function for enabling a stable operation can only be implemented to a limited extent
with a reset time Ti <= 15 ms For applications with speeds above the 2-fold rated speed,
we recommend a reset time Ti (C00074/2) > 15 ms.
170 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
t t
t t
Actual speed value (signal nMotorSpeedAct_a) Speed controller output (signal nOutputSpeedCtrl_a)
Speed setpoint (nSpeedSetValue_a signal)
[5-12] Typical signal characteristics for different settings of the load moment of inertia
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 171
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
Via the nTorqueSetValue_a process signal at the LS_MotorInterface SB, any differential
signal can be defined for torque feedforward control. First the speed controller, then this
additive torque is connected which is hence not derived from the differential change in
speed setpoint.
172 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
Stop!
In the Lenze setting of C00654/1, the speed setpoint of the speed controller
(nSpeedSetValue_a) is used for the torque feedforward control which is why it is also
called "differential setpoint feedforward control". A very sharp change of the speed
setpoint at the speed controller thus causes a strong torque impulse at the machine!
A very sharp change of the speed setpoint of the speed controller occurs if a control
creates the setpoint ramp itself and the speed setpoint is only written every 20 ms to the
drive. (In this case, the speed setpoint is changed every 20 ms.)
Deactivate the speed feedforward control for the speed setpoint in C00654/1 if the
speed setpoint changes very sharply or the mass inertia is unknown (e.g. in case of
hoists)!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 173
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
In order to achieve a better speed stability and torque accuracy, the slip calculation can be either
derived from the motor nameplate data (e.g. rated motor speed) or the motor equivalent circuit
diagram data (stator resistance, rotor resistance etc.).
The data to be used for sensorless vector control is selected via bit 0 in C02879/1:
Setting Info
Bit 0 SLVC In case of sensorless vector control:
• "0" ≡ Slip calculation from motor nameplate data (Lenze setting)
• "1" ≡ Slip calculation from motor equivalent circuit diagram data
Bit 1 ... 7 Reserved
Note!
In order that the slip can be calculated from the motor equivalent circuit diagram data,
the equivalent circuit data (stator resistance, rotor resistance etc.) must be known as
exactly as possible.
• Selecting a motor in the »Engineer« motor catalogue loads the exact motor
equivalent circuit diagram data.
• When the motor nameplate data is entered manually and the motor equivalent
circuit diagram data is then detected via the motor parameter identification, the
"extended identification" (C02867/1 = 2) must be used. Automatic motor data
identification ( 111)
In the slip calculation from the motor equivalent circuit diagram data, the slip
compensation (C00021) has no influence anymore.
174 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The setting of C00985 and C00986 reduces the torque setting range.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 175
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.7 Sensorless vector control (SLVC)
________________________________________________________________
+15 %
92
C00
0
-15 %
0,37 22 90 PN [kW]
176 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
The sensorless control for synchronous motors is based on a decoupled and separated control of the
torque-creating and field-creating current share of synchronous motors. In contrast to the servo
control, the actual speed value and the rotor position are reconstructed via a motor model.
Stop!
• The sensorless control for synchronous motors is only possible up to a maximum
output frequency of 650 Hz (from version 14.00.00: 1000 Hz)!
• Depending on the number of motor pole pairs, the reference speed (C00011) may
only be selected that high that the output frequency displayed in C00059 is less
than or equal to 650 Hz (from version 14.00.00: 1000 Hz).
• We recommend to select a power-adapted combination of inverter and motor.
• The Lenze setting permits the operation of a power-adapted motor. Optimal
operation is only possible if either:
• the motor is selected via the »Engineer« motor catalogue,
• the motor nameplate data are entered and motor parameter identification is
carried out afterwards
- or -
• the nameplate data and equivalent circuit data of the motor (motor leakage
inductance and motor stator resistance) are entered manually.
• When you enter the motor nameplate data, take into account the phase connection
implemented for the motor (star or delta connection). Only enter the data applying to
the selected connection type.
• In order to protect the motor (e.g. from demagnetisation), we recommend setting the
ultimate motor current in C00939. This ensures motor protection even with an
unstable operation. Maximum current monitoring ( 248)
• Controller enable is only possible if the motor is at standstill.
• When the controller is enabled, a jerk may occur due to an angle jump since the
rotor displacement angle is not known after controller enable. For some
applications, this jerk in the machine is not acceptable.
• From version 11.00.00, the rotor displacement angle is identified with every
controller enable in the Lenze setting, and thus a jerk in the machine after
controller enable can be avoided. Pole position identification without motion
( 197)
• A flying restart circuit for synchronising to rotating motors is in preparation.
• The injection of a constant current may cause an unwanted heating of the motor at
controlled operation.
• We recommend using a temperature feedback via PTC or thermal contact. Motor
temperature monitoring (PTC) ( 242)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 177
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Currently, the sensorless control does not contain a flying restart function that enables
a synchronisation of the controller to a rotating machine.
• Thus, we recommend taking measures for preventing overvoltages at operation in
generator mode (e.g. brake resistor).
• By any means, the delay time for the "DC-bus overvoltage" error trigger in C00601/1
must be set to 0 s.
The motor model-based speed monitoring requires a rotating machine. Thus, the operational
performance of the sensorless control for synchronous motors is divided into two categories:
1. Open-loop controlled operation (|nsetpoint| < nC00996)
• In the range of low speeds, the speed of a synchronous motor is not possible. Thus, only an
adjustable and constant current is injected that enables an acceleration.
2. Closed-loop controlled operation (|nsetpoint| > nC00996)
• In this range, the rotor flux position and the speed are reconstructed via an observer. The
control is carried out field-oriented. Only the current is injected that is needed for the
required torque.
2 3
[5-13] Operating ranges of the sensorless control for synchronous motors
The sensorless control for synchronous motors has similar advantages for the closed-loop
controlled operating range and the servo control (SC) for synchronous motors. Compared to
asynchronous motors, there are the following advantages:
• Higher power density of the motor
• Higher efficiency
• Limitation of the maximum torque in motor mode and generator mode in closed-loop
operating range
• Implementation of simple positioning
178 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control:
1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 StateLine controller.
2. Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace.
3. Select the motor control "3: SLPSM: Sensorless PSM" from the Overview dialog level in the
Motor control list field:
4. Click the Motor control servo SLPSM button to change to the Overview Motor control
vector dialog box.
• This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important
parameters.
• When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with
more details/parameters is displayed.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 179
180
________________________________________________________________
5.8
5
Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
Motor control (MCTRL)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
________________________________________________________________
5.8
5
Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
Motor control (MCTRL)
Parameter Info Parameter Info Parameter Info
1 C00830/27 MCTRL: nTorqueSetValue_a 11 C00995/1 SLPSM: Open-loop controlled accelerating current 18 C00075 Vp current controller
2 C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode 12 C00995/2 SLPSM: Open-loop controlled standstill current 19 C00076 Ti current controller
3 C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode 13 C00996/1 SLPSM: Closed-loop controlled switching speed 20 C00018 Switching frequency
4 C00274 SC: Max. change in acceleration 14 C00996/2 SLPSM: Open-loop controlled switching speed 21 C00830/32 MCTRL: nPWMAngleOffset_a
5 C00270 SC: Freq. current setpoint filter 15 C00050 Speed setpoint 22 C00830/31 MCTRL: nVoltageAdd_a
6 C00271 SC: Current setpoint filter width 16 C00022 Imax in motor mode 23 C00058 Output frequency
7 C00272 SC: Current setpoint filter depth 17 C00023 Imax in generator mode 24 C00052 Motor voltage
8 C00056/2 Actual torque value
9 C00056/1 Torque demand
10 C00056/2 Actual torque value
181
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Sensorless control for synchronous motors can only be executed in the "Speed control with torque
limitation" (bTorquemodeOn = FALSE) mode.
Stop!
Torque limitation is only active in the closed-loop controlled operation (|nSetpoint| >
nC00996)!
• It must be prevented that the actual speed value is braked into the non-observable
area due to the torque limitation!
Note!
To avoid instabilities during operation, the torque limit values are internally processed
as absolute values.
182 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
The following "Initial commissioning steps" must be performed to commission the sensorless
control for synchronous motors:
3. Set speed switching thresholds between open-loop and closed-loop controlled operation:
• Set transition speed from closed-loop to open-loop operation in C00996/1 in [%] with regard to the rated
motor speed (C00087).
• Set transition speed from closed-loop to open-loop operation in C00996/2 in [%] with regard to the rated
motor speed (C00087).
Tip!
• With voltage-adjusted motors, a speed switching threshold of 10 % is recommended.
• As a rule of thumb, the speed switching threshold should be selected as follows:
U Rated, motor [V]
C00996/1...2 [%] = --------------------------------------- ⋅ 10
U Rated, FI [V]
4. Set open-loop accelerating current in C00995/1 in [%] with regard to the rated motor current (C00088).
• This value defines the height of the current that is injected during the acceleration process.
• The accelerating current must be dimensioned so that the required torque in the lower speed range can
always be reached (acceleration torque + load torque):
M Meax [Nm]
C00995/1 [%] = ------------------------------- ⋅ I Rated, motor [A] ⋅ 1.3
M Rated [Nm]
5. Set open-loop steady-state current in C00995/2 in [%] with regard to the rated motor current (C00088).
• This value defines the height of the current for processes without acceleration (e.g. standstill or constant
setpoint speed ).
6. For improving the operating characteristics:
If required, adapt the filter time for reconstructing the rotor position and the actual speed value through the
motor model in C00998/1 and C00998/2.
• We recommend using the Lenze setting:
Filter time rotor position (C00998/1) = 3 ms
Filter time actual speed value (C00998/2) = 5 ms
• Deviant from this, the following value range can be used:
Filter time rotor position (C00998/1) = 2 ... 5 ms
Filter time actual speed value (C00998/2) = 3 ... 8 ms
7. For protecting the motor from demagnetisation:
Set the ultimate current in C00939.
Note!
The Lenze settings of the current controller are predefined for a power-adapted motor.
For an optimal drive behaviour of a synchronous motor, we recommend to adapt the
controller settings.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 183
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
Information on the optimisation of the control mode and the adaptation to the real
application is provided in the "Optimising the control mode" chapter.
Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter
"Parameterisable additional functions". ( 202)
184 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
From version 12.00.00:
• Following successful motor parameter identification, the current controller
parameters (C00075, C00076) are calculated automatically.
• If these parameters are not to be calculated, bit 4 of C02865/1 must be set to "1".
• Following successful motor parameter identification, the speed controller parameters
(C00070/3, C00071/3) can be calculated automatically.
• If these parameters are to be calculated, bit 6 of C02865/1 must be set to "5".
• Following successful motor parameter identification, other controller parameters
(C00011, C00022) can be calculated automatically.
• If these parameters are to be calculated, bit 6 of C02865/1 must be set to "6".
The measures described in the following subchapters serve to further optimise the control
behaviour of the sensorless control for synchronous motors and adjust it to the concrete
application.
• Optimise current controller. ( 186)
• The current controller should always be optimised if a motor of a third-party manufacturer
with unknown motor data is used!
• Optimise speed controller. ( 187)
• The setting of the speed controller must be adapted depending on the mechanical path.
• Optimise response to setpoint changes and determine mass inertia. ( 190)
• For an optimal reference behaviour, the total moment of inertia can be used to make a
feedforward control of the speed setpoint.
• Current-dependent stator leakage inductance Ppp(I). ( 193)
• If the motor is operated with very low and very high currents during the process (e.g. in Pick
and place-applications), the stator leakage inductance and current controller parameters can
be tracked by means of an adjustable saturation characteristic.
Note!
Current setpoint filter (band-stop filter) / jerk limitation
The use of the functions is only recommended in exceptional cases.
Setting the current setpoint filter (band-stop filter) ( 195)
Adapting the max. acceleration change (jerk limitation) ( 196)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 185
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
An optimisation of the current controller should generally be carried out unless a power-
adapted standard motor is used or the motor has been selected from the motor
catalogue of the »Engineer«!
An optimisation of the current controller is sensible since the two control parameters gain (C00075)
and reset time (C00076) depend on the required maximum current and the set switching
frequency.
• Gain and reset time can be calculated as per the following formulae:
Vp = Current controller gain (C00075)
L ss [ H ] Ti = Current controller reset time (C00076)
V p = ---------------
-
TE [ s ] Lss = Motor stator leakage inductance (C00085)
Rs = Motor stator resistance (C00084)
TE = Equivalent time constant (= 500 μs)
L ss [ H ]
T i = ---------------
-
Rs [ Ω ]
186 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
TM [ s ]
V P ≈ 0.2 ... 0.5 ⋅ -------------------
0.01 [ s ]
2 ⋅ π ⋅ n N [ rpm ] 2
T M [ s ] = -------------------------------------- ⋅ J Drive, total [ kgm ]
M N [ Nm ] ⋅ 60
P N [ W ] ⋅ 60
M N [ Nm ] = -------------------------------------
-
2 ⋅ π ⋅ n N [ rpm ]
[5-14] Recommendation for the setting of the gain of the speed controller
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 187
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
If the mass inertia of the drive is unknown, the optimisation can be achieved as follows:
1. Specify speed setpoint.
• A small speed just above the switching threshold is recommended in the closed-loop
controlled operation.
2. Increase Vp (C00070/3) until the drive starts to oscillate (observe engine noise).
3. Reduce Vp (C00070/3) until the drive runs stable again.
4. Reduce Vp (C00070/3) to approx. half the value.
5. Afterwards check results of the optimisation in the entire speed range (one-time passing
through of the speed range).
Tip!
Values recommended by Lenze for the setting of the (proportional) gain:
• For drive systems without feedback: Vp = 2 … 8
• For drive systems with a good disturbance behaviour: Vp > 6
Tip!
Value range recommended by Lenze for the setting of the reset time:
Ti = 20 ms … 150 ms
Stop!
If the controller parameters are preset unfavourably, the control can tend to heavy
overshoots up to instability!
• Following and speed errors can adopt very high values.
• If the mechanics are sensitive, the corresponding monitoring functions are to be
activated.
188 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
For an optimal setting, we recommend to determine the mass inertia (optimal response
to setpoint changes) first.
Optimise response to setpoint changes and determine mass inertia ( 190)
How to optimise the speed controller setting by means of the ramp response:
1. Run a typical speed profile and record the ramp response of the speed using the data
logger.
• Motor control variables to be recorded:
nSpeedSetValue_a (speed setpoint)
nMotorSpeedAct_a (actual speed value)
2. Evaluate the ramp response:
Vp < Vp opt. Vp = Vp opt. Vp > Vp opt.
n n n
Tn < Tn opt.
t t t
n n n
Tn = Tn opt.
t t t
n n n
Tn > Tn opt.
t t t
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 189
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
t t
t t
Actual speed value (signal nMotorSpeedAct_a) Speed controller output (signal nOutputSpeedCtrl_a)
Speed setpoint (nSpeedSetValue_a signal)
[5-15] Typical signal characteristics for different settings of the load moment of inertia
190 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
Via the nTorqueSetValue_a process signal at the LS_MotorInterface SB, any differential
signal can be defined for torque feedforward control. First the speed controller, then this
additive torque is connected which is hence not derived from the differential change in
speed setpoint.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 191
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Stop!
In the Lenze setting of C00654/1, the speed setpoint of the speed controller
(nSpeedSetValue_a) is used for the torque feedforward control which is why it is also
called "differential setpoint feedforward control". A very sharp change of the speed
setpoint at the speed controller thus causes a strong torque impulse at the machine!
A very sharp change of the speed setpoint of the speed controller occurs if a control
creates the setpoint ramp itself and the speed setpoint is only written every 20 ms to the
drive. (In this case, the speed setpoint is changed every 20 ms.)
Deactivate the speed feedforward control for the speed setpoint in C00654/1 if the
speed setpoint changes very sharply or the mass inertia is unknown (e.g. in case of
hoists)!
192 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
• The saturation characteristic is not only used for the correction of the current
controller but also influences the current controller feedforward control (C00079/1).
• When a Lenze motor is selected from the »Engineer« motor catalogue, the
corresponding saturation characteristic is set in C02853/1...17 and – if required – the
correction via this saturation characteristic is switched on in C02859.
• For third-party motors: If the current controller becomes unstable with high currents,
contact the motor manufacturer to find out whether the stator leakage inductance
changes with the current level. If required, the saturation characteristic of this motor
must be set in C02853/1...17 and then activated in C02859.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 193
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
L/Ln [%]
C02853/2
200
180
140
C02853/4
120
100
80
60
40 C02853/17
20
0 I/Imax
0 6.25 12.5 18.75 25 31.25 37.5 43.75 50 56.25 62.5 68.75 75 81.25 87.5 93.75 100 [%]
[5-16] Saturation characteristic: Inductance referring to the inductance for rated current
194 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
• In the default setting of 0 db of the filter depth (C00272), the current setpoint filter is switched
off.
Note!
Readjust the speed controller after setting the current setpoint filter. Optimise speed
controller. ( 187)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 195
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Via the max. acceleration change that can be set in C00274, the change of the
setpoint torque can be limited for jerk limitation. Hence, sudden torque step
changes can be avoided. The entire speed characteristic is smoothed.
In the default setting of 400 %/ms of the max. acceleration change (C00274), jerk limitation is
switched off.
The setting defines the permissible maximum torque change per ms (based on the rated motor
torque).
Note!
Only activate this jerk limitation for speed-controlled applications!
196 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
From version 11.00.00 onwards, when sensorless control is active for synchronous motors (SLPSM),
the rotor displacement angle is identified with every controller enable in the Lenze setting and thus
a jerk in the machine after controller enable can be avoided.
The "Pole position identification without motion" is able to identify the electrical rotor
displacement angle with an accuracy of up to 10°. The identification takes 1 ... 15 ms depending on
the motor. The function is preset in the Lenze setting so that no further settings need to be made in
the majority of cases. In order to get the same behaviour as before, the function can be deactivated
in C02874.
Note!
In case of synchronous motors with a stator time constant < 1 ms, the pole position
identification is not executed since the resulting test current pulse could exceed the
permissible motor current.
• This, however, only affects very few synchronous motors with very low power (e.g.
Lenze motor MDSKS-020-13-300 with rated power of 40 W).
• A non-executed pole position identification can be recognised by the display
C02870 = 0 % and C02871 = 0 ms.
• The stator time constants can be calculated based on the following formula:
TS = stator time constant
L ss [mH] Lss = Motor stator leakage inductance (C00085)
T s [ms] = -------------------
-
Rs [ Ω ] Rs = Motor stator resistance (C00084)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 197
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Stop!
In case of a too high setting in C02872, an impermissible motor current may occur during
pole position identification. In this case, the "Fault" error response occurs and the "Id5:
Pole position identification error" error message entered in the logbook.
In case of aconsiderably too high setting in C02872:
• The following current monitoring functions can be triggered:
• OC7: Motor overcurrent
• OC11: Active clamp operation
• OC1: Power section - short circuit
• The optimisation degree "0 %" is displayed in C02870.
• The time "0 ms" is displayed in C02871.
198 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
Note!
In the Lenze setting, the field weakening for synchronous motors is activated in
C00079/4.
• If a high energy efficiency is required, keep the field weakening switched off or restrict
the field weakening operation via C00938.
Stop!
In the field weakening operation, a current is injected into the synchronous motor even
in idle state which can rise to maximum current (C00022).
Ensure that this no-load current does not cause the motor to be heated impermissibly!
• We recommend using a temperature feedback via PTC or thermal contact. Motor
temperature monitoring (PTC) ( 242)
n
800V
n max = n nenn_mot ⋅ --------------------------------------
2 ⋅ U nenn_mot
[5-18] Calculation of the maximally reachable speed with switched-on field weakening
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 199
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
M [Nm]
60
50
40 0
30
20
1
10
0 n [rpm]
0 1500 3000 4500
Standstill torque
Rated torque
Characteristic for continuous operation
Limit characteristic at a mains voltage of 400 V without field weakening
Limit characteristic with field weakening
• The maximally effective field-producing motor current is calculated based on the motor data
set in C00085, C00089 and C00098. Then, the value is internally limited to 98 % of the set
maximum current (C00022 or maximally permissible current for the permanent switching
frequency set in C00018).
• C00938 serves to limit the maximally effective field-producing motor current as well.
• In the Lenze setting, the field weakening for synchronous motors is active (C00079/4).
However, the field-producing motor current is limited via C00938 to 30 % of the rated motor
current (C00088). Hence, the maximum speed is limited during field weakening operation
and, at the same time, the temperature rise of the motor during field weakening operation
and no-load operation is also limited.
• If a higher speed for the field weakening operation is required or the current in the field
weakening operation is to be limited (e.g. since no motor temperature detection is available
and/or heating in the field weakening operation is to be limited), the value must be increased
or reduced accordingly in C00938.
200 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.8 Sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
________________________________________________________________
• In C000937/1, the actually used maximally effective field-producing motor current is displayed.
• With switched-on and active field weakening: 0.00 A ... -x.xx A
• With sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM), the injected current is displayed in
open-loop controlled operation: 0.00 A ... +x.xx A
• If neither field weakening nor open-loop controlled operation are active,e "0.00 A" is
displayed.
Note!
If a Lenze motor is used:
The controller is automatically parameterised so that field weakening operates
optimally and the maximally permissible speed is monitored.
Stop!
If an OEM motor is used:
If pulse inhibit is set in the controller, the DC bus is loaded with the voltage that
corresponds to the current speed of the machine.
Since with switched-on field weakening higher speeds can be achieved at a
correspondingly higher rotor voltage of the motor, the DC bus can be loaded to a voltage
higher than the set DC-bus voltage in case of pulse inhibit and a currently high motor
speed and even exceed the maximally permissible voltage of 800 V!
For device protection, either use a brake chopper or parameterise the motor speed
monitoring via C00965 in such a way that only a maximum speed is possible which
would be also reachable without field weakening with a DC-bus voltage of = 800 V.
Motor speed monitoring ( 249)
Example: Voltage increase in the DC bus when field weakening is switched off
(For instance by an active setting of the controller inhibit or by tripping a fault or error at high motor
speed.)
U
• If pulse inhibit occurs at 6000 rpm and switched-on field
840 V
> 800 V weakening, the DC bus is loaded to more than 800 V ().
• A speed limitation to 5700 rpm is required since this speed
560 V
causes a DC-bus voltage of 800 V if field weakening is
switched off.
4000 6000 n
[5-20] Example: Possible DC-bus voltage > 800 V if field weakening gets lost
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 201
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
The switching frequency of the inverter that can be selected in C00018 influences the smooth
running performance and the noise generation in the connected motor as well as the power losses
in the controller.
The lower the switching frequency the higher the concentricity factor, the smaller the losses, and
the higher the noise generation.
Stop!
If operated at a switching frequency of 16 kHz, the output current of the controller must
not exceed the current limit values specified in the technical data! (See chapter "Rated
data" of the hardware manual.)
Note!
• Operate mid-frequency motors only at a switching frequency of 8 kHz or 16 kHz
(var./drive-opt.).
• If operated at a switching frequency of 16 kHz, the Ixt evaluation (C00064) is
considered including the required derating to 67 % of the rated device current at
switching frequencies of 2.4 and 8 kHz.
• Ensure that the value does not fall below the permissible switching frequency,
• if the motor is not approved for the setting switching frequency
- or -
• if a sinusoidal filter has been connected between the output of the inverter and the
motor which is not approved for the setting switching frequency.
(see section "Preventing a decrease of the switching frequency")
202 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
Selection in C00018
1 4 kHz var./drive-optimised 21 8 kHz var./drive-opt./4 kHz min
2 8 kHz var./drive-optimised 22 16 kHz var./drive-opt./4 kHz min
3 16 kHz var./drive-optimised 23 16 kHz var./drive-opt./8 kHz min
5 2 kHz constant/drive-optimised 31 8 kHz var./min. Pv/4 kHz min
6 4 kHz constant/drive-optimised 32 16 kHz var./min. Pv/4 kHz min
7 8 kHz constant/drive-optimised 33 16 kHz var./min. Pv/8 kHz min
8 16 kHz constant/drive-optimised Abbreviations used:
11 4 kHz var./min. Pv • "var.": Adaptation of the switching frequency
depending on the current
12 8 kHz var./min. Pv • "drive-opt.": drive-optimised modulation ("sine/delta
13 16 kHz var./min. Pv modulation")
• "fixed": fixed switching frequencies
15 2 kHz constant/min. Pv • "min. Pv": additional reduction of power loss
16 4 kHz constant/min. Pv
17 8 kHz constant/min. Pv
18 16 kHz constant/min. Pv
Tip!
The Lenze setting C00018 = "2: 8 kHz var.drive-opt." is the optimal value for standard
applications.
Selection in C00018
7 8 kHz constant/drive-optimised
8 16 kHz constant/drive-optimised
23 16 kHz var./drive-opt./8 kHz min
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 203
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Switching frequency for the motor parameter identification
Up to and including version 13.xx.xx, the motor parameter identification is executed
with a switching frequency of 4 kHz.
• Thus, a motor parameter identification is not permissible for the previously
mentioned example as the sinusoidal filter may only be operated with a minimum
switching frequency of 8 kHz!
From version 14.00.00, the motor parameter identification can also be executed with a
switching frequency of 8 kHz instead of 4 kHz. For this purpose, the option "Motor ident.:
Switching frequency 8 kHz" (Bit 4 = "1") has to be set in C02864/1.
• With this setting, a motor parameter identification would be permissible for the
previously mentioned example.
Generally, a switching frequency of 4 kHz is recommended for the motor parameter
identification as it serves to obtain the most accurate results.
Automatic motor data identification ( 111)
The changeover thresholds are listed in the 8400 hardware manual in the rated data.
The hardware manual has been stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied
with the 8400 controller.
When a "fixed" switching frequency is selected, no switching frequency changeover takes place. In
case of fixed frequencies, the controller output current is limited to the permissible value of the
corresponding switching frequency. In case of larger load impulses, the overcurrent interruption
may be activated, to which the controller responds with "Error".
204 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
1
Maximum output frequency ≤ --- Switching frequency
8
• At a switching frequency of 4 kHz, for instance, 500 Hz for the maximum output frequency
should not be exceeded.
Carry out further measures:
• If required, deactivate the switching frequency changeover by the heatsink temperature via
C00144.
• If required, ensure that the changeover threshold of the controller output current to the next
switching frequency below will not be exceeded. If required, select a constant switching
frequency in C00018.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 205
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
Under the operating conditions described here and under continuous operation, the controller can
be operated with a higher power motor (increased rated power). The remaining overload capacity
of the drive system (for 60 s/3 s) is reduced accordingly to approx. 120 %/160 %.
Typical applications stand out due to low dynamic requirements, e.g. pumps and fans, general
horizontal materials handling technology and line drives.
The controllers which can be operated at an increased rated power are listed in the 8400
hardware manual in the rated data. The hardware manual is stored in electronic form on
the data carrier which is supplied with the 8400 controller.
Stop!
Operation at increased rated power is only permitted ...
• with the controllers listed in the 8400 hardware manual for this type of operation in
the stated mains voltage range.
• at switching frequencies of 2 kHz and 4 kHz.
• at a max. ambient temperature of 40 °C.
• with the types of installation stated in the 8400 hardware manual.
• with the fuses, cable cross-sections, mains chokes, and filters as required in the 8400
hardware manual for this operation.
• after parameterisation according to the specifications below.
Required parameterisation
Operation at increased rated power requires the following settings to be made particularly for the
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus), but also for all other types of control:
206 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 207
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
The flying restart circuit for asynchronous motors uses a simple motor model which requires
knowledge of the motor stator resistance RS and the rated motor current.
Note!
• Currently, the flying restart circuit is only available for asynchronous motors. (A flying
restart circuit for synchronous motors is in preparation.)
• For a correct functioning of the flying restart circuit, we recommend to perform a
parameter identification first. Automatic motor data identification ( 111)
• The flying restart function works safely and reliably for drives with great centrifugal
masses.
• Do not use the flying restart function if several motors with different centrifugal
masses are connected to a controller.
• After the controller is enabled, the motor can start for a short time or reverse when
machines with low friction and low mass inertia are used.
• The flying restart function serves to identify max. field frequencies up to ±200 Hz.
• When power-adapted standard asynchronous motors are used (rated motor power
approximately corresponds to the rated inverter power), a motor parameter
identification is not required.
• On drive systems with feedback, you do not need to use the flying restart function
because the synchronisation to the speed detected by the feedback is always carried
out in a jerk-free manner.
• Especially in case of very high power, very high mass inertia and a mains voltage
higher than 440 V, an overvoltage in the DC bus may be caused temporarily. Using a
brake resistor may avoid this behaviour.
• From version 15.00.00, frequency can be set as a remedy in C00989 which is added
to the found flying restart frequency.
Here, the setting in C00989 has to be increased in small steps up to double the slip
frequency until the behaviour does not occur anymore.
Tip!
In association with the flying restart function, we recommend information provided in this
documentation on the following topic:
Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) ( 212)
208 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
General information
This function serves to activate a mode which is used to "catch" a coasting motor during operation
without speed feedback. This means that the synchronicity between controller and motor is to be
adjusted in such a way that a jerk-free transition to the rotating machines is achieved in the instant
of connection.
The drive controller determines the synchronicity by identifying the synchronous field frequency.
Duration
The "catching" process is completed after approx. 0.5 ... 1.5 seconds. The duration is influenced by
the starting value. If the field frequency is not known, we recommend a fixed starting value of 10
Hz (or -10 Hz with systems rotating in negative direction).
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 209
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
We recommend setting a flying restart current of 10 % ... 25 % of the rated motor current.
• During a flying restart process, a current is injected into the motor to identify the speed.
• Reducing the current causes a reduction of the motor torque during the flying restart
process. A short-time starting action or reversing of the motor is prevented with low
flying restart currents.
• An increase of the current improves the robustness of the flying restart function.
• At too high mass inertias and high speeds at the same time, the flying restart circuit may
cause an overvoltage in the DC bus ("oU") if no brake resistor is connected. In this case,
reduce the flying restart current.
Tip!
Use of motors with higher rated frequencies
For trouble-free operation, we recommend to manually enter a starting frequency of 20 %
of the rated motor frequency in C00992 as well as to accelerate the flying restart process
(see above) and to use a lower flying restart current (10 % of the rated motor current) if
motors with higher rated frequencies are used.
Optimisation of the flying restart time
From version 05.00.00 onwards, the duration of the flying restart process can be influenced
via the setting of the integration time (C00993). A reduction of the integration time causes
the flying restart function to accelerate and thus a reduced flying restart time.
• We recommend not to change the Lenze setting of the integration time.
• When special motor are used (e.g. multi-pole motors or ASM servo motors), a reduced
integration time may improve the flying restart behaviour.
Optimising the current controller if the behaviour is unstable
During the execution of flying restart function, peak currents/torques are avoided by
controlling the current amplitude.
Gain (C00075) and reset time (C00076) of the current controller can be adapted to improve
the jerk-free/torque-free connection of the inverter to the supply of the rotating motor.
• We recommend not to change the Lenze setting of the current controller.
• If the behaviour of the current controller is unstable, gain and reset time can be
calculated as per the following formulae:
[5-21] Formulae for the calculation of the gain and reset time of the current controller
210 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The DC-injection braking function (manually or automatically) is only possible for the
following motor control modes:
• V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) ( 126)
• V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco) ( 144)
• V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) ( 154)
• Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ( 161)
Danger!
Holding braking is not possible when this braking mode is used!
For low-wear control of a holding brake, use the basic function "Holding brake control".
( 402)
DC-injection braking allows the drive to be quickly braked to a standstill without the need to use an
external brake resistor.
• The braking current is set in C00036.
• The maximum braking torque to be generated by the DC braking current is approx. 20 ... 30 %
of the rated motor torque. It is lower than that for braking in generator mode with an external
brake resistor.
• The DC-injection braking can be activated manually via a control input of the application or
automatically ("Auto-DCB"). The two different modes are described in the following
subchapters.
Tip!
DC-injection braking has the advantage that it is possible to influence the braking time by
changing the motor current or the braking torque..
The automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) improves the starting performance of the
motor in case of V/f operation without speed feedback.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 211
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Deactivate automatic DC-injection braking when a holding brake is used!
• For this purpose, go to C00019 and set the auto DCB threshold to "0".
• Background: Controller inhibit is already activated by the Holding brake control.
( 402)
Function
For understanding the auto DCB function, it is necessary to distinguish between three different
types of operation:
A. The drive has been enabled and, in the course of operation, the speed setpoint falls below the
auto DCB threshold.
• In case of V/f operation without speed feedback, a braking current (C00036) is injected. After
the auto DCB hold time (C00106) has expired, the motor is deenergised via the auto DCB
function, i.e. pulse inhibit is set.
• In case of V/f operation with speed feedback, the motor is deenergised via the auto DCB
function after the auto DCB hold time (C00106) has expired, i.e. pulse inhibit is set. The
braking current which can be parameterised in C00036 does not have any effect during
operation with speed feedback.
B. When the controller is enabled, the drive is at standstill (n = 0).
If the enabled drive is to start, the speed setpoint passed via the acceleration ramp must exceed
the auto DCB threshold (C00019). Below this threshold, the motor will not be energised.
212 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
C. When the controller is enabled, the motor (still) rotates at a speed which is above the auto DCB
threshold. If the speed setpoint reached via the acceleration ramp exceeds the auto DCB
threshold (C00019), the motor will be energised and the following action will take place:
• During V/f operation without speed feedback, the drive is "caught".Flying restart function
( 208)
• During V/f operation with speed feedback, the drive synchronises to the current actual speed
value.
Tip!
We recommend to deactivate the auto DCB function during V/f operation with speed
feedback via a setting of C00019 = 0.
Stop!
If the DC-injection braking operation is too long and the braking current or braking
voltage is too high, the connected motor may overheat!
If you want to use the auto DCB function contrary to our recommendation (see above), the auto DCB
threshold must not fall below the following values depending on the number of encoder
increments:
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 213
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
Speed setpoint
Actual speed value of the motor
Controller output current
2
Disable voltage
C00036
DC-injection braking is active
3 C00106
[5-22] Example 1: Auto-GSB signal characteristic during V/f operation without speed feedback
Speed setpoint
Actual speed value of the motor
2 Controller output current
C00106
Disable voltage
DC-injection braking is active
3
[5-23] Example 2: Auto-GSB signal characteristic during V/f operation with speed feedback
214 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Slip compensation is only active with the following motor control modes:
• V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) ( 126)
• Sensorless vector control (SLVC) ( 161)
Under load, the speed of an asynchronous motor decreases. This load-dependent speed drop is
called slip. The slip can partly be compensated for by the setting in C00021.
• The setting of C00021 can be done automatically in the course of motor parameter
identification. Automatic motor data identification ( 111)
• The setting must be made manually if the motor parameter identification cannot be called up.
Tip!
The following guide value applies to a correctly set slip compensation:
• Deviation from the rated motor speed ≤ 1% for the speed range of 10 % ... 100 % of the
rated motor speed and loads ≤ rated motor torque.
• Greater deviations are possible in the field weakening range.
• If C00021 is set too high, the drive may get unstable.
• Negative slip (C00021 < 0) with V/f characteristic control results in "smoother" drive
behaviour at heavy load impulses or applications requiring a significant speed drop
under load.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 215
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
Mechanical oscillations are undesirable effects in every process and they may have an adverse effect
on the single system components and/or the production output.
Mechanical oscillations in the form of speed oscillations are suppressed by the oscillation damping
function.
Mechanical oscillations may occur:
• In the voltage range (output voltage is lower than max. voltage)
• Here, the oscillations occur in no-load operation.
• Here, speeds of 40 ... 80 % of the rated speed are typical.
• See subchapter "Oscillation damping voltage range". ( 217)
• In the field weakening range (output voltage has reached maximum voltage)
• Here, the oscillations occur in no-load operation and with load.
• Here, speeds higher than the rated speed are typical, especially when the output frequency is
close to the mains frequency.
• See subchapter "Oscillation damping in the field weakening range". ( 218)
216 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Compensate the resonance during operation with feedback (closed loop, feedback of
nact) via the parameters of the slip regulator.
Parameterising the slip regulator ( 158)
How to eliminate speed oscillations in no-load operation at speeds with 40 ... 80 % of the
rated speed:
1. Approach the area where the speed oscillations occur.
2. Reduce the speed oscillations by changing C00234 step by step (increment 1 %).
• The filter time oscillation damping (C00235) should not be changed.
3. These can be indicators for smooth running:
• Constant motor current characteristic
• Reduction of the mechanical oscillations in the bearing seat
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 217
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
• With the Lenze setting of C00236 the limitation of the output voltage is set so that voltage dips
in the DC bus in the output voltage for the single-phase and three-phase devices can largely be
compensated so that no speed oscillations may be expected. Thus, an adaptation of C00236 is
not required in the majority of cases.
• Maximum output voltage to be reached with Lenze setting of C00236:
• Single-phase devices: 98.2 %
• Three-phase devices: 99.7 %
Note!
The limitation of the output voltage via C00236 in the extreme field weakening range
(high speeds) causes a reduction of the max. possible output torque (stalling torque).
• If the output torque to be reached in the extreme field weakening range is not
sufficient (motor is stalling too early), reduce the setting in C00236.
218 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.9 Parameterisable additional functions
________________________________________________________________
5.9.7 Phase sequence reversal for correcting misconnected UVW motor phases
Note!
Up to and including version 11.00.00, this function may only be activated for the
following motor control types:
• V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) ( 126)
• V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco) ( 144)
For all other motor control types, this function must not be activated because the set
control mode would not work in that case!
From version 12.00.00, this function may be activated for all motor control types with
the exception of the ones for synchronous motor.
The activation of this function does not affect the control types for synchronous motor
since these control types require an in-phase connection of the synchronous motor.
If the motor phases are misconnected at the inverter output (e.g. phase u takes the place of phase
v), the motor will rotate in the wrong direction.
To correct such misconnected motor phases, the rotating field of the controller's output can be
reversed by selecting "1: Inverted" in C00905. In this case, a phase will be reversed at the output of
the inverter.
This function does not have any effect on setpoints and actual values, i.e. the polarity of the speed
setpoint/actual speed value, actual torque, output frequency, and AngleOffset do not change.
Tip!
Cases of application for this function:
• Phase sequence reversal in case of misconnected motor phases.
• Setting of the correctly signed direction of rotation for inversely mounted motors.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 219
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.10 Encoder/feedback system
________________________________________________________________
For motor control with speed feedback, the feedback signal can be fed to the digital terminals
(DI1/DI2) via an HTL encoder.
Danger!
• To avoid interference when using an encoder, only use shielded motor and encoder
cables.
• If an HTL encoder is used at the digital input terminals:
Observe the maximum input frequencies of the digital inputs!
• DI1/DI2: max. 10 kHz
Note!
In the Lenze setting (e.g. when the device is delivered), the open-circuit monitoring of the
encoder is activated. Encoder open-circuit monitoring ( 250)
Wiring diagram, assignment and electrical data of the digital input terminals can be
found in the hardware manual 8400 in the chapter "technical data". The hardware
manual is stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied with the 8400 controller.
Speed encoder
selection C00496 Encoder evaluation procedure
C00420/1 Encoder number of incr. C00495 C00497/1 Filter time
C00425/1 Encoder sampling time Speed controller/
0
10 kHz slip regulator
1
FreqIn12 2 C00051
Actual speed value
4. Go to the Overview Motor data dialog level and click the Encoder/Feedback system...
button.
220 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.10 Encoder/feedback system
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 221
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.10 Encoder/feedback system
________________________________________________________________
General procedure
(if the encoder is connected to the digital inputs DI1 and DI2)
1. Define the function of the digital inputs DI1 and DI2 in C00115/1.
2. Set the encoder increments in C00420/1.
3. Select "1: Encoder signal FreqIn12" in C00495.
4. Adapt the filter time of the speed measurement in C00497/1.
Define the function of the digital inputs DI1 and DI2 in C00115/1.
To be able to use the digital inputs as encoder inputs, select 2, 3, or 4 (Lenze recommendation: 2) in
C00115/ depending on the input terminals used.
Danger!
For single-track evaluation, make sure that the sign is correctly specified. Otherwise, the
motor may overspeed.
Note!
If the digital inputs are parameterised as encoder inputs, the corresponding output
signals (bIn1/bIn2) at the LS_DigitalInput system block are automatically set to FALSE.
The wiring diagram and assignment of the input terminals are described in the 8400
hardware manual . The hardware manual has been stored in electronic form on the data
carrier supplied with the 8400 controller.
Related topics:
Digital terminals ( 261)
Using DI1 and DI2 as frequency inputs ( 266)
222 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.10 Encoder/feedback system
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 223
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.10 Encoder/feedback system
________________________________________________________________
Note!
At the digital terminals DI1 and DI2, only encoders with HTL level can be used.
In spite of the selected operating mode without encoder feedback, the actual speed
value (C00051) is calculated if an encoder is connected and "1: Encoder signal FrqIn12" is
selected in C00495.
Tip!
We recommend the use of the preset procedure for low-resolution encoders (C00496 = 1).
This procedure can also be used for dynamic applications (e.g. V/f + encoder).
224 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.10 Encoder/feedback system
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 225
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
When braking electrical motors, the kinetic energy of the drive train is fed back regeneratively to the
DC bus. This energy results in a boost of the DC-bus voltage.
• Several different strategies can serve to avoid DC-bus overvoltages:
• Use of a brake resistor
• Stopping of the ramp function generator if brake chopper threshold exceeded (RFG_Stop)
• Use of the "inverter motor brake" function (from version 04.00.00)
• Combination of the above named options
• In the case of inverters with a 3-phase supply, the following is also possible:
• Coupling of the inverters in a DC-bus connection
• Recovery of regenerative energy with a regenerative module
Stop!
If the connected brake resistor is smaller than required, the brake chopper can be
destroyed!
• Appropriate protective measures are described in subchapter "Avoiding thermal
overload of the brake resistor". ( 234)
If no brake resistor or regenerative module is used, the overvoltage switch-off ("oU") may
respond, e.g. in case of short deceleration times during feedback operation. Error
messages of the operating system ( 444)
226 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The brake transistor will be switched off if it remains switched on for a period of 4
seconds.
• If the DC-bus voltage falls under the brake chopper threshold for a short time again,
the brake transistor can switch on again for a maximum of 4 seconds, without
interruption.
• This protective function is used to prevent the brake chopper from being switched on
permanently due to e.g. too high voltages at all times or incorrect interconnection of
the bBrakeChopperOn signal (from version V12.00.00).
• From version 14.00.00, the limitation of the operating time can be deactivated to
max. 4 seconds. For this purpose, set bit 1 to "1" in C02864/1.
The integrated brake chopper is always triggered via the DC-bus voltage with
exceedance of the "voltage threshold for braking operation" independent of the device
status.
From version 14.00.00, the brake chopper can also be switched off at pulse inhibit or
when the "Fault" device status is activated.
• For a switch-off at pulse inhibit, set bit 7 to "1" in C02865/1.
• For a switch-off in the "Fault" device status, set bit 2 to "1" in C02864/1.
DC-bus system
For a DC-bus connection with other devices, we recommend to connect the regenerative power
supply module to terminals +UG and –UG.
Note!
DC-bus system without the use of a regenerative module:
• Up to and including version V11.xx.xx, only one internal brake chopper can be used in
the DC-bus system to dissipate regenerative energy.
• From version V12.00.00, all internal brake choppers can be used in the DC-bus system
to dissipate regenerative energy ("Master-slave operation"). Control of multiple
internal brake choppers in the DC-bus system ( 234)
In order to install the regenerative module, follow the notes in the 8400 hardware
manual. The hardware manual has been stored in electronic form on the data carrier
supplied with the 8400 controller.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 227
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the brake energy management:
1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 StateLine controller.
2. Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace.
3. Go to the Overview dialog level and click the "basic functions" button.
4. Go to the Overview basic functions dialog box and click the Brake energy management
button.
228 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
The voltage threshold for braking operation is set via the mains voltage (C00173) and the reduced
brake chopper threshold (C00174). When this "brake chopper threshold" is exceeded, the response
selected in C00175 takes place in the DC bus. The selected function (e.g. use of a brake resistor)
serves to dissipate energy in the DC bus and reduce the DC-bus voltage.
• The "brake chopper threshold" is preset as follows so that it is higher than the specified mains
voltage (C00173):
• This brake chopper threshold can be reduced by 0 ... 150 V by means of C00174.
Stop!
The brake chopper threshold resulting from C00173 and C00174 must not exceed the
stabilised DC-bus voltage!
Example:
• A 400 V device has a maximum mains voltage of 420 V AC.
• Maximum stationary DC-bus voltage: 420 V AC * 1.414 = 594 V DC
• C00173 has been set with the selection "0" for 400 V AC mains.
• This means that C00174 can be set to a maximum of 131 V DC (725 V DC - 594 V DC).
If the brake chopper threshold resulting from C00173 and C00174 is exceeded in the DC bus, the
reaction selected in C00175 takes place (use of the brake resistor and/or stop of the ramp function
generator and/or inverter-motor brake).
• Optimum following of the actual speed value until the speed setpoint is reached (e.g. the motor
is stopped rapidly) is always achieved with the help of a brake resistor.
• Stopping the ramp function generator enables smoother deceleration with lower torque
oscillation..
• The inverter motor brake is available in C00175 from version 04.00.00 onwards. This function
enables rapid braking without a brake resistor. Torque oscillations can occur due to the
traversing dynamics.Inverter motor brake ( 231)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 229
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
Stop!
• The two braking procedures "Stopping of the ramp function generator" and "Inverter
motor brake" can only be used for speed-controlled applications without the
influence of a position controller!
• When the "inverter motor brake" function is used, the Motor overload monitoring
(I2xt) is not adapted. If it is braked too frequently, there is a risk of the motor being
thermally overloaded or the motor overload monitoring does not work properly!
• The "inverter motor brake" function must not be used with vertical conveyors (hoists)
or with active loads!
The way in which the different braking procedures work is demonstrated schematically in the
following illustration:
0 1 2
nSet nSet nSet
t t t
t t t
Use of the brake resistor (C00175 = "0: Brake resistor")
Stopping of the ramp function generator (C00175 = "1: HlgStop")
Inverter motor brake (C00175 = "3: FI_MotBrk + RfgStop)
[5-25] Graph of the effective speed setpoint and the DC bus voltage during braking
Tip!
Independent of the selected motor control, all procedures given in C00175 can be used. The
actual speed value always follows the speed setpoint in an optimal way when a brake
resistor is used.
If it is possible to dispense with exact adherence to the deceleration ramp in simple
applications, selection of a braking method without an external brake resistor enables
costs to be reduced due to the avoidance of having to use a brake resistor .
With the "inverter motor brake" function, an effective braking torque of 10 ... 20 % of the
rated motor torque can be achieved.
A combination of all three braking procedures is also possible, e.g. for emergency braking if
the brake resistor fails
(C00175 = "4: Brake resistor + FI_MotBrk + RfgStop").
230 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
With this braking method, which can be selected as an alternative in C00175, the regenerative
energy in the motor is converted as a result of dynamic acceleration/deceleration with down-
ramping of the ramp function generator..
Stop!
• This braking method only works without intervention of a position controller in the
case of speed-controlled applications!
• When the "inverter motor brake" function is used, the Motor overload monitoring
(I2xt) is not adapted. If it is braked too frequently, there is a risk of the motor being
thermally overloaded or the motor overload monitoring does not work properly!
• The "inverter motor brake" function must not be used with vertical conveyors (hoists)
or with active loads!
Tip!
If no brake resistor is used, the DC injection brake can also be used for a braking process in
addition to the "inverter motor brake" and "Stopping of the ramp function generator".
DC-injection braking ( 211)
In applications with high mass inertia and long braking times (> 2 s), we recommend the
use of the DC injection brake.
• The DC injection brake provides for an oscillation-minimised braking. The braking
process generally takes more time than the "inverter motor brake" function with an
optimised setting. Moreover, the function is only recommended for braking to a
standstill.
In the following cases we recommend the "inverter motor brake" function:
• For all applications that do not require braking to a standstill (e.g.braking to a lower
speed setpoint) or the braking process can be interrupted by selecting a new speed
setpoint.
• For applications with low mass inertias and a short braking time (< 1 s).
• For all applications where braking should be as quick as possible.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 231
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
nSpeedSetValue_a
QSP C00909/1
C00909/2
0
1
Inverter
motor brake
bLimSpeedSetVal
C00173 C00988
C00174
C00987
DC-bus voltage
Speed setpoint for motor control
• In case of an asynchronous motor, the additive speed setpoint (C00987) should be 1 … 4 times
the slip of the machine:
[5-27] Formula for calculating the additive speed setpoint for an asynchronous motor
• In case of a synchronous motor, the additive speed setpoint (C00987) should be 5 … 20 % of the
rated machine speed.
232 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
Note!
When the "inverter motor brake" function is used, torque oscillations occur which have
may have a negative effect on the service life of the components of the mechanical drive
train (e.g. gearbox).
• The extent of the occurring oscillations depends on the drive train (mass inertia,
natural frequencies, etc.) and the function setting.
• We recommend optimising the "inverter motor brake" function for an oscillation-free
operation as described in the following. Usually, this setting does not cause any
torque oscillations which affect the service life of the gearbox.
• The settings of implementing a maximum acceleration ramp are only recommended
if the inverter motor brake is used infrequently (e.g. in case of quick stop).
How to set the "inverter motor brake" function for an oscillation-reduced operation:
For V/f characteristic open-loop control/closed-loop control (VFCplus):
• Set reduced brake chopper threshold (C00174) to approx. 70 V.
• Set additive speed (C00987) to rated slip speed.
• Adapt the deceleration ramp so that the deceleration time is slightly below (10 ... 30 %)
the deceleration time that can be realised with the inverter motor brake.
For sensorless vector control (SLVC):
• Set reduced brake chopper threshold (C00174) to approx. 50 V.
• Set additive speed (C00987) to 1 ... 2-fold rated slip speed.
• Adapt the deceleration ramp so that the deceleration time is slightly below (10 ... 30 %)
the deceleration time that can be realised with the inverter motor brake.
How to set the "inverter motor brake" function for a maximum acceleration ramp:
For V/f characteristic open-loop control/closed-loop control (VFCplus):
• Set reduced brake chopper threshold (C00174) to approx. 70 V.
• Set additive speed (C00987) to 1,5 ... 2,5-fold rated slip speed.
• Adapt the deceleration ramp so that the deceleration time is slightly below (10 ... 30 %)
the deceleration time that can be realised with the inverter motor brake.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 233
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
If an additional control signal is used, all internal brake choppers can be used in the DC-bus system
to dissipate regenerative energy ("Master-slave operation").
Stop!
The integration of external brake choppers (e.g. brake chopper 9352) in the above-
described "Master-slave operation" is not permissible since the voltage levels for the
input and output of the external brake chopper are not suitable for the brake transistor
control or, more precisely, for the output of the state of the brake transistor.
If the internal brake choppers of the DC-bus system are not sufficient, they should be
replaced by an external brake chopper. It can be synchronised with other external brake
choppers, if need be, so that simultaneous switch-on of all external brake choppers is
ensured.
Note!
For trouble-free operation, the setting of the mains voltage in C00173 must be identical
for all controllers of the DC-bus system since this setting also influences the brake
chopper threshold for switching on the brake chopper.
234 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
Functional principle
One of the controllers of the DC-bus system is assigned the role of the "brake chopper master".
• For logical reasons, the "brake chopper master" should be the most powerful controller.
• The "brake chopper master" controls its internal brake chopper via the DC-bus voltage as before.
In addition, the "brake chopper master" transmits the bBrakeChopperActive status signal of its
internal brake chopper control to the other controllers of the DC-bus system via fieldbus or
digital output.
All other controllers of the DC-bus system are "brake chopper slaves".
• The "brake chopper slaves" have the bBrakeChopperActive status signal received from the "brake
chopper master" connected to the bBrakeChopperOn control input.
• If the internal brake transistor of the "brake chopper master" is switched on, the internal brake
transistors of the "brake chopper slaves" are switched on at the same time.
%UDNHFKRSSHUPDVWHU %UDNHFKRSSHUVODYH V
/6B0RWRU,QWHUIDFH /6B0RWRU,QWHUIDFH
E%UDNH&KRSSHU$FWLYH E%UDNH&KRSSHU2Q
& &
/6B0RWRU,QWHUIDFH
E%UDNH&KRSSHU2Q
&
[5-28] Functional principle of the "Brake chopper master-slave operation" (simplified representation)
Procedure
1. Assign the role of the "brake chopper master" to one of the controllers of the DC-bus system.
2. Adapt the function block interconnection for the "brake chopper master" so that the
bBrakeChopperActive status signal of the LS_MotorInterface SB is provided to the other
controllers for controlling the internal brake chopper.
• The bBrakeChopperActive signal can e.g. be output via port block to the fieldbus or via digital
output.
• A free output of the application block can be used to transfer the signal from application level
to I/O level.
3. Configure all other controllers of the DC-bus system as "brake chopper slaves". Select "1: Yes" in
C2866/3 for these controllers.
• With this setting, the brake chopper is not controlled via the DC-bus voltage anymore. Its
control now depends on the bBrakeChopperOn control signal.
4. Adapt the function block interconnection for the "brake chopper slaves" so that the
bBrakeChopperActive signal received from the "brake chopper master" is connected to the
bBrakeChopperOn input of the LS_MotorInterface SB.
• Depending on the output at the "brake chopper master", the signal must be read in e.g. via
port block or digital input.
• A free input of the application block can be used to transfer the signal from I/O level to
application level.
• If the digital inputs/outputs are used for transmitting the signal, they must be connected
electrically accordingly.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 235
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.11 Braking operation/brake energy management
________________________________________________________________
Note!
If the brake chopper master-slave operation is activated, plausibility monitoring is
carried out in the "brake chopper slaves":
• The brake transistor can only be switched on via the bBrakeChopperOn control signal
if the DC-bus voltage is greater than the brake chopper threshold minus 40 VDC.
• Exception: From a mains voltage of 513 VAC (or 725 VDC) and a mains voltage of 480
V or 500 V set in C00173, the plausibility monitoring is not effective anymore.
Note!
Only the brake transistor of the "brake chopper master" is switched on with this function
(max. 4 seconds, without interruption).
A complete discharge of the DC-bus cannot be achieved using this function!
From version 14.00.00, the limitation of the operating time can be deactivated to max. 4
seconds. For this purpose, set bit 1 to "1" in C02864/1.
• We recommend this setting when this function is used in order to achieve a higher
discharge of the DC bus - especially in case of high device power.
236 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
5.12 Monitoring
Many monitoring functions that are integrated into the controller can detect errors and thus protect
the device/motor from damage or overload.
• Detailed information on the individual monitoring functions can be found in the following
subchapters.
Parameterisable responses
If a monitoring function trips, the response set via the corresponding parameter is carried out. The
following responses can be selected:
• "No response": Response/monitoring is deactivated.
• "Fault": Change of the operating status by a pulse inhibit of the power output stage.
• "Warning": Operating status of the controller remains unchanged. Only a message is entered
into the Logbook of the controller.
Related topics:
Device state machine and device states ( 84)
Diagnostics & error management ( 420)
Basics on error handling in the controller ( 420)
Error messages of the operating system ( 444)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 237
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
C00064/1...3 displays the device utilisation (ixt) in [%] in different time intervals:
Parameter Info
C00064/1 Device utilisation (Ixt)
• Maximum value of pulse utilisation (C00064/2)
and permanent utilisation (C00064/3).
C00064/2 Device utilisation (Ixt) 15s
• Pulse utilisation over the last 15 seconds (only for loads >160 %).
C00064/3 Device utilisation (Ixt) 3 min
• Permanent utilisation over the last 3 minutes.
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
238 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
The Inverter Drives 8400 are provided with a simple, sensorless, thermal I2xt motor monitoring of
self-ventilated standard motors which is based on a mathematical model.
• C00066 displays the calculated motor load in [%].
• If the calculated motor load reaches the motor load setting (C00120):
• The error response set in C00606 will be carried out (Lenze setting: "Warning").
• The "oC6: I2xt motor overload" error message will be entered into the Logbook.
• The bMctrlI2xtOverload status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor system block will be set to
TRUE.
• A setting of C00606 = "0: No Reaction" deactivates the monitoring.
Stop!
I2xt motor monitoring does not provide full motor protection!
As the motor utilisation calculated in the thermal motor model is lost after mains
switching, for instance the following operating states cannot be detected correctly:
• Restarting (after mains switching) of a motor that is already very hot.
• Change of the cooling conditions (e.g. cooling air flow interrupted or too warm).
A full motor protection requires additional measures as e.g. the evaluation of
temperature sensors that are located directly in the winding or the use of thermal
contacts.
For the installation according to UL or UR, the safety instructions provided in the
hardware manual must be observed! Among other things, the activation of the motor
overload monitoring (I2xt) is required here.
Note!
From version 12.00.00, the thermal motor load displayed in C00066 can be pre-
initialised when the device is connected to the mains, optionally using a fixed value or
the value used last at the time when the device was switched off. The desired
initialisation is selected in C00122. In the Lenze setting of C00122, the behaviour
remains unchanged (no initialisation).
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 239
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
• If you reduce C00120 starting from the calculated value, the motor utilisation meter will already
be counted up before the rated overload threshold is reached.
• If you increase C00120 starting from the calculated value, the motor utilisation meter will not
be counted up until the rated overload threshold is reached.
240
180
120
60
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 C00054
Ir
f: Output frequency
t: Release time
IN: Rated device current at a switching frequency of f = 8 kHz
Ir : Rated motor current (see nameplate of motor)
C00054: Apparent motor current
C00120: Motor overload setting
240 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
• If forced ventilated motors are used, a premature response of the overload threshold can
be avoided by deactivating this function if necessary (C00606 = "0: No Reaction").
• The current limits set in C00022 and C00023 influence the I2xt calculation only in an
indirect way. However, the operation of the motor at maximum possible load can be
averted. Defining current and speed limits ( 123)
The ultimate motor current to be parameterised in C00939 is a limit value to protect the motor from
destruction, influence of the rated data and demagnetisation.
• This limit value must not be travelled cyclically in the drive process.
• If the instantaneous value of the motor current exceeds the limit value set in C00939, the error
response "Fault" occurs to protect the motor and the error message "oC7: Motor overcurrent" is
entered into the logbook.
• The maximum currents to be parameterised in C00022 and C00023 should have a sufficient
distance to this limit value.
Note!
If a Lenze motor is selected from the catalogue whose plant parameters are transferred
into the controller, the setting of the maximum current in C00022 and C00023 will
automatically be adapted to the selected motor.
Related topics:
Maximum current monitoring ( 248)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 241
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
For detecting and monitoring of the motor temperature, a PTC thermistor (DIN 44081/DIN 44082)
or a thermal contact (NC contact) can be connected to the terminals X106/T1 and X106/T2.
Stop!
• The controller can only evaluate one PTC thermistor!
Do not connect several PTC thermistors in series or parallel.
• If several motors are operated on one controller, use thermal contacts (NC contacts)
connected in series.
• To achieve full motor protection, an additional temperature monitoring with separate
evaluation must be installed.
Note!
• In the Lenze setting (C00585 = "1: Fault"), motor temperature monitoring is activated!
• There is a wire jumper between the terminals X106/T1 and X106/T2 by default.
• Lenze three-phase AC motors are provided with a thermal contact on delivery.
• If 1.6 kΩ < R < 4 kΩ at the terminals X106/T1 and X106/T2, the monitoring will respond, see
functional test below.
• If the monitoring responds:
• The error response set in C00585 is activated (Lenze setting: "Fault").
• The "oH3: Motor temperature (X106) triggered" error message is entered into the Logbook.
• The bMctrlMotorPtc status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor system block is set to TRUE.
• A setting of C00585 = "0: No Reaction" deactivates the monitoring.
Tip!
We recommend to always activate the PTC input when using motors which are equipped
with PTC thermistors or thermostats. This prevents the motor from being destroyed by
overheating.
Functional test
Connect a fixed resistor to the PTC input:
• R > 4 kΩ : Fault message must be activated.
• R < 1 kΩ : Fault message must not be activated.
242 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Due to the converted braking power, the brake resistor is thermally stressed and can even be
thermally destroyed by excessive braking power.
The monitoring of the I2xt utilisation of the controller serves to protect the brake resistor. It acts in
proportion to the converted braking power.
Danger!
In the Lenze setting (C00574 = "0: No Reaction"), the response of the monitoring function
does not stop the braking process!
In particular for applications such as hoists or applications with a DC-bus connection, it
must be checked if a stopping of the braking process due to a setting of C00574 = "1:
Fault" is permissible.
Stop!
Implement appropriate protective measures against thermal overload of the brake
resistor!
Examples:
• Parameterisation of an error response in C00574 and evaluation of the parameterised
error message within the application or the machine control system.
• Interruption of the mains supply by means of the temperature contact at the brake
resistor and a simultaneous activation of the mechanical brake.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 243
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Temperature model
Temperature model
J
I2xt
IBr
C00129
)
C00138
C00130
IOn = 1 C00131 C00572 C00574
IOff = 0
The monitoring function calculates the braking current IBr from the current DC-bus voltage UDC_act
and the brake resistance parameterised in C00129:
U DC_act
I Br = -------------------
-
C00129
Note!
The monitoring function can also be triggered due to a value entered in C00129
although a brake resistor is not even connected.
• The calculation considers the thermal utilisation of the brake resistor based on the following
parameters:
• Resistance value (C00129)
• Continuous power (C00130)
• Thermal capacity (C00131)
• In the Lenze setting these parameters are preset with the corresponding power-adapted Lenze
brake resistor.
• C00133 indicates the calculated utilisation of the brake resistor in [%].
• A utilisation of 100 % corresponds to the continuous power of the brake resistor depending
on the maximally permissible temperature limit.
Related topics:
Braking operation/brake energy management ( 226)
244 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Note!
In the Lenze setting (C00597 = "0: No Reaction"), the motor phase failure monitoring is
not activated!
In the case of a synchronous motor,
• the motor phase failure monitoring is basically deactivated. (Due to the low no-load
current, the monitoring would be permanently activated.)
• only the Motor phase error monitoring before operation is active (for Lenze setting
C2866/2 = "1: Yes").
In order to safely detect the failure of a motor phase, a certain motor current must flow for the
current sensor system. Thus, the response set in C00597 (Lenze setting: "No Reaction") is caused
after a delay time of maximally 2 s after controller enable if a current-carrying motor phase U, V, W
fails or if motor connection is missing. If the current threshold value set in C00599 is already
exceeded within the delay time, the motor phase failure monitoring starts from this point in time.
The monitoring mode checks the current flow for each motor phase as a function of the
commutation angle. Monitoring is activated if a commutation angle of approx. 140° is covered
without the current set in C00599 being exceeded. Monitoring is activated at an output frequency
of 0 Hz if none of the three motor phases reaches the threshold value set in C00599.
• If the motor phase failure detection is tripped:
• The response set in C00597 will take place.
• The error message "LP1: Motor phase failure" is entered into the logbook.
• The bMctrlMotorPhaseFault status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor system block is set to
TRUE.
Note!
If an error response of "1: Fault" is set in C00597, the bMctrlMotorPhaseFault status
output of the LS_DeviceMonitor SB will be set to TRUE for only 1 second in the event of
a motor phase failure because it is no longer possible to detect a motor phase fault via
the error response with a pulse inhibit. However, the Logbook and C00561/3...5 still
display the cause of the motor phase failure.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 245
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
This extended motor phase failure monitoring can both detect a phase failure on the basis of test
signals and check for the existence of the motor.
• The "motor phase error monitoring before operation" is only directly active after controller
enable if
• an error response is set in C00597 AND
• the motor phase error monitoring is switched on (C2866/2 = "1: Yes").
• The following parameters show the cause of the motor phase failure:
• C00561/3: Motor phase U
• C00561/4: Motor phase V
• C00561/5: Motor phase W
Note!
The motor phase error monitoring before operation must not be connected to a rotating
or coasting machine (high compensation currents and effect of the DC injection
braking).
• In case of motor control with feedback, no motor phase error monitoring is executed
if the actual speed value is > 10 rpm.
• In case of motor control without feedback, the user must ensure that the motor phase
error monitoring will only be executed if the speed is 0.
If the motor is at quick stop and the brake is applied, no motor phase error monitoring is
executed when quick stop is deactivated (same with "0" speed and applied brake).
If the rated current of the connected motor is lower than 10 % of the rated device
current, the motor phase error monitoring can be activated although no motor phase
error has occurred. In this case, the motor phase error monitoring must be switched off
before operation (C2866/2 = "0: No").
246 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Note!
With automatic brake control:
In case of automatic brake control, the brake will only be released if no motor phase
failure exists and the magnetisation of the field-oriented control types is completed.
With manual brake control:
In case of manual brake control and forced release of the brake, the brake will be
controlled directly as before.
The user himself must ensure that the brake will only be opened if all of the following
conditions are met:
• Motor phase failure monitoring (C00597) and motor phase error monitoring before
operation (C2866/2) are active.
• The controller is enabled (controller enable).
• The bMctrlMotorPhaseFault status output of the SB LS_DeviceMonitor is set to FALSE.
• Bit 10 of the MCTRL_Status3 status word must be set to 0 before the brake opening is
triggered.
• When the controller is enabled, this bit is set to 1 and will not be set to 0 again
before the "Motor phase error monitoring before operation" is successfully
completed.
• The MCTRL_Status3 status word can be integrated in the application via
configuration parameters (e.g. C00620) (MCTRL_Status3 = selection 34906 in
Selection list - analog signals).
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 247
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Stop!
Under load, the mains input of a three-phase controller can be destroyed if the device is
only supplied by two phases (e.g. if a mains phase fails).
The drive controller has a simple mains-phase failure detection function with which a mains phase
failure can be detected under load.
• In the case of power-adapted machines, approx. 50 % of the rated motor power must be
exceeded so that a main-phase failure can be detected.
• If the mains phase failure monitoring is tripped:
• The error response set in C00565 will be carried out (Lenze setting: "Warning").
• The "Su02: One mains phase is missing" error message will be entered into the logbook.
• The bMctrlMainsFault status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor system block will be set to
TRUE.
Note!
In the Lenze setting (C00609 = "0: No Reaction"), the maximum current monitoring is not
activated!
If a Lenze motor is selected from the catalogue whose plant parameters are transferred
into the controller, the setting of the maximum current in C00022 and C00023 will
automatically be adapted to the selected motor.
If the parameterised maximum current is reached, the response set in C00609 is triggered (Lenze
setting: "0: No Reaction").
If the activated monitoring is tripped:
• The "oC10: Maximum current reached" error message is entered in the logbook.
Related topics:
Motor overcurrent monitoring ( 241)
248 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Note!
In the Lenze setting (C00608 = "0: No Reaction"), the maximum torque monitoring is not
activated!
If the maximum possible torque C00057 is reached at the motor shaft, the response set in C00608
will be carried out (Lenze setting: "0: No Reaction").
If the activated monitoring is tripped:
• The "oT1: Maximum torque reached" error message is entered into the logbook.
• The bMctrlTorqueMax status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor system block will be set to TRUE.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 249
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.12 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Note!
In the Lenze setting (C00586 = "1: Fault"), open-circuit monitoring of the encoder is
activated!
Related topics:
Encoder/feedback system ( 220)
250 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.13 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotorInterface"
________________________________________________________________
The LS_MotorInterface system block provides the internal interfaces to the driving machine in the
function block editor.
/6B0RWRU,QWHUIDFH
Q3RV&WUO2XW/LPLWBD E/LP3RV&WUO2XW
Q3RV&WUO3$GDSWBD Q2XWSXW3RV&WUOBD
Q6SHHG+LJK/LPLWBD GQ0RWRU3RV$FWBS
Q6SHHG/RZ/LPLWBD GQ0RWRU'HOWD3RV$FWBS
E6SHHG&WUO3$GDSW2Q E/LP6SHHG&WUO2XW
Q6SHHG&WUO3$GDSWBD 0&75/ E/LP6SHHG6HW9DO
E6SHHG,QWHUSRODWRU2Q Z0D[0RWRU6SHHG
Q7RUTXH0RW/LPLWBD Q2XWSXW6SHHG&WUOBD
Q7RUTXH*HQ/LPLWBD Q6SHHG&WUO,$FWBD
Inputs
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 251
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.13 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotorInterface"
________________________________________________________________
MN
-nN nN n
-MN
TorqueMotLim
TorqueGenLim
Q9ROWDJH$GGBD
Q
• CW rotation in motor mode: Increase voltage
• CCW rotation in generator mode: Reduce voltage
Stop!
Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting
current!
bAutoBoostOn Reserved
C00833/32 | BOOL
(from version 04.00.00)
252 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.13 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotorInterface"
________________________________________________________________
Stop!
Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting
current!
bPosCtrlOn Inputs of 8400 StateLine have no function!
bDeltaPosOn
dnDeltaPos_p
dnPosSetValue_p
bPosDerivativeOn
bMotorRefOffsetOn
dnMotorRefOffset_p
bQspOn Quick stop
C00833/33 | BOOL
FALSE Deactivate quick stop
TRUE Activate quick stop
nPWMAngleOffset_a Angle step change of output voltage phasor
C00830/32 | INT • Scaling: 65535 ≡ 1 revolution
bSpeedCtrlIOn Directly set the I-component of speed controller
C00833/31 | BOOL • In order to statically specify a minimum torque, e.g. when a load is being lifted.
TRUE Se the I-component of the speed controller to the value
nSpeedCtrlI_a.
nSpeedCtrlI_a Value of the speed controller integrator
C00830/24 | INT • Scaling depends on the selected motor control:
• V/f control (VFCplus + encoder):
16384 ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011)
• Vector control (SLVC):
16384 ≡ 100 % Mmax (C00057)
nSpeedSetValue_a Speed setpoint
C00830/22 | INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011)
bTorquemodeOn Selection: Speed/Torque control
C00833/30 | BOOL
FALSE Speed control with torque limitation
TRUE Torque control with speed limitation
nTorqueSetValue_a Torque setpoint / additive torque
C00830/27 | INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % Mmax (C00057)
bDcBrakeOn Activate DC injection brake
C00833/34 | BOOL
FALSE Deactivate DC-injection braking
TRUE Activate DC-injection braking
bTorqueLimitAdaptOn Adaptation of torque limitation
C00833/98 | BOOL
TRUE Activate adaptation of torque limitation.
nTorqueLimitAdapt_a Value for adaptation of torque limitation
C00830/70 | INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % nTorqueMotLimit_a and nTorqueGenLimit_a
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 253
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.13 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotorInterface"
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
254 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.13 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotorInterface"
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 255
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.13 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotorInterface"
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
bHlgLoad Control signal for an additional loading function of the ramp function generator
BOOL • L_NSet_1.bExternalCINH
• To enable the ramp function generator to follow automatically when the
controller is inhibited, for jerk-free setpoint connection.
TRUE Set the ramp function generator to a setpoint of nHlgSetValue_a
nHlgSetValue_a Setpoint for an additional loading function of the ramp function generator
INT • L_NSet_1.nCInhVal_a
• For speed-controlled drive tasks, the current actual speed value (e.g. in case of an
active pulse inhibit, flying restart function, controller inhibit) is provided at this
output.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011)
bHlgStop Control signal for stopping the ramp function generator (L_NSet_1)
BOOL
TRUE Stop the ramp function generator
bBrakeChopperActive Status signal of the internal brake chopper control
BOOL Control of multiple internal brake choppers in the DC-bus system ( 234)
(from version 12.00.00)
TRUE Internal brake chopper is switched-on.
nVoltageAngleAct_a Current electrical voltage output angle of the controller
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 360°
(from version 13.00.00)
256 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.14 Internal status signals | System block "LS_DeviceMonitor"
________________________________________________________________
The LS_DeviceMonitor system block provides the status signals of the motor control in the function
block editor.
Note!
The LS_DeviceMonitor system block can only be inserted on the application level.
If status signals of the motor control function are to be output via digital outputs or
example, you can use the free bFreeOut1 ... bFreeOut8 outputs of the application block
to transfer the desired status signals from the application level to the I/O level. On the
I/O level, you can then establish the logical link to the digital output terminals.
/6B'HYLFH0RQLWRU
E0FWUO,PS$FWLYH
E0FWUO&ODPS$FWLYH
E0FWUO0RWRU3KDVH)DXOW
E0FWUO(QFRGHU&RP)DXOW
'HYLFH E0FWUO1PD[
E0FWUO7RUTXH0D[
PRQLWRU E0FWUO)&KRS5HGXFHG
E0FWUO,[W2YHUORDG
Q0FWUO,[W5DWHBD
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 257
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.14 Internal status signals | System block "LS_DeviceMonitor"
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
bMctrlNmaxForFChop TRUE The maximum field frequency for the respective switching
BOOL frequency has been exceeded.
bMctrlShortCircuit TRUE Motor short circuit has been detected
BOOL
258 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
5 Motor control (MCTRL)
5.14 Internal status signals | System block "LS_DeviceMonitor"
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
bWirebreakUfLinearActive Status "V/f emergency operation due to encoder open circuit active"
BOOL • The internal change-over to "V/f emergency operation" can be suppressed by
(from version 15.00.00)
setting bit 8 to "1" in C02864/1.
TRUE Due to an encoder open circuit, it is internally switched to the
encoderless V/f characteristic control in order to avoid impermissible
motor movements. This does not influence the setting in C00006.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 259
6 I/O terminals
________________________________________________________________
6 I/O terminals
This chapter provides information on the function, possible parameter settings, and technical data
of the input/output terminals of the controller.
In the »Engineer«, the input and output terminals are parameterised on the Terminal assignment
tab. To do this, go to the Control terminals list field and select the terminals that you wish to
parameterise:
Note!
The input and output terminals of the drive controller have already been functionally
assigned in the default setting ("Lenze setting"). The preconfigured assignment depends
on the technology application selected in C00005 and the control mode selected in
C00007:
• TA "Actuating drive speed": Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 309)
• TA "Switch-off positioning": Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 369)
Wiring diagram, assignment and electrical data of the input and output terminals can be
found in the hardware manual 8400 in the chapter "technical data". The hardware
manual is stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied with the 8400 controller.
Tip!
How you can alter the preconfigured assignment of the input and output terminals is
described in the chapter entitled "User-defined terminal assignment". ( 289)
260 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
The digital input terminals together with the digital output terminals are located on the X4 plug
connector.
Note!
Initialisation behaviour:
• After mains switching up to the start of the application, the digital output remains set
to FALSE.
Exception handling:
• In case of a critical exception in the application (e.g. reset), the digital output is set to
FALSE considering the terminal polarity parameterised in C00118.
Switching cycle diagnostics of the relay:
• A reference for evaluating the wear limit can be obtained via the number of switching
cycles of the relay displayed in C00177/2.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 261
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Button Function
Indicates the polarity of the input is HIGH active.
The polarity can be changed from HIGH active to LOW active by clicking this button.
Open the parameterising dialog for assigning application inputs to the digital input.
Changing the terminal assignment with the »Engineer« ( 293)
262 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Related topics:
Configuring exception handling of the output terminals ( 288)
User-defined terminal assignment ( 289)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 263
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
The internal processing function of the digital input terminals DI1 and DI2 can be reconfigured in
C00115 if necessary. In this way, these input terminals can alternatively be used as frequency or
counting inputs in order to implement the following functions:
• Detection of the input frequency
• Detection and processing of two unipolar input frequencies to one bipolar frequency
• Counting of input pulses
• Evaluation of the speed feedback (HTL encoder) for the motor control (speed-controlled
operation)
Note!
• In the Lenze setting of C00115, the digital input terminals DI1 and DI2 have been
configured as "normal" digital inputs.
• The digital input terminals DI3 ... DI4 are basically designed as "normal" digital inputs.
• Very high pulse frequencies can be measured at the DI1 and DI2 input terminals if the
latter have been configured as frequency or counting inputs in C00115. Scanning is
then carried out within less than μs instead of the otherwise usual scanning rate of
1 kHz (1 ms).
You can find detailed information on the respective function assignment in the following
subchapters:
Using DI1 and DI2 as digital inputs ( 265)
Using DI1 and DI2 as frequency inputs ( 266)
Using DI1 as counting input ( 270)
264 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Output Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
Related topics:
Using DI1 and DI2 as frequency inputs ( 266)
Using DI1 as counting input ( 270)
Internal interfaces | System block "LS_DigitalInput" ( 273)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 265
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Note!
• Make sure that, when motor control with speed feedback is in use, the maximum
input frequency of the respective input terminal is not exceeded.
• DI1/DI2: fmax = 10 kHz
• If the encoder signal is used as an actual speed value:
Number of encoder pulses / revolution ≤ 8192!
1500 rpm
Input frequency = ------------------------- × 512 pulses = 12800 pulses/s = 12.8 kHz
60 s
Tip!
From version 06.00.00 onwards, the LS_DigitalInput system block can also provide the
encoder position. Detailed information on this topic is provided in chapter "Output of the
encoder position of the DI1/DI2 frequency input". ( 275)
266 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
&
Q)UHT,QBY
&
GQ3RV,QB6HWBS E3RV,QB6WDWH
& )XQFWLRQ
& &RPSDUHYDOXH
&
Q)UHT,QBY
0&75/B6SHHGIHHGEDFN &
GQ3RV,QB6HWBS E3RV,QB6WDWH
& )XQFWLRQ
& &RPSDUHYDOXH
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 267
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Q)UHT,QBY
&
GQ3RV,QB6HWBS E3RV,QB6WDWH
& )XQFWLRQ
& &RPSDUHYDOXH
268 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Output Value/meaning
Data type
Related topics:
Output of the encoder position of the DI1/DI2 frequency input ( 275)
Using DI1 and DI2 as digital inputs ( 265)
Using DI1 as counting input ( 270)
Internal interfaces | System block "LS_DigitalInput" ( 273)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 269
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Note!
• The starting value must be have been set so that it is smaller than the comparison
value. Otherwise, the counter will be kept at the starting value because the condition
"Count value ≥ Comparison value" has been satisfied.
• Note the maximum input frequency of the input terminal:
• DI1: fmax = 10 kHz
&%LW
', &2817 & &
N+]
E&RXQW,QB&RPSDUH
E&RXQW,QB5HVHW&RPSDUH Z&RXQW,QB+:
E&RXQW,QB/RDG6WDUW9DOXH & Z&RXQW,QB/:
270 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 271
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Counting behaviour
The following temporal characteristic shows the counting process depending on the signals of the
interfaces described before:
6DPSOLQJF\FOH &RPSDUHYDOXH
&
&RXQWSXOVH
W
&RXQWHUYDOXH
&
E&RXQW,QB&RPSDUH
W
E&RXQW,QB5HVHW&RPSDUH
W
E&RXQW,QB/RDG6WDUW9DOXH
W
6WDUWYDOXH
&
Related topics:
Using DI1 and DI2 as digital inputs ( 265)
Using DI1 and DI2 as frequency inputs ( 266)
Internal interfaces | System block "LS_DigitalInput" ( 273)
272 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
The system block LS_DigitalInput maps the digital input terminals in the FB editor.
• The internal processing function of the digital DI1/2 input terminals can be reconfigured inn
C00115 if necessary. These input terminals can then be alternatively used as frequency inputs
or counting inputs.
• The DI3 ... DI4 input terminals are basically designed as "normal" digital inputs.
*,2 '2 ', ', ', ', 5)5 , (
/6B'LJLWDO,QSXW
&%LW E&,QK
&
&%LW &[ &
&%LW E,Q
&%LW
&%LW E,Q
N+]
&%LW E,Q
&%LW &2817 W
N+]
&%LW E,Q
&%LW
&
; N+]
& &
N+] E&RXQW,QB&RPSDUH
E&RXQW,QB5HVHW&RPSDUH Z&RXQW,QB+:
E&RXQW,QB/RDG6WDUW9DOXH & Z&RXQW,QB/:
2IIVHW *DLQ
Q)UHT,QBD
&
& &
&
&
Q)UHT,QBY
&
E3RV,QB/RDG GQ3RV,QBS
GQ3RV,QB6HWBS &
E3RV,QB6WDWH
)XQFWLRQ &
&RPSDUHYDOXH &
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 273
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
Digital inputs DI1 ... DI4 Using DI1 and DI2 as digital inputs
bIn1 ... bIn4 Digital input DI1 ... DI4
C00443/2 | BOOL
274 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
The LS_DigitalInput system block has been extended by the integrator function for providing the
encoder position.
• The integrator can take max. ±32000 encoder revolutions.
• The starting position can be loaded via inputs.
• The internal function can be set via parameters.
• In addition to the encoder position, the "Overflow occurred/distance processed" status signal is
provided.
&
&%LW
', N+] & Q)UHT,QBY
&%LW
', N+]
GQ3RV,QB6HWBS E3RV,QB6WDWH
& )XQFWLRQ
& &RPSDUHYDOXH
Inputs
bPosIn12_Load Load angle integrator with starting value and reset status signal
BOOL
TRUE Angle integrator is loaded with the value at dnPosIn12_Set_p and
bPosIn12_State is reset to FALSE.
dnPosIn12_Set_p Starting value for angle integrator
DINT
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
DIS code | data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 275
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
Parameter
dnPosIn12_p
0
t
bPosIn12_State
TRUE
FALSE
t
• If "0: Loading with level" is selected in C02844/1, the bPosIn12_Load input is status-controlled:
In case of a TRUE signal, the integrator is loaded with the value at dnPosIn12_Set_p and the
bPosIn12_State output is set to FALSE.
• If "1: Loading with edge" is selected in C02844/1, the bPosIn12_Load input is edge-controlled: In
case of a FALSE/TRUE edge, the integrator is loaded with the value at dnPosIn12_Set_p and then
immediately continues to integrate, the bPosIn12_State output is set to FALSE.
• A positive nFreqIn12_v signal is incremented (the counter content is increased with every cycle).
• A negative nFreqIn12_v signal is decremented (the counter content is reduced with every cycle).
276 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
dnPosIn12_p
0
0
t
bPosIn12_State
TRUE
FALSE
t
• If "2: Loading with level + reset" is selected in C02844/1, the bPosIn12_Load input is status-
controlled: In case of a TRUE signal, the integrator is loaded with the value at dnPosIn12_Set_p
and the bPosIn12_State output is set to FALSE.
• A positive nFreqIn12_v signal is incremented (the counter content is increased with every cycle).
• A negative nFreqIn12_v signal is decremented (the counter content is reduced with every cycle).
• dnPosIn12_p provides the counter content of the bipolar integrator.
• If the positive counter content is higher than the comparison value set in C02845, the
comparison value will be subtracted from the counter content, and bPosIn12_State will be set
to TRUE for one task cycle.
• If the negative counter content is lower than the comparison value set in C02845, the
comparison value will be added to the counter content, and bPosIn12_State will be set to
TRUE for one task cycle.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 277
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
t = integration time
16384 ≡ 15000 rpm
1 ≡ 1 incr.
Example
You want to determine the counter content of the integrator at a certain speed at the input and a
certain integration time t.
Given values:
• nFreqIn12_v = 1000 rpm ≈ integer value 1092
• Integration time t = 10 s
• Starting value of the integrator = 0
Solution:
• Conversion of the nFreqIn12_v input signal:
278 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.1 Digital terminals
________________________________________________________________
The LS_DigitalOutput system block maps the digital output terminals in the FB editor.
/6B'LJLWDO2XWSXW
E5HOD\ &%LW &%LW &%LW
,Q
;
2XW
&20
& &
1&
&
12
6ZLWFKLQJF\FOHV
&%LW ;
E2XW &%LW ,Q
2XW &%LW
*,2 '2
& &
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 279
6 I/O terminals
6.2 Analog terminals
________________________________________________________________
The analog input terminals together with the analog output terminals are located on the X3 plug
connector.
Note!
To avoid undefined states, free input terminals of the controller must be assigned as
well, e.g. by applying 0 V to the terminal.
Note!
Initialisation behaviour:
• After mains switching up to the start of the application, the analog output remains
set to 0 V.
Exception handling:
• In case of a critical exception in the application (e.g. reset), the analog output is set to
0 V.
280 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.2 Analog terminals
________________________________________________________________
Button Function
Parameterising analog input ( 282)
Open the parameterising dialog for assigning application inputs to the analog input.
Changing the terminal assignment with the »Engineer« ( 293)
Analog input 1
C00028/1 AIN1: Input voltage - V
C00029/1 AIN1: Input current - mA
C00033/1 AIN1: Output value (to application) - %
Analog output 1
C00439/1 O1U: Input value (from application) - %
C00436/1 O1U: Voltage - V
Analog output 1 - terminal assignment
C00620/1 LS_AnalogOutput: nOut1_a (V) 1003: LA_nCtrl_nMotorSpeedAct_a
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
Related topics:
Configuring exception handling of the output terminals ( 288)
User-defined terminal assignment ( 289)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 281
6 I/O terminals
6.2 Analog terminals
________________________________________________________________
By clicking on the button on the Terminal assignment tab, you reach the parameterising
dialog for the analog input:
Analog input 1
C00034/1 AIN1: Config. 0: -10V..+10V
C00026/1 AIN1: Offset 0.00 %
C00027/1 AIN1: Gain 1.0000
C00028/1 AIN1: Input voltage - V
C00029/1 AIN1: Input current - mA
C00033/1 AIN1: Output value (to application) - %
C00440/1 PT1 rounding AnalogIn1 10 ms
C00598/1 Resp. to open circuit AIN1 3: TroubleQuickStop
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
282 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.2 Analog terminals
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
By selecting "2: 4...20mA", you can implement a 4 ...20 mA current loop, e.g. for stipulation
of the speed setpoint.
Open-circuit monitoring
In the case of configuration as a 4 ... 20 mA current loop, the fault response set in C00598 takes place
in the event of a wire breakage (Lenze setting: "TroubleQuickStop").
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 283
6 I/O terminals
6.2 Analog terminals
________________________________________________________________
According to the illustration below, an individual characteristic can be parameterised for the analog
input via the subcodes of C00010 to provide different slopes and a dead band. Here, the input signal
corresponds to the X axis and the output signal corresponds to the Y axis:
199.99 %
ymax
ymin
-xmax
-199.99 %
199.99 %
xmax
-ymin
-ymax
-199.99 %
284 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.2 Analog terminals
________________________________________________________________
2. Click on the button for the analog input in order to open the Analog input dialog.
3. Click on the Settings button in order to open the Analog input - Characteristic dialog box:
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 285
6 I/O terminals
6.2 Analog terminals
________________________________________________________________
By clicking on the button on the Terminal assignment tab, you reach the parameterising
dialog for the analog output:
Analog output 1
C00434/1 O1U: Gain 100.00 %
C00435/1 O1U: Offset 0.00 %
C00439/1 O1U: Input value (from application) - %
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
286 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.2 Analog terminals
________________________________________________________________
The LS_AnalogInput system block displays the analog input in the FB Editor.
/6B$QDORJ,QSXW
; )LOWHUWLPH 2IIVHW *DLQ
28 *$ $, $8 $5 & & & & &[
& $
& Q,QBD
&
'
E&XUUHQW(UURU,Q
& (UURUUHDFWLRQ
Output Value/meaning
Data type
The LS_AnalogInput system block maps the analog output in the FB editor.
;
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 287
6 I/O terminals
6.3 Configuring exception handling of the output terminals
________________________________________________________________
Exception handling for the analog and digital output terminals in the event of an error can be set
via decoupling configuration and decoupling values.
• Bit coded selection is carried out in C00441 for the analog output terminal, defining the events
that will trigger decoupling.
• Bit coded selection is carried out in C00447 for the digitale output terminal, defining the events
that will trigger decoupling.
Bit Event
Bit 0 SafeTorqueOff
Bit 1 ReadyToSwitchOn
Bit 2 SwitchedOn
Bit 3 Reserved
Bit 4 Trouble
Bit 5 Fault
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Fail CAN_Management
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Reserved
Finally, the following parameters define the value/status that the output terminals are to have
when they are decoupled:
Related topics:
Configuring exception handling of the CAN PDOs ( 522)
288 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.4 User-defined terminal assignment
________________________________________________________________
In order to individually adapt the preconfigured assignment of the input/output terminals to your
application, you can choose one of the following procedures:
A. In the »Engineer«:
• Change the terminal assignment on the Terminal assignment tab.
• Change the signal assignment on the Application Parameters tab, on the dialog level
Overview Signal flow.
• Change the interconnections in the FB editor (on the I/O level).
B. In the »Engineer« or with the keypad:
• Change the parameters for signal configuration in the parameters list.
Note!
If you change the preconfigured assignment of the input/output terminals, the terminal
assignment will be a user-defined one. In C00007, control mode "0: Interconnection
changed" will be shown.
Tip!
First of all, select a Lenze configuration useful for the purpose at hand by going to C00005
and selecting a technology application that matches your drive task and then going to
C00007 and selecting an appropriate control mode. You will then have an application for
which there is a signal flow, logical block links and terminal assignment.
We recommend using the »Engineer« for the implementation of comprehensive user-
defined drive solutions.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 289
6 I/O terminals
6.4 User-defined terminal assignment
________________________________________________________________
The I/O configuration of the input and output signals is carried out according to the
source/destination principle:
• A connection always has a direction and therefore always has a source and a target.
• The inputs signals of the technology application are logically linked to the outputs of system
blocks which represent the device input terminals.
• The inputs of system blocks that represent the device output terminals are logically linked to
output signals of the technology application.
The following graphic illustrates the source/destination principle:
& &
& &
,QSXWSRUWV 2XWSXWSRUWV
$SSOLNDWLRQ
$SSOLFDWLRQ
$QWULHEVVFKQLWWVWHOOH
2XWSXWV
'LJLWDOLQSXWV 'LJLWDORXWSXWV
,QSXWV
,QSXWV
$QDORJLQSXWV $QDORJRXWSXWV
290 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.4 User-defined terminal assignment
________________________________________________________________
You can reconfigure the preconfigured terminal assignment with the keypad (and with the
»Engineer«) by means of so-called configuration parameters.
• Each configuration parameter represents a signal input of a system block or application block.
• Each configuration parameter contains a selection list with output signals of the same type of
data.
• Logical linking is thus carried out by selecting the output signal for the corresponding signal
input.
In the following example, digital output 1 (LS_DigitalOutput.bOut1 input) is logically linked to the
status signal "Drive ready" (LA_nCtrl_bDriveReady output signal):
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 291
6 I/O terminals
6.4 User-defined terminal assignment
________________________________________________________________
Parameter Info
TA "Actuating drive speed": Configuration parameters ( 322)
C00700/1...20 Analog connection list
C00701/1...48 Digital connection list
TA "Switch-off positioning": Configuration parameters ( 382)
C00760/1...16 Analog connection list
C00761/1...47 Digital connection list
Example
Task: Starting from the preset technology application "Actuating drive speed" and the "Terminals 0"
control mode, the DI2 digital input is to be used for choosing an alternative
acceleration/deceleration time for the main setpoint instead of for choosing the fixed setpoint 2/3.
To do this, the DI2 digital input is not to be linked to the bJogSpeed2 input but to the bJogRamp1
input of the application module.
Procedure:
1. Use the keypad to go to the menu level Applications Actuating drive speed (conf.). This menu
level contains all the configuration parameters of the "Actuating drive speed" technology
application". Configuration parameters ( 322)
2. Navigate to the configuration parameter LA_NCtrl: bJogSpeed2 (C00701/10) which represents
the logical signal link of the application input bJogSpeed2.
3. Change the setting of C00701/10:
Change selection "16001: DigIn_bIn2" in selection "0: Not interconnected".
4. Navigate to the configuration parameter LA_NCtrl: bJogRamp1 (C00701/13) which represents
the logical signal link of the application input bJogRamp1.
5. Change the setting of C00701/13:
Change selection "0: Not interconnected" in selection "16001: DigIn_bIn2".
Tip!
The example shows that, for each input of the application block, the associated
configuration parameter (C00700/x or C00701/x) is only allowed to contain one source
that you enter.
292 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.4 User-defined terminal assignment
________________________________________________________________
Whereas the configuration parameters referred to have to be parameterised with the keypad,
implementation in the »Engineer« is much easier due to the availability of the corresponding
dialogs. The following task illustrates the respective procedure.
Task: Starting from the preset technology application "Actuating drive speed" and the "Terminals 0"
control mode, the DI2 digital input is to be used for choosing an alternative
acceleration/deceleration time for the main setpoint instead of for choosing the fixed setpoint 2/3.
To do this, the DI2 digital input is not to be linked to the bJogSpeed2 input but to the bJogRamp1
input of the application module.
2. Click on the button for the DI2 terminal in order to open the dialog box Assignment
Terminal --> Function block.
• In the list field, all block inputs that are currently logically linked to digital input DI2 are
marked with a checkmark:
3. Remove checkmark for the connection LA_NCtrl: bJogSpeed2 in order to cancel the existing
logical link.
4. Set checkmark for connection LA_NCtrl: bJogRamp1 in order to logically link this application
input to digital input DI2.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 293
6 I/O terminals
6.4 User-defined terminal assignment
________________________________________________________________
4. In the bJogSpeed2 list field, set the selection "0: Not interconnected".
5. In the bJogRamp1 list field, set the selection "16001: DigIn_bIn2".
6. Click on the Back button in order to close the dialog box again.
294 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
6 I/O terminals
6.4 User-defined terminal assignment
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
You can find detailed information on how to use the FB editor of the »Engineer« in the main
chapter entitled "Working with the FB Editor". ( 857)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 295
7 Technology applications
________________________________________________________________
7 Technology applications
This chapter describes the handling and the functional range of the technology applications
available for the 8400 StateLine controller.
Note!
Please note that the "StateLine", "HighLine" and "TopLine" device types differ with regard
to the number, functional range, and flexibility of the technology applications offered.
Related topics:
Integrated technology applications ( 22)
Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application ( 51)
Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application ( 59)
296 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.1 Selection of the technology application and the control mode
________________________________________________________________
Different control modes can be selected for every application in C00007. By selecting the control
mode you set the way by which the technology application should be controlled, e.g. via terminals
or via a fieldbus. The interconnection of the input/output terminals and ports shown in the FB editor
in the I/O level changes accordingly.
• You can select the control mode in the »Engineer« on the Application parameter tab via the
Control mode list field:
Tip!
You can infer the pre-configured assignment of the input/output terminals and ports for
each control mode from the description of the corresponding technology application:
TA "Actuating drive speed": Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 309)
TA "Switch-off positioning": Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 369)
Detailed information on the individual configuration of the input/output terminals can be
found in the description of the I/O terminals in the subchapter "User-defined terminal
assignment". ( 289)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 297
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
Features
• Pre-configured control modes for terminals and bus control (with predefined process data
connection to the fieldbus)
• Free configuration of input and output signals
• Offset, gain, and negation of main setpoint, additional setpoint, actual process controller value
• Up to 15 fixed setpoints for speed and ramp time
• Adjustable setpoint ramp times
• Freely selectable, variable ramp shape
• Automatic holding brake control
• Quick stop (QSP) with adjustable ramp time
• Motor potentiometer function
• Process controller
• Load monitoring (in preparation)
• Integrated, freely available "GeneralPurpose" functions:
Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary delay element, binary logic, analog
comparison, D-flipflop
• Interface to the safety module (optional)
• Integration of encoder feedback
Related topics:
Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application ( 51)
298 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 299
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
In the case of a grinding machine, the additional speed setpoint can, for instance, be used
to control a constant circumferential speed while the grinding disk diameter is reduced.
300 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The connectors grayed out in the following table are hidden in the function block editor
in the Lenze setting.
• These connections can be shown via the Connector visibilities command in the
Context menu of the application block.
Inputs
wCANDriveControl Control word via system bus (CAN) for device control
WORD • See the device control chapter, subchapter "wCANControl/wMCIControl control
words" for a detailed description of the individual control bits.
wMCIDriveControl Control word via communication module (e.g. PROFIBUS) for device control
WORD • See the device control chapter, subchapter "wCANControl/wMCIControl control
words" for a detailed description of the individual control bits.
wSMControl Interface to the optional safety system.
WORD • Setting control bit 0 ("SafeStop1") in this control word causes e.g. the automatic
deceleration of the drive to standstill within this application (in the Motion
Control Kernel).
• For a detailed description of each control bit see the subchapter "Interface to
safety system" in the basic drive functions chapter.
bCInh Enable/Inhibit controller
BOOL
FALSE Enable controller: The controller switches to the "OperationEnabled"
device state, if no other source of a controller inhibit is active.
• C00158 provides a bit coded representation of all active
sources/triggers of a controller inhibit.
TRUE Inhibit controller (controller inhibit): The controller switches to the
"SwitchedOn" device state.
bFailReset Reset error message
BOOL In the Lenze setting this input is connected to the digital input controller enable so
that a possibly existing error message is reset together with the controller enable (if
the cause for the fault is eliminated).
TRUE The current fault is reset, if the cause for the fault is eliminated.
• If the fault still exists, the error status remains unchanged.
bSetQuickstop Enable quick stop (QSP)
BOOL • Also see device command "Activate/deactivate quick stop".
TRUE Activate quick stop
• Motor control is decoupled from the setpoint selection and,
within the deceleration time parameterised in C00105, the motor
is brought to a standstill (nact = 0).
• The motor is kept at a standstill during closed-loop operation.
• A pulse inhibit is set if the auto-DCB function has been activated
via C00019.
FALSE Deactivate quick stop
• The quick stop is deactivated if no other source for the quick stop
is active.
• C00159 displays a bit code of active sources/causes for the quick
stop.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 301
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Holding braking is not possible when this braking mode is used!
Use the basic "Holding brake control" function for controlling the holding brake with
a low rate of wear.
FALSE Deactivate DC-injection braking.
TRUE Activate DC-injection braking, i.e. the drive is brought to a standstill
by means of DC-injection braking.
• The braking effect stops when the rotor is at standstill.
• After the hold time (C00107) has expired, the controller sets the
pulse inhibit.
bRFG_Stop Ramp function generator: Maintain the current value of the main setpoint
BOOL integrator
• The speed, for instance, of a running ramp process is immediately kept constant
when bRFG_Stop is activated. At the same time, the acceleration/deceleration
jumps to the value "0".
• For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB.
TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is held.
bRFG_0 Ramp function generator: Lead the main setpoint integrator to "0" within the
BOOL current Ti times
• For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB.
TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is led to "0" within
the Ti time set.
nVoltageAdd_a Additive voltage impression
INT • An additional setpoint for the motor voltage can be specified via this process
input.
• If there are, for instance, different loads at the motor output end, it is possible to
apply a voltage boost at the starting time.
• If the value is negative, the voltage is reduced.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V
Stop!
Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting
current!
nBoost_a Additional setpoint for the motor voltage at speed = 0
INT • The entire voltage-frequency characteristic is provided with an offset.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V
Stop!
Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting
current!
nPWMAngleOffset Additional offset for the electrical angle of rotation
INT • If a torque is connected, e.g. dynamic acceleration processes can be generated.
• Scaling: ±32767 ≡ ±180 ° angle of rotation
302 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
MN
-nN nN n
-MN
TorqueMotLim
TorqueGenLim
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 303
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
304 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
Process controller
• In the Lenze setting, the process controller is deactivated.
• The activation is executed by selecting the operating mode in C00242.
• For a detailed functional description see FB L_PCTRL.
bPIDEnableInfluenceRamp Activate ramp for influencing factor
BOOL
FALSE Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped down to "0".
TRUE Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped up to the value
nPIDInfluence_a.
bPIDIOff Switch off the I-component of the process controller
BOOL • In conjunction with the operating mode set in C00242
(Lenze setting: "Off").
TRUE I-component of the process controller is switched off.
nPIDVpAdapt_a Adaptation of gain Vp set in C00222 in percent
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Internal limitation to ± 199.99 %
• Changes can be done online.
nPIDSetValue_a Sensor and process setpoint for operating modes 2, 4 and 5
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Internal limitation to ± 199.99 %
nPIDActValue_a Speed or actual sensor value (actual process value)
INT • Offset and gain for this input signal can be set in C00698 and C00672.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Internal limitation to ± 199.99 %
nPIDInfluence_a Limitation of the influencing factor in percent
INT • The influence factor of the PID controller can be limited to a certain value (-
199.99% ... + 199.99%) via nPIDInfluence_a.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Internal limitation to ± 199.99 %
MCK basic functions
bMBrakeRelease Holding brake control: Release/apply brake
BOOL • In conjunction with the operating mode selected in C02580
(Lenze setting: "Brake control off").
FALSE Apply brake.
• During automatic operation, the internal brake logic controls the
brake.
TRUE Release brake manually (forced release).
• Note!
The brake can also be released if the controller is inhibited!
• During automatic operation, the internal brake logic is
deactivated and the brake is released (supervisor operation). If a
controller inhibit has been set by the brake control, it will be
deactivated.
• In semi-automatic operation, the brake is released including
feedforward control.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 305
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
GP: GeneralPurpose
The following inputs are interconnected with logic/arithmetic functions on application level for free usage.
"GeneralPurpose" functions
bGPFree1 ... bGPFree2 Free inputs for digital signals
BOOL • Digital signals can be transferred from the I/O level to the application level via
(from version 11.00.00)
these inputs.
nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a Analog switch: Input signals
nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a • The input signal selected via the selection input bGPAnalogSwitchSet is output at
INT output nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a.
bGPAnalogSwitchSet Analog switch: Selection input
BOOL
FALSE nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a = nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a
TRUE nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a = nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a
nGPArithmetikIn1_a Arithmetic: Input signals
nGPArithmetikIn2_a • The arithmetic function is selected in C00338.
INT • The result is output at output nGPArithmetikOut_a.
nGPMulDivIn_a Multiplication/Division: Input signal
INT • The factor for the multiplication can be set in C00699/1 (numerator) and
C00699/2 (denominator).
• The result is output at output nGPMulDivOut_a.
bGPDigitalDelayIn Binary delay element: Input signal
BOOL • The on-delay can be set in C00720/1.
• The off-delay can be set in C00720/2.
• The time-delayed input signal is output at output bGPDigitalDelayOut.
bGPLogicIn1 Binary logic: Input signals
bGPLogicIn2 • The logic operation is selected in C00820.
bGPLogicIn3 • The result is output at output bGPLogicOut.
BOOL
Free inputs
The following inputs can freely be interconnected on the application level.
The signals can be transferred from the I/O level to the application level via these inputs.
bFreeIn1 ... bFreeIn8 Free inputs for digital signals
BOOL
306 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 307
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Free outputs
The following outputs can freely be interconnected on the application level.
The signals from the application level can be transferred to the I/O level via these outputs.
bFreeOut1 ... bFreeOut8 Free outputs for digital signals
BOOL
308 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7.2.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
________________________________________________________________
7.2
7
The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_NCtrl are interconnected to the digital
and analog input/output terminals of the drive controller in the different control modes.
________________________________________________________________
7.2.3.1 Terminals 0
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Fixed setpoint 1/3 DI1
Fixed setpoint 2/3 DI2
DC brake DI3
Change of direction of rotation DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
310 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
7.2.3.2 Terminals 2
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Fixed setpoint 1/3 DI1
Fixed setpoint 2/3 DI2
Quickstop DI3
Change of direction of rotation DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 311
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
7.2.3.3 Terminals 11
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Change of direction of rotation DI1
DC brake active DI2
Motor potentiometer Speed higher DI3
Speed lower DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
312 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
7.2.3.4 Terminal 16
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Fixed setpoint 1/3 DI1
Fixed setpoint 2/3 DI2
Cw rotation quick stop DI3
Ccw rotation quick stop DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 313
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
7.2.3.5 Keypad
Engineer: Keypad:
X101 All parameters
COM
NC Par1 8400 StateLineC
DriveFail NO
User - Menu
Quick commissioning
X3
Terminal Go to param
AR
Logbook
A1U Quick commissioning
Keypad
A1I Quick commissioning
GA SAVE
O1U Actual speed value
CH
CL
C15
X1 C16
C22
C87
C89
C39/1
C727/3
C727/4
C51
C54
314 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
7.2.3.6 PC
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 315
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
7.2.3.7 CAN
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Additional speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Quickstop DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
LP_CanIn1 LP_CanOut1
wCtrl DriveControl wState DriveControlStatus
CG
CH
CL
Note!
• You must set the setpoint arithmetic in C00190 to "1: NOut = NSet + NAdd" so that
the additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect.
• The "manual jog" function via digital terminals is being prepared!
316 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
7.2.3.8 MCI
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Additional speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Quickstop DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
LP_MciIn LP_MciOut
wCtrl DriveControl wState DriveControlStatus
wIn2 MainSetValue wOut2 MotorSpeedAct
wIn3...16 - wOut3 MotorSpeedSet
wOut4...16 -
Note!
• You must set the setpoint arithmetic in C00190 to "1: NOut = NSet + NAdd" so that
the additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect.
• The "manual jog" function via digital terminals is being prepared!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 317
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
318 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
Bit 10 StatusCodeBit2
Bit 11 StatusCodeBit3
Bit 12 Warning 1 ≡ A warning is indicated
Bit 13 Trouble 1 ≡ Controller is in the "Trouble" device status
• E.g. if an overvoltage has occurred.
Bit 14 FreeStatusBit14 Free status bit 14 (not assigned, freely assignable)
Bit 15 FreeStatusBit15 Free status bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 319
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
320 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
Related topics:
"GeneralPurpose" functions ( 385)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 321
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
If required, the subcodes of C00700 and C00701 serve to change the pre-configured assignment of
the application inputs:
LA_NCtrl
LS_AnalogInput
nMainSetValue_a
nIn1_a 16000 C700/7 L_Interpolator_1 L_OffsetGainP_1
bCurrentErrorIn1 16011
L_MPot_1
nln_a nOut_a
bMPotEnable bEnable
C701/31
bMPotUp bUp
C701/18
bMPotInAct bInAct
C701/17
bMPotDown bDown
C701/19
L_NSet_1
nNSet_a nNOut_a
... bRfgIEq0 bSpeedSetReached
1 1020
bRFG_Stop bRfgStop
C701/5 nSetValue_a
bRFG_0 bSpeedActEqSet
C701/6 bRfg0
bJogSpeed1 a
C701/9 bJog1 |a|=|b| 1021
bJogSpeed2 bJog2 b
C701/10
bJogSpeed4 bJog4
C701/11
bJogSpeed8 bJog8
C701/12
bJogRamp1 bTi1
C701/13
bJogRamp2 bTi2
C701/14
bJogRamp4 bTi4
C701/15
bJogRamp8 bTi8
C701/16
C700/8 L_OffsetGainP_2 nNAdd_a
nAuxSetValue_a bNSetInv
L_PCTRL_1
nNSet_a nOut_a
nPIDVpAdapt_a nAdapt_a
C700/5
nPIDActValue_a nAct_a
C700/6
nPIDInfluence_a nInfluence_a
C700/17
nPIDSetValue_a nSet_a
C700/18
bPIDEnableInfluence... bEnableInfluenceRamp
C701/32
bPIDIOff bIOff
C701/33
LS_ParFree_a
C472/1 nPar1_a 20010 LS_MotorInterface LS_AnalogOutput
nPar2_a nSpeedSetValue_a nMotorSpeedAct_a nMotorSpeedAct_a
C472/2 20011 1003 C620/1 nOut1_a
nPar3_a nTorqueMotLim_a nTorqueMotLim_a nMotorTorqueAct_a nMotorTorqueAct_a
C472/3 20012 C700/3 1013
nPar4_a nTorqueGenLim_a nTorqueGenLim_a bLimCurrentSetVal bImaxActive
C472/4 20013 C700/4 1019
nVoltageAdd_a nVoltageAdd_a nStatorCurrentIS_a nMotorCurrent_a
C700/16 1002
nBoost_a nBoost_a nDCVoltage_a nDCVoltage_a
C700/20 1014
nMotorVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a
1015
bQSPActive bQSPIsActive
LS_DigitalInput 1003
bIn1 16000
bIn2 16001 LS_MotionControlKernel
bSetDCBrake bDCBrakeOn nSpeedSetValue_a nMotorSpeedSet_a
bIn3 16002 C701/4 1016
bSetQuickstop bMBrakeReleaseOut bMBrakeReleaseOut
bIn4 16003 C701/3 1015
1 bQspOn bMBrakeReleased bMBrakeReleased
bCInh 16008 bRLQCw 1016
C701/34
RLQ
bRLQCcw
C701/35
1
bSetSpeedCcw
LS_ParFix C701/8
C_bTrue 20000
bMBrakeRelease bMBrakeRelease
C_nPos100_a 20000 C701/20
nPWMAngleOffset nPWMAngleOffset
C_nNeg100_a 20001 C700/19
wSMControl wSMCtrl
C_nPos199_9_a 20002 C700/21
C_nNeg199_9_a 20003
C_w65535 20004 LS_DriveInterface
wCANDriveControl wCANControl wDeviceStatusWord wDriveControlStatus
C_wDriveCtrl 20005 C700/1 1000
wMCIDriveControl wMCIControl wStateDetermFailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoLow
C700/2
bCInh bCInh wStateDetermFailNoHigh wStateDetermFailNoHigh LS_DigitalOutput
C701/1
bFailReset bFailReset bFail bDriveFail
C701/2 1001 C621/1 bRelay
bReady bDriveReady
1000 C621/2 bOut1
bCInhIsActive bCInhActive
1002
bCwCcw bSpeedCcw
1004
bNactCompare bSpeedActCompare
1005
[7-2] Pre-assignment of the "Actuating drive speed" application in the "Terminals 0" control mode
322 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
LA_NCtrl
GeneralPurpose (GP) functions
nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a C00830/14
C700/9 0 nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a
nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a C00830/15 1006
C700/10 1
bGPAnalogSwitchSet C00833/13
C701/23
C00338 Out =
0 In1
1 In1 + In2
nGPArithmetikIn1_a C00830/12 In1 2 In1 - In2
C700/11
3 (In1 * In2) nGPArithmetikOut_a
1007
nGPArithmetikIn2_a C00830/13 In2 100%
C700/12 ±32767
4 (In1 * 1%) (±199.99%)
|In2|
5 (In1 * 100%)
(100% - In2)
bGPDigitalDelayIn C00833/66 In
C701/24
Out bGPDigitalDelayOut
1008
C00720/1 C00720/2
0
bGPLogicIn1 C00833/63 0
C701/25 & 1
bGPLogicIn2 C00833/64 1 bGPLogicOut
2
C701/26 1009
bGPLogicIn3 C00833/65 3
C701/27 4
>1 C00820
0 0 0 C00821/1
0 0 1 C00821/2
0 1 0 C00821/3
...
1 1 1 C00821/8
C00681 C00682
nGPCompareIn1_a C00830/16
C700/14 bGPCompareOut
nGPCompareIn2_a C00830/17 1017
C700/15
f = C00680
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 323
7 Technology applications
7.2 TA "Actuating drive speed"
________________________________________________________________
LA_NCtrl
GeneralPurpose (GP) functions
C00410/1 C00413/1 C00413/2
nGPSignalOut1_a
1009
LA_NCtrl
Free In/Out
bGPFree1
C701/21
bGPFree2
C701/21
bFreeIn1 bFreeOut1
C701/41 1029
bFreeIn2 bFreeOut2
C701/42 1030
bFreeIn3 bFreeOut3
C701/43 1031
bFreeIn4 bFreeOut4
C701/44 1032
bFreeIn5 bFreeOut5
Application
C701/45 1033
bFreeIn6 bFreeOut6
C701/46 1034
bFreeIn7 bFreeOut7
C701/47 1035
bFreeIn8 bFreeOut8
C701/48 1036
wFreeIn1 wFreeOut1
C700/26 1023
wFreeIn2 wFreeOut2
C700/27 1024
wFreeIn3 wFreeOut3
C700/28 1025
wFreeIn4 wFreeOut4
C700/29 1026
Related topics:
User-defined terminal assignment ( 289)
"GeneralPurpose" functions ( 385)
324 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Features
• Pre-configured control modes for terminals and bus control (with predefined process data
connection to the fieldbus)
• Free configuration of input and output signals
• adjustable offset, gain and negation of the speed setpoint
• Up to 15 fixed setpoints for speed and ramp time
• Adjustable setpoint ramp times
• Freely selectable, variable ramp shape
• Automatic holding brake control
• Quick stop (QSP) with adjustable ramp time
• Motor potentiometer function (optional)
• Process controller (optional)
• Integrated, freely available "GeneralPurpose" functions:
Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary delay element, binary logic, analog
comparison, D-flipflop
• Interface to the safety module (optional)
• Integration of encoder feedback
Note!
In contrast to the "actuating drive speed" standard application, this application makes
use of the nAuxSetValue_a input to determine a local speed setpoint (when NetRef=0).
For this reason, the nNAdd_a input at the L_NSet_1 setpoint generator for determining
an additional speed setpoint is not connected in the Lenze setting.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 325
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
For the data exchange, the technology application supports the assembly output object instance 23
(0x17) and assembly input object instance 73 (0x49) defined by the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor
Association).
Detailed information on the data transfer and "AC Drive Profile" can be found in the
E84AYCEO communication manual (EtherNet/IP™).
Tip!
Detailed information on EtherNet/IP™ can be found at the web page of the ODVA (Open
DeviceNet Vendor Association) user organisation:
http://www.odva.org
Related topics:
Process data assignment for fieldbus communication
Run/Stop event
Scaling of speed and torque values
326 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
[7-6] Signal flow of the "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)" technology application
Configuration of the signal source for setpoint selection via fieldbus (NetRef=1)
Configuration of the signal source for local setpoint selection (NetRef=0)
Offset and gain for speed setpoint (L_OffsetGainP_1)
Setpoint generator (L_NSet_1)
Speed setpoint input limitation
Holding brake control
Terminal assignment & display of digital control signals
Integrated disposable "GeneralPurpose" functions: Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary
delay element, binary logic, analog comparison, D-flipflop
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 327
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Fieldbus used Control mode Speed AC Drive Profile control word effective input
(C00007) reference (wMCIDriveControl) (at LA_NCtrl)
40: MCI via fieldbus Bit 6 ("NetRef") = 1 nMainSetValue_a
(data word 2)
local* Bit 6 ("NetRef") = 0 nAuxSetValue_a
30: CAN via fieldbus Bit 6 ("NetRef") = 1 nMainSetValue_a
(data word 2)
local* Bit 6 ("NetRef") = 0 nAuxSetValue_a
- 10: Terminals 0 local* 9 ≡ 0x0009 nAuxSetValue_a
12: Terminals 2 • Bit 0, SwitchOn = TRUE
14: Terminals 11 • Bit 3, EnableOperation = TRUE
16: Terminals 16 • All others: FALSE
20: Keypad C00728/3
21: PC C00472/1
* The local setpoint is selected in the Lenze setting via the analog input 1
328 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Fieldbus used Control mode Torque AC Drive Profile control word effective input
(C00007) reference (wMCIDriveControl) (at LA_NCtrl)
40: MCI via fieldbus Bit 6 ("NetRef") = 1 nTorqueGenLim_a
(data word 3)
local* Bit 6 ("NetRef") = 0 nAuxSetValue_a
30: CAN via fieldbus Bit 6 ("NetRef") = 1 nTorqueGenLim_a
(data word 3)
local* Bit 6 ("NetRef") = 0 nAuxSetValue_a
- 10: Terminals 0 local* 9 ≡ 0x0009 nAuxSetValue_a
12: Terminals 2 • Bit 0, SwitchOn = TRUE
14: Terminals 11 • Bit 3, EnableOperation = TRUE
16: Terminals 16 • All others: FALSE
20: Keypad C00728/3
21: PC C00472/1
* The local setpoint is selected in the Lenze setting via the analog input 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 329
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The connectors grayed out in the following table are hidden in the function block editor
in the Lenze setting.
• These connections can be shown via the Connector visibilities command in the
Context menu of the application block.
Inputs
330 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Holding braking is not possible when this braking mode is used!
Use the basic "Holding brake control" function for controlling the holding brake with
a low rate of wear.
FALSE Deactivate DC-injection braking.
TRUE Activate DC-injection braking, i.e. the drive is brought to a standstill
by means of DC-injection braking.
• The braking effect stops when the rotor is at standstill.
• After the hold time (C00107) has expired, the controller sets the
pulse inhibit.
bRFG_Stop Ramp function generator: Maintain the current value of the main setpoint
BOOL integrator
• The speed, for instance, of a running ramp process is immediately kept constant
when bRFG_Stop is activated. At the same time, the acceleration/deceleration
jumps to the value "0".
• For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB.
TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is held.
bRFG_0 Ramp function generator: Lead the main setpoint integrator to "0" within the
BOOL current Ti times
• In case of control via fieldbus (NetCtrl=1): If a stop is triggered via bit 0 ("Run
Forward") and bit 1 ("Run Backward") of the AC Drive Profile control word, this
signal is internally set to TRUE and thus the drive is braked to standstill.
• For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB.
TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is led to "0" within
the Ti time set.
nVoltageAdd_a Additive voltage impression
INT • An additional setpoint for the motor voltage can be specified via this process
input.
• If there are, for instance, different loads at the motor output end, it is possible to
apply a voltage boost at the starting time.
• If the value is negative, the voltage is reduced.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V
Stop!
Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting
current!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 331
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Stop!
Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting
current!
nPWMAngleOffset Additional offset for the electrical angle of rotation
INT • If a torque is connected, e.g. dynamic acceleration processes can be generated.
• Scaling: ±32767 ≡ ±180 ° angle of rotation
nTorqueMotLim_a Torque limitation in motor mode and in generator mode (speed mode)
nTorqueGenLim_a or torque setpoint selection (torque mode)
INT
When "speed mode" is set, the following applies:
• The torque limitation in motor mode and generator mode are determined via
nTorqueMotLim_a.
• The nTorqueGenLim_a input is not effective.
When "torque mode" is set, the following applies:
• The torque setpoint is determined via nTorqueGenLim_a.
• The nTorqueMotLim_a input is not effective.
More notes for both inputs:
• These input signals are directly transferred to the motor control to limit the
controller's maximum torque in motor and generator mode.
• The drive cannot output a higher torque in motor/generator mode than set here.
• The applied values (any polarity) are internally interpreted as absolute values.
• If V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) is selected, limitation is indirectly
performed via a so-called Imax controller.
• If sensorless vector control (SLVC) or servo control (SC) is selected, limitation has
a direct effect on the torque-producing current component.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % Mmax (C00057)
Torque limits in motor and generator mode:
TorqueGenLim M
TorqueMotLim
MN
-nN nN n
-MN
TorqueMotLim
TorqueGenLim
332 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 333
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Motor potentiometer
Alternatively to the input signal nMainSetValue_a (or nAuxSetValue_a in case of local setpoint selection), the speed
setpoint can also be generated via a motor potentiometer function.
• In the Lenze setting, the motor potentiometer function is deactivated.
• Activation is possible via C00806 or via the bMPotEnable input.
• The behaviour of the motor potentiometer during switch-on of the drive system can be selected in C00805.
• For a detailed functional description see the L_MPot FB.
bMPotEnable Activating the motor potentiometer function
BOOL • This input and C00806 are OR'd.
TRUE The motor potentiometer function is active; the speed setpoint can
be changed via the bMPotUp and bMPotDown control inputs.
bMPotUp Increasing the speed setpoint
BOOL
TRUE Approach the upper speed limit value set in C00800 with the
acceleration time set in C00802.
bMPotInAct Activating the inactive function
BOOL
TRUE The speed setpoint behaves according to the inactive function set in
C00804.
• In the Lenze setting, the speed setpoint is maintained.
bMPotDown Decreasing the speed setpoint
BOOL
TRUE Approach the lower speed limit value set In C00801 with the
deceleration time set in C00803.
Process controller
• In the Lenze setting, the process controller is deactivated.
• The activation is executed by selecting the operating mode in C00242.
• For a detailed functional description see FB L_PCTRL.
bPIDEnableInfluenceRamp Activate ramp for influencing factor
BOOL
FALSE Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped down to "0".
TRUE Influencing factor of the PID controller is ramped up to the value
nPIDInfluence_a.
bPIDIOff Switch off the I-component of the process controller
BOOL • In conjunction with the operating mode set in C00242
(Lenze setting: "Off").
TRUE I-component of the process controller is switched off.
nPIDVpAdapt_a Adaptation of gain Vp set in C00222 in percent
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Internal limitation to ± 199.99 %
• Changes can be done online.
nPIDSetValue_a Sensor and process setpoint for operating modes 2, 4 and 5
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Internal limitation to ± 199.99 %
nPIDActValue_a Speed or actual sensor value (actual process value)
INT • Offset and gain for this input signal can be set in C00698 and C00672.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Internal limitation to ± 199.99 %
nPIDInfluence_a Limitation of the influencing factor in percent
INT • The influence factor of the PID controller can be limited to a certain value (-
199.99% ... + 199.99%) via nPIDInfluence_a.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Internal limitation to ± 199.99 %
334 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 335
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Free inputs
The following inputs can freely be interconnected on the application level.
The signals can be transferred from the I/O level to the application level via these inputs.
bFreeIn1 ... bFreeIn8 Free inputs for digital signals
BOOL
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
336 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 337
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Free outputs
The following outputs can freely be interconnected on the application level.
The signals from the application level can be transferred to the I/O level via these outputs.
bFreeOut1 ... bFreeOut8 Free outputs for digital signals
BOOL
338 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7.3.4 Terminal assignment of the control modes
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
________________________________________________________________
7.3
7
The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_NCtrl are interconnected to the digital
and analog input/output terminals of the drive controller in the different control modes.
________________________________________________________________
7.3.4.1 Terminals 0
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Speed mode:
AR
Speed setpoint A1U
Torque mode:
Torque setpoint A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Fixed setpoint 1/3 DI1
Fixed setpoint 2/3 DI2
DC brake DI3
Change of direction of rotation DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
340 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
7.3.4.2 Terminals 2
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Speed mode:
AR
Speed setpoint A1U
Torque mode:
Torque setpoint A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Fixed setpoint 1/3 DI1
Fixed setpoint 2/3 DI2
Quickstop DI3
Change of direction of rotation DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 341
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
7.3.4.3 Terminals 11
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Speed mode:
AR
Speed setpoint A1U
Torque mode:
Torque setpoint A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Change of direction of rotation DI1
DC brake active DI2
Motor potentiometer Speed higher DI3
Speed lower DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
342 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
7.3.4.4 Terminal 16
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Speed mode:
AR
Speed setpoint A1U
Torque mode:
Torque setpoint A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Fixed setpoint 1/3 DI1
Fixed setpoint 2/3 DI2
Cw rotation quick stop DI3
Ccw rotation quick stop DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 343
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
7.3.4.5 Keypad
CH
CL
C727/4
X1 C51
C54
344 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
7.3.4.6 PC
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 345
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
7.3.4.7 CAN
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Speed mode:
AR
Speed setpoint A1U
Torque mode:
Torque setpoint A1I
GA
(only if NetRef=0) O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Fixed setpoint 1/3* DI1 * Inputs only active
Fixed setpoint 2/3* DI2 if NetCtrl=0
DC brake* DI3
Change of direction of rotation* DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
LP_CanIn1 LP_CanOut1
wCtrl DriveControl wState DriveControlStatus
CG
CH
CL
346 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
7.3.4.8 MCI
X101
COM
NC
DriveFail NO
X3
Speed mode:
AR
Speed setpoint A1U
Torque mode:
Torque setpoint A1I
GA
(only if NetRef=0) O1U Actual speed value
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Fixed setpoint 1/3* DI1 * Inputs only active
Fixed setpoint 2/3* DI2 if NetCtrl=0
DC brake* DI3
Change of direction of rotation* DI4
DO1 DriveReady
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
LP_MciIn LP_MciOut
wCtrl DriveControl wState DriveControlStatus
wIn2 SpeedReference wOut2 SpeedActual
wIn3 TorqueReference wOut3 TorqueActual
wIn4...16 - wOut4...16 -
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 347
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
348 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Starter Drive
Contactor Starter Reverser Speed Soft start
Run1 Close Run RunFwd RunLow RunRamp1 RunFwd
Run2 No Action No Action RunRev RunHigh RunRamp2 RunRev
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 349
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
16384 1
Speed setpoint Application = Speed setpoint Bus [rpm] ⋅ ---------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ --------------------------------
Reference speed [rpm] 2 Scaling factor
For the output of the actual speed value to the bus, the following conversion is made:
16384 ⋅ 100 1
Torque setpoint Application = Torque setpoint Bus [Nm] ⋅ ------------------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ --------------------------------
Maximum torque [0.01 Nm] 2 Scaling factor
For the output of the actual torque value to the bus, the following conversion is made:
350 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
In the All parameters tab, the parameters for diagnostic purposes listed in the following table are
displayed in the AC Drive Profile category.
Note!
These parameter are set by the EtherNet/IP™ communication module and should not be
written by the user.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 351
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
Related topics:
"GeneralPurpose" functions ( 385)
352 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
If required, the subcodes of C00700 and C00701 serve to change the pre-configured assignment of
the application inputs:
LA_NCtrl
nMainSetValue_a
LS_AnalogInput C700/7 L_Interpolator_1 L_OffsetGainP_1
nAuxSetValue_a
nIn1_a 16000 C700/8
bCurrentErrorIn1 16011 100 %
L_MPot_1
nln_a nOut_a
bMPotEnable bEnable
C701/31
bMPotUp bUp
C701/18
bMPotInAct bInAct
C701/17
bMPotDown bDown
C701/19
L_NSet_1
nNSet_a nNOut_a
... bSpeedSetReached
bRfgIEq0 1020
bRFG_Stop 1 bRfgStop
nSetValue_a
C701/5
bRFG_0 bSpeedActEqSet
C701/6 bRfg0
bJogSpeed1 a
C701/9 bJog1 |a|=|b| 1021
bJogSpeed2 bJog2 b
C701/10
bJogSpeed4 bJog4
C701/11
bJogSpeed8 bJog8
C701/12
bJogRamp1 bTi1
C701/13
bJogRamp2 bTi2
C701/14
bJogRamp4 bTi4
C701/15
bJogRamp8 bTi8
C701/16
L_OffsetGainP_2 nNAdd_a
bNSetInv
L_PCTRL_1
nNSet_a nOut_a
nPIDVpAdapt_a nAdapt_a
C700/5
nPIDActValue_a nAct_a
C700/6
nPIDInfluence_a nInfluence_a
C700/17
nPIDSetValue_a nSet_a
C700/18
bPIDEnableInfluence... bEnableInfluenceRamp
C701/32
bPIDIOff bIOff
C701/33
LS_ParFree_a
C472/1 nPar1_a 20010 LS_MotorInterface LS_AnalogOutput
nPar2_a nSpeedSetValue_a nMotorSpeedAct_a nMotorSpeedAct_a
C472/2 20011 1003 C620/1 nOut1_a
nPar3_a nTorqueMotLim_a nTorqueMotLim_a nMotorTorqueAct_a nMotorTorqueAct_a
C472/3 20012 C700/3 1013
nPar4_a nTorqueGenLim_a nTorqueGenLim_a bLimCurrentSetVal bImaxActive
C472/4 20013 C700/4 1019
nVoltageAdd_a nVoltageAdd_a nStatorCurrentIS_a nMotorCurrent_a
C700/16 1002
nBoost_a nBoost_a nDCVoltage_a nDCVoltage_a
C700/20 1014
nMotorVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a
1015
bQSPActive bQSPIsActive
LS_DigitalInput 1003
bIn1 16000
bIn2 16001 LS_MotionControlKernel
bSetDCBrake bDCBrakeOn nSpeedSetValue_a nMotorSpeedSet_a
bIn3 16002 C701/4 1016
bSetQuickstop bMBrakeReleaseOut bMBrakeReleaseOut
bIn4 16003 C701/3 1015
1 bQspOn bMBrakeReleased bMBrakeReleased
bCInh 16008 bRLQCw 1016
C701/34
RLQ
bRLQCcw
C701/35
1
bSetSpeedCcw
C701/8
LS_ParFix
bMBrakeRelease bMBrakeRelease
C_bTrue 20000 C701/20
nPWMAngleOffset nPWMAngleOffset
C_nPos100_a 20000 C700/19
wSMControl wSMCtrl
C_nNeg100_a 20001 C700/21
C_nPos199_9_a 20002
C_nNeg199_9_a 20003 LS_DriveInterface
wCANDriveControl wCANControl wDeviceStatusWord wDriveControlStatus
C_w65535 20004 C700/1 1000
wMCIDriveControl wMCIControl wStateDetermFailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoLow
C_wDriveCtrl 20005 C700/2
bCInh bCInh wStateDetermFailNoHigh wStateDetermFailNoHigh LS_DigitalOutput
C701/1
bFailReset bFailReset bFail bDriveFail
C701/2 1001 C621/1 bRelay
bReady bDriveReady
1000 C621/2 bOut1
bCInhIsActive bCInhActive
1002
bCwCcw bSpeedCcw
1004
bNactCompare bSpeedActCompare
1005
nMainSetValue_a input is only effective when NetRef=1; nAuxSetValue_a input is only effective when NetRef=0
Torque mode: nAuxSetValue_a input is internally connected to nTorqueGenLim_a; speed setpoint = 100 % (fixed)
[7-7] Pre-assignment of the "Actuating drive speed" (AC Drive Profile) application in the "Terminals 0" control mode
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 353
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
LA_NCtrl
nMainSetValue_a
LS_AnalogInput C700/7 L_Interpolator_1 L_OffsetGainP_1
nAuxSetValue_a
nIn1_a 16000 C700/8
bCurrentErrorIn1 16011 100 %
L_MPot_1
nln_a nOut_a
bMPotEnable bEnable
C701/31
bMPotUp bUp
C701/18
LP_CanIn1 bMPotInAct bInAct
C701/17
bMPotDown bDown
wCtrl 16002 C701/19
wIn2 16003
wIn3 16004
wIn4 16005 L_NSet_1
nNSet_a nNOut_a
... bSpeedSetReached
bRfgIEq0 1020
bRFG_Stop 1 bRfgStop
nSetValue_a
C701/5
bRFG_0 bSpeedActEqSet
C701/6 bRfg0
bJogSpeed1 a
C701/9 bJog1 |a|=|b| 1021
bJogSpeed2 bJog2 b
C701/10
bJogSpeed4 bJog4
C701/11
bJogSpeed8 bJog8
C701/12
bJogRamp1 bTi1
C701/13
bJogRamp2 bTi2
C701/14
bJogRamp4 bTi4
C701/15
bJogRamp8 bTi8
C701/16
L_OffsetGainP_2 nNAdd_a
bNSetInv
L_PCTRL_1
nNSet_a nOut_a
nPIDVpAdapt_a nAdapt_a
C700/5
nPIDActValue_a nAct_a
C700/6
nPIDInfluence_a nInfluence_a
C700/17
nPIDSetValue_a nSet_a LS_AnalogOutput
C700/18
bPIDEnableInfluence... bEnableInfluenceRamp C620/1 nOut1_a
C701/32
bPIDIOff bIOff
C701/33
LS_ParFree_a LP_CanOut1
C472/1 nPar1_a 20010 LS_MotorInterface C620/2 wState
nPar2_a nSpeedSetValue_a nMotorSpeedAct_a nMotorSpeedAct_a
C472/2 20011 1003 C620/3 wOut2
nPar3_a nTorqueMotLim_a nTorqueMotLim_a nMotorTorqueAct_a nMotorTorqueAct_a
C472/3 20012 C700/3 1013 C620/4 wOut3
nPar4_a nTorqueGenLim_a nTorqueGenLim_a bLimCurrentSetVal bImaxActive
C472/4 20013 C700/4 1019 C620/5 wOut4
nVoltageAdd_a nVoltageAdd_a nStatorCurrentIS_a nMotorCurrent_a
C700/16 1002
nBoost_a nBoost_a nDCVoltage_a nDCVoltage_a
C700/20 1014
nMotorVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a
1015
bQSPActive bQSPIsActive
LS_DigitalInput 1003
bIn1 16000
bIn2 16001 LS_MotionControlKernel
bSetDCBrake bDCBrakeOn nSpeedSetValue_a nMotorSpeedSet_a
bIn3 16002 C701/4 1016
bSetQuickstop bMBrakeReleaseOut bMBrakeReleaseOut
bIn4 16003 C701/3 1015
1 bQspOn bMBrakeReleased bMBrakeReleased
bCInh 16008 bRLQCw 1016
C701/34
RLQ
bRLQCcw
C701/35
1
bSetSpeedCcw
C701/8
LS_ParFix
bMBrakeRelease bMBrakeRelease
C_bTrue 20000 C701/20
nPWMAngleOffset nPWMAngleOffset
C_nPos100_a 20000 C700/19
wSMControl wSMCtrl
C_nNeg100_a 20001 C700/21
C_nPos199_9_a 20002
C_nNeg199_9_a 20003 LS_DriveInterface
wCANDriveControl wCANControl wDeviceStatusWord wDriveControlStatus
C_w65535 20004 C700/1 1000
wMCIDriveControl wMCIControl wStateDetermFailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoLow
C_wDriveCtrl 20005 C700/2
bCInh bCInh wStateDetermFailNoHigh wStateDetermFailNoHigh LS_DigitalOutput
C701/1
bFailReset bFailReset bFail bDriveFail
C701/2 1001 C621/1 bRelay
bReady bDriveReady
1000 C621/2 bOut1
bCInhIsActive bCInhActive
1002
bCwCcw bSpeedCcw
1004
bNactCompare bSpeedActCompare
1005
nMainSetValue_a input is only effective when NetRef=1; nAuxSetValue_a input is only effective when NetRef=0
Torque mode: nAuxSetValue_a input is internally connected to nTorqueGenLim_a; speed setpoint = 100 % (fixed)
[7-8] Pre-assignment of the "Actuating drive speed" (AC Drive Profile) application in the "CAN " control mode
354 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
LA_NCtrl
nMainSetValue_a
LS_AnalogInput C700/7 L_Interpolator_1 L_OffsetGainP_1
nAuxSetValue_a
nIn1_a 16000 C700/8
bCurrentErrorIn1 16011 100 %
L_MPot_1
nln_a nOut_a
bMPotEnable bEnable
C701/31
bMPotUp bUp
C701/18
LP_MciIn bMPotInAct bInAct
C701/17
bMPotDown bDown
wCtrl 16104 C701/19
wIn2 16105
wIn3 16106
wIn4 16107 L_NSet_1
wIn5 16108 nNSet_a nNOut_a
... bSpeedSetReached
wIn6 16109 bRfgIEq0 1020
bRFG_Stop 1 bRfgStop
nSetValue_a
wIn7 16110 C701/5
bRFG_0 bSpeedActEqSet
wIn8 16111 C701/6 bRfg0
bJogSpeed1 a
wIn9 16112 C701/9 bJog1 |a|=|b| 1021
bJogSpeed2 bJog2 b
wIn10 16113 C701/10
bJogSpeed4 bJog4
wIn11 16114 C701/11
bJogSpeed8 bJog8
wIn12 16115 C701/12
bJogRamp1 bTi1
wIn13 16116 C701/13
bJogRamp2 bTi2
wIn14 16117 C701/14
bJogRamp4 bTi4
wIn15 16118 C701/15
bJogRamp8 bTi8
wIn16 16119 C701/16
L_OffsetGainP_2 nNAdd_a
bNSetInv
L_PCTRL_1
nNSet_a nOut_a
nPIDVpAdapt_a nAdapt_a
C700/5
nPIDActValue_a nAct_a
C700/6
nPIDInfluence_a nInfluence_a
C700/17
nPIDSetValue_a nSet_a LS_AnalogOutput
C700/18
bPIDEnableInfluence... bEnableInfluenceRamp C620/1 nOut1_a
C701/32
bPIDIOff bIOff
C701/33
LS_ParFree_a LP_MciOut
C472/1 nPar1_a 20010 LS_MotorInterface C620/22 wState
nPar2_a nSpeedSetValue_a nMotorSpeedAct_a nMotorSpeedAct_a
C472/2 20011 1003 C620/23 wOut2
nPar3_a nTorqueMotLim_a nTorqueMotLim_a nMotorTorqueAct_a nMotorTorqueAct_a
C472/3 20012 C700/3 1013 C620/24 wOut3
nPar4_a nTorqueGenLim_a nTorqueGenLim_a bLimCurrentSetVal bImaxActive
C472/4 20013 C700/4 1019 C620/25 wOut4
nVoltageAdd_a nVoltageAdd_a nStatorCurrentIS_a nMotorCurrent_a
C700/16 1002 C620/26 wOut5
nBoost_a nBoost_a nDCVoltage_a nDCVoltage_a
C700/20 1014 C620/27 wOut6
nMotorVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a
1015 C620/28 wOut7
bQSPActive bQSPIsActive
LS_DigitalInput 1003 C620/29 wOut8
bIn1 16000 C620/30 wOut9
bIn2 16001 LS_MotionControlKernel C620/31 wOut10
bSetDCBrake bDCBrakeOn nSpeedSetValue_a nMotorSpeedSet_a C620/32 wOut11
bIn3 16002 C701/4 1016
bSetQuickstop bMBrakeReleaseOut bMBrakeReleaseOut C620/33 wOut12
bIn4 16003 C701/3 1015
1 bQspOn bMBrakeReleased bMBrakeReleased C620/34 wOut13
bCInh 16008 bRLQCw 1016
C701/34 C620/35 wOut14
RLQ C620/36 wOut15
bRLQCcw C620/37 wOut16
C701/35
1
bSetSpeedCcw
C701/8
LS_ParFix
bMBrakeRelease bMBrakeRelease
C_bTrue 20000 C701/20
nPWMAngleOffset nPWMAngleOffset
C_nPos100_a 20000 C700/19
wSMControl wSMCtrl
C_nNeg100_a 20001 C700/21
C_nPos199_9_a 20002
C_nNeg199_9_a 20003 LS_DriveInterface
wCANDriveControl wCANControl wDeviceStatusWord wDriveControlStatus
C_w65535 20004 C700/1 1000
wMCIDriveControl wMCIControl wStateDetermFailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoLow
C_wDriveCtrl 20005 C700/2
bCInh bCInh wStateDetermFailNoHigh wStateDetermFailNoHigh LS_DigitalOutput
C701/1
bFailReset bFailReset bFail bDriveFail
C701/2 1001 C621/1 bRelay
bReady bDriveReady
1000 C621/2 bOut1
bCInhIsActive bCInhActive
1002
bCwCcw bSpeedCcw
1004
bNactCompare bSpeedActCompare
1005
nMainSetValue_a input is only effective when NetRef=1; nAuxSetValue_a input is only effective when NetRef=0
Torque mode: nAuxSetValue_a input is internally connected to nTorqueGenLim_a; speed setpoint = 100 % (fixed)
[7-9] Pre-assignment of the "Actuating drive speed" (AC Drive Profile) application in the "MCI" control mode
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 355
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
LA_NCtrl
GeneralPurpose (GP) functions
nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a C00830/14
C700/9 0 nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a
nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a C00830/15 1006
C700/10 1
bGPAnalogSwitchSet C00833/13
C701/23
C00338 Out =
0 In1
1 In1 + In2
nGPArithmetikIn1_a C00830/12 In1 2 In1 - In2
C700/11
3 (In1 * In2) nGPArithmetikOut_a
1007
nGPArithmetikIn2_a C00830/13 In2 100%
C700/12 ±32767
4 (In1 * 1%) (±199.99%)
|In2|
5 (In1 * 100%)
(100% - In2)
bGPDigitalDelayIn C00833/66 In
C701/24
Out bGPDigitalDelayOut
1008
C00720/1 C00720/2
0
bGPLogicIn1 C00833/63 0
C701/25 & 1
bGPLogicIn2 C00833/64 1 bGPLogicOut
2
C701/26 1009
bGPLogicIn3 C00833/65 3
C701/27 4
>1 C00820
0 0 0 C00821/1
0 0 1 C00821/2
0 1 0 C00821/3
...
1 1 1 C00821/8
C00681 C00682
nGPCompareIn1_a C00830/16
C700/14 bGPCompareOut
nGPCompareIn2_a C00830/17 1017
C700/15
f = C00680
356 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.3 TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
________________________________________________________________
LA_NCtrl
GeneralPurpose (GP) functions
C00410/1 C00413/1 C00413/2
nGPSignalOut1_a
1009
LA_NCtrl
Free In/Out
bGPFree1
C701/21
bGPFree2
C701/21
bFreeIn1 bFreeOut1
C701/41 1029
bFreeIn2 bFreeOut2
C701/42 1030
bFreeIn3 bFreeOut3
C701/43 1031
bFreeIn4 bFreeOut4
C701/44 1032
bFreeIn5 bFreeOut5
Application
C701/45 1033
bFreeIn6 bFreeOut6
C701/46 1034
bFreeIn7 bFreeOut7
C701/47 1035
bFreeIn8 bFreeOut8
C701/48 1036
wFreeIn1 wFreeOut1
C700/26 1023
wFreeIn2 wFreeOut2
C700/27 1024
wFreeIn3 wFreeOut3
C700/28 1025
wFreeIn4 wFreeOut4
C700/29 1026
Related topics:
User-defined terminal assignment ( 289)
"GeneralPurpose" functions ( 385)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 357
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
The basic principle of this technology application is to travel to a switch-off sensor (e.g. a limit
switch) in a speed-controlled manner and to stop as close as possible at this position. Unlike other
positioning controls, the switch-off positioning neither has a position feedback nor calculates the
path in advance. Thus, the accuracy that can be achieved depends on various factors such as the
speed at which the switch-off sensor is advanced.
In addition, a pre-switch off can be implemented which requires a sufficient number of unassigned
digital inputs on the controller which can be used to connect other sensors for the additional stop
positions. These sensors effect a reduction in speed before the last switch-off sensor is reached.
Features
• Pre-configured control modes for terminals and bus control (with predefined process data
connection to the fieldbus)
• Free configuration of input and output signals
• Offset, gain, and negation of main setpoint & additional setpoint
• Up to 15 fixed setpoints for speed and ramp time
• Adjustable setpoint ramp times
• Freely selectable, variable ramp shape
• Automatic holding brake control
• Quick stop (QSP) with adjustable ramp time
• Integrated, freely available "GeneralPurpose" functions:
Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary delay element, binary logic, analog
comparison, D-flipflop
• Interface to the safety module (optional)
• Integration of encoder feedback
• Switch-off sensor management for the implementation of a pre-switch off
Decision criteria
358 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
Related topics:
Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application ( 59)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 359
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
360 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The connectors grayed out in the following table are hidden in the function block editor
in the Lenze setting.
• These connections can be shown via the Connector visibilities command in the
Context menu of the application block.
Inputs
wCANDriveControl Control word via system bus (CAN) for device control
WORD • See the "wCANControl/wMCIControl control words" subchapter of the chapter
on device control for a detailed description of the individual control bits.
wMCIDriveControl Control word via communication module (e.g. PROFIBUS) for device control
WORD • See the "wCANControl/wMCIControl control words" subchapter of the chapter
on device control for a detailed description of the individual control bits.
wSMControl Interface to the optional safety system.
WORD • Setting control bit 0 ("SafeStop1") in this control word causes e.g. the automatic
deceleration of the drive to standstill within this application (in the Motion
Control Kernel).
• See the subchapter "Interface to safety system" of the chapter on basic drive
functions for a detailed description of the individual control bits.
bCInh Enable/Inhibit controller
BOOL
FALSE Enable controller: The controller switches to the "OperationEnabled"
device status if no other source for controller inhibit is active.
• C00158 provides a bit coded representation of all active
sources/triggers of a controller inhibit.
TRUE Inhibit controller (controller inhibit): The controller switches to the
"SwitchedOn" device status.
bFailReset Reset error message
BOOL In the Lenze setting this input is connected to the digital input controller enable so
that a possibly existing error message is reset together with the controller enable (if
the cause for the fault is eliminated).
TRUE The current fault is reset, if the cause for the fault is eliminated.
• If the fault still exists, the error status remains unchanged.
bSetQuickstop Enable quick stop (QSP)
BOOL • Also see device command "Activate/deactivate quick stop".
TRUE Activate quick stop
• Motor control is decoupled from the setpoint selection and,
within the deceleration time parameterised in C00105, the motor
is brought to a standstill (nact = 0).
• The motor is kept at a standstill during closed-loop operation.
• A pulse inhibit is set if the auto-DCB function has been activated
via C00019.
FALSE Deactivate quick stop
• The quick stop is deactivated if no other source for the quick stop
is active.
• C00159 displays a bit code of active sources/causes for the quick
stop.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 361
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Holding braking is not possible when this braking mode is used!
Use the basic "Holding brake control" function for controlling the holding brake with
a low rate of wear.
FALSE Deactivate DC-injection braking.
TRUE Activate DC-injection braking, i.e. the drive is brought to a standstill
by means of DC-injection braking.
• The braking effect stops when the rotor is at standstill.
• After the hold time (C00107) has expired, the controller sets the
pulse inhibit.
bRFG_Stop Ramp function generator: Maintain the current value of the main setpoint
BOOL integrator
• The speed, for instance, of a running ramp process is immediately kept constant
when bRFG_Stop is activated. At the same time, the acceleration/deceleration
jumps to the value "0".
• For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB.
TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is held.
nVoltageAdd_a Additive voltage impression
INT • An additional setpoint for the motor voltage can be specified via this process
input.
• If there are, for instance, different loads at the motor output end, it is possible to
apply a voltage boost at the starting time.
• If the value is negative, the voltage is reduced.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V
Stop!
Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting
current!
nBoost_a Additional setpoint for the motor voltage at speed = 0
INT • The entire voltage-frequency characteristic is provided with an offset.
• Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V
Stop!
Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting
current!
nPWMAngleOffset Additional offset for the electrical angle of rotation
INT • If a torque is connected, e.g. dynamic acceleration processes can be generated.
• Scaling: ±32767 ≡ ±180 ° angle of rotation
362 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
MN
-nN nN n
-MN
TorqueMotLim
TorqueGenLim
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 363
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
Switch-off positioning
bJogCtrlInputSel1 Selection inputs for a binary coded selection of the switch-off position 1 ... 3
bJogCtrlInputSel2 • Activation of the signal pairs bJogCtrlSlowDown1/bJogCtrlStop1,
BOOL bJogCtrlSlowDown2/bJogCtrlStop2 or bJogCtrlSlowDown3/bJogCtrlStop3
according to the Truth table for activating the pre-switch off.
bJogCtrlRfgIn Ramping down of the setpoint generator in the downstream L_NSet FB according to
BOOL the Truth table for activating the pre-switch off
bJogCtrlJog1 Selection inputs for fixed changeover setpoints (JOG setpoints) for the main setpoint
bJogCtrlJog2 • If the pre-switch off is inactive (bJogCtrlInputSel1 and bJogCtrlInputSel2 are both
BOOL set to FALSE), the two control signals are passed through 1:1 to the downstream
FB L_NSet.
• To achieve the desired behaviour (starting at high speed, pre-switch off at low
speed), both inputs must be set to TRUE.
• Fixed setpoint 2 must be less than fixed setpoint 3!
Otherwise, the drive will start at a low speed and accelerate after the pre-switch
off.
• If in additional to the inputs bJogCtrlJog1 and bJogCtrlJog2 the selection inputs
bJogSpeed4 and bJogSpeed8 are assigned, different fixed setpoints can result
from this and the drive may travel with different speeds than selected via
bJogCtrlJog1 and bJogCtrlJog2.
bJogCtrlSlowDown1 Activation of fixed setpoint 2 in the downstream L_NSet FB
bJogCtrlSlowDown2 • These inputs only have a function if they have been previously activated via
bJogCtrlSlowDown3 bJogCtrlInputSel1 and bJogCtrlInputSel2 (see Truth table for activating the pre-
BOOL switch off).
bJogCtrlStop1 Ramping down of the ramp function generator in the downstream L_NSet FB
bJogCtrlStop2 • These inputs only have a function if they have been previously activated via
bJogCtrlStop3 bJogCtrlInputSel1 and bJogCtrlInputSel2 (see Truth table for activating the pre-
BOOL switch off).
bJogSpeed4 Selection inputs for fixed changeover setpoints (JOG setpoints) for the main setpoint
bJogSpeed8 • A fixed setpoint for the setpoint generator can be activated instead of the main
BOOL setpoint via these selection inputs.
• The selection inputs are binary coded.
• For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB.
bJogRamp1 ... bJogRamp8 Selection inputs for alternative acceleration/deceleration times for the main
BOOL setpoint
• The four selection inputs are binary coded, therefore 15 alternative
acceleration/deceleration times can be selected.
• For main setpoint nMainSetValue_a, the set acceleration time (C00012) and
deceleration time (C00013) are active in the case of the binary coded selection "0"
(all inputs = FALSE or not assigned).
• Alternative acceleration times are selected in C00101/1...15.
• The selection of the alternative deceleration times is carried out in C00103/1...15.
• For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet FB.
MCK basic functions
bMBrakeRelease Holding brake control: Release/apply brake
BOOL • In conjunction with the operating mode selected in C02580
(Lenze setting: "Brake control off").
FALSE Apply brake.
• During automatic operation, the internal brake logic controls the
brake.
TRUE Release brake manually (forced release).
• Note!
The brake can also be released if the controller is inhibited!
• During automatic operation, the internal brake logic is
deactivated and the brake is released (supervisor operation). If a
controller inhibit has been set by the brake control, it will be
deactivated.
• In semi-automatic operation, the brake is released including
feedforward control.
364 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
GP: GeneralPurpose
The following inputs are interconnected with logic/arithmetic functions on application level for free usage.
"GeneralPurpose" functions
nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a Analog switch: Input signals
nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a • The input signal selected via the selection input bGPAnalogSwitchSet is output at
INT output nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a.
bGPAnalogSwitchSet Analog switch: Selection input
BOOL
FALSE nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a = nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a
TRUE nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a = nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a
nGPArithmetikIn1_a Arithmetic: Input signals
nGPArithmetikIn2_a • The arithmetic function is selected in C00338.
INT • The result is output at output nGPArithmetikOut_a.
nGPMulDivIn_a Multiplication/Division: Input signal
INT • The factor for the multiplication can be set in C00699/1 (numerator) and
C00699/2 (denominator).
• The result is output at output nGPMulDivOut_a.
bGPDigitalDelayIn Binary delay element: Input signal
BOOL • The on-delay can be set in C00720/1.
• The off-delay can be set in C00720/2.
• The time-delayed input signal is output at output bGPDigitalDelayOut.
bGPLogicIn1 Binary logic: Input signals
bGPLogicIn2 • The logic operation is selected in C00820.
bGPLogicIn3 • The result is output at output bGPLogicOut.
BOOL
Free inputs
The following inputs can freely be interconnected on the application level.
The signals can be transferred from the I/O level to the application level via these inputs.
bFreeIn1 ... bFreeIn8 Free inputs for digital signals
BOOL
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 365
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
366 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Free outputs
The following outputs can freely be interconnected on the application level.
The signals from the application level can be transferred to the I/O level via these outputs.
bFreeOut1 ... bFreeOut8 Free outputs for digital signals
BOOL
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 367
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
368 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7.4.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
________________________________________________________________
7.4
7
The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_SwitchPos are interconnected to the
digital and analog input/output terminals of the drive controller in the different control modes.
TA "Switch-off positioning"
Technology applications
Control mode (C00007)
10: Terminals 0 12: Terminals 2 14: Terminals 11 16: Terminal 16 20: Keypad 21: PC 30: CAN 40: MCI
Digital input terminals
X4/RFR Controller enable Controller enable / Reset of error message
bFailReset
X4/DI1 Fixed setpoint 1/3 Stop function 1 Fixed setpoint 1/3 - - Stop function 1
bJogCtrlJog1 bJogCtrlStop1 bJogCtrlJog1 bJogCtrlStop1
X4/DI2 Fixed setpoint 2/3 Stop function 2 Selection: Pre-switch off Fixed setpoint 2/3 - - Selection: Pre-switch off 1
bJogCtrlJog2 bJogCtrlStop2 1 bJogCtrlJog2 bJogCtrlSlowDown 1
bJogCtrlSlowDown 1
X4/DI3 Reset error message CW rotation quick stop CW rotation quick stop - - Stop function 2
bFailReset bRLQCw bRLQCw bJogCtrlStop2
Selection: Switch-off position 1
bJogCtrlInputSel1
X4/DI4 Change of direction of CCW rotation quick stop CCW rotation quick stop - - Selection: Pre-switch off 2
rotation bRLQCcw bRLQCcw bJogCtrlSlowDown 2
bSetSpeedCcw Selection: Switch-off position 2
bJogCtrlInputSel2
Analog input terminals
X3/A1U, A1I Main speed setpoint - - Additional speed setpoint
nMainSetValue_a nAuxSetValue_a
10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011)
Digital output terminals
X4/DO1 - - - - - - - -
X101/COM, NO - - - - - - - -
Analog output terminal
X3/O1U - - - - - - - -
369
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
7.4.3.1 Terminals 0
X101
COM
NC
NO
X3
Speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable RFR
Fixed setpoint 1/3 DI1
Fixed setpoint 2/3 DI2
Reset error DI3
Change of direction of rotation DI4
DO1
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
370 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
7.4.3.2 Terminals 2
X101
COM
NC
NO
X3
Speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Stop function 1 DI1
Stop function 2 DI2
CW rotat. quick stop / selection: switch-off pos. 1 DI3
CCW rotat. quick stop / selection: switch-off pos. 2 DI4
DO1
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 371
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
7.4.3.3 Terminals 11
X101
COM
NC
NO
X3
Speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Stop function 1 DI1
Selection of pre-switch off 1 DI2
CW rotat. quick stop / selection: switch-off pos. 1 DI3
CCW rotat. quick stop / selection: switch-off pos. 2 DI4
DO1
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
372 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
7.4.3.4 Terminal 16
X101
COM
NC
NO
X3
Speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Fixed setpoint 1/3 DI1
Fixed setpoint 2/3 DI2
CW rotation quick stop DI3
CCW rotation quick stop DI4
DO1
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 373
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
7.4.3.5 Keypad
X101
COM
NC
NO
X3
AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DO1
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
374 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
7.4.3.6 PC
X101
COM
NC
NO
X3
AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DO1
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 375
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
7.4.3.7 CAN
X101
COM
NC
NO
X3
Additional speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Stop function 1 DI1
Selection of pre-switch off 1 DI2
Stop function 2 DI3
Selection of pre-switch off 2 DI4
DO1
GIO
LP_CanIn1 LP_CanOut1
-
wCtrl DriveControl wState DriveControlStatus
CG
CH
CL
Note!
You must set the setpoint arithmetic in C00190 to "1: NOut = NSet + NAdd" so that the
additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect.
376 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
7.4.3.8 MCI
X101
COM
NC
NO
X3
Additional speed setpoint AR
A1U
A1I
GA
O1U
External
supply X4
+ 24E
24 V DC =
24I
Controller enable / reset error RFR
Stop function 1 DI1
Selection of pre-switch off 1 DI2
Stop function 2 DI3
Selection of pre-switch off 2 DI4
DO1
GIO
CG
CH
CL
X1
LP_MciIn LP_MciOut
wCtrl DriveControl wState DriveControlStatus
wIn2 MainSetValue wOut2 MotorSpeedAct
wIn3...16 - wOut3 GPSignalOut1
wOut4...16 -
Note!
You must set the setpoint arithmetic in C00190 to "1: NOut = NSet + NAdd" so that the
additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 377
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
378 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
Bit 10 StatusCodeBit2
Bit 11 StatusCodeBit3
Bit 12 Warning 1 ≡ A warning is indicated
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 379
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
380 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
Related topics:
"GeneralPurpose" functions ( 385)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 381
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
If required, the subcodes of C00760 and C00761 serve to change the pre-configured assignment of
the application inputs:
LA_SwitchPos
L_JogCtrlExtension_1
bJogCtrlInputSel1 bInputSel1
C761/9
bJogCtrlInputSel2 bInputSel2
C761/10
bJogCtrlRfgIn bRfgIn bRfgOut
C761/11
bJogCtrlJog1 bJog1In bJog1Out
C761/12
bJogCtrlJog2 bJog2In bJog2Out
C761/13
bJogCtrlSlowDown1 bSlowDown1
C761/14
bJogCtrlStop1 bStop1
C761/15
bJogCtrlSlowDown2 bSlowDown2
C761/16
bJogCtrlStop2 bStop2
C761/17
bJogCtrlSlowDown3 bSlowDown3
C761/18
bJogCtrlStop3 bStop3
C761/19
LS_ParFree_a
C472/1 nPar1_a 20010 LS_MotorInterface
nPar2_a nSpeedSetValue_a nMotorSpeedAct_a nMotorSpeedAct_a
C472/2 20011 1205
nPar3_a nTorqueMotLim_a nTorqueMotLim_a nMotorTorqueAct_a nMotorTorqueAct_a
C472/3 20012 C760/6 1206
nPar4_a nTorqueGenLim_a nTorqueGenLim_a bLimCurrentSetVal bImaxActive
C472/4 20013 C760/7 1209
nVoltageAdd_a nVoltageAdd_a nStatorCurrentIS_a nMotorCurrent_a
C760/3 1203
nBoost_a nBoost_a nDCVoltage_a nDCVoltage_a
C760/4 1207
nMotorVoltage_a nMotorVoltage_a
1208
bQSPActive bQSPIsActive
LS_DigitalInput 1206 LS_DigitalOutput
bIn1 16000 C621/1 bRelay
bIn2 16001 LS_MotionControlKernel C621/2 bOut1
bSetDCBrake bDCBrakeOn nSpeedSetValue_a nMotorSpeedSet_a
bIn3 16002 C761/4 1204
bSetQuickstop bMBrakeReleaseOut bMBrakeReleaseOut
bIn4 16003 C761/3 1212
1 bQspOn bMBrakeReleased bMBrakeReleased
bCInh 16008 bRLQCw 1213
C761/7
RLQ
bRLQCcw
C761/8
1
bSetSpeedCcw
LS_ParFix C761/6
C_bTrue 20000
bMBrakeRelease bMBrakeRelease
C_nPos100_a 20000 C761/26
nPWMAngleOffset nPWMAngleOffset
C_nNeg100_a 20001 C760/5
wSMControl wSMCtrl
C_nPos199_9_a 20002 C760/17
C_nNeg199_9_a 20003
C_w65535 20004 LS_DriveInterface
wCANDriveControl wCANControl wDeviceStatusWord wDriveControlStatus
C_wDriveCtrl 20005 C760/1 1200
wMCIDriveControl wMCIControl wStateDetermFailNoLow wStateDetermFailNoLow
C760/2 1201
bCInh bCInh wStateDetermFailNoHigh wStateDetermFailNoHigh
C761/1 1202
bFailReset bFailReset bFail bDriveFail
C761/2 1200
bWarning bWarningActive
1201
bSafeTorqueOff bSafeTorqueOff
1202
bReady bDriveReady
1203
bCInhIsActive bCInhActive
1204
bImpIsActive bImpIsActive
1205
bCwCcw bSpeedCcw
1207
bNactCompare bSpeedActCompare
1208
[7-14] Pre-assignment of the "Switch-off positioning" application in the "Terminals 0" control mode
382 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
LA_SwitchPos
GeneralPurpose (GP) functions
nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a C00830/14
C760/10 0 nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a
nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a C00830/15 1209
C760/11 1
bGPAnalogSwitchSet C00833/13
C761/27
C00338 Out =
0 In1
1 In1 + In2
nGPArithmetikIn1_a C00830/12 In1 2 In1 - In2
C760/12
3 (In1 * In2) nGPArithmetikOut_a
1210
nGPArithmetikIn2_a C00830/13 In2 100%
C760/13 ±32767
4 (In1 * 1%) (±199.99%)
|In2|
5 (In1 * 100%)
(100% - In2)
bGPDigitalDelayIn C00833/66 In
C761/28
Out bGPDigitalDelayOut
1214
C00720/1 C00720/2
0
bGPLogicIn1 C00833/63 0
C761/29 & 1
bGPLogicIn2 C00833/64 1 bGPLogicOut
2
C761/30 1215
bGPLogicIn3 C00833/65 3
C761/31 4
>1 C00820
0 0 0 C00821/1
0 0 1 C00821/2
0 1 0 C00821/3
...
1 1 1 C00821/8
C00681 C00682
nGPCompareIn1_a C00830/16
C760/15 bGPCompareOut
nGPCompareIn2_a C00830/17 1216
C760/16
f = C00680
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 383
7 Technology applications
7.4 TA "Switch-off positioning"
________________________________________________________________
LA_SwitchPos
GeneralPurpose (GP) functions
C00410/1 C00413/1 C00413/2
nGPSignalOut1_a
1212
LA_SwitchPos
Free In/Out
bFreeIn1 bFreeOut1
C761/40 1228
bFreeIn2 bFreeOut2
C761/41 1229
bFreeIn3 bFreeOut3
C761/42 1230
bFreeIn4 bFreeOut4
C761/43 1231
bFreeIn5 bFreeOut5
C761/44 1232
bFreeIn6 bFreeOut6
C761/45 1233
bFreeIn7 bFreeOut7
C761/46 1234
bFreeIn8 bFreeOut8
Application
C761/47 1235
wFreeIn1 wFreeOut1
C760/22 1221
wFreeIn2 wFreeOut2
C760/23 1222
wFreeIn3 wFreeOut3
C760/24 1223
wFreeIn4 wFreeOut4
C760/25 1224
dnFreeIn1_p dnFreeOut1_p
1205
dnFreeIn2_p dnFreeOut2_p
1206
Related topics:
User-defined terminal assignment ( 289)
"GeneralPurpose" functions ( 385)
384 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.5 "GeneralPurpose" functions
________________________________________________________________
Each technology application provides different free logic and arithmetic functions, so-called
"GeneralPurpose" functions.
For the interconnection of these functions, the application block features inputs and outputs on the
I/O level, which are linked to the logic/arithmetic function.
Note!
In the Lenze setting, the connectors for the "GeneralPurpose" functions are hidden in the
function block editor.
• These connections can be shown via the Connector visibilities command in the
Context menu of the application block.
Tip!
The inputs of the "GeneralPurpose" functions can also be linked to other output signals via
the configuration parameters of the technology application.
On the other hand, the outputs of the "GeneralPurpose" functions can be selected in the
configuration parameters of other inputs.
Related topics:
User-defined terminal assignment ( 289)
TA "Actuating drive speed": Configuration parameters ( 322)
TA "Switch-off positioning": Configuration parameters ( 382)
This function switches between two analog input signals. The switch-over is controlled by a boolean
input signal.
nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a C00830/14
0 nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a
nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a C00830/15
C00833/13 1
bGPAnalogSwitchSet
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 385
7 Technology applications
7.5 "GeneralPurpose" functions
________________________________________________________________
7.5.2 Arithmetic
This function links two analog signals arithmetically. The arithmetic function can be parameterised.
C00338 Out =
0 In1
1 In1 + In2
nGPArithmetikIn1_a C00830/12 In1 2 In1 - In2
3 (In1 * In2) nGPArithmetikOut_a
nGPArithmetikIn2_a C00830/13 In2 100%
±32767
4 (In1 * 1%) (±199.99%)
|In2|
5 (In1 * 100%)
(100% - In2)
7.5.3 Multiplication/Division
This function multiplies an analog input signal with a parameterisable factor. The factor must be
selected in the form of a quotient (numerator and denominator).
386 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.5 "GeneralPurpose" functions
________________________________________________________________
This function timely delays binary signals. On-delay and off-delay can be parameterised separately.
bGPDigitalDelayIn C00833/66 In
Out bGPDigitalDelayOut
C00720/1 C00720/2
This function provides a binary output signal which is formed by a logic operation of the input
signals. Alternatively, you can also select a fixed binary value which is independent of the input
signals.
0
bGPLogicIn1 C00833/63 0
& 1
bGPLogicIn2 C00833/64 1 bGPLogicOut
2
bGPLogicIn3 C00833/65 3
4
>1 C00820
0 0 0 C00821/1
0 0 1 C00821/2
0 1 0 C00821/3
...
1 1 1 C00821/8
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 387
7 Technology applications
7.5 "GeneralPurpose" functions
________________________________________________________________
This function compares two analog signals and can be used e.g. to realise a trigger. The comparison
operation, hysteresis and window size can be parameterised.
C00681 C00682
nGPCompareIn1_a C00830/16
bGPCompareOut
nGPCompareIn2_a C00830/17
f = C00680
This function serves to output four binary signals selected from a list of all binary output signals
available in the drive controller. You can set an inversion of the output signals.
388 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
7 Technology applications
7.5 "GeneralPurpose" functions
________________________________________________________________
This function serves to output four analog signals selected from a list of all analog output signals
available in the drive controller. Offset and gain of the source signals can be adjusted.
7.5.9 D-FlipFlop
This function saves the logic status of the data input (1D) in case of an active clock edge at the clock
input (C1) and puts out its value in sequence at the output Q. If there is no active clock edge, the
input value is not accepted.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 389
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
________________________________________________________________
390 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.1 Basic signal flow
________________________________________________________________
The Motion Control Kernel is connected between setpoint generator (e.g. ramp generator, PID
process controller, etc.) and the motor control function in the case of the available technology
applications. For problem-free interaction of the Motion Control Kernel and motor control function,
the two associated system blocks LS_MotionControlKernel and LS_MotorInterface have interfaces
with corresponding inputs/outputs. These are visible in the FB Editor for monitoring purposes and
must be connected to each other:
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 391
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.2 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel"
________________________________________________________________
In the interconnection previously shown, the Motion Control Kernel monitors every interface. Some
of the signals such as a quick stop request or a DC-injection braking request are directly passed
through to the motor control. However, other signals are passed through or modified depending on
the operating mode (e.g. synchronising a setpoint selection via ramp function).
In the Function Block editor, the system block LS_MotionControlKernel provides the interfaces to
the Motion Control Kernel.
Inputs
392 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.2 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel"
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Holding braking is not possible when this braking mode is used!
Use the basic "Holding brake control" function for controlling the holding brake with
a low rate of wear.
FALSE Deactivate DC-injection braking.
TRUE Activate DC-injection braking, i.e. the drive is brought to a standstill
by means of DC-injection braking.
• The braking effect stops when the rotor is at standstill.
• After the hold time (C00107) has expired, the controller sets the
pulse inhibit.
bTorqueLimitAdaptOn Inputs of 8400 StateLine have no function!
nTorqueLimitAdapt_a
Control words
MCK: wMotionCtrl1 Inputs of 8400 StateLine have no function!
wMotionCtrl2
wAuxCtrl
wSMCtrl Interface to the optional safety system.
WORD • Setting control bit 0 ("SafeStop1") in this control word causes e.g. the automatic
deceleration of the drive to standstill within this application (in the Motion
Control Kernel).
• See the "Interface to safety system" subchapter for a detailed description of the
individual control bits.
Control and setpoint signals for Motion Control Kernel function
dnProfilePosition_p Inputs of 8400 StateLine have no function!
nSpeedAddValue_v
nSpeedOverride_a
nAccOverride_a
nSRampOverride_a
bLimitSwitchPos
bLimitSwitchNeg
bHomingMark
bMBrakeRelease Holding brake control:
BOOL Releasing/applying the brake in connection with the selected operating mode
FALSE Apply brake.
• During automatic operation, the internal brake logic controls the
brake.
TRUE Release brake manually (forced release).
• Note!
The brake can also be released if the controller is inhibited!
• During automatic operation, the internal brake logic is
deactivated and the brake is released (supervisor operation). If a
controller inhibit has been set by the brake control, it will be
deactivated.
• In semi-automatic operation, the brake is released including
feedforward control.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 393
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.2 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel"
________________________________________________________________
2
(-)nSetSpeed
T = 4 ms
TorqueValue2 0
1
1 nSpeedSetValue_a
Release brake
C02581/4
C02581/5
Close brake
0 t
C02581/1: Switching threshold
C02581/2: Hysteresis for release
C02581/3: Hysteresis for application
C02581/4: Starting value 1 for manual feedforward control
C02581/5: Starting value 2 for manual feedforward control
C02582/Bit 4: Selection of the feedforward control value (automatic/manual
selection)
nMBrakeAddValue_a Holding brake control:
INT Additive feedforward control value (speed or torque) in [%] for torque feedforward
(from version 11.00.00)
control when the respective control mode is started
• For speed control: 100 % ≡ reference speed (C00011)
• For torque control: 100 % ≡ maximum torque (C00057)
Feedforward control of the motor before release
bMBrakeApplied Holding brake control:
BOOL Input for status detection via switching contacts at the brake
(from version 11.00.00)
• Only effective if bit 5 in C02582 is set to "1".
FALSE Brake is released.
TRUE Brake is applied.
394 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.2 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel"
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 395
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.2 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel"
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
bMBrakeReleaseOut Trigger signal for switching element holding brake control via a digital output
BOOL • Use bit 0 in C02582 to activate inverted switching element triggering.
Holding brake control
FALSE Apply brake.
TRUE Release brake.
bMBrakeReleased "Brake released" status signal considering the brake release time
BOOL • When the holding brake is triggered to close, bMBrakeReleased is immediately set
to FALSE even if the brake closing time has not yet elapsed!
Holding brake control
TRUE Brake released (after the brake release time has expired).
396 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.2 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel"
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The internal "StandBy" operating mode is assumed if pulse inhibit, quick stop and/or DC-
injection braking are activated.
• No setpoint generation via the Motion Control Kernel in this operating mode.
• If the holding brake control sets a controller inhibit when the holding brake is closed,
the internal "StandBy" operating mode is not assumed.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 397
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.2 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel"
________________________________________________________________
Prio Condition
1
Setpoint generation through Motor control (MCTRL): '&%
• DCB = DC-injection braking
463
• QSP = quick stop
&,1+
• CINH = controller inhibit
2 "Safe stop 1" (SS1) requested '&%
Interface to safety system
463
&,1+
6DIH6WRS
6WDQG%\ 6SHHG)ROORZHU
6DIH6WRS
398 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.2 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel"
________________________________________________________________
For operation with optional safety system, the LS_MotionControlKernel system block has the
wSMCtrl input, This interface is used to transfer a control word by means of which the Motion
Control Kernel can be supplied with information on requested or active safety functions. The
Motion Control Kernel then initiates the necessary motion sequence (e.g. braking).
At the moment, only bit 0 in the wSMCtrl control word has a function. Additional functions are in
preparation:
If the request is reset during the down-ramping process (bit 0 = "10"), the behaviour depends on
the active operating mode:
• In the "Speed follower" operating mode, direct synchronisation with the target speed takes
place with the ramp time set in C02610/2.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 399
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.3 Speed follower
________________________________________________________________
The 8400 StateLine controller only supports the "speed follower" operating mode where the drive
follows a speed setpoint.
In the »Engineer», you can set the initial limit by means of the dialog box Min/Max speed.
• Open the Min/max speed dialog box by opening the Application Parameters tab and clicking on
the following button on the dialog level Overview Signal flow:
400 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.3 Speed follower
________________________________________________________________
The speed setpoint is selected via the nSpeedSetValue_a process input and additively via the
nSpeedAddValue_v process input.
• Usually, the ramp generator L_NSet and, optionally, the process controller L_PCTRL are
upstream of the nSpeedSetValue_a process input.
• The speed setpoint is limited internally to the speed limits set in C02611/1...4.
nSpeedSetValue_a nSpeedSetValue_a_
v
C02611/1
0
C02611/2
Sync
C02610/2 C02
1
610
/2
t
Sync
C02611/3
C02611/4
Setpoint range
Synchronisation range
[8-4] Example: Speed setpoint generation in the "Speed follower" operating mode (with nSpeedAddValue_v = 0)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 401
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Danger!
Please note that the holding brake is an important element of the safety concept of the
entire machine.
Thus, proceed very carefully when commissioning this system part!
Stop!
Holding brakes on Lenze motors are not intended for braking during operation. The
increased wear caused by braking during operation can destroy the motor holding
brake!
Note!
• Deactivate automatic DC-injection braking when a holding brake is used!
• For this purpose, go to C00019 and set the Auto DCB threshold to "0".
• Background: Controller inhibit is already activated by the holding brake control.
• If an electrically holding (self-releasing) brake is to be controlled instead of an
electrically released (self-holding) brake, the trigger signal must be inverted!
Functional settings ( 408)
• Detailed information on mounting and electrical installation of the motor holding
brake can be found in the documentation on the motor holding brake.
Intended use
Motor holding brakes are used to lock axes if the controller is inhibited or in case of "mains off"
system status. This is not only important for vertical axes but also for e.g. horizontal axes which may
cause various problems if the motion is not controlled.
Examples:
• Loss of the reference information after mains OFF and further spinning of the drive.
• Collision with other moving machine parts.
402 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
In the function block editor, the LS_MotionControlKernel system block provides the following
internal interfaces for the basic function "holding brake control":
Inputs
bMBrakeRelease Releasing/applying the brake in connection with the selected operating mode
BOOL
FALSE Apply brake.
• During automatic operation, the internal brake logic controls the
brake.
TRUE Release brake manually (forced release).
• Note!
The brake can also be released if the controller is inhibited!
• During automatic operation, the internal brake logic is
deactivated and the brake is released (supervisor operation). If a
controller inhibit has been set by the brake control, it will be
deactivated.
• In semi-automatic operation, the brake is released including
feedforward control.
bMBrakeStartValue2 Selection of the torque feedforward control value
BOOL Feedforward control of the motor before release
(from version 11.00.00)
FALSE Starting value 1 is active (see the following figure).
TRUE Starting value 2 is active (see the following figure).
Creation of the feedforward control value for the release process of the brake:
Signal path for motor control with feedback
Signal path for motor control without feedback
Feedforward control value
bBrakeStartValue2
0 S&H (Retain)
C02582 - Bit 4
nMotorTorqueAct_a TorqueValue1 0
(+)nSetSpeed 1 nBrkAddValue_a
2
(-)nSetSpeed
T = 4 ms
TorqueValue2 0
1
1 nSpeedSetValue_a
Release brake
C02581/4
C02581/5
Close brake
0 t
C02581/1: Switching threshold
C02581/2: Hysteresis for release
C02581/3: Hysteresis for application
C02581/4: Starting value 1 for manual feedforward control
C02581/5: Starting value 2 for manual feedforward control
C02582/Bit 4: Selection of the feedforward control value (automatic/manual
selection)
nMBrakeAddValue_a Additive feedforward control value (speed or torque) in [%] for torque feedforward
INT control when the respective control mode is started
(from version 11.00.00)
• For speed control: 100 % ≡ reference speed (C00011)
• For torque control: 100 % ≡ maximum torque (C00057)
Feedforward control of the motor before release
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 403
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
bMBrakeApplied Input for status detection via switching contacts at the brake
BOOL • Only effective if bit 5 in C02582 is set to "1".
(from version 11.00.00)
FALSE Brake is released.
TRUE Brake is applied.
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
bMBrakeReleaseOut Trigger signal for switching element holding brake control via a digital output
BOOL • Use bit 0 under C02582 to activate inverted switching element triggering.
Functional settings
FALSE Apply brake.
TRUE Release brake.
bMBrakeReleased "Brake released" status signal considering the brake release time
BOOL • When the holding brake is triggered to close, bMBrakeReleased is immediately set
to FALSE even if the brake closing time has not yet elapsed!
TRUE Brake released (after the brake release time has expired).
Stop!
The digital outputs are not suitable for the "direct" control of a holding brake!
• Connect the digital output connected to the trigger signal bMBrakeReleaseOut with a
relay or power contactor which switches the brake supply.
• When a power contactor is used, the response and release time of the earth contact is
added to the response and release time of the brake. Both times must also be
considered for parameterising the closing and opening time of the holding brake
404 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Danger!
A faultless brake control function requires a correct setting of the different deceleration
times in the following parameters!
A wrong setting of the delay times can cause a faulty control of the brake!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 405
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Note!
In the Lenze setting, the mode 0 is preset to get into a safe state after the mains is
switched on.
Tip!
You can use mode 11 to easily check if the brake switches correctly.
406 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Danger!
In this mode, the input bMBrakeRelease should be permanently set to FALSE unless
manual release (supervisor operation) is required.
If the bMBrakeRelease input is set to TRUE, the brake is released immediately, even if the
controller is inhibited!
• If the requested speed setpoint reaches a parameterisable upper speed threshold that allows
traversing of the drive, the brake will be released and operation enabled.
• On the other hand, if speed setpoint and actual speed fall below a parameterisable lower speed
threshold, the brake will be applied under consideration of different time parameters.
• The brake will also be activated automatically if quick stop is activated in the drive, e.g. by a
device command or as response to an error, and in the event of controller inhibit or pulse inhibit.
• After automatic brake activation and expiration of the brake application time, the controller is
inhibited automatically by the basic "Holding brake control" function.
Tip!
The 2/12 mode is the usual mode to control the brake.
Related topics:
TroubleQSP ( 92)
Behaviour in case of pulse inhibit ( 417)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 407
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
408 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Related topics:
Behaviour in case of pulse inhibit ( 417)
Feedforward control of the motor before release ( 418)
Stop!
Do not set the lower speed threshold for closing the brake too high to prevent excessive
wear of the brake!
Note!
When comparing speeds, only the absolute value of the motor speed and not the
direction of rotation is considered.
Tip!
The lower speed threshold for brake application should be set to approximately 5 ... 20 % of
the maximum speed to minimise the wear of the brake and provide for an optimum brake
reaction by a low grinding of the brake.
Related topics:
Process when brake is released ( 414)
Process when brake is closed ( 415)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 409
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Danger!
A wrong setting of the application and release time can cause a faulty control of the
brake!
• If the application time is set too low, the controller is inhibited and the drive becomes
torqueless before the brake is applied completely.
[8-5] Definition of the application and release time with the example of the PM brake
Tip!
The application and release times do not only vary between the brake types but also
depend on the basic conditions in the plant:
• Parameters of the hardware (cable length, temperature, level of supply voltage etc.)
• Contact elements used (brake module or contactor at the digital output)
• Type of overvoltage limitation/suppressor circuit
For optimisation purposes, detect in individual cases the response times by measurement.
410 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
[8-6] Oscillogram 1: Current characteristic for the application of a mechanical holding brake (application time: 10.7 ms)
[8-7] Oscillogram 2: Current characteristic for the release of a mechanical holding brake (release time: 36.8 ms)
Related topics:
Process when brake is released ( 414)
Process when brake is closed ( 415)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 411
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Example:
A setpoint of 90 % is selected via the ramp function generator while the brake is applied (controller
is inhibited).
1. At the set ramp (in most cases C00012), the ramp function generator ramps up to 90 %.
2. The brake identifies the setpoint selection of 5 % (release switching threshold). The feedforward
control of the brake provides 3 % of the setpoint and will not report the release of the brake after
approx. 1 s has expired.
Conclusion: 90 % of the selected setpoint is already ramped up while the brake is only providing 3
% of the setpoint via the feedforward control.
Since at this point a step change from 3 % to 90 % may cause mechanical jerks, the setpoint is
ramped up from 3 % to 90 %, using the ramp time set in C02610/1 (Lenze setting: 2 s).
Our example is based on the V/f characteristic control mode (VFCplus). However, ramping up to a
setpoint that is out of reach is carried out for all motor control modes because there is always a
mechanical/electric delay when controlling a holding brake.
This delay is due to:
• Motor magnetisation (in the case of servo control only)
• Mechanical delay of all switching elements connected upstream to the holding brake
• Mechanical delay of the holding brake itself
• Generation of the holding torque by the motor
Related topics:
Process when brake is released ( 414)
412 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
[8-8] Considering the motor magnetising time taking the PM brake as an example
Related topics:
Process when brake is released ( 414)
Note!
In the Lenze setting, the actual speed time monitoring is deactivated (C02593/1 = "0 s"),
i.e. the brake will only be applied when the actual speed has reached the lower switching
threshold.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 413
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Time diagram
Feedforward control
Setpoint synchronisation
Follow setpoint
0 1 2
nSpeedSetValue_a
nSpeedSetValue_a_
0
t
bMBrakeReleaseOut
t
bMBrakeReleased
t
CINH
t
Related topics:
Feedforward control of the motor before release ( 418)
414 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
1. The motor is decelerated when the setpoint is reduced by the user (e.g. turn down the
potentiometer, setpoint selection via CAN).
• The motor can also be decelerated by the "Quick stop" function or by "DC-injection braking",
either directly requested by the user or as response to an error.
2. If the speed setpoint and the actual speed have fallen below the lower speed threshold or only
the speed setpoint has fallen below the lower speed threshold and the actual value monitoring
time has expired:
• The bMBrakeReleaseOut trigger signal for the holding brake switching element is set to FALSE
for closing the brake.
• The bMBrakeReleased status signal is reset to FALSE.
• The brake application time starts to expire.
3. After the brake application time has expired, the controller is inhibited.
4. After the waiting time set in C02589/3 has additionally expired, the status monitoring starts
again (if activated via bit 5 in C02582).
5. In order to prevent the drive from further rotating/accelerating in the event of an error of the
feedback contact, controller inhibit is cancelled again and the drive is held at standstill in a
speed-controlled manner.
Time diagrams
Feedforward control
0 0
nSpeedSetValue_a
nSpeedSetValue_a_
0
t
bMBrakeReleaseOut
t
bMBrakeReleased
t
CINH
t
C02581/1: Switching threshold
C02581/2: Hysteresis for release
C02581/3: Hysteresis for application
C02593/2: Application delay
C02589/1: Application time
[8-10] Close holding brake in automatic mode via speed threshold (actual value = setpoint)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 415
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Feedforward control
0 0
nSpeedSetValue_a
nMotorSpeedAct_a
nSpeedSetValue_a_
0
t
bMBrakeReleaseOut
t
bMBrakeReleased
t
CINH
t
C02581/1: Switching threshold
C02581/2: Hysteresis for release
C02581/3: Hysteresis for application
C02593/2: Application delay
C02593/1: Actual value monitoring time
C02589/1: Application time
[8-11] Close holding brake in automatic mode with actual value monitoring time (C02593/1 > 0 s)
416 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Setting the pulse inhibit causes a load-controlled coasting of the motor until the pulse is enabled
again. In the enabled controller, the pulse can be inhibited e.g. due to a DC overvoltage, DC
undervoltage or the "Safe torque off" request.
The brake response to pulse inhibit can be parameterised under C02582.
Stop!
For parameterising the response to pulse inhibit in C02582, the energy conditions of the
machine should be evaluated first.
The energy stored in the machine can be considerably higher than the permissible
switching energy and thus lead to the destruction of the brake if applied directly!
Danger!
This behaviour is valid in (semi) automatic operation when the bMBrakeRelease input is
set to FALSE.
When the bMBrakeRelease input is set to TRUE (supervisor operation) in automatic
mode, the brake is not applied at pulse inhibit!
Related topics:
Functional settings ( 408)
Switching thresholds ( 409)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 417
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
The motor is precontrolled by selecting the lower speed threshold for applying the brake. When the
upper speed threshold for brake release is reached, the motor is precontrolled for 200 ms with the
lower threshold value before the brake switches to the release mode.
Here, the direction of the feedforward control depends on two conditions:
1. On the settings selected under C02582:
• Bit 2 = feedforward control inverted
• Bit 3 = direction of the axis
2. On the sign of the setpoint.
inverted
(C02582: Bit 2 = 1) 0
Q
P
inverted
(C02582: Bit 2 = 1) 0
Q
P
n<0 Q
418 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
8 Basic drive functions (MCK)
8.4 Holding brake control
________________________________________________________________
Related topics:
Functional settings ( 408)
Switching thresholds ( 409)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 419
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.1 Basics on error handling in the controller
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
For many device errors, the error type and hence the response of the controller to the error
can be parameterised. Setting the error response ( 438)
420 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.2 LED status displays
________________________________________________________________
CAN-RUN
Information on some of the operating states can be quickly obtained via the
LED display on the front of the controller.
CAN-ERR
DRV-RDY
DRV-ERR
Related topics:
Device control (DCTRL) ( 72)
Device state machine and device states ( 84)
System bus "CAN on board" ( 488)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 421
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.2 LED status displays
________________________________________________________________
CAN-RUN
The two LEDs "DRV-RDY" and "DRV-ERR" on the front of the controller are
triggered depending on the device status.
CAN-ERR
DRV-RDY The meaning can be seen from the table below.
DRV-ERR
Legend
Meaning of the symbols used to describe the LED states:
LED is flashing once approx. every 3 seconds (slow flash)
LED is permanently on
Related topics:
Device state machine and device states ( 84)
422 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.3 Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer«
________________________________________________________________
When an online connection to the controller has been established, the connected controller can be
diagnosed and relevant actual controller states can be displayed in a clearly arranged visualisation
using the »Engineer«.
Button Function
Acknowledge error message (if the error cause has been eliminated).
Display the internal state machine including the current device status.
Display details of the status determining error.
Display details of the current error.
Display all active sources of a controller inhibit.
Display all active sources of a quick stop.
Monitoring... Configure the Monitoring. ( 436)
Drive control... Display the bit assignment of the following control-related words:
• MCI control word (C00136/1)
• CAN control word (C00136/2)
• Cause of controller inhibit (C00158)
• Cause of quick stop (C00159)
• Status word (C00150)
• Status word 2 (C00155)
Device information... Display identification data, e.g. firmware information or serial number of individual
controller components.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 423
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.3 Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer«
________________________________________________________________
2. Click the icon or select the OnlineGo online command to build up an online
connection with the controller.
3. Select the Diagnostics tab.
• With an online connection, the Diagnostics tab displays current status information
about the controller.
Tip!
The online connection to the controller can be established via the following device
interfaces:
• CAN interface X1
Diagnostics via the System bus "CAN on board" ( 488)
• X6 diagnostic interface
We recommend this diagnostic connection when the X1 CAN interface is used for
process communication.
424 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.3 Drive diagnostics with the »Engineer«
________________________________________________________________
If you go to the Diagnostics tab and click the button for the status determining or current error,
the Error details dialog box displays further information on the error:
• Click the Help about error... button to open the online help with information on the error cause
and possible remedies.
Related topics:
Structure of the 32-bit error number (bit coding) ( 444)
Structure of the 16 bit error number (bit coding) ( 447)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 425
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.4 Drive diagnostics via keypad/bus system
________________________________________________________________
Controller is enabled.
Warning is active
426 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.4 Drive diagnostics via keypad/bus system
________________________________________________________________
Display parameters
The parameters listed in the following tables serve to query current states and actual values of the
controller for diagnostic purposes, e.g. by using the keypad, a bus system or the »Engineer« (with an
online connection to the controller).
• These parameters are listed in the »Engineer« parameter list and the keypad in the Diagnostics
category.
• A detailed description of these parameters can be found in the chapter "Parameter reference"
( 590).
Parameter Display
C00051 MCTRL: Actual speed value
C00052 Motor voltage
C00053 DC-bus voltage
C00054 Motor current
C00056/1 Torque demand
C00056/2 Actual torque value
C00058 Output frequency
C00061 Heatsink temperature
C00064/1 Device utilisation (Ixt)
C00064/2 Device utilisation (Ixt) 15s
C00064/3 Device utilisation (Ixt) 3 min
C00133 Brake resistor utilisation
C00136/1 MCI control word
C00136/2 CAN control word
C00137 Device status
C00138/1 SYS control signals
C00138/2 MCK control signals
C00138/3 FWM control signals
C00150 Status word
C00158 Cause of controller inhibit
C00159 Cause of quick stop QSP
C00165/1 Status determining error (displayed as a numeric text)
C00165/2 Current error (displayed as a numeric text)
C00168 Status determining error (display of 32-bit number)
C00170 Current error
C00166/1 Error type, status determining
C00166/2 Error subject area, status determining
C00166/3 Error ID, status determining
C00166/4 Error type, current
C00166/5 Error subject area, current
C00166/6 Error ID, current
C00177/1 Switching cycles mains switching
C00177/2 Switching cycles output relay
C00177/3 Stress counter - short circuit
C00177/4 Stress counter - earth fault
C00177/5 Stress meter clamp
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 427
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.4 Drive diagnostics via keypad/bus system
________________________________________________________________
Parameter Display
C00177/6 STO counter after power-on
C00177/7 DigIn CINH counter after power-on
C00177/8 IMP counter after power-on
C00178 Time the controller was enabled (elapsed-hour meter)
C00179 Power-up time (power-on time meter)
C00180/1 Running time - control card
C00180/2 Running time - heatsink fan
C00180/3 Running time - internal fan
Identification data
The parameters listed in the following table belong to the Identification category of the »Engineer«
parameter list and the keypad and serve to display the identification data of the controller:
Parameter Display
C00099 Firmware version (as a string)
C00199/1 Device name
Automatic acceptance of the device name in the »Engineer«
C00200 Firmware product type
C00201/1...6 Firmware of the control card and the power section
C00203/1...9 Product type code of the individual device components
C00204/1...9 Serial numbers of the individual device components
428 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.5 Logbook
________________________________________________________________
9.5 Logbook
The integrated logbook function of the controller chronologically logs important events within the
system and plays an important role for troubleshooting and controller diagnostics.
Information saved
For each event, the following information is saved in the logbook:
• Type of response to the event (e.g. fault, warning or information)
• Subject area that activated the event (e.g. CAN or USER).
• Event
• Value of power-on time meter
• Selected process values (analog % signals, binary signals)
Memory depth
Maximum number of logbook entries:
• 8400 StateLine: 15 logbook entries
• 8400 HighLine/TopLine: 50 logbook entries
Q
Note!
In the event of a supply voltage failure, the logbook is saved and reloaded automatically
when the controller is switched on. This ensures that the error history of the device does
not get lost. For this reason it is very important to act with caution when deleting the
logbook entries.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 429
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.5 Logbook
________________________________________________________________
The logbook adds new entries to the ring buffer after they have been passed through a
parameterisable filter. This filter helps you to exclude certain events from being entered into the
logbook which would trigger a certain error response (fault, trouble, warning, information, etc.).
C00169 (bit 1 ... bit 6) includes a bit coded specification of the events which are to be entered into
the logbook. In the Lenze setting, all events are entered into the logbook.
Note!
Events with the "No response" setting are not entered into the logbook.
9.5.3 Automatic recording of device-internal signals at the time the error occurs
For purposes of error analysis, two optional device-internal digital signals and an analog signal
(16 bit) can be recorded at the time the error occurs.
• The digital signals to be recorded are selected in C00163/1 and C00163/2.
• Scaling of the value recorded: 0 ≡ FALSE; 1 ≡ TRUE
• The analog signal to be recorded is selected in C00164/1.
• Scaling of the value recorded: 16384 ≡ 100 %
430 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.5 Logbook
________________________________________________________________
With an online connection, the existing logbook entries can easily be displayed in the »Engineer«.
Alternatively, the logbook entries can also be read out via the corresponding parameters (e.g. using
the keypad).
Note!
Reading out the logbook entries is only permissible by one engineering tool at a time!
• If the logbook entries are tried to be read out via two engineering tools at the same
time, missing lines or a permanent refresh may be caused.
• The parameter interface for reading out the logbook by an external
control/visualisation, is available as well.Reading out the logbook from an external
control/visualisation ( 434)
2. Click the icon or select the OnlineGo online command to build up an online
connection with the controller.
3. Select the Diagnostics tab from the Workspace.
4. Click Logbook.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 431
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.5 Logbook
________________________________________________________________
Button Function
Reset filters Reset set filter criteria to display all available logbook entries.
Export... Export the entries available in the logbook into a *.log file.
Exporting logbook entries to a file ( 432)
File in project File the current logbook in the Engineer project to be able to access it offline,
too.
Storing the logbook in the project ( 433)
Delete Delete all entries available in the logbook.
Configure... Open parameterisation dialog for configuring the logbook.
>> more details Show more details:
• Analog value 1, digital values 1 & 2
• More output types of the error numbers (32-bit, internal 32-bit and
internal 16-bit).
• Instead of the >> more details button, the << less details is now displayed
via which the details can be hidden again.
Help Open online help for the logbook.
Reset error Acknowledge existing error message if the error cause has been eliminated
and thus the error is not pending anymore.
• After the reset (acknowledgement) of the current error, further errors
may be pending which must also be reset.
Close Close the Logbook dialog box again.
432 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.5 Logbook
________________________________________________________________
If you want to display the currently available logbook entries at a later date in offline mode, i.e.
without a connection to the controller, you can store the current logbook in the project.
• The logbook with all the entries uploaded up to now is stored in the Engineer project
independent of the set filter criteria.
• A logbook of the same device already stored before will be overwritten without querying the
user.
• The filter settings are not stored in the project.
• When a logbook is filed in the project, the logbook can also be opened in offline mode via the
Logbook button on the Diagnostics tab.
Note!
Storing the logbook changes the project.
• When the project is closed, you are asked to save the changed project.
• Only if the changed project is saved, the new logbook entries stored in the project
remain stored.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 433
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.5 Logbook
________________________________________________________________
The parameters described in the following provide a second interface via which an external control
or visualisation can exclusively access the logbook and read out logbook contents. Logbook contents
can even be read out via this additional interface if the logbook is read out by the »Engineer« or
»EASY Starter« at the same time.
• The line index of the logbook entry to be read out has to be set In C00191/1.
• Then the logbook entry addressed is stored as "OCTET STRING" in C00192/1.
• Via this display parameter, the logbook entry can be read out by the control.
• The "OCTET STRING" has a length of 8 double words of 4 successive bytes (= 32 bytes),
starting with byte 0 in each case:
434 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.5 Logbook
________________________________________________________________
• Additionally, a read access to different individual elements of the logbook entry addressed can
be executed via the subcodes of C00193. These parameters have a uniform data format (32 bits)
and represent the most important part of the logbook data:
Parameter Display
C00193/1 Response index, reference to the index requested (C00191/1)
C00193/2 Error activity flag (0 = error not active; 1 = error active)
C00193/3 Error counter (0 ... 255)
• This information depends on the logbook configuration. In the Lenze setting the logbook
configured so that identical errors do not produce a new line entry, but a counter is
incremented for this error.
C00193/4 Error type (bits 26 ... 29 of the 32-bit error number)
C00193/5 Error subject area + error ID (bits 0 ... 25 of the 32-bit error number)
C00193/6 Time in [s] during which the power was switched on (power-on time meter).
Note!
• In the case of a simultaneous read access to the logbook entry (C00192/1) and its
individual elements (C00193/x), the line index in C00191/1 must only be reset by the
control after the read process is fully completed. Otherwise the data read are
inconsistent.
• Depending on the device version, the maximum number of logbook entries can vary:
• 8400 StateLine: 15 logbook entries
• 8400 HighLine/TopLine: 50 logbook entries
Basic workflow
5HDG/RJOLQH
&
/RJOLQH
1R UHVSRQVHLQGH[
/RJOLQH
LQGH["
<HV
Related topics:
Structure of the 32-bit error number (bit coding)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 435
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.6 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
9.6 Monitoring
The controller is provided with various monitoring functions which protect the drive against
impermissible operating conditions.
• If a monitoring function responds,
• an entry will be made into the Logbook of the controller,
• the response (TroubleQSP, Warning, Fault, etc.) set for this monitoring function will be
triggered,
• the status of the internal device control changes according to the selected response,
controller inhibit is set, and the "DRV- ERR" LED on the front of the controller goes on:
Trouble
TroubleQSP
WarningLocked
Warning
Information OFF
System fault Mains
switching
is required!
Related topics:
LED status displays of the device status ( 422)
Device state machine and device states ( 84)
Device overload monitoring (Ixt) ( 238)
Motor overload monitoring (I2xt) ( 239)
Motor temperature monitoring (PTC) ( 242)
Brake resistor monitoring (I2xt) ( 243)
Motor phase failure monitoring ( 245)
Mains phase failure monitoring ( 248)
Maximum current monitoring ( 248)
Maximum torque monitoring ( 249)
Encoder open-circuit monitoring ( 250)
436 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.6 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Related topics:
Setting the error response ( 438)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 437
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.6 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
When a monitoring function responds, the response set for this monitoring function (TroubleQSP,
Warning, Fault, etc.) will be triggered.
• For many monitoring functions the response can be individually parameterised via parameters.
Tip!
The table in the chapter "Short overview (A-Z)" contains the error messages for which the
response can be set. ( 450)
Warning thresholds
Some of the monitoring functions are activated if a defined warning threshold (e.g. temperature)
has been exceeded.
• The corresponding preset threshold values can be changed via the following parameters:
Parameter Info
C00120 Setting of motor overload (I²xt)
C00123 Device utilisat. threshold (Ixt)
C00572 Brake resistor overload threshold
C00599 Motor phase failure threshold
438 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.6 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
The AutoFailReset function serves to automatically reset the latching "Fault" and "TroubleQSP"
errors as well as the latching "WarningLocked" warning.
The "latching" term means that the effect on the controller remains active even after the error cause
has been removed.
To reset latching errors and warnings, the following options are available:
• Manual reset
• with device command C00002/19 (activated by Low-High edge)
• by a Low-High edge at the bResetFail input of the LS_DriveInterface (the "FailReset" control
bit in the control word must be parameterised with a value of "1").
• Automatic reset
• using the AutoFailReset function.
Parameter Info
C00184 Repetition time of the error reset processes
C00185 Time left until the next error reset process
C00186 Max. number of permissible unsuccessful error reset processes
• When the number set is reached, the response parameterised in C00189
is executed.
C00187 Current number of unsuccessful error reset processes carried out
C00188 Configuration of the AutoFailReset function
• 0: Off
• 1: Fault + TroubleQSP
• 2: WarningLocked
• 3: All locking
C00189 Response after max. number of unsuccessful error reset processes has been
reached
Highlighted in grey = display parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 439
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.7 Maloperation of the drive
________________________________________________________________
440 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.7 Maloperation of the drive
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 441
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.7 Maloperation of the drive
________________________________________________________________
442 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.8 Operation without mains supply
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Observe the following restrictions for operation without mains supply:
Safety state
Controllers of the 8400 series can be optionally equipped with the integrated "Safe
torque off (STO)" safety system.
• Up to and including version 13.xx.xx, the following applies:
If merely the external 24-V supply of the controller is switched on, the "Safe torque
off" status in C00137 (bit 10) will not be updated.
• From version 14.00.00 the following applies:
If merely the external 24-V supply of the controller is switched on, the "Safe torque
off" status in C00137 (bit 10) will be updated.
Fan monitoring functions
The fan monitoring functions are only active if the mains supply is switched on.
The following display parameters have a value of "0" if the mains supply is switched off and the
external 24 V supply of the controller is switched on:
Parameter Info
C00050 MCTRL: Speed setpoint
C00051 MCTRL: Actual speed value
C00052 Motor voltage
C00053 DC-bus voltage
C00054 Motor current
C00058 Output frequency
C00061 Heatsink temperature
C00064/1...3 Device utilisation (Ixt)
C00066 Thermal motor load (I²xt)
C00177 Switching cycles
C00725 Current switching frequency
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 443
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
This chapter describes all error messages of the controller operating system and possible causes &
remedies.
Tip!
Each error message is also saved to the logbook in chronological order. Logbook ( 429)
If an error occurs in the controller, the internal fault memory saves a 32-bit value which contains the
following information:
Reserved
0 1 2 3 Error type
Bit 31 30 29 26 25 16 15 0
Error subject area
Error ID
[9-1] Structure of the error number
444 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Error type
Bit 31 30 29 26 25 16 15 0
The error type gives information about the behaviour/response of the controller to the error. The
error type for some device errors can also be parameterised.
The error subject area indicates the internal "function unit" of the controller in which the error has
occurred:
Error ID
Bit 31 30 29 26 25 16 15 0
16-bit value (0 ... 65535) for error identification within the error subject area.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 445
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
00001000011110110000000000001111
446 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
In addition to the 32-bit error number, a 16-bit error number is generated if an error occurs. It
consists of the following information:
Reserved
0 1 2 Error subject area
Bit15 14 8 7 0
Error ID
The error subject area indicates the internal "function unit" of the controller in which the error has
occurred.
Note!
Due to the smaller value range (0 ...127), the number assignment to the error subject
area differs from the 32-bit error number.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 447
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Error ID
Bit15 14 8 7 0
8-bit value (0 ... 255) for error identification within the error subject area.
Tip!
All possible 16-bit error numbers are listed in the table "Short overview (A-Z)" in the second
column. ( 450)
An error message with the response "Fault", "Trouble", "TroubleQSP" or "Warning locked" must be
explicitly reset (acknowledged) after the cause of the error has been eliminated.
Tip!
When an online connection to the controller has been established, use the Diagnostics tab
of »Engineer« and click Reset error to reset a pending error message.
448 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
All error texts of the controller can be exported into a text file (*.txt) for further processing.
• The error text is preceded with the corresponding 32-bit error number (no error type) and the
16-bit error number, both as decimal number.
• If there is no corresponding 16-bit error number for a 32-bit error number, the field remains
empty.
Example
Output of the German and English error texts:
Tip!
From version 13.00.00, the 32-bit number of the state-determining error is displayed in
C00162/1 without error type.
If, for instance, the error texts are stored in a master control or on an operator panel, the
error text to be displayed can be detected by reading the C00162/1 code.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 449
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
The table below contains all error messages of the controller operating system in alphabetical order.
Note!
For the sake of legibility, the Logbook and C00165 display the error number with the
following syntax:
[Error type].[Error subject area no.].[Error ID]
In this documentation, "xx", a wildcard, stands for the error type since it is configurable
for many error messages.
Tip!
If you click the cross-reference in the first column, "Error number", you will reach the
detailed description of the respective error message in the following chapter "Cause &
possible remedies". ( 453)
450 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 451
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
* Only the lower 8 bits of the adjustable error ID (C161/x) can be used.
452 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
This chapter contains all error messages of the controller operating system in numerical order of the
error numbers. The list provides detailed information on the response to the error message as well
as information on the cause & possible remedies.
Note!
For the sake of legibility, the Logbook and C00165 display the error number with the
following syntax:
[Error type].[Error subject area no.].[Error ID]
In this documentation, "xx", a wildcard, stands for the error type since it is configurable
for many error messages.
Tip!
A list of all error messages of the controller operating system in alphabetical order can be
found in the previous chapter "Short overview (A-Z)" ( 450).
Cause Remedy
One mains phase of a three-phase supply has failed. Check mains connection (terminal X100).
Cause Remedy
Too frequent mains switching of the power section. The error must be acknowledged by mains switching.
• The device recognises if the power section is switched The charging circuit can only cool down when the mains
on and off too frequently. is switched off.
• To protect internal charging connections from • After switching the mains 3 times in one minute,
destruction, the device reports this error and prevents there must be a switching pause of 9 minutes.
the controller inhibit. All other functions are active. • Cyclic mains switching every 3 minutes is permissible.
Use of a power supply module in the DC-bus connection, From version 12.00.00 onwards, this power supply
the DC terminals of which are connected downstream to module can be used in the DC-bus connection by
the charging connection for the voltage DC bus (e.g. enabling it via C02865 (bit 8).
9400 from 45 kW). Note:
For further configuration of devices in the DC-bus
connection with 8400, the DC terminals of which are
connected downstream to the charging connection for
the voltage DC bus (e.g. 9400 from 45 kW with 8400)
contact Lenze.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 453
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
After switching on the device, the 24V supply voltage for With internal supply voltage via the power electronics,
the control electronics is too low (100 ms after switch-on the controller must be replaced.
U is < 19V). With external supply voltage, check the correct
• The current supply voltage is displayed in C00065. connection and/or the stability of the supply voltage.
Cause Remedy
In order to protect the device from overload, the • Check whether all mains phases are connected (a 2-
following device outputs have a hardware detection in phase supply may be existent).
the mains input: 7.5 kW, 11 kW, 15 kW, 30 kW, 37 kW, 45 • Provide for sufficient cooling of the device.
kW.
In case of the error message "Su06", this hardware
detection has responded.
Cause Remedy
The heatsink temperature now only differs by 5 °C from Prevent further heating, i.e. reduce motor load or set
the shutdown temperature of the motor. controller inhibit so that the heatsink can cool down
again.
Cause Remedy
The heatsink temperature is higher than the fixed limit • Check control cabinet temperature.
temperature (90 ° C). • Clean filter.
Maybe the ambient temperature of the controller is too • Clean controller.
high or the fan or its ventilation slots are dirty. • If required, clean or replace the fan.
• Provide for sufficient cooling of the device.
Cause Remedy
The motor temperature monitoring function at the plug • Check motor temperature monitoring.
connector X106, terminal T1 /T2, has tripped. • Provide for sufficient cooling of the motor.
Possible causes: • Check terminals for open circuit or loose contact.
• The motor is overheated so that the thermal contact
integrated into the motor has been switched.
• An open circuit or a loose contact at the connections
mentioned above has occurred.
454 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
The Ixt overload check has tripped. • Check and, if required, correct dimensioning of the
• Operating threshold = 100 % Ixt (adjustable in device and the motor load with regard to technical
C00123) data.
Possible causes: • Reduce motor load cycles (observe load cycles
• Wrong dimensioning of the device with regard to its according to documentation).
motor load.
• Load cycles are not complied with.
Cause Remedy
The device indicates that the maximally possible torque Reduce motor load.
at the motor shaft has been reached.
• C00057 displays the current torque.
Cause Remedy
Maximum current monitoring has tripped. Check and, if required, correct dimensioning of the load
• The instantaneous value of the motor current has with regard to the installed device power.
exceeded the limit value set in C00939.
Cause Remedy
The device has detected an overvoltage in the DC bus. To • Reduce load in generator mode.
protect the device hardware, the inverter control is • Use a brake resistor.
switched off. • Use a regenerative power supply unit.
• Depending on the configuration of the auto-start lock • Establish a DC-bus connection.
function, set C00142 so that, when this error is • Select a braking method in C00175 which stops the
tripped, the controller only restarts after the ramp function generator when reaching the brake
controller inhibit has been switched. chopper threshold ("HlgStop").
• If this error message remains active longer than the
time set in C00601, a "Fault" is tripped. Otherwise, the
deactivation of the error message causes the inverter
control to be enabled again
• In case of the control types VFCplus and SLVC, the
motor voltage is approached to the voltage
setpoint alongside a ramp.
• From version 15.00.00, this voltage ramp can be set
in C00983/2. If the described remedies are not
possible or do not have any effect, it may be
required to increase this voltage ramp as otherwise
an overcurrent interruption may be caused. This
only happens in case of high motor power and
mass inertia so that the Lenze setting of 1 s should
be sufficient in the majority of cases.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 455
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
The device has detected a DC bus undervoltage. The • Switch on mains supply or ensure sufficient supply via
inverter control is switched off because the drive DC bus.
properties of the motor control cannot be provided • Adjust setting in C00142 if required.
anymore due to the DC bus undervoltage.
• Depending on the configuration of the auto-start lock
function, set C00142 so that, when this error is
tripped, the controller only restarts after the
controller inhibit has been switched.
Cause Remedy
The device has recognised a short circuit of the motor • Check motor connections and the corresponding plug
phases. To protect the device electronics, the inverter connector on the device.
control is switched off. • Only use permissible combinations of device power
• Mostly, incorrectly executed motor connections are and motor power.
the cause. • Do not set the dynamics of the current limitation
• If the device is inappropriately dimensioned with controller too high.
regard to the motor load and the current limitation in
the controller (Imax controller) is set incorrectly, this
error message may also occur.
Motor control: Defining current limits
Cause Remedy
The device has recognised an earth fault at one of the • Check motor connections and the corresponding plug
motor phases. To protect the device electronics, the connector on the device.
inverter control is switched off. • Use motor filters, cable lengths, and cable types
• Mostly, incorrectly executed motor connections are recommended by Lenze.
the cause. • If motor filters with additional terminals for +UG and
• If motor filter, motor cable length, and cable type –UG and devices greater or equal 3 kW are used:
(shielding capacity) are dimensioned incorrectly, this • up to version V05.00.00: Set resp. to earth fault
error message may occur due to leakage currents to (C00602) to "0: No Reaction".
PE. • From version V05.01.00 onwards: Deactivate earth-
• If motor filters with additional terminals for +UG and fault detection during operation by setting the
–UG and devices greater or equal 3 kW are used, the filter time (C01770) to 250 ms.
earth fault detection may be triggered due to leakage • If motor cables longer than 50 m are used:
currents to +UG and –UG. • From version V05.01.00 onwards: Increase filter
• A cause can also be the use of shielded motor cables time for earth-fault detection during operation
longer than 50 m. (C01770).
456 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
The device displays that the maximum current has been • Check and, if required, correct dimensioning of the
reached. load with regard to the installed device power.
• Check the maximum current settings in C00022
(Imax in motor mode) and C00023 (Imax in generator
mode).
Cause Remedy
Due to a short overcurrent, the inverter was switched off • Check and, if required, correct dimensioning of the
for a short time (clamp disconnection). load with regard to the installed device power.
• Reduce the dynamics of the setpoint change or speed
control.
Cause Remedy
The device has recognised that the maximum speed has • Limit setpoint selection to maximum values.
been reached. • Adjust set speed limitation (C00909) and frequency
limitation (C00910).
Cause Remedy
The device has recognised that the maximally • Limit setpoint selection to the maximally permissible
permissible motor speed has been reached. motor speed.
• If required, adapt set maximum motor speed
(C00965).
Cause Remedy
During the identification of motor parameters, an error • Check the motor connections and the corresponding
has occurred. plug connector on the device and, if necessary, the
Possible causes: motor terminal box.
• Interrupted motor cable. • Correct start parameters for the motor parameter
• Switched-off power section during the identification. identification (motor nameplate data).
• Implausible start parameter settings. • Stable power supply of the device.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 457
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
The device has detected controller inhibit during the • Do not set controller inhibit during the motor data
motor data identification. identification.
• This cancels the identification process. The Lenze • Do not execute any device function which may
setting of the motor data is used. activate controller inhibit.
Cause Remedy
The device has recognised that an error has occurred in Enter sensible values for cable cross-section and motor
the calculation of the motor cable resistance. cable length.
• The parameters for cable cross-section and cable
length are implausible.
Cause Remedy
At controller enable, the device has detected that the Enter correct motor nameplate data and set a matching
motor control type set in C00006 cannot control the motor control type in C00006:
motor type set. • Motor nameplate data asynchronous motor motor
• Example: Motor nameplate data for an asynchronous control type must be ASM, SLVC or VFCplus servo
motor have been entered; however, a motor control control.
type for a synchronous motor is set in C00006. • Motor nameplate data synchronous motor motor
Note: control type must be PSM, SLPSM or VFCplus servo
Since the "VFCplus" control types are able to control control.
every motor to a certain extent, this error message will
never occur here.
Cause Remedy
When being In controller enable status, the device has Set the speed sensor in C00495.
detected that a motor control type with feedback has Note: The error can only be reset if the settings in C00006
beent set in C00006 , but no speed sensor has been set in and C00495 match.
C00495.
Cause Remedy
Too frequent and too long braking processes. Check drive dimensioning.
458 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
The device indicates that the "CLAMP" overcurrent Reduce setpoint generation dynamics or motor load.
limitation has been activated.
• A permanent clamp operation causes an overload
disconnection.
Cause Remedy
Pole position identification has not been completed Check parameter setting of the pole position
successfully. identification.
Cause Remedy
The device has detected a motor current which exceeds • Observe the maximum current setting depending on
the maximum current limit at permanent switching the set switching frequency of the inverter.
frequency of the inverter. • Reduce the required load or setting of the dynamic
• If a permanent switching frequency inverter is set, a switching frequency if necessary.
certain limit arises for the maximum current,
depending on the setting. If this current limit is
exceeded due to a load impulse or overload, an error
message is displayed.
Cause Remedy
The output of the speed controller has reached the • Observe load requirements.
internal limit value. In this status, the speed controller is • Correct dimensioning or reduce setpoint generation
not able anymore to correct the system deviation. dynamics if necessary.
• Only during "Closed loop" operation or with vector Motor control
control (SLVC).
Cause Remedy
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 459
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
Maximum speed for chopper frequency has been Select the correct maximum speed as a function of the
reached. switching frequency.
• The maximum speed has been exceeded depending Motor control: Determine speed limits
on the switching frequency.
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
The output of the field controller has reached its • Observe load requirements.
maximum limit value. The drive is at the torque limit in • Correct dimensioning or reduce setpoint from the
the field weakening range. field weakening range if necessary.
Motor control
460 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
Thermal overload of the motor. Only self-ventilated motors can be monitored using the
I2xt function.
• Check whether is it a self-ventilated motor. If not, set
C00606 to "0: No Reaction".
• Observe load requirements.
• Correct dimensioning if necessary.
• For VFCplus control type: Check Vmin boost (C00016).
Set Vmin boost
Cause Remedy
Motor phase failure - power section • Check the motor connections and the corresponding
• This error message is displayed if a motor phase plug connector on the device and, if necessary, the
carries less current of one half-wave than set in motor terminal box.
C00599. • Check the trigger threshold (C00599).
Cause Remedy
Maximally permissible speed of the feedback system Reduce speed of the rotation shaft/feedback system.
connected to DI1/DI2 reached. nencoder <= (fmax x 60) / encoder increments
(for fmax = 10 kHz)
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Open-circuit monitoring for analog input 1 has tripped. • Check wiring of the analog X3/A1I input terminal for
• Only if the analog input has been configured as a open circuit.
current loop of 4 ... 20 mA (C00034/1 = 2). • Check minimum current values of the signal sources.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 461
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Bit 14 ("SetFail") of the wMciCtrl control word of the Trace back signal source on the bus (e.g. PROFIBUS) that
LS_DriveInterface system block has been set. sets bit 14 ("SetFail").
Cause Remedy
CAN on board: "Bus off" status • Check wiring and bus terminating resistor.
• Received too many faulty telegrams. • Set identical baud rate for each bus node.
• Damaged cable (e.g. loose contact). • Assign different IDs to nodes.
• Two nodes with the same ID. • Eliminate electrical interference (e.g. EMC).
Cause Remedy
CAN on board: A faulty CAN telegram has been detected. • Check wiring and bus terminating resistor.
• Eliminate electrical interference (e.g. EMC).
Cause Remedy
CAN on board: Incorrect transmission or reception of • Check wiring and bus terminating resistor.
more than 96 CAN telegrams. • Set identical baud rate for each bus node.
• The current number of incorrectly transmitted CAN • Assign different IDs to nodes.
telegrams is displayed in C00372/1. • Eliminate electrical interference (e.g. EMC).
• The current number of incorrectly received CAN
telegrams is displayed in C00372/2.
• The current CAN error status is displayed in C00345.
462 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
CAN on board: The device has received the "Stop Remote Check CAN master (NMT master).
Node" NMT telegram.
Cause Remedy
CAN on board: Cyclic node monitoring • Reactivate Heartbeat producers by mains switching,
• Being a Heartbeat consumer, the device has not restarting the controller, or a CAN Reset Node.
received a Heartbeat telegram from Heartbeat • Reparameterise CAN Heartbeat producer time or
producer 1 ... 7 within the defined time. switch off consumer monitoring and reset error
• The current states of the Heartbeat producers are status if latched.
displayed in C00347/1...7. Heartbeat protocol
Cause Remedy
Bit 14 ("SetFail") in the wCANControl control word of the Trace back signal source on the CAN bus that sets bit 14
LS_DriveInterface system block has been set. ("SetFail").
Cause Remedy
CAN on board: Time monitoring for RPDO1 has been • Set correct telegram length for CAN master
triggered. (transmitter).
• RPDO1 has not been received within the monitoring • Eliminate electrical interference (e.g. EMC).
time set in C00357/1 or was faulty. • Adjust monitoring time C00357/1 or switch off time
monitoring.
Cause Remedy
CAN on board: Time monitoring for RPDO2 has been • Set correct telegram length for CAN master
triggered. (transmitter).
• RPDO2 has not been received within the monitoring • Eliminate electrical interference (e.g. EMC).
time set in C00357/2 or was faulty. • Adjust monitoring time C00357/2 or switch off time
monitoring.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 463
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
CAN on board: Time monitoring for RPDO3 has been • Set correct telegram length for CAN master
triggered. (transmitter).
• RPDO3 has not been received within the monitoring • Eliminate electrical interference (e.g. EMC).
time set in C00357/3 or was faulty. • Adjust monitoring time C00357/3 or switch off time
monitoring.
Cause Remedy
CAN on board: Time monitoring for RPDO4 has been • Set correct telegram length for CAN master
triggered. (transmitter).
• RPDO4 has not been received within the monitoring • Eliminate electrical interference (e.g. EMC).
time set in C00357/4 or was faulty. • Adjust monitoring time C00357/4 or switch off time
monitoring.
Cause Remedy
The optional communication module has been removed • Check connection between the communication
or there is a connection problem or incompatibility with module and standard device.
the standard device. • Check if the module is plugged in correctly.
• In case of an incompatibility, either the module or the
software of the standard device is out of date. In this
case, please contact Lenze.
Cause Remedy
Memory module is either not available or not snapped • If a memory module has been provided: Plug the
into place correctly. memory module into the slot of the standard device
intended for this purpose.
• If a memory module has been provided: Check if the
memory module has been plugged-in correctly.
464 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
The parameter set saved to the memory module is Ensure voltage supply during the storage process and
invalid because it has not been saved completely. that the module remains plugged into the slot.
• This can be due to voltage failure or caused by Acknowledge errors via C00002/19 or control word via
removing the memory module while saving the communication interface and then re-parameterise the
parameter set. controller.
The parameter set stored in the memory module is The error can only be removed by loading the Lenze
invalid. The reason for this can be as follows: setting with the C00002/1 = "1: On / start" device
• Incomplete storage of the parameter set due to command.
voltage failure. • In order to prevent the error, do not switch off the
• The plugged-in module stems from a device with new voltage during the saving process.
firmware (compare C00099) or from a different • If the parameter set is to be transferred from one
device type (e.g. 8400 BaseLine). device with a higher version to a device with a lower
version, use the "copy parameter set" function of the
keypad. Make sure that you do not use functions that
are not available in the older device.
Cause Remedy
The parameter set saved to the memory module is When the memory modules are exchanged, observe the
incompatible to the standard device. downward compatibility:
• An incompatibility of the parameter set is caused e.g. • OK: StateLine V2.0 to StateLine V3.0
when the memory module of an 8400 HighLine is • OK: StateLine V2.0 to HighLine V2.0
plugged into an 8400 StateLine or the parameter set • Not OK: HighLine Vx.x to StateLine Vx.x
in the memory module has a higher version than • Not OK: StateLine V3.0 to StateLine < V3.0
expected by the standard device.
Cause Remedy
The parameter set saved to the communication module When the memory modules are exchanged, observe the
is incompatible to the standard device. downward compatibility:
• An incompatibility of the parameter set is caused e.g. • OK: StateLine V2.0 to StateLine V3.0
when the MCI module parameters in the memory • OK: StateLine V2.0 to HighLine V2.0
module do not match the plugged communication • Not OK: HighLine Vx.x to StateLine Vx.x
module. • Not OK: StateLine V3.0 to StateLine < V3.0
Cause Remedy
The parameter set saved to the memory module is Consultation with Lenze required.
invalid.
• The error occurs while loading the parameter set.
• The memory module plugged in the device lacks a
code or a code is incorrect.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 465
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
The parameter set in the device is invalid. Consultation with Lenze required.
• The error occurs while loading the parameter set.
• One code in the device is incorrect.
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Device personalisation is active: The binding ID of the • Use memory module/controller with matching
memory module does not comply with the binding ID of binding IDs.
the controller. • Contact machine manufacturer.
Note:
It is not possible for Lenze to modify a replacement
device via special accesses in such a way that it
cooperates with a personalised memory module.
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
466 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
Time-out of the application. The required computing Reduction of the function block interconnection or the
time of the application exceeds the available computing complexity of the application.
time.
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Too frequent auto-trip reset. • Check the error cause that activates the auto-trip
reset.
• Eliminate error cause and reset (acknowledge) error
manually afterwards.
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 467
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
MCK: The status monitoring of the holding brake control • Check configuration of the bMBrakeApplied input for
has tripped. status detection of the brake (via a switching contact
at the brake).
• Check wiring/function of the switching contact.
• Adapt waiting time (C02589/3).
• Deactivate status monitoring (via bit 5 in C02582).
Cause Remedy
PC manual control: The connection monitoring has • Check communication link between PC and
tripped. controller.
• The online connection between the PC and the • Check voltage supply/function of the controller.
controller has been interrupted for a longer period of • Adjust the timeout (C00464/1).
time than the timeout set in C00464/1.
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
The device fan has failed. • Check the fan for short-circuit.
Possible causes: • Clean the fan.
• The short-circuit check of the fan connection has
tripped.
• The speed monitoring of the fan has tripped.
468 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
Cause Remedy
User error 1 has been tripped via the bSetError1 input of User-defined.
the LS_SetError_1 system block.
Cause Remedy
User error 2 has been tripped via the bSetError2 input of User-defined.
the LS_SetError_1 system block.
Cause Remedy
User error 3 has been tripped via the bSetError3 input of User-defined.
the LS_SetError_1 system block.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 469
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.9 Error messages of the operating system
________________________________________________________________
Cause Remedy
User error 4 has been tripped via the bSetError4 input of User-defined.
the LS_SetError_1 system block.
470 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
9 Diagnostics & error management
9.10 "LS_SetError_1" system block
________________________________________________________________
This system block is used for error handling within the application.
• The application can trip up to four different user error messages with parameterisable error IDs
and error responses via the four boolean inputs.
• If several inputs are set to TRUE at the same time, the input with the lowest number will trip the
error message.
/6B6HW(UURUB
E6HW(UURU & (UURULG
& 5HDFWLRQ
E6HW(UURU & (UURULG
& 5HDFWLRQ
E6HW(UURU & (UURULG
& 5HDFWLRQ
E6HW(UURU & (UURULG
& 5HDFWLRQ
Inputs
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 471
10 Oscilloscope function
________________________________________________________________
10 Oscilloscope function
This function extension is available from version 12.00.00!
The oscilloscope function integrated in the 8400 StateLine can be used as support for
commissioning, maintenance, and troubleshooting. It is operated via a user interface in the
»Engineer«.
Typical applications
• Graphical representation of measured values (e.g. speed setpoint, actual speed and torque)
• Detection of process values without additional measuring instruments (e.g. oscilloscope,
voltmeter and ammeter)
• Convenient documentation for fine tuning of control circuits or parameter changes of the
controller
Special features
• Recording and saving of measured values in the 8400 StateLine
• Simultaneous measuring on four independent channels
• Measuring of fast and slow signals by means of adjustable sample rate
• Triggering on a channel
• Detecting of measured values before and after a trigger event (pre-/post-trigger)
• Transfer of the measured values to the Engineering PC for the graphical representation and
evaluation in the »Engineer«
• The measured data represented in the form of interpolated curves can be optionally shown and
hidden, represented in any colour or overlaid with the signal characteristics of other variables
recorded.
• Cursor and zoom function for the measurement analysis
• Saving & loading of oscilloscope configurations on the Engineering PC
• Export of measured values via the clipboard for further processing
472 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
10 Oscilloscope function
10.1 Technical data
________________________________________________________________
Functional description
In the »Engineer«, you set the trigger condition and sample rate and select the variables to be
recorded via the oscilloscope user interface when an online connection to the 8400 StateLine has
been established. In this case, "variables" are the internal output signals of the function, system,
application and port blocks.
Every configuration change is transferred to the 8400 StateLine and checked. If invalid settings are
found, the oscilloscope triggers an error.
With an online connection, the measured 8400 StateLine data are transferred to the »Engineer« and
graphically represented on the oscilloscope user interface as soon as the measurement has been
completed.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 473
10 Oscilloscope function
10.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
The oscilloscope user interface is available in the »Engineer« from version 2.16 onwards!
The oscilloscope user interface contains the following control and function elements:
474 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
10 Oscilloscope function
10.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
Oscilloscope toolbar
Icon Function
Loading the oscillogram ( 485)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 475
10 Oscilloscope function
10.3 Operation
________________________________________________________________
10.3 Operation
This chapter describes step-by-step how to record the signal characteristics of 8400 StateLine
variables and represent, analyse, document and process them in the oscilloscope.
Note!
The oscilloscope can only be configured and recording can only be started when an
online connection has been established to the 8400 StateLine.
The oscilloscope supports up to four channels, i.e. max. four variables can be recorded in a data set.
The variables to be recorded can be configured by means of the Vertical channel settings list field.
Four variables have already been selected in the default setting. In case of the 8400 StateLine, all
available channels are already assigned:
476 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
10 Oscilloscope function
10.3 Operation
________________________________________________________________
If not all available channels are assigned, you can add more variables for recording.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 477
10 Oscilloscope function
10.3 Operation
________________________________________________________________
The trigger condition serves to define the starting time of recording in the 8400 StateLine. The
oscilloscope provides various trigger conditions by means of which recording of the measured
values can be controlled.
If the Cursor tab is selected, click the Trigger tab to show the input fields for configuring the
trigger condition.
Setting Function
Source Selection of trigger source:
Channel The oscilloscope triggers on a channel configured in the Vertical channel settings list field.
Force trigger No trigger condition, recording starts immediately after the start.
Trigger value Value from which on triggering is activated.
Delay Delay between recording and trigger event.
Pre-trigger Select a negative delay time to detect signals prior to the trigger event.
Trigger event
Trigger level
Trigger
delay
(negative)
Trigger event
Trigger level
Trigger
delay
(positive)
478 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
10 Oscilloscope function
10.3 Operation
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Recording can only be started when an online connection has been established to the
8400 StateLine.
After the variable values have been recorded and the online data set has been transferred to the
Engineering PC, the data set is visualised in the oscillogram. If required, the representation can now
be adjusted by using the zoom or the automatic scaling function.
Tip!
When the oscillogram does not show the complete measurement, a scrollbar appears
below the time axis. You can use this scrollbar for horizontal scrolling of the visible area.
The labelling of the time axis and the position display are automatically adapted.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 479
10 Oscilloscope function
10.3 Operation
________________________________________________________________
Zoom function
Go to the oscilloscope toolbar and click the icon to activate the zoom function.
Hold down the right mouse button and move the mouse pointer to the
right to stretch the shown selection from the left edge.
Hold down the right mouse button and move the mouse pointer to the
top to stretch the shown selection from the bottom.
480 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
10 Oscilloscope function
10.3 Operation
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 481
10 Oscilloscope function
10.3 Operation
________________________________________________________________
In addition to the zoom and scaling function, the oscilloscope offers a "cursor function" that can be
used to display individual measured values of a selectable channel or the difference between two
measured values.
482 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
10 Oscilloscope function
10.4 Managing oscillograms (measured data sets)
________________________________________________________________
If several measured data sets are loaded in the oscilloscope at the same time, the data set to be
displayed is selected via the Oscillogram list field. There are three types of data sets:
In the Comments text field, you can enter a comment on the oscillogram selected.
• When the Saving the oscillogram command is executed, the comment is saved in the file
together with the data set.
• If you execute the Loading the oscillogram command and then select a data set in the Load
data set dialog box, the corresponding comment is shown in the dialog box.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 483
10 Oscilloscope function
10.4 Managing oscillograms (measured data sets)
________________________________________________________________
After the variables to be recorded have been selected and the required settings have been entered,
you can save the configuration and recording, if already executed, for future use in the project or
export them to a file.
Note!
The reuse of a saved configuration is only reasonable for controllers of the same type, as
otherwise due to a scaling of the oscilloscope channels that is not adapted, incorrect
values are displayed!
Note!
The data set is only saved if the entire project is saved!
484 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
10 Oscilloscope function
10.4 Managing oscillograms (measured data sets)
________________________________________________________________
Configurations/data sets already stored can be reloaded into the oscilloscope any time, e.g. for the
overlay function.
Note!
The reuse of a saved configuration is only reasonable for controllers of the same type, as
otherwise due to a scaling of the oscilloscope channels that is not adapted, incorrect
values are displayed!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 485
10 Oscilloscope function
10.4 Managing oscillograms (measured data sets)
________________________________________________________________
Go to the Oscilloscope toolbar and click the symbol to close the currently displayed
offline data record.
The overlay function serves to lay several characteristics from the currently loaded data sets on top
of each other, e.g. to compare signal characteristics from different recordings.
• If two or more data sets are loaded in the oscilloscope, e.g. the ONLINE data set and a data set
saved before in the project, a "MERGE" data set is automatically provided in the Oscillogram list
field.
• If the merge data record is selected, the desired characteristics to be overlaid or compared can
be selected from the loaded data records in the Vertical channel settings group field.
• If an online data record is used in the merge data record, an update is carried out in the merge
data record in case of a renewed recording.
• Removing variables from an offline or online data record causes the characteristics in the merge
data record to be deleted.
486 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
10 Oscilloscope function
10.4 Managing oscillograms (measured data sets)
________________________________________________________________
2. In the upper list field, click the data set to be deleted using the right mouse button to open
the Context menu.
3. In the Context menu, select the Delete data set command to delete the data set in the
project.
4. Click Cancel to close the Load data set dialog box again.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 487
11 System bus "CAN on board"
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
• In the »Engineer« parameter list, category CAN, you can find the parameters relevant for
the CANopen interface classified in different subcategories.
• Information on CAN communication modules and CANopen interfaces of other Lenze
devices is provided in the "CAN" communication manual in the Lenze library.
488 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.1 General information
________________________________________________________________
For many years, the system bus (CAN) based on the CANopen communication profile has been
integrated in Lenze controllers. Due to the lower number of data objects available, the functionality
and compatibility of the previous system bus are lower as compared to CANopen. For parameter
setting, two parameter data channels are always available to the user while CANopen provides only
one active parameter channel.
The system bus (CANopen) of the Inverter Drives 8400 is a further development of the system bus
(CAN) including the following properties:
• Full compatibility with CANopen DS301 V4.02.
• Support of the "Heartbeat" NMT slave function (DS301 V4.02)
• 1 or 2 parameterisable parameter data channels for transmitting SDOs (Service Data Objects)
• Up to four parameterisable process data channels (dependent on the device version) for
transmitting PDOs (Process Data Objects)
• All process data channels are functionally equivalent
• Monitoring of the receive PDOs for data reception
• Adjustable error response to ...
• physical CAN errors (frame, bit, ACK error)
• bus-stop, bus working
• absent PDOs
• Telegram counters for SDOs and PDOs
• Bus status diagnostics
• Boot-up telegram generation
• Emergency telegram generation
• Reset node telegram generation (for master configuration)
• Sync telegram generation and response to sync telegrams:
• Data transmission/reception
• Device-internal time base synchronisation
• Abort codes
• All CAN on board functions can be parameterised via codes
• Object directory (all mandatory functions, optional functions, indexes)
Range Values
Communication profile CANopen, DS301 V4.02
Communication medium DIN ISO 11898
Network topology Line terminated at both ends
Adjustable node addresses Depending on the number of SDO channels set in C00366:
(max. number of nodes) • 1 SDO: Node address 1 ... 127 (max. 127 nodes)
• 2 SDO: Node address 1 ... 63 (max. 63 nodes)
• adjustable via DIP switches or via code C00350.
Adjustable baud rates 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 1000 kbps
• adjustable via DIP switches or via code C00351.
• 1000 kbps are supported from version 11.00.00.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 489
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.1 General information
________________________________________________________________
Range Values
Process data For "BaseLine C" version:
• Max. 2 transmit PDOs (TPDOs) with 1 ... 8 bytes (adjustable)
• Max. 2 receive PDOs (RPDOs) with 1 ... 8 bytes (adjustable)
For "StateLine C" version:
• Max. 4 transmit PDOs (TPDOs) with 1 ... 8 bytes (adjustable)
• Max. 4 receive PDOs (RPDOs) with 1 ... 8 bytes (adjustable)
(Process data channel 4 is available from version 15.00.00!)
Parameter data Max. 2 server SDO channels with 1 ... 8 bytes
• Because of the 2 server SDO channels, the address range from 1 ... 63 is
available
Transfer mode for TPDOs • in case of data change (including adjustable blocking time)
• Time-controlled, 1 to x ms
• After the reception of 1 to 240 sync telegrams
Protocols
Standard PDO protocols PDO write
PDO read
SDO protocols SDO download
SDO download initiate
SDO download segment
SDO upload
SDO upload initiate
SDO upload segment
SDO abort transfer
SDO block download
SDO block download initiate
SDO block download end
SDO block upload
SDO block upload initiate
SDO block upload end
NMT protocols Start remote node (master and slave)
Stop remote node (slave)
Enter pre-operational (slave)
Reset node (slave and local device)
Reset communication protocol (slave)
Monitoring protocols Heartbeat (heartbeat producer and heartbeat consumer)
• Up to 7 Heartbeat Producers can be monitored.
Emergency telegram (to master)
More protocols Transmitting and receiving a sync telegram
• Synchronisation of the internal time base to the reception of the CAN
sync telegram is possible.Synchronisation of the internal time base
490 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.1 General information
________________________________________________________________
The communication time is the time between the start of a request and the arrival of the
corresponding response.
Tip!
The communication times in the CAN network depend on:
• the processing time in the device
• the telegram runtime (baud rate/telegram length)
• the bus load (especially if the bus is charged with PDOs and SDOs at a low baud rate)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 491
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.2 Possible settings via DIP switch
________________________________________________________________
The following can be set via the front panel DIP switches:
R d c b a 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
• Bus terminating resistor
Switch: "R"
• Baud rate
Switch position:
Switch: "a" ... "d"
ON • Node address
Switch: "1" ... "64"
OFF
[11-1] DIP switch
Note!
• The DIP switch settings are accepted if a node address is unequal zero when the device
or the 24-V supply is switched on by the DIP address.
• If all DIP switches are OFF when the device or the 24 V supply is switched on, the
setting of the baud rate and node address are read out of the parameter
set/parameter.
Tip!
The current DIP switch settings are displayed in code C00349.
Bit 15 indicates that the setting of the DIP switches has been accepted when the device or
the 24V supply has been switched on.
The system bus must be terminated between CAN low and CAN high at the first and last physical
node each by a resistor (120 Ω). The 8400 controller is provided with an integrated bus terminating
resistor, which can be activated via the unlabelled DIP switch.
DIP switch position ("R"):
• OFF = bus terminating resistor is inactive
• ON = bus terminating resistor is active
492 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.2 Possible settings via DIP switch
________________________________________________________________
The baud rate can be set via code C00351 or with the DIP switches a to d.
Note!
• All DIP switches (a ... d, 1 ... 64) = OFF (Lenze setting):
• At switching on, the settings under code C00350 (node address) and C00351 (baud
rate) will become active.
• Preset baud rate: 500 kbps
The node address can be set via code C00350 or with the DIP switches 1 to 64.
• The labelling on the housing corresponds to the values of the individual DIP switches for
determining the node address.
• The valid address range depends on the number of SDO channels set in C00366:
• 1 SDO (Lenze setting): 1 ... 127
• 2 SDO: 1 ... 63
Note!
• The addresses of the nodes must differ from each other.
• All DIP switches (a ... d, 1 ... 64) = OFF (Lenze setting):
• At switching on, the settings under code C00350 (node address) and C00351 (baud
rate) will become active.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 493
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.3 LED status displays for the system bus
________________________________________________________________
DIP switch 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Switch position OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
Value 0 0 16 0 4 2 1
Node address = Sum of the values = 16 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 23
CAN-RUN
Information about the status of the system bus can be obtained quickly via
LED displays "CAN-RUN" and "CAN-ERR" on the front of the controller.
CAN-ERR
DRV-RDY The meaning can be seen from the tables below.
DRV-ERR
Operational
(CAN-RUN is permanently lit)
Stopped
(CAN-RUN is blinking every second)
494 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.4 Going online via the system bus
________________________________________________________________
The integrated system bus interface (CAN on board, X1 terminal) can also be used for the
communication between the »Engineer« and the controller, alternatively to the USB diagnostic
adapter.
• Lenze offers the following communication accessories for connection to the PC:
Note!
• For detailed information about the PC system bus adapter, please see the "CAN
Communication Manual".
• Please observe the documentation for the PC system bus adapter!
• In the »Engineer«, go to the Device assignment offline devices dialog box and select the
"System bus CAN" entry from the Bus connection list field to establish an online
connection.
The C00002/26 = "1: EOn / start" device command reinitialises the CANopen interface of the
controller ("Reset node"), which is required after e.g. changing the data transfer rate, the node
address or the identifiers, respectively.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 495
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.6 Structure of the CAN data telegram
________________________________________________________________
The following subchapters provide a detailed description of the identifier and the user data. The
other signals refer to the transfer characteristics of the CAN telegram whose description is not
included in the scope of this documentation.
Tip!
Please visit the homepage of the CAN user organisation CiA (CAN in automation) for further
information:
http://www.can-cia.org
11.6.1 Identifier
The principle of the CAN communication is based on a message-oriented data exchange between a
transmitter and many receivers. All nodes can transmit and receive quasi-simultaneously.
The identifier, also called COB-ID (abbr. for communication object identifier), is used to control
which node is to receive a transmitted message. In addition to the addressing, the identifier
contains information on the priority of the message and the type of user data.
The identifier consists of a basic identifier and the node address of the node to be addressed:
Identifier (COB-ID) = basic identifier + node address (node ID)
Exception: The identifier for process data/heartbeat/emergency objects as well as network
management and sync telegrams is freely assigned by the user (either manually or automatically by
the network configurator), or is permanently assigned.
496 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.6 Structure of the CAN data telegram
________________________________________________________________
Identifier assignment
The system bus is message-oriented instead of node-oriented. Every message has an unambiguous
identification, the identifier. For CANopen, node-oriented transfer is achieved by the fact that every
message has only one transmitter.
• The basic identifiers for network management (NMT) and the basic SDO channel (SDO1) are
defined in the CANopen protocol and cannot be changed.
• The basic identifiers of the PDOs are preset in the Lenze setting according to the "Predefined
Connection Set" of DS301 V4.02.
Tip!
If required, the identifiers of the PDOs and the identifiers for the sync telegram can be
changed via parameters/indices.
Identifiers of the process data objects ( 517)
PDO synchronisation via sync telegram ( 521)
The active identifiers fo the PDOs are displayed in C00355/x.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 497
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.6 Structure of the CAN data telegram
________________________________________________________________
All nodes communicate by exchanging data telegrams via the system bus. The user data area of the
CAN telegram either contains network management data or parameter data or process data:
Process data
(PDOs – process data objects)
• Process data are transferred via the process data channel.
• Process data can be used to control the controller.
• Process data are not saved to the controller.
• Process data are transmitted between host system and nodes to ensure continuous exchange
of current input and output data.
• Process data usually are unscaled/scalable raw data.
• Process data are, for instance, setpoints and actual values.
• The exact meaning of the PDO file contents is determined via the function block editor (FB
Editor) in the I/O level or via the PDO mapping.
Parameter data
(SDOs – service data objects)
• Parameter data are the CANopen indexes or, in case of Lenze devices, the codes.
• Parameters are, for instance, used for one-off plant setting during commissioning or when the
material is changed on a production machine.
• Parameter data are transmitted as SDOs via the parameter data channel. They are
acknowledged by the receiver, i.e. the transmitter gets a feedback about the transmission being
successful or not.
• The parameter data channel enables access to all Lenze codes and CANopen indexes.
• Parameter changes are automatically saved to the controller until mains switching.
• In general, the parameter transfer is not time-critical.
• Parameter data are, for instance, operating parameters, diagnostic information and motor data
as well as control information on the interconnection of function blocks in the I/O level of the
FB Editor.
498 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.7 Communication phases/network management
________________________________________________________________
Regarding communication via the system bus, the controller distinguishes between the following
statuses:
Status Explanation
"Initialisation" After switch-on, an initialisation run is carried out.
(Initialisation) • During this phase, the controller is not involved in the data exchange via
the bus.
• The standard values are re-written to all CAN-relevant parameters.
• After initialisation is completed, the controller is automatically set to the
"Pre-Operational" status.
"Pre-Operational" Parameter data can be received, process data are ignored.
(before being ready for operation)
"Operational" Parameter data and process data can be received!
(ready for operation)
"Stopped" Only network management telegrams can be received.
(stopped)
Tip!
Part of the initialisation or the entire initialisation can be carried out anew in every status
by transferring the corresponding network management telegrams.
The current CAN status is displayed in C00359 for diagnostic purposes.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 499
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.7 Communication phases/network management
________________________________________________________________
,QLWLDOLVDWLRQ
3UH2SHUDWLRQDO
6WRSSHG
2SHUDWLRQDO
Transition NMT command Status after Effects on process/parameter data after status change
change
(1) - Initialisation Initialisation starts automatically when the mains is
switched on.
• During initialisation, the controller is not involved in the
data exchange.
• After the initialisation is completed, the node sends a
boot-up message with an individual identifier and
automatically changes to the "pre-operational" status.
(2) - Pre-Operational In this phase, the master determines the way in which the
node(s) takes/take part in communication.
From here, the master changes the statuses for the entire network.
• A target address included in the NMT command defines the receiver(s).
• If the 8400 controller is configured as CAN master, the status is automatically changed to
"Operational" after a waiting time has expired (C00356/1), and the 0x0100 ("Start remote node")
NMT command is transmitted to all nodes.
• Data can only be exchanged via process data objects if the status is "Operational"!
(3), (6) 0x01 xx Operational Network management/sync/emergency telegrams as well
Start remote node as process data (PDO) and parameter data (SDO) are active.
Optional: When the status is changed, event and time-
controlled process data (PDOs) are transmitted once.
(4), (7) 0x80 xx Pre-Operational Network management/sync/emergency telegrams and
Enter Pre-Operational parameter data (SDO) are active.
(5), (8) 0x02 xx Stopped Only network management telegrams can be received.
Stop remote node
(9), (10), (11) 0x81 xx Initialisation All CAN-relevant parameters (CiA DS 301) are initialised with
Reset node the saved values.
(12), (13), (14) 0x82 xx All CAN-relevant parameters (CiA DS 301) are initialised with
Reset communication the saved values.
500 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.7 Communication phases/network management
________________________________________________________________
The telegram for the network management contains identifier "0" and the command included in
the user data which consists of the command byte and the node address:
[11-4] Network management telegram for changing over the communication phases
The change-over of the communication phases for the entire network is carried out by one node, the
CAN master. The function of the CAN master can also be carried out by the controller.
Parameterising the controller as CAN master ( 502)
Meaning of the node address in the user data:
• node ID = "0": The telegram addresses all nodes (broadcast telegram). The status of all nodes can
be changed at the same time.
• node ID = "1" ... "127": If a node address is specified, only the status of the node with the
corresponding address changes.
Example:
Data can only be exchanged via process data objects if the status is "Operational".If the CAN master
is supposed to switch all nodes connected to the bus from the "Pre-Operational" communication
status to the "Operational" communication status, the identifier and user data in the transmission
telegram must be set as follows:
• Identifier: 0x00 (network management)
• User data: 0x0100 ("Start remote node" NMT command to all nodes)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 501
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.7 Communication phases/network management
________________________________________________________________
If the initialisation of the system bus and the associated status change from "Pre-Operational" to
"Operational" is not effected by a superimposed host system, the controller can instead be defined
to be a "quasi" master to execute this task.
The controller is configured as CAN master in C00352.
• Being the CAN master, the controller sets all nodes connected to the bus (broadcast telegram)
to the "Operational" communication status with the "Start remote node" NMT telegram. Only
in this communication status, data can be exchanged via process data objects.
• A delay time can be set in C00356/1 which must expire after mains switching before the
controller transmits the "Start remote node" NMT telegram.
Note!
The changes of the master/slave operation in C00352 will not be activated until
• another mains switching of the controller
or
• the "Reset node" or "Reset communication" NMT telegram has been transmitted to
the controller.
The "CAN reset node" device command (C00002/26) is provided as an alternative to the
"Reset node" NMT telegram for the reinitialisation of the CAN-specific device
parameters.
Tip!
Master functionality is only required during the initialisation phase of the drive system.
502 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
For transmitting process data, up to four separated process data channels (PDO1 ... PDO4) are
available depending on the device version and software version.
Definitions
• Process data telegrams between the host system and the devices are distinguished in terms of
direction as follows:
• Process data telegrams to the device (RPDO)
• Process data telegrams from the device (TPDO)
• The CANopen process data objects are designated as seen from the node's view:
• Receive PDOs (RPDOx): Process data object received by a node
• Transmit PDOs (TPDOx): Process data object sent by a node
Note!
Data can only be exchanged via process data objects if the status is "Operational"!
Communication phases/network management ( 499)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 503
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
The number of available process data objects for controllers of the 8400 series depends on the
device version:
504 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
/3B&DQ,Q
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
:25'WR%,7
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
3'2PDSSLQJ
E&WUOB%
& &
&
Z&WUO
&
& Z,Q
&
&$1 :25' :25'
GQ,QBS
&$1EXV
53'2 &
',17
& Z,Q
&
& Z,Q
&
:25' :25'
GQ,QBS
',17
&
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 505
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
506 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
/3B&DQ,Q
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
:25'WR%,7
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
3'2PDSSLQJ
E,QB%
& &
&
Z,Q
&
& Z,Q
&
&$1 :25' :25'
GQ,QBS
&$1EXV
53'2 &
',17
& Z,Q
&
& Z,Q
&
:25' :25'
GQ,QBS
',17
&
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 507
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
508 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
/3B&DQ,Q
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
:25'WR%,7
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
3'2PDSSLQJ
E,QB%
& &
&
Z,Q
&
& Z,Q
&
&$1 :25' :25'
GQ,QBS
&$1EXV
53'2 &
',17
& Z,Q
&
& Z,Q
&
:25' :25'
GQ,QBS
',17
&
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 509
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
510 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
The LP_CanIn4 port block maps process data object RPDO4 in the FB Editor.
/3B&DQ,Q
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
:25'WR%,7
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
E,QB%
3'2PDSSLQJ
E,QB%
& &
&
Z,Q
&
& Z,Q
&
&$1 :25' :25'
GQ,QBS
&$1EXV
53'2 &
',17
& Z,Q
&
& Z,Q
&
:25' :25'
GQ,QBS
',17
&
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 511
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
512 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
/3B&DQ2XW
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
%,7WR:25'
E6WDWHB% &
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
Z6WDWH &
Z2XW &
&$1 &$1EXV
Z2XW
& 73'2
Z2XW &
:25' :25'
GQ2XWBS
',17
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 513
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
/3B&DQ2XW
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
%,7WR:25'
E2XWB% &
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
Z2XW &
Z2XW &
&$1 &$1EXV
Z2XW
& 73'2
Z2XW &
:25' :25'
GQ2XWBS
',17
514 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
/3B&DQ2XW
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
%,7WR:25'
E2XWB% &
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
Z2XW &
Z2XW &
&$1 &$1EXV
Z2XW
& 73'2
Z2XW &
:25' :25'
GQ2XWBS
',17
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 515
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
The LP_CanOut4 port block maps process data object TPDO4 in the FB Editor.
/3B&DQ2XW
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
%,7WR:25'
E2XWB% &
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
Z2XW &
Z2XW &
&$1 &$1EXV
Z2XW
& 73'2
Z2XW &
:25' :25'
GQ2XWBS
',17
516 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
For the process data objects PDO1 ... PDO4, three identifier assignment procedures are available in
C00353/1...4 :
• Identifier (COB-ID) = node address (C00350) + CANBaseID (Lenze setting)
• Identifier (COB-ID) = node address (C00350) + LenzeBaseID
• Identifier (COB-ID) = C0354/x
Lenze setting: Basic identifiers according to the "Predefined Connection Set" of DS301 V4.02
In the Lenze setting, the identifiers for the process data objects PDO1 ... PDO4 consist of the node
address set in C00350 and a basic identifier (CANBaseID) which corresponds to the "Predefined
Connection Set" of DS301 V4.02:
Tip!
The active identifiers (COB-ID) are displayed in C00355/x.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 517
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
Note!
After a node address change (C00350) and a CAN reset node afterwards, the subcodes of
C00354 automatically resume the values which result from the respective basic
identifier and the set node address.
518 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 519
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
The communication parameters such as the transmission mode and cycle time can be set freely for
every PDO and independently of the settings of other PDOs:
CAN1_OUT
C00322/1 Transmission mode 254
C00324/2 Blocking time 0 ms
C00356/5 Cycle time 0 ms
C00358/1 Data length 8 Bytes
CAN2_OUT
C00322/2 Transmission mode 254
C00324/3 Blocking time 0 ms
C00356/2 Cycle time 0 ms
C00358/2 Data length 8 Bytes
CAN3_OUT
C00322/3 Transmission mode 254
C00324/4 Blocking time 0 ms
C00356/3 Cycle time 0 ms
C00358/3 Data length 8 Bytes
CAN4_OUT (from version 15.00.00
C00322/4 Transmission mode 254
C00324/5 Blocking time 0 ms
C00356/6 Cycle time 0 ms
C00358/4 Data length 8 Bytes
CAN1_IN ... CAN4_IN
C00323/1...4 Transmission mode CAN1_IN ... CAN4_IN 254
• In the case of the RPDO serves as
monitoring setting in the case of sync-
controlled PDOs.
Blocking time
In C00324/x a "blocking time" can be set which defines the shortest transmission cycle with the
transmission type"asynchronous - manufacturer-specific/device profile-specific".
Example: Cycle time = 500 ms, blocking time = 100 ms, sporadic data change:
• With a sporadic data change < 500 ms, quickest transmission takes place every 100 ms due to
the set blocking time (event-controlled transmission). The transmission cycle timer is reset to 0
if the transmission has been activated in an event-controlled way.
• In the case of a sporadic data change > 500 ms, due to the cycle time set, transmission takes
place every 500 ms (cyclic transmission).
Tip!
The communication parameters can also be set via the following CANopen objects:
• I-1400 ... I-1403: Communication parameters for RPDO1 ... RPDO4
• I-1800 ... I-1803: Communication parameters for TPDO1 ... TPDO4
520 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
During cyclic transmission, one or more PDOs are transmitted/received in fixed time intervals. An
additional specific telegram, the so-called sync telegram, is used for synchronising cyclic process
data.
• The sync telegram is the trigger point for the transmission of process data from the slaves to the
master and for the acceptance of process data from the master in the slaves.
• For sync-controlled process data processing, the sync telegram must be generated accordingly.
• The response to a sync telegram is determined by the selected transmission
type.Transmission type ( 519)
Basic workflow
SYNC
SYNC
0 1 2
Sync cycle time (C01121)
A. After the sync telegram has been received, the slaves transmit the synchronous process data to
the master (TPDOs). The master reads them as process input data.
B. When the transmission process is completed, the slaves receive (RPDOs) the process output
data (of the master).
• All other telegrams (e.g. parameters or event-controlled process data) are accepted acyclically
by the slaves after the transmission is completed.
• Illustration [11-6] does not include acyclic data. However, they need to be considered when
dimensioning the cycle time.
C. The data are accepted in the slave with the next sync telegram if the Rx mode is set to 1 ... 240.
If the Rx mode is 254 or 255, the data are accepted in the next device cycle, irrespective of the
sync telegram.
Related topics:
Synchronisation of the internal time base ( 575)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 521
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
For RPDO1 ... RPDO4 each, a monitoring time can be parameterised within which the RPDO must
arrive. If the RPDO is not received within the monitoring time or not with the configured sync, the
response parameterised for each RPDO takes place.
Exception handling for the CAN PDOs in the event of an error can be set via decoupling
configuration and decoupling values.
• Bit coded selection is carried out in C00342/1 for the process data words read by the bus,
defining the events that will trigger decoupling.
• Bit coded selection is carried out in C00342/2 for the process data words output by the
application, defining the events that will trigger decoupling.
Bit Event
Bit 0 BusOff_MsgErr
Bit 1 Warning
Bit 2 NodeStopped
Bit 3 HeartBeatEvent
Bit 4 CAN1_In_Überw.
Bit 5 CAN2_In_Überw.
Bit 6 CAN3_In_Überw.
Bit 7 CAN4_In_Überw.
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
Bit 14 Trouble
Bit 15 Fault
522 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.8 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
Finally, the following parameters define the value that the process data words are to have when
they are decoupled:
C00344/1...16
C00343/1...16 CAN OUT
Application
CAN IN
C00342/1 C00342/2
Exception event (an error has occurred)
Related topics:
Configuring exception handling of the output terminals ( 288)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 523
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
[11-8] Parameter data transfer via the available parameter data channels
Note!
Up to and including version 05.00.00, the parameter channels 1 and 2 are activated in
the Lenze setting.
From version 05.01.00 onwards, only the parameter data channel 1 is activated in the
Lenze setting according to CANopen.
• In order to activate both parameter data channels according to the previous
behaviour, set "2 SDO Lenze" in C00366.
524 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
In the Lenze setting, the basic identifiers of the SDOs are preset according to the "Predefined
Connection Set".
The identifiers of the parameter data objects SDO1 and SDO2 result from the basic identifier and
the node address set under code C00350:
Identifier = basic identifier + node address
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
LOW byte HIGH LOW word HIGH word
byte
LOW byte HIGH byte LOW byte HIGH byte
Note!
For the user data, the Motorola format is used.
Parameter data telegram examples ( 531)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 525
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
11.9.2.1 Command
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
LOW byte HIGH LOW word HIGH word
byte
LOW byte HIGH byte LOW byte HIGH byte
The following commands can be transmitted or received for writing and reading the parameters:
Tip!
More commands are defined in CANopen specification DS301, V4.02 (e.g. segmented
transfer).
526 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
LOW byte HIGH LOW word HIGH word
byte
LOW byte HIGH byte LOW byte HIGH byte
Example
The C00011 parameter (motor reference speed) is to be addressed.
Calculation:
• Index:
• Decimal: 24575 - 11 = 24564
• Hexadecimal: 0x5FFF - 0xB = 0x5FF4
• Subindex: 0x00 (subindex 0 since the parameter does not have any subcodes)
Entries:
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
0xF4 0x5F 0x00
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 527
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
LOW byte HIGH LOW word HIGH word
byte
LOW byte HIGH byte LOW byte HIGH byte
Maximally 4 bytes are available for parameter value entries. Depending on the data format, they are
assigned as follows:
Note!
The "Factor" column of the Table of attributes contains a so-called scaling factor for all
Lenze parameters. The scaling factor is relevant to the transfer of parameter values
which have one or more decimal positions in the parameter list.
If the scaling factor is > 1, the value must be multiplied by the indicated scaling factor
prior to transmission to be able to transfer the value as an integer. At the SDO client end,
the integer must be divided by the scaling factor to obtain the original value including
decimal positions again.
Example
A value of "123.45" is to be transmitted for a code, unit: "%" (e.g. C00039/1: "Fixed setpoint-JOG1").
In controllers of the 8400 series, parameters with the "%" unit have two decimal positions and hence
a scaling factor of "100".
Calculation:
• Value to be transmitted = scaling factor x value
• Data (1 ... 4) = 100 x 123.45 = 12345 (0x00 00 30 39)
Entries:
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
0x39 0x30 0x00 0x00
528 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Command Index Subindex Error code
0x80 LOW byte HIGH byte LOW word HIGH word
(128) LOW byte HIGH byte LOW byte HIGH byte
In the event of an error, the addressed node generates a telegram with the "Error response" (0x80)
command.
• The telegram includes the index and subindex of the code where the error occurred.
• The error code is entered in bytes 5 ... 8.
• The error codes are standardised according to DS301, V4.02.
• The representation of the error codes is provided in reverse read direction (see example
below).
Example
Representation of error code "0x06 04 00 41" in bytes 5 ... 8:
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Command Index Subindex Error code
0x41 0x00 0x04 0x06
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 529
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
530 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
Telegram to drive
Response telegram from drive (if data have been correctly transmitted)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 531
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
Telegram to drive
Response telegram from drive (if data have been correctly transmitted)
532 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
Response telegram 1 from the drive: Indication of the block length (11 characters)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 533
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
Response telegram 2 from the drive: Transmission of the 1st data block
534 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.9 Parameter data transfer
________________________________________________________________
Response telegram 3 from the drive: Transmission of the 2nd data block including end identifier
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 535
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.10 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
11.10 Monitoring
If a node detects an error, it rejects the CAN telegram bits received so far and transmits an error flag.
The error flag consists of 6 consecutive bits with the same logic value.
The following errors are detected:
Fault Description
Bit error The sending node follows the transmission on the bus and interrupts the
transmission if it receives a different logic value than the value transmitted. With
the next bit, the sending node starts the transmission of an error flag.
In the arbitration phase, the transmitter only detects a bit error if a dominantly sent
bit is received as recessive bit. In the ACK slot as well, the dominant overwriting of a
recessive bit is not indicated as a bit error.
Stuff-bit error If more than 5 consecutive bits have the same logic value before the ACK delimiter
in the telegram, the previously transmitted telegram will be rejected and an error
flag will be sent with the next bit.
CRC error If the received CRC checksum does not correspond to the checksum calculated in the
bus controller, the bus controller will send an error flag after the ACK delimiter and
the previously transmitted telegram will be annulled.
Acknowledgement error If the sent ACK slot recessively sent by the transmitting node is not dominantly
overwritten by a receiver, the transmitting node will cancel the transmission. The
transmitting node will annul the transmitted telegram and will send an error flags
with the next bit.
Format error If a dominant bit is detected in the CRC delimiter, in the ACK delimiter or in the first
6 bits of the EOF field, the received telegram will be rejected and an error flag will be
sent with the next bit.
Tip!
The errors mentioned before indicate that a physical error has occurred in the bus system.
Possible causes are:
• Several nodes with identical node address
• Wrong baud rate of one or several nodes
• Too high cable length
• Too many or no terminating resistors
• Too high bus load/too many data telegrams
(e.g. since a node permanently transmits event-controlled due to data changes of an
analog signal/actual value.)
• EMC interferences on the system bus
(e.g. since the CAN bus cable next to the motor cable is unshielded.)
C00364 displays whether such an error is active.
536 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.10 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
The heartbeat protocol can be used for node monitoring purposes within a CAN network.
Basic workflow
+HDUWEHDWSURGXFHU +HDUWEHDWFRQVXPHUV
UHTXHVW LQGLFDWLRQ
U V
+HDUWEHDWSURGXFHUWLPH
+HDUWEHDWFRQVXPHU
LQGLFDWLRQ
LQGLFDWLRQ
WLPH
UHTXHVW LQGLFDWLRQ
U V
+HDUWEHDWFRQVXPHU
LQGLFDWLRQ
LQGLFDWLRQ
WLPH
LQGLFDWLRQ
(0(5*(1&< +HDUWEHDW
HYHQW
107PDVWHU
r: Reserved (always 0)
s: Status of the producer (0: Boot-up, 4: Stopped, 5: Operational, 127: Pre-Operational)
Boot-up 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Stopped 4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
Operational 5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
Pre-Operational 127 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 537
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.10 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Heartbeat event
The "Heartbeat event" is activated in the consumer if it does not receive any heartbeat telegram
from the producer within the heartbeat consumer time:
• The consumer changes from the "Operational" communication status to the "Pre-Operational"
communication status.
• The NMT master receives an emergency telegram containing emergency error code 0x8130.
• The response parameterised in C00592/5 is activated (Lenze setting: "No response").
538 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.10 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The heartbeat monitoring will not start until the first heartbeat telegram of a monitored
producer has been received successfully and the "Pre-Operational" NMT status has been
assumed.
The boot-up telegram counts as the first heartbeat telegram.
Task
An 8400 controller (node 2) which is configured as heartbeat consumer is to monitor another 8400
controller (heartbeat producer, node 1).
• The heartbeat producer is to transmit a heartbeat telegram to the heartbeat consumer every
10 ms.
• The heartbeat consumer monitors the heartbeat telegram for arrival. A response is to be
activated in the event of an error.
Tip!
C00347/1...n displays the heartbeat status of the monitored nodes.
Heartbeat telegram
• The heartbeat telegram of the producer has the following identifier:
Identifier (COB-ID) = 1792 + producer's node address = 1792 + 1 = 1793 = 0x701
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 539
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.10 Monitoring
________________________________________________________________
If the error status changes because an internal device error occurs or has been eliminated, the NMT
master receives an emergency telegram once with the following structure:
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Emergency error codes Error register Manufacturer-specific error message
LOW byte HIGH byte I-1001 0x00 LOW word HIGH word
(Reserved) LOW byte HIGH byte LOW byte HIGH byte
See table below • For emergency error code 0xF000: Lenze error number
(value displayed in C00168)
• All other emergency error codes have a value of "0" here.
The Short overview (A-Z) of error messages of the operating system includes a list of more
emergency error codes. ( 450)
Example
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Emergency error codes Error register Manufacturer-specific error message
0x00 0xF0 0x01 0x00 Lenze error number
Generic error (Reserved) Error messages of the operating system
Corresponding error-free message: Value
"0x00000000"
Tip!
A detalied description can be found in CAN specification DS301, V4.02.
540 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects
________________________________________________________________
Lenze devices can both be parameterised with Lenze codes and manufacturer-independent
"CANopen objects". A completely CANopen-compliant communication can only be achieved by
using CANopen objects for parameter setting. The CANopen objects described in this chapter are
defined in the CAN specification DS301 V4.02.
Many CANopen objects can be mapped on Lenze codes. In the following table, the corresponding
Lenze codes are listed in the column "Relationship to Lenze codes".
Note!
Some of the terms used here derive from the CANopen protocol.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 541
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects
________________________________________________________________
542 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 543
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1000
________________________________________________________________
I-1000
Index Name:
I-1000 Device type
Subindex Default setting Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Device type 0 0 4294967295 ro U32
The CANopen index I-1000 specifies the profile for this device. Furthermore, additional information
defined in the device profile itself can be stored here.
In case of 8400 series controllers, the four bytes contain the following values:
• 5th and 6th byte: The data content is 0x0000, i.e. no profile definition.
• 7th byte: The data content specifies the device type: Here the value is 0x00 for controllers.
• 8th byte: The data content is 0x00.
The data content for the 8400 controller thus is: 00 00 00 00
I-1001
Index: Name:
I-1001 Error register
Subindex Default setting Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Error register - 0 255 ro U8
Error register
The error status in the data byte (U8) is bit coded. The following error states are coded in the data
byte (U8):
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Error status
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 No error
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Device error message
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Communication error
544 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1003
________________________________________________________________
I-1003
Index: Name:
I-1003 Predefined error field
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Number of errors 0 0 255 rw U8
1 ... 10: Standard error field - 0 4294967295 ro U32
Error history
This object indicates that an error has occurred in the module and in the standard device.
Subindex Meaning
0 Number of saved error messages
1 ... 10 Display of the error list
The error messages (U32) consist of a 16-bit error code and a manufacturer-specific
information field comprising 16 bits.
Note!
The values in the "standard error field" under subindex 1 ... 10 will be deleted if the
subindex "number of recorded errors" is overwritten with the value "0".
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 545
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1005
________________________________________________________________
I-1005
Index: Name:
I-1005 COB-ID SYNC message
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: COB-ID SYNC message 0x0000 0080 0 4294967295 rw U32
or
0x8000 0080
This object can be used to activate the generation of sync telegrams and to write the identifier
value.
• This object relates to codes C00367 and C00368.
Writing identifiers
To receive PDOs, the value 0x80 must be entered in the 11-bit identifier in the Lenze setting (and
according to CANopen specification) . This means that all modules are by default set to the same
sync telegram.
• If sync telegrams are only to be received by certain communication modules, their identifiers
can be entered with values up to and including 0x07FF.
• The identifier can only be changed if the communication module does not send any sync
telegrams (bit 30 = "0").
• How to change the identifier:
• Deactivate identifier (set bit 30 to "0").
• Change identifier.
• Activate identifier (set bit 30 to "1").
546 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1006
________________________________________________________________
I-1006
Index: Name:
I-1006 Communication cycle period
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Communication cycle period 0 μs 0 μs 65535000 rw U32
I-1014
Index: Name:
I-1014 COB-ID EMCY
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: COB-ID EMCY 0x80 + node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32
When communication errors occur and are acknowledged or when internal errors occur in the
communication module or controller (e.g. "fault"), the system bus sends an error message. The
telegram is sent once for every error. This function can be activated or deactivated with bit 31.
Bit Setting
Bit 31 0 Emergency object is valid.
1 Emergency object is invalid.
Note!
The identifier can only be changed in the "emergency object invalid" status (bit 31 = 1).
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 547
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1016
________________________________________________________________
I-1016
Index: Name:
I-1016 Consumer heartbeat time
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported BaseLine C: 1 - (read access only) ro U16
StateLine C: 7
HighLine C: 15
TopLine C: 15
1 ... n: Consumer heartbeat time 0 0 65535 rw U16
Monitoring time for the nodes to be monitored via heartbeat. Heartbeat protocol ( 537)
• The parameterised time is rounded down to an integer multiple of 5 ms and must have a greater
value than the heartbeat producer time of the node to be monitored.
548 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1017
________________________________________________________________
I-1017
Index: Name:
I-1017 Producer heartbeat time
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Producer heartbeat time 0 0 ms 65535 rw U16
Time interval for sending the heartbeat telegram to the consumer(s).Heartbeat protocol ( 537)
• The parameterised time is rounded down to an integer multiple of 5 ms.
• The heartbeat telegram is automatically sent as soon as a time > 0 ms is entered. In this case,
the "node guarding" monitoring function is deactivated.
• This object relates to code C00381.
I-1018
Index: Name:
I-1018 Identity object
Subindex Default setting Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported see below 0 4294967295 ro U32
1: Vendor ID
2: Product code
3: Revision number
4: Serial number
Subindex Meaning
1 Manufacturer's identification number
• The identification number allocated to Lenze by the organisation "CAN in
Automation e. V." is "0x0000003B".
2 Product code
0x84001 8400 BaseLine C
0x84002 8400 StateLine C
0x84003 8400 HighLine C
0x84004 8400 TopLine C
3 Main and subversion of firmware
4 Serial number
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 549
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1200
________________________________________________________________
I-1200
Index: Name:
I-1200 SDO1 server parameter
Subindex Default setting Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported 2 2 2 ro U8
1: COB-ID client -> server (rx) node ID + 0x600 0 4294967295 ro U32
2: COB-ID server -> client (tx) node ID + 0x580 0 4294967295 ro U32
Subindex Meaning
1 Specification of receive identifier
• For SDO server channel 1: node address (C00350) + 0x600
2 Specification of send identifier
• For SDO server channel 1: node address (C00350) + 0x580
550 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1201
________________________________________________________________
I-1201
Index: Name:
I-1201 SDO2 server parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported 3 - (read access only) ro U8
1: COB-ID client -> server (rx) 0x80000000 0 4294967295 rw U32
2: COB-ID server -> client (tx) 0x80000000 0 4294967295 rw U32
Subindex Meaning
1 Specification of receive identifier
2 Specification of send identifier
Bit Setting
Bit 31 0 SDO is valid.
1 SDO is invalid.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 551
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1201
________________________________________________________________
Example
Parameter data channel 2 of the controller with node address 4 shall be activated.
• For this, bit 31 must be set to "0" (≡ "SDO is valid") in subindices 1 and 2 of the object I-1201.
• The master must send the two "write request" commands to the nodes via the basic SDO
channel.
Identifier calculation
• Identifier (COB-ID) = basic identifier + node address (node ID)
• Basic identifier SDO2 from master to drive: 1600 (0x640)
Identifier = 0x640 + 0x4 = 0x644
• Basic identifier SDO2 from drive to master: 1472 (0x5C0)
Identifier = 0x5C0 + 0x4 = 0x5C4
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
0x23 0x01 0x12 0x01 0x44 0x06 0x00 0x00
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte
Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4
0x23 0x01 0x12 0x02 0xC4 0x05 0x00 0x00
552 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1400
________________________________________________________________
I-1400
Index: Name:
I-1400 RPDO1 communication parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported 5 - (read access only) ro U8
1: COB-ID used by RPDO 0x200 + node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32
2: Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8
3: Inhibit time - - (not used for RPDOs) rw U16
4: Compatibility entry - - (reserved, read or write access leads to error message rw U8
0x06090011)
5: Event timer - - (not used for RPDOs) rw U16
Description of subindex 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 553
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1401
________________________________________________________________
Description of subindex 2
I-1401
Index: Name:
I-1401 RPDO2 communication parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported 5 - (read access only) ro U8
1: COB-ID used by RPDO 0x300 + node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32
2: Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8
3: Inhibit time - - (not used for RPDOs) rw U16
4: Compatibility entry - - (reserved, read or write access leads to error message rw U8
0x06090011)
5: Event timer - - (not used for RPDOs) rw U16
• For data telegram assignment and description of subindices 1 and 2, see object I-1400.
554 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1402
________________________________________________________________
I-1402
Index: Name:
I-1402 RPDO3 communication parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported 5 - (read access only) ro U8
1: COB-ID used by RPDO 0x400 + node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32
2: Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8
3: Inhibit time - - (not used for RPDOs) rw U16
4: Compatibility entry - - (reserved, read or write access leads to error message rw U8
0x06090011)
5: Event timer - - (not used for RPDOs) rw U16
• For data telegram assignment and description of subindices 1 and 2, see object I-1400.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 555
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1403
________________________________________________________________
I-1403
Index: Name:
I-1403 RPDO4 communication parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported 5 - (read access only) ro U8
1: COB-ID used by RPDO 0x500 + node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32
2: Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8
3: Inhibit time - - (not used for RPDOs) rw U16
4: Compatibility entry - - (reserved, read or write access leads to error message rw U8
0x06090011)
5: Event timer - - (not used for RPDOs) rw U16
• For data telegram assignment and description of subindices 1 and 2, see object I-1400.
556 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1600
________________________________________________________________
I-1600
Index: Name:
I-1600 RPDO1 mapping parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Number of mapped application 0 0 8 rw U8
objects in PDO
1 ... 4: Application object 1 ... 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32
Subindex Meaning
0 Number of mapped objects
1 ... 4 Mapping entries 1 ... 4 for RPDO1
• The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value
available.
IEC 61131 process data words are mapped. Only whole bytes can be mapped (1-byte/mapping
entry).
Related topics:
RPDO1 | Port block "LP_CanIn1" ( 505)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 557
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1601
________________________________________________________________
I-1601
Index: Name:
I-1601 RPDO2 mapping parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Number of mapped application 0 0 8 rw U8
objects in PDO
1 ... 4: Application object 1 ... 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32
Subindex Meaning
0 Number of mapped objects
1 ... 4 Mapping entries 1 ... 4 for RPDO2
• The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value
available.
Related topics:
RPDO2 | "LP_CanIn2" port block ( 507)
I-1602
Index: Name:
I-1602 RPDO3 mapping parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Number of mapped application 0 0 8 rw U8
objects in PDO
1 ... 4: Application object 1 ... 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32
Subindex Meaning
0 Number of mapped objects
1 ... 4 Mapping entries 1 ... 4 for RPDO3
• The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value
available.
Related topics:
RPDO3 | "LP_CanIn3" port block ( 509)
558 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1603
________________________________________________________________
I-1603
Index: Name:
I-1603 RPDO4 mapping parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Number of mapped application 0 0 8 rw U8
objects in PDO
1 ... 4: Application object 1 ... 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32
Subindex Meaning
0 Number of mapped objects
1 ... 4 Mapping entries 1 ... 4 for RPDO4
• The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value
available.
Related topics:
RPDO4 | "LP_CanIn4" port block ( 511)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 559
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1800
________________________________________________________________
I-1800
Index: Name:
I-1800 TPDO1 communication parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported 5 - (read access only) ro U8
1: COB-ID used by TPDO 0x180 + node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32
2: Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8
3: Inhibit time 0 ms 0 0.1 ms 65535 rw U16
4: Reserved - - (reserved, read or write access leads to error message rw U8
0x06090011)
5: Event timer 0 ms 0 ms 65535 rw U16
Bit Setting
Bit 30 0 RTR to this PDO possible (Lenze).
1 RTR to this PDO not possible (not adjustable)
Bit 31 0 PDO active
1 PDO inactive
560 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1800
________________________________________________________________
Note!
The delay time can only be changed when the PDO is not active (see subindex 1, bit 31 =
1).
The entered value multiplied by 0.1 gives the delay time in [ms]. Only integers will be considered,
i.e. fractional numbers will be rounded down to integers.
Example:
• Entered value: 26
• Calculated time = 26 x 0.1 [ms] = 2.6 [ms] delay time = 2 [ms]
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 561
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1801
________________________________________________________________
I-1801
Index: Name:
I-1801 TPDO2 communication parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported 5 - (read access only) ro U8
1: COB-ID used by TPDO 0x280 + node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32
2: Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8
3: Inhibit time 0 ms 0 0.1 ms 65535 rw U16
4: Reserved - - (reserved, read or write access leads to error message rw U8
0x06090011)
5: Event timer 0 ms 0 ms 65535 rw U16
• For data telegram assignment and description of subindices, see object I-1800.
562 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1802
________________________________________________________________
I-1802
Index: Name:
I-1802 TPDO3 communication parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported 5 - (read access only) ro U8
1: COB-ID used by TPDO 0x380 + node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32
2: Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8
3: Inhibit time 0 ms 0 0.1 ms 65535 rw U16
4: Reserved - - (reserved, read or write access leads to error message rw U8
0x06090011)
5: Event timer 0 ms 0 ms 65535 rw U16
• For data telegram assignment and description of subindices, see object I-1800.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 563
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1803
________________________________________________________________
I-1803
Index: Name:
I-1803 TPDO4 communication parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Highest subindex supported 5 - (read access only) ro U8
1: COB-ID used by TPDO 0x480 + node ID 0 4294967295 rw U32
2: Transmission type 254 0 255 rw U8
3: Inhibit time 0 ms 0 0.1 ms 65535 rw U16
4: Reserved - - (reserved, read or write access leads to error message rw U8
0x06090011)
5: Event timer 0 ms 0 ms 65535 rw U16
• For data telegram assignment and description of subindices, see object I-1800.
564 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1A00
________________________________________________________________
I-1A00
Index: Name:
I-1A00 TPDO1 mapping parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Number of mapped application 0 0 8 rw U8
objects in PDO
1 ... 4: Application object 1 ... 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32
Subindex Meaning
0 Number of mapped objects
1 ... 4 Mapping entries 1 ... 4 for TPDO1
• The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value
available.
IEC 61131 process data words are mapped. Only whole bytes can be mapped (1-byte/mapping
entry).
Related topics:
TPDO1 | "LP_CanOut1" port block ( 513)
I-1A01
Index: Name:
I-1A01 TPDO2 mapping parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Number of mapped application 0 0 8 rw U8
objects in PDO
1 ... 4: Application object 1 ... 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32
Subindex Meaning
0 Number of mapped objects
1 ... 4 Mapping entries 1 ... 4 for TPDO2
• The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value
available.
Related topics:
TPDO2 | "LP_CanOut2" port block ( 514)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 565
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.11 Implemented CANopen objects | I-1A02
________________________________________________________________
I-1A02
Index: Name:
I-1A02 TPDO3 mapping parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Number of mapped application 0 0 8 rw U8
objects in PDO
1 ... 4: Application object 1 ... 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32
Subindex Meaning
0 Number of mapped objects
1 ... 4 Mapping entries 1 ... 4 for TPDO3
• The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value
available.
Related topics:
TPDO3 | "LP_CanOut3" port block ( 515)
I-1A03
Index: Name:
I-1A03 TPDO4 mapping parameter
Subindex Default setting Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Access Data type
0: Number of mapped application 0 0 8 rw U8
objects in PDO
1 ... 4: Application object 1 ... 4 0 0 4294967295 rw U32
Subindex Meaning
0 Number of mapped objects
1 ... 4 Mapping entries 1 ... 4 for TPDO4
• The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value
available.
Related topics:
TPDO4 | "LP_CanOut4" port block ( 516)
566 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
11 System bus "CAN on board"
11.12 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_CANManagement"
________________________________________________________________
The LS_CANManagement system block serves to control internal functions of the CAN driver (reset
node and re-initialisation) and to display the "Operational" status as well as the node address
(analogous to the 9300 ServoPLC and ECS devices).
/6B&DQ0DQDJHPHQW
E5HVHW1RGH E)DLO
E5H,QLW&DQ ; E2SHUDWLRQDO
&* &/ &+
Z1RGH,'
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
bFail Fault
BOOL
TRUE An event according to the error configuration in C00341 has
occurred
bOperational "Operational" status signal
BOOL
TRUE The system bus is in the "Operational" status
wNodeID Output of the node address
WORD
Note!
If a "Bus off" error is detected, the "CAN on board" interface will automatically be
reinitialised after 1 second.
Hence, 1 second after the "Bus off" has occurred, the controller will automatically be
active again on the system bus ("Auto bus off recovery").
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 567
12 Fieldbus interface (MCI)
________________________________________________________________
EtherCAT® (E84AYCET)
EtherNet/IP™ (E84AYCEO)
INTERBUS (E84AYCIB)
PROFIBUS® (E84AYCPM)
PROFINET® (E84AYCER)
Detailed information is provided in the communication manual (KHB) for the respective
fieldbus and in the »Engineer« online help.
568 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
12 Fieldbus interface (MCI)
12.1 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
The process data serve to control the controller. Thus the transfer of the process data is time-critical.
• The process cycle is 1 ms, irrespective of the respectively plugged-in bus system and the type of
drive controller.
• Process data transfer takes place cyclically between the master system and the drive controllers.
• This concerns the continuous exchange of current input and output data.
• In the case of the 8400 drive controller, 16 words per direction are exchanged.
• The master computer can directly access the process data.
Access to the process data takes place via the port blocks LP_MciIn and LP_MciOut (see FB
interconnection of the »Engineer«).
These port blocks are also called process data channels.
• The process data are not saved in the controller.
)LHOGEXV
&RPPXQLFDWLRQPRGXOH
0&,LQWHUIDFH
E&WUOB% E6WDWHB%
Z&WUO Z6WDWH
E,QB%
$SSOLFDWLRQ E2XWB%
)%LQWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
Z,Q Z2XW
Z,Q Z2XW
GQ,QBS GQ2XWBS
[12-1] External and internal data transfer between bus system, drive controller and function block interconnection
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 569
12 Fieldbus interface (MCI)
12.1 Process data transfer
________________________________________________________________
Voltage supply
Depending on the complexity and functional range of the fieldbus, the communication modules are
supplied by the standard device or an external 24 supply at the module.
The external 24 V voltage supply of the communication module is required if the supply of the
standard device fails but the communication via the bus is to continue.
Hotplug
The communication module (MCI module) can be plugged in/out while the controller is switched
on. When the module is plugged in, it is automatically detected and checked for plausibility
regarding the function and version.
570 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
12 Fieldbus interface (MCI)
12.2 Control mode "MCI"
________________________________________________________________
"40: MCI" can be selected as a control mode in C00007 in order to quickly and easily set-up drive
controller control by means of MCI-PDOs via the fieldbus interface.
Given that the technology applications are fundamentally different and have different
requirements regarding the signals sent to them, predefined assignment of the MCI-PDOs depends
on the technology application selected in C00005:
• TA "Actuating drive speed":
Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 318)
• TA "Abschaltpositionierung":
Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 378)
Tip!
The predefined assignment of the MCI-PDOs can be parameterised by means of PDO
mapping and can be freely configured on the I/O level in the function block editor (FB
editor).
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 571
12 Fieldbus interface (MCI)
12.2 Control mode "MCI"
________________________________________________________________
The LP_MciIn port block maps the received MCI-PDOs in the FB Editor.
/3B0FL,Q
E&WUOB%
:25'WR%,7
E&WUOB%
& E&WUOB%
&
E&WUOB%
E&WUOB%
Z&WUO
E,QB%
:25'WR%,7
E,QB%
& E,QB%
&
E,QB%
)LHOGEXV 0&,
E,QB%
Z,Q
& Z,Q
& Z,Q
& Z,Q
& Z,Q
& Z,Q
& Z,Q
& Z,Q
:25' :25'
GQ,QBS
',17
:25' :25'
GQ,QBS
',17
:25' :25'
GQ,QBS
',17
572 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
12 Fieldbus interface (MCI)
12.2 Control mode "MCI"
________________________________________________________________
The LP_MciOut port block maps the MCI-PDOs to be transmitted in the FB Editor.
/3B0FL2XW
E6WDWHB%
%,7WR:25'
E6WDWHB% &
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
E6WDWHB%
Z6WDWH &
E2XWB%
%,7WR:25'
E2XWB% &
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
E2XWB%
0&, )LHOGEXV
Z2XW &
Z2XW &
Z2XW &
Z2XW &
Z2XW &
:25' :25'
GQ2XWBS
',17
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 573
12 Fieldbus interface (MCI)
12.3 CAN gateway
________________________________________________________________
The CAN gateway functionality forwards the read/write requests of the attached communication
module to a connected remote device via the "CAN on board" system bus. It also receives the
responses via this way.
• From the point of view of the attached communication module, the read/write requests are
identical to accesses to its own standard device.
• Block services (reading/writing parameters of the "String" data type) can also be executes via
the CAN gateway.
)LHOGEXV
&$1EXV
&$1*DWHZD\
&
574 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
13 Synchronisation of the internal time base
________________________________________________________________
Short overview of the parameters for the synchronisation of the internal time base:
Note!
• Only integer multiples of 1000 μs can be set in C01121.
• Intelligent communication modules usually define the cycle time setpoint derived
from the bus cycle. In this case, a manual change is not possible.
Example: For the CAN bus, 2 ms has been selected as interval between two synchronisation signals.
If the CAN bus is to be used as synchronisation source, a cycle time setpoint of 2000 μs must be
selected in C01121.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 575
13 Synchronisation of the internal time base
13.1 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_SyncManagement"
________________________________________________________________
The SB LS_SyncManagement provides status information for synchronising the internal time base:
/6B6\QF0DQDJHPHQW
E6\QF6LJQDO2.
E6\QF3KDVH2.
W
6<1& 6<1&
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
576 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
14 Parameter change-over
________________________________________________________________
14 Parameter change-over
This function extension is only available from version 04.00.00!
For up to 32 freely selectable parameters, this basic function provides a change-over between four
sets with different parameter values.
The parameter list is created in the same way as the user menu is composed, namely by means of
parameterisation. In the »Engineer«, a user-friendly parameterisation dialog with import and
export functions is available for this purpose.
Principle:
• The motor which is being controlled at the
moment is connected to the controller via
0 motor contactors. (The contactor system
Motordata parameterset 1
can e.g. be controlled via the digital
outputs of the controller.)
Motordata parameterset 2
Motordata parameterset 3
• At the same time, the motor data
changeover serves to activate the motor
Motordata parameterset 4
and control settings suitable for the motor
in the controller.
Note:
The motor data changeover is carried out
within 2 ms and hence within the opening and
1 closing times of most motor contactors.
M1 M2 M3 M4
3~ 3~ 3~ 3~
Motor data changeover
Motor changeover (e.g. via motor contactors)
[14-1] Principle of the selective control of multiple motors using one controller
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 577
14 Parameter change-over
14.1 Configuring parameter change-over via the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog
________________________________________________________________
Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the parameter change-over:
1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 StateLine controller.
2. Select the Application parameters tab from the Workspace.
3. Go to the Overview dialog level and click the "Basic functions" button.
4. Go to the Overview Basic functions dialog box and click the Parameter change-over
button.
Note!
The "parameter change-over" basic function is always processed, even if the
corresponding LS_WriteParamList system block has been removed from the
interconnection by the function block editor.
If you do not require this basic function anymore, delete the composed parameter list in
order that no unwanted parameter write operations take place.
578 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
14 Parameter change-over
14.1 Configuring parameter change-over via the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog
________________________________________________________________
• On the left-hand side, all the parameters of the drive controller with write and read
access are shown in the list entitled Available parameters.
• If the option In menu groups is activated, all parameters are shown assigned to their
functions.
• By clicking on the button in the Filter area, you can shorten the list of available
parameters. If, for example, you enter the text "ain1" and then click on the button, only
those parameters whose designation contains this text are shown for selection.
2. Highlight the parameter/parameters in the Available parameters list that is/are to be
added to the WriteParamList.
• Here, you can use the <Ctrl> key and the<Shift> key for multiple selection, as in the case
of general Windows functions.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 579
14 Parameter change-over
14.1 Configuring parameter change-over via the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog
________________________________________________________________
3. Click on the button in order to add the highlighted parameters to the WriteParamList
on the right-hand side.
• With the and buttons, you can alter the sequence of parameters in the
WriteParamList.
To remove parameters from the WriteParamList, proceed as follows:
• Highlight the parameter/parameters in the WriteParamList that is/are to be removed
from the WriteParamList.
• Click on the button to remove the highlighted parameters from the WriteParamList.
4. Click on the OK button to accept the configuration and close the dialog box.
• You can call the configuration dialog again at any time in order to change or expand the
WriteParamList retrospectively.
• Unlike the "definable" parameter list, the motor data parameter list has a fixed assignment to
the motor and control parameters.
• A list of the switchable motor and control parameters is provided in chapter "Configuring the
motor data parameter list by means of parameterisation". ( 585)
• The preset values are changed in the same way as the definable parameter list.
580 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
14 Parameter change-over
14.1 Configuring parameter change-over via the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog
________________________________________________________________
Copying values
All the settings of a value set can be copied to another value set.
2. Define the parameter list to be copied via the two upper checkboxes.
3. Select Source and Target.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 581
14 Parameter change-over
14.1 Configuring parameter change-over via the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog
________________________________________________________________
The three control inputs for parameter change-over can be configured via the following parameters:
582 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
14 Parameter change-over
14.1 Configuring parameter change-over via the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog
________________________________________________________________
With every run through the main program, one parameter of the definable parameter list is written
until the parameter list has been executed completely. If an error occurs, C01083 displays an error
status and C01084 displays the number of the list entry causing the error (in connection with the
selected value set).
• If several errors occur at the same time, only the first incorrect list entry will be displayed. Hence,
after elimination of the displayed error and another activation, more errors may be displayed.
• The parameter list will always be processed from beginning to end, even if errors occur in the
meantime.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 583
14 Parameter change-over
14.2 Configuring the definable parameter list by means of parameterisation
________________________________________________________________
The following application example shows the necessary procedure for configuring the list without
using the »Engineer« parameterisation dialog.
Task:
The LS_WriteParamList SB is to be used to write to parameters C00012, C00026/1 and C00027/1.
Note!
Gaps in the parameter list (setting = 0.000) are permissible and are skipped in the
process.
Invalid parameter entries are not accepted when being entered.
584 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
14 Parameter change-over
14.3 Configuring the motor data parameter list by means of parameterisation
________________________________________________________________
The setting of the values for value sets 1 ... 4 of the motor data parameter list can also be carried out
directly via the codes from code C02210 (see following table; columns 1st value ... 4th value).
• Unlike the "definable" parameter list, the motor data parameter list has a fixed assignment to
the motor and control parameters.
• The preset values for value sets 1 ... 4 correspond to the Lenze setting of the respective motor or
control parameter.
• The values are entered according to the scaling format / scaling factor of the respective motor
or control parameter.
Code Name Lenze setting 1st value 2nd value 3rd value 4th value
C00006 Motor control 6 C02210/1 C02210/2 C02210/3 C02210/4
C00015 VFC: V/f base frequency 50.0 Hz C02212/1 C02212/2 C02212/3 C02212/4
C00016 VFC: Vmin boost 1.60 % C02213/1 C02213/2 C02213/3 C02213/4
C00018 Switching frequency 2 C02214/1 C02214/2 C02214/3 C02214/4
C00019 Auto-DCB: Threshold 3 rpm C02215/1 C02215/2 C02215/3 C02215/4
C00021 Slip comp. 2.67 % C02216/1 C02216/2 C02216/3 C02216/4
C00022 Imax in motor mode 47.00 A C02217/1 C02217/2 C02217/3 C02217/4
C00023 Imax in generator mode 100.00 % C02218/1 C02218/2 C02218/3 C02218/4
C00036 DC braking: Current 50.00 % C02219/1 C02219/2 C02219/3 C02219/4
C00070/1 SLVC: Vp speed controller 15.00 C02220/1 C02220/2 C02220/3 C02220/4
C00070/2 Reserved 6.00 C02220/5 C02220/6 C02220/7 C02220/8
C00070/3 SLPSM: Vp speed controller 3.00 C02220/9 C02220/10 C02220/11 C02220/12
C00071/1 SLVC: Ti speed controller 100.0 ms C02221/1 C02221/2 C02221/3 C02221/4
C00071/2 Reserved 50.0 ms C02221/5 C02221/6 C02221/7 C02221/8
C00071/3 SLPSM: Ti speed controller 100.0 ms C02221/9 C02221/10 C02221/11 C02221/12
C00072 SC: Tdn speed controller 0.00 ms C02222/1 C02222/2 C02222/3 C02222/4
C00073/1 VFC: Vp Imax controller 0.25 C02223/1 C02223/2 C02223/3 C02223/4
C00073/2 SLVC: Vp torque controller 1.25 C02223/5 C02223/6 C02223/7 C02223/8
C00074/1 VFC: Ti Imax controller 65 ms C02224/1 C02224/2 C02224/3 C02224/4
C00074/2 SLVC: Ti torque controller 30 ms C02224/5 C02224/6 C02224/7 C02224/8
C00075 Vp current controller 7.00 V/A C02225/1 C02225/2 C02225/3 C02225/4
C00076 Ti current controller 10.61 ms C02226/1 C02226/2 C02226/3 C02226/4
C00079/1 SC: Current controller - feedforward control 0 C02229/1 C02229/2 C02229/3 C02229/4
C00079/2 SC: adapt. field weak. controller 1 C02229/5 C02229/6 C02229/7 C02229/8
C00079/3 SC: n-Ctrl Anti-Wind-Up 0 C02229/9 C02229/10 C02229/11 C02229/12
C00080 Override point of field weakening 0 Hz C02230/1 C02230/2 C02230/3 C02230/4
C00081 Rated motor power 11.00 kW C02231/1 C02231/2 C02231/3 C02231/4
C00082 Motor rotor resistance 276 mOhm C02232/1 C02232/2 C02232/3 C02232/4
C00084 Motor stator resistance 330 mOhm C02233/1 C02233/2 C02233/3 C02233/4
C00085 Motor stator leakage inductance 3.50 mH C02234/1 C02234/2 C02234/3 C02234/4
C00087 Rated motor speed 1460 rpm C02236/1 C02236/2 C02236/3 C02236/4
C00088 Rated motor current 21.00 A C02237/1 C02237/2 C02237/3 C02237/4
C00089 Rated motor frequency 50 Hz C02238/1 C02238/2 C02238/3 C02238/4
C00090 Rated motor voltage 400 V C02239/1 C02239/2 C02239/3 C02239/4
C00091 Motor cosine phi 0.85 C02240/1 C02240/2 C02240/3 C02240/4
C00092 Motor magnetising inductance 81.0 mH C02241/1 C02241/2 C02241/3 C02241/4
C00095 Motor magnetising current 8.50 A C02242/1 C02242/2 C02242/3 C02242/4
C00106 Auto-DCB: Hold time 0.500 s C02244/1 C02244/2 C02244/3 C02244/4
C00107 DC braking: Hold time 999.000 s C02245/1 C02245/2 C02245/3 C02245/4
C00120 Setting of motor overload (I²xt) 100.00 % C02246/1 C02246/2 C02246/3 C02246/4
C00234 Oscillation damping influence 5.00 % C02249/1 C02249/2 C02249/3 C02249/4
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 585
14 Parameter change-over
14.3 Configuring the motor data parameter list by means of parameterisation
________________________________________________________________
Code Name Lenze setting 1st value 2nd value 3rd value 4th value
C00235 Oscillation damping filter time 32 ms C02250/1 C02250/2 C02250/3 C02250/4
C00236 Oscillation damping field weakening 14 C02251/1 C02251/2 C02251/3 C02251/4
C00273 Motor moment of inertia 0.00 kg cm^2 C02256/1 C02256/2 C02256/3 C02256/4
C00653/1 Sensibility - Setpoint feedforward control 0 C02264/1 C02264/2 C02264/3 C02264/4
C00905 Motor phase direction of rotation 0 C02272/1 C02272/2 C02272/3 C02272/4
C00909/1 Max. pos. speed 120.00 % C02273/1 C02273/2 C02273/3 C02273/4
C00909/2 Max. neg. speed 120.00 % C02273/5 C02273/6 C02273/7 C02273/8
C00910/1 Max. pos. output frequency 1000 Hz C02274/1 C02274/2 C02274/3 C02274/4
C00910/2 Max. neg. output frequency 1000 Hz C02274/5 C02274/6 C02274/7 C02274/8
C00915 Motor cable length 5.0 m C02275/1 C02275/2 C02275/3 C02275/4
C00916 Motor cable cross-section 6.00 mm^2 C02276/1 C02276/2 C02276/3 C02276/4
C00938 PSM: Maximum motor current field weakening 30.00 % C02278/1 C02278/2 C02278/3 C02278/4
C00939 Ultimate motor current 3000.0 A C02279/1 C02279/2 C02279/3 C02279/4
C00965 Max. motor speed 60000 rpm C02280/1 C02280/2 C02280/3 C02280/4
C00966 VFC: Time const. slip comp. 100 ms C02281/1 C02281/2 C02281/3 C02281/4
C00971/1 VFC: Controller limitation V/f +encoder 10.00 Hz C02284/1 C02284/2 C02284/3 C02284/4
C00971/2 VFC: Slip limitation V/f +encoder 100.00 Hz C02284/5 C02284/6 C02284/7 C02284/8
C00972 VFC: Vp V/f +encoder 0.100 Hz/Hz C02285/1 C02285/2 C02285/3 C02285/4
C00973 VFC: Ti V/f +encoder 100.0 ms C02286/1 C02286/2 C02286/3 C02286/4
C00975 VFC-ECO: Vp CosPhi controller 0.500 Hz/Hz C02287/1 C02287/2 C02287/3 C02287/4
C00976 VFC-ECO: Ti CosPhi controller 200.0 ms C02288/1 C02288/2 C02288/3 C02288/4
C00977 VFC-ECO: Minimum voltage V/f 20.00 % C02289/1 C02289/2 C02289/3 C02289/4
C00982 VFC-ECO: Voltage reduction ramp 0.8 s C02290/1 C02290/2 C02290/3 C02290/4
C00985 SLVC: Field current controller gain 0.50 % C02291/1 C02291/2 C02291/3 C02291/4
C00986 SLVC: Cross current controller gain 0.00 % C02292/1 C02292/2 C02292/3 C02292/4
C00987 Inverter motor brake: nAdd 80 rpm C02293/1 C02293/2 C02293/3 C02293/4
C00988 Inverter motor brake: PT1 filter time 0.0 ms C02294/1 C02294/2 C02294/3 C02294/4
C00990 Flying restart fct.: Activate 0 C02295/1 C02295/2 C02295/3 C02295/4
C00991 Flying restart fct.: Process 2 C02296/1 C02296/2 C02296/3 C02296/4
C00992 Flying restart fct.: Start frequency 10 Hz C02297/1 C02297/2 C02297/3 C02297/4
C00993 Flying restart fct: Int. time 300.0 ms C02298/1 C02298/2 C02298/3 C02298/4
C00994 Flying restart fct.: Current 25.00 % C02299/1 C02299/2 C02299/3 C02299/4
C00995/1 SLPSM: Controlled accelerating current 100.00 % C02300/1 C02300/2 C02300/3 C02300/4
C00995/2 SLPSM: Controlled standstill current 20.00 % C02300/5 C02300/6 C02300/7 C02300/8
C00996/1 SLPSM: Switching speed, closed-loop control 13.00 % C02301/1 C02301/2 C02301/3 C02301/4
C00996/2 SLPSM: Switching speed, open-loop control 8.00 % C02301/5 C02301/6 C02301/7 C02301/8
C00997 SLPSM: Filter cutoff frequency 5.00 % C02302/1 C02302/2 C02302/3 C02302/4
C00998/1 SLPSM: Filter time rotor position 3.0 ms C02303/1 C02303/2 C02303/3 C02303/4
C00998/2 SLPSM: Filter time actual speed value 5.0 ms C02303/5 C02303/6 C02303/7 C02303/8
C00999 SLPSM: PLL gain 400 % C02304/1 C02304/2 C02304/3 C02304/4
C01001/1 Manual entry of motor type 0 C02315/1 C02315/2 C02315/3 C02315/4
C02853/1 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/1 C02305/2 C02305/3 C02305/4
C02853/2 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/5 C02305/6 C02305/7 C02305/8
C02853/3 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/9 C02305/10 C02305/11 C02305/12
C02853/4 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/13 C02305/14 C02305/15 C02305/16
C02853/5 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/17 C02305/18 C02305/19 C02305/20
C02853/6 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/21 C02305/22 C02305/23 C02305/24
C02853/7 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/25 C02305/26 C02305/27 C02305/28
C02853/8 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/29 C02305/30 C02305/31 C02305/32
C02853/9 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/33 C02305/34 C02305/35 C02305/36
C02853/10 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/37 C02305/38 C02305/39 C02305/40
C02853/11 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/41 C02305/42 C02305/43 C02305/44
586 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
14 Parameter change-over
14.3 Configuring the motor data parameter list by means of parameterisation
________________________________________________________________
Code Name Lenze setting 1st value 2nd value 3rd value 4th value
C02853/12 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/45 C02305/46 C02305/47 C02305/48
C02853/13 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/49 C02305/50 C02305/51 C02305/52
C02853/14 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/53 C02305/54 C02305/55 C02305/56
C02853/15 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/57 C02305/58 C02305/59 C02305/60
C02853/16 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/61 C02305/62 C02305/63 C02305/64
C02853/17 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/65 C02305/66 C02305/67 C02305/68
C02855 PSM: Imax Lss saturation characteristic 3000.0 A C02306/1 C02306/2 C02306/3 C02306/4
C02859 PSM: Activate Ppp saturation char. 0 C02307/1 C02307/2 C02307/3 C02307/4
C02872/1 PLI without motion: Adaptation of time duration 0 C02311/1 C02311/2 C02311/3 C02311/4
C02874/1 PLI without motion 0x0001 C02312/1 C02312/2 C02312/3 C02312/4
C02875/1 PLI without motion: Adaptation of ident angle 0 ° C02313/1 C02313/2 C02313/3 C02313/4
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 587
14 Parameter change-over
14.4 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_WriteParamList"
________________________________________________________________
The LS_WriteParamList system block provides the internal interfaces for the basic "Parameter
change-over" function.
Note!
The "parameter change-over" basic function is always processed, even if the
LS_WriteParamList system block has been removed from the interconnection by the FB
Editor.
If you do not require this basic function anymore, delete the composed parameter list in
order that no unwanted parameter write operations take place.
/6B:ULWH3DUDP/LVW
E([HFXWH & :ULWHSDUDPHWHUOLVW 2Q2II E'RQH
& :ULWHPRWRUSDUDPHWHUOLVW 2Q 2II
&
E6HOHFW:ULWH9DOXHB )DLOVWDWH E)DLO
)$/6( 758( )$/6( 758(
E6HOHFW:ULWH9DOXHB &
)$/6( )$/6( 758( 758( )DLOOLQHQXPEHU
Inputs
588 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
14 Parameter change-over
14.4 Internal interfaces | System block "LS_WriteParamList"
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 589
15 Parameter reference
________________________________________________________________
15 Parameter reference
This chapter describes all parameters which can be used for parameterising and monitoring the
controller.
Parameters which are only available in the controller from a certain software version onwards are
marked with a corresponding note in the parameter description ("from version xx.xx.xx").
The parameter descriptions are based on software version V15.00.00
Tip!
For quick reference of a parameter with a certain name simply use the index of the online
documentation. The index always contains the corresponding code in parentheses behind
the name.
General information on parameter setting can be found in the chapter "Introduction:
Parameterising the controller". ( 20)
For general information on how to read and change parameters, please see the online
documentation for the »Engineer«.
590 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.1 Structure of the parameter descriptions
________________________________________________________________
Each parameter is described in the Parameter list in the form of a table which consists of the
following three areas:
Table header
The table header contains the following general information:
• Parameter number (Cxxxxx)
• Parameter name (display text in the »Engineer» and keypad)
• Data type
• Parameter index in decimal and hexadecimal notation for access via a fieldbus (e.g. CAN system
bus).
Tip!
The parameter index is calculated as follows:
• Index [dec] = 24575 - code
• Index [hex] = 0x5FFF - code
Example for code C00005:
• Index [dec] = 24575 - 5 = 24570
• Index [hex] = 0x5FFF - 0x{5} = 0x5FFA
Table contents
The table contains further general explanations & notes on the parameter and the possible settings,
which are represented in different ways depending on the parameter type:
• Parameters with read-only access
• Parameters with write access
Table footer
The table footer contains the Parameter attributes.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 591
15 Parameter reference
15.1 Structure of the parameter descriptions
________________________________________________________________
Parameters for which the "write access" attribute has not been set can only be read and not be
changed by the user.
Description structure
Description
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
592 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.1 Structure of the parameter descriptions
________________________________________________________________
Only parameters with a check mark () in front of the "write access" attribute can be changed by
the user. The Lenze setting for these parameters is printed in bold.
• The settings can either be selected from a selection list or the values can be entered directly.
• Values outside the valid setting range are represented in red in the »Engineer«.
Description structure
Description
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Description structure
Description
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
1
2
3
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 593
15 Parameter reference
15.1 Structure of the parameter descriptions
________________________________________________________________
Description structure
Description
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0
...
Bit 31
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
594 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.1 Structure of the parameter descriptions
________________________________________________________________
Description structure
Description
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
Attribute Meaning
Read access Read access to parameter possible.
Write access Write access to parameter possible.
• Please also observe the following attributes:
CINH Parameter value can only be changed when the controller is
inhibited.
PLC STOP Parameter value can only be changed when the application is
stopped.
No transfer Parameter is not transferred to controller when the command Download parameter set is
executed.
COM Communication-relevant parameter
• This parameter is relevant for parameter data transfer via the (CAN) system bus.
MOT Motor control parameters
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 595
15 Parameter reference
15.1 Structure of the parameter descriptions
________________________________________________________________
Scaling factor
The "scaling factor" is important for parameter access via a bus system.
Example 1: The value "654" of the parameter C00028/1 (AIN1: input voltage) read via a bus system
must be divided by the corresponding scaling factor "100" to obtain the actual display value
"6.54 V".
Example 2: In order to set the parameter C00012 (acceleration time main setpoint) to the value
"123.45 %" via a bus system, the integer value "12345" must be transferred, i.e. the value to be set
must be multiplied by the corresponding scaling factor "100".
Character length
In case of parameters of "VISIBLE_STRING" data type, the character length is given in addition. This
is also important for the parameter access via a bus system.
596 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list
________________________________________________________________
This chapter lists all parameters of the operating system in numerically ascending order.
Note!
The parameter descriptions are based on the software version V15.00.00.
C00001
From version 12.00.00 onwards, the extent of menus, submenus and codes shown in the keypad can be adapted by
selecting the "userlevel".
• When the userlevel has been changed, the menus of the keypad will be reconfigured according to the selected
user level.
• Independently of the set userlevel, the parameters of the attached communication module will always be
displayed completely.
Selection list Info
10 Standard Only the most important menus and codes are displayed
on the keypad.
20 Expert All menus and codes are displayed on the keypad.
30 Service Only for servicing purposes (Lenze service).
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00001/1 10: Standard Keypad UserLevel
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00002
Note:
• Before switching off the supply voltage after a device command has been executed, check the successful
execution of the device command via the status display in C00003!
• Before activating device commands by a master control, wait for the "Ready" signal of the controller.
• The device will reject a write process to C00002/x if the value is >1 and issue an error message.
Drive control (DCTRL): Device commands
Selection list
0 Off / ready
1 On / start
4 Action cancelled
5 No access
6 No access controller inhibit
20 20% working
40 40% working
60 60% working
80 80% working
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 597
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list
________________________________________________________________
598 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 599
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00003
________________________________________________________________
C00003
Note:
Before switching off the supply voltage after carrying out a device command, check whether the device command
has been carried out successfully via the status display!
Drive control (DCTRL): Device commands
Selection list (read only) Info
0 Successful Device command has been executed successfully.
1 Command unknown Device command implausible or unknown to the system.
2 Password protection Unauthorised access for requested device command.
Password protection
3 Time-out Device command could not be processed in the defined
time (timeout).
4 System fault
5 Command server assigned
6 Controller inhibit required
10 Memory module binding error Device personalisation
11 Password too short Password protection
12 Wrong password
13 Password already set
14 Password not assigned
20 Setting the hiperface position failed
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00005
600 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00006
________________________________________________________________
C00006
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 601
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00007
________________________________________________________________
C00007
With this parameter the control mode for the technology application selected under C00005 is defined, i.e. how the
inputs and outputs of the technology application are connected to the I/Os of the controller.
• How the inputs and outputs are connected in the individual control modes is described in the corresponding
technology application:
• "Actuating drive speed" TA
• TA "actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)"
• "Switch-off positioning" TA
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Info
0 Wiring has changed This is displayed when the FB interconnection has been
changed in the I/O level via the FB Editor.
10 Terminals 0 The technology application is controlled via the digital
and analog input terminals of the controller.
12 Terminals 2
• For a short overview of the preconfigured terminal
14 Terminals 11 assignment see the following section "Terminal
assignment of the control modes 10 ... 16".
16 Terminal 16
20 Keypad The technology application is controlled via the keypad.
21 PC The technology application is controlled via the "Free
parameters" of the controller (PC control).
30 CAN The technology application is controlled by means of
CAN-PDOs via the system bus "CAN on board".
"CAN on board" system bus
40 MCI The technology application is controlled by means of
MCI-PDOs via the MCI-interface of an attached
communication module (e.g. PROFIBUS).
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
602 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00007
________________________________________________________________
"Switch-off positioning" TA
Input/output 10: Terminals 0 12: Terminals 2 14: Terminals 11 16: Terminals 16
RFR Controller enable Controller enable / Reset of error message
DI1 Fixed setpoint 1/3 Stop function 1 Fixed setpoint 1/3
DI2 Fixed setpoint 2/3 Stop function 2 Selection: Pre-switch off 1 Fixed setpoint 2/3
DI3 Reset error message CW rotation quick stop CW rotation quick stop
Selection: Switch-off position 1
DI4 Change of direction of CCW rotation quick stop CCW rotation quick stop
rotation Selection: Switch-off position 2
A1U Main speed setpoint (10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed)
O1U -
DO1 -
Relay output -
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 603
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00008
________________________________________________________________
C00008
Display of the originally selected technology application and the originally selected control mode.
• This parameter shows the selection that was set with C00005 and C00007 before a change in the I/O level or the
application level was carried out.
• For diagnostic purposes, this display serves to determine whether there is a standard interconnection in the
controller or a change carried out by the user.
Selection list (read only) Info
0 Free|Free Application: Interconnection has been changed.
I/O level: Interconnection has been changed.
10 Free|Terminal0 Application: Interconnection has been changed.
I/O level: "Terminals 0" control mode
12 Free|Terminal2 Application: Interconnection has been changed.
I/O level: "Terminal 2" control mode
14 Free|Terminal11 Application: Interconnection has been changed.
I/O level: "Terminal 11" control mode
16 Free|Terminal 16 Application: Interconnection has been changed.
I/O level: "Terminal 16" control mode
20 Free|Keypad Application: Interconnection has been changed.
I/O level: "Keypad" control mode
21 Free|PC Application: Interconnection has been changed.
I/O level: "PC" control mode
30 Free|CAN Application: Interconnection has been changed.
I/O level: "CAN" control mode
40 Free|MCI Application: Interconnection has been changed.
I/O level: "MCI" control mode
1000 Speed|Free Application: Actuating drive speed
I/O level: Interconnection has been changed.
1010 Speed|Terminal0 Application: Actuating drive speed
I/O level: "Terminals 0" control mode
1012 Speed|Terminal2 Application: Actuating drive speed
I/O level: "Terminal 2" control mode
1014 Speed|Terminal11 Application: Actuating drive speed
I/O level: "Terminal 11" control mode
1016 Speed|Terminal16 Application: Actuating drive speed
I/O level: "Terminal 16" control mode
1020 Speed|Keypad Application: Actuating drive speed
I/O level: "Keypad" control mode
1021 Speed|PC Application: Actuating drive speed
I/O level: "PC" control mode
1030 Speed|CAN Application: Actuating drive speed
I/O level: "CAN" control mode
1040 Speed|MCI Application: Actuating drive speed
I/O level: "MCI" control mode
1100 SpeedACdrive|Free Application: Actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)
I/O level: Interconnection has been changed.
1110 SpeedACdrive|Terminal0 Application: Actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)
I/O level: "Terminals 0" control mode
1112 SpeedACdrive|Klemme2 Application: Actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)
I/O level: "Terminal 2" control mode
1114 SpeedACdrive|Klemme11 Application: Actuating drive speed (AC Drive Profile)
I/O level: "Terminal 11" control mode
604 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00010
________________________________________________________________
C00010
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 605
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00011
________________________________________________________________
C00011
Note:
This is not a maximum limitation!
All values in percent in the controller may be in a range of 0 ... 199.99 %.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
50 rpm 60000 1500 rpm
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00012
The L_NSet_1 FB: Acceleration time of the ramp generator for the main speed setpoint
• Generally, this ramp generator is used for all speed-controlled technology applications.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.000 s 999.999 2.000 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C00013
The L_NSet_1 FB: Deceleration time of the ramp generator for the main speed setpoint
• Generally, this ramp generator is used for all speed-controlled technology applications.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.000 s 999.999 2.000 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C00015
V/f base frequency for V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) and V/f control (VFCplus+encoder)
• The motor voltage increases linearly with the frequency until the base frequency is reached. From this value on,
the motor voltage remains constant, the speed increases and the maximum torque decreases.
• After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
7.5 Hz 2600.0 50.0 Hz
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
606 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00016
________________________________________________________________
C00016
Boost of the V/f voltage characteristic in the range of small speeds or frequencies with V/f characteristic control
(VFCplus) and V/f control (VFCplus+encoder)
• This may increase the starting torque.
• After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Motor control (MCTRL): Setting the Vmin boost
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 100.00 1.60 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00018
Selection of the pulse width modulated switching frequency transferred from the inverter to the motor
• Select between an ideal setting for the drive which provides smooth running, and an optimal setting with regard
to the inverter which keeps its losses to a minimum (min. Pv).
• Both possibilities offer fixed and variable switching frequencies.
• When a variable switching frequency is selected, the switching frequency may change as a function of the load
and rotational frequency.
Selection of switching frequency
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
1 4 kHz var./drive-optimised
2 8 kHz var./drive-optimised
3 16 kHz var./drive-optimised
5 2 kHz constant/drive-optimised
6 4 kHz constant/drive-optimised
7 8 kHz constant/drive-optimised
8 16 kHz constant/drive-optimised
11 4 kHz var./min. Pv
12 8 kHz var./min. Pv
13 16 kHz var./min. Pv
15 2 kHz constant/min. Pv
16 4 kHz constant/min. Pv
17 8 kHz constant/min. Pv
18 16 kHz constant/min. Pv
21 8 kHz var./drive-opt./4 kHz min
22 16 kHz var./drive-opt./4 kHz min
23 16 kHz var./drive-opt./8 kHz min
31 8 kHz var./min. Pv/4 kHz min
32 16 kHz var./min. Pv/4 kHz min
33 16 kHz var./min. Pv/8 kHz min
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 607
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00019
________________________________________________________________
C00019
C00021
Slip compensation for V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) and sensorless vector control (SLVC)
• A higher slip compensation results in a higher increase in frequency and voltage when the machine is under load.
• After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Motor control (MCTRL): Optimising the operational performance by slip compensation
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
-100.00 % 100.00 2.67 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00022
C00023
608 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00024
________________________________________________________________
C00024
C00026
C00027
C00028
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 609
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00029
________________________________________________________________
C00029
C00033
C00034
610 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00036
________________________________________________________________
C00036
C00039
The L_NSet_1 FB: Fixed speed setpoints (JOG values) for the setpoint generator
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.99 % 199.99
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00039/1 40.00 % Fixed setpoint 1
C00039/2 60.00 % Fixed setpoint 2
C00039/3 80.00 % Fixed setpoint 3
C00039/4 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 4
C00039/5 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 5
C00039/6 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 6
C00039/7 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 7
C00039/8 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 8
C00039/9 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 9
C00039/10 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 10
C00039/11 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 11
C00039/12 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 12
C00039/13 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 13
C00039/14 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 14
C00039/15 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 15
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00050
Display of the speed setpoint at the speed setpoint input of the motor control
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-120000 rpm 120000
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 611
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00051
________________________________________________________________
C00051
Note:
The displayed value only corresponds to the real actual speed value of the motor shaft if an encoder is connected to
the motor and the evaluation of the feedback signal has been set correctly ("Closed loop" operation).
In case of operation without speed feedback, the signal is calculated from the motor control and thus may not
correspond to the real actual speed.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-120000 rpm 120000
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00052
C00053
C00054
612 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00055
________________________________________________________________
C00055
Note:
When a single-track feedback has been selected for the HTL encoder (C00115 = 1 or 3), the sign of the actual speed
value is created from the sign of the speed setpoint. In C00055/1, a positive speed is always displayed.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-32767 rpm 32767
Subcodes Info
C00055/1 Actual value - HTL encoder FreqIn12
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00056
C00057
C00058
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 613
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00059
________________________________________________________________
C00059
Display of the field frequency which corresponds to the reference speed set in C00011.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 Hz 1300.00
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00061
C00062
C00064
614 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00065
________________________________________________________________
C00065
Display of the 24V supply voltage for the supply of the control electronics
Note:
The 24 V supply for the control electronics is either provided by an external supply or by the controller itself if it is
connected to the mains voltage.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 V 3276.7
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C00066
Display of the thermal motor load, sensorlessly determined using a motor model
• If the value displayed here exceeds "100.00 %", the error message "OC6: Thermal motor overload (I2xt)" is output
and the fault response set in C00606 is executed (default setting: "Warning").
Motor overload monitoring (I2xt)
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 199.99
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00070
Amplification factor Vp of the speed controller for different motor control modes
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 600.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00070/1 15.00 SLVC: Vp speed controller
C00070/2 6.00 Reserved
C00070/3 3.00 SLPSM: Vp speed controller
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00071
Reset time Ti of the speed controller for different motor control modes
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 ms 6000.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00071/1 100.0 ms SLVC: Ti speed controller
C00071/2 50.0 ms Reserved
C00071/3 100.0 ms SLPSM: Ti speed controller
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 615
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00072
________________________________________________________________
C00072
Differential time constant Tdn of the speed controller for sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 ms 3.00 0.00 ms
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00073
C00074
C00075
Gain factor Vp of the current controller for certain inverter functions (parameter identification, flying restart circuit)
• After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 V/A 500.00 7.00 V/A
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
616 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00076
________________________________________________________________
C00076
Reset time Ti of the current controller for certain inverter functions (parameter identification, flying restart circuit)
• After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 ms 500.00 10.61 ms
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00079
Configuration of different options for sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
Selection list
0 Off
1 On
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00079/1 0: Off SC: Current controller - feedforward control
C00079/2 1: On SC: Adapt. VP in the field weakening range
C00079/3 0: Off SC: n-Ctrl Anti-Wind-Up
C00079/4 1: On Field weakening for synchronous motors
• From version 11.00.00
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00080
C00081
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Note:
It is mandatory to give the rated motor power for the sensorless vector control (SLVC).
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 kW 500.00 11.00 kW
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 617
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00082
________________________________________________________________
C00082
After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0 mOhm 200000 276 mOhm
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00083
C00084
After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0 mOhm 200000 330 mOhm
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00085
After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 mH 650.00 3.50 mH
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00087
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Note:
It is mandatory to give the rated motor speed for the sensorless vector control (SLVC).
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
50 rpm 60000 1460 rpm
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
618 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00088
________________________________________________________________
C00088
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.20 A 320.00 21.00 A
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00089
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Note:
It is mandatory to give the rated motor frequency for the sensorless vector control (SLVC).
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
1 Hz 1000 50 Hz
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00090
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0 V 5000 400 V
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00091
This value can be obtained from the motor nameplate. After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor
catalogue, the suitable value can be entered automatically.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.40 1.00 0.85
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00092
After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.0 mH 6500.0 81.0 mH
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 619
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00093
________________________________________________________________
C00093
C00095
After the motor to be used has been selected from the motor catalogue, the suitable value can be entered
automatically. An automatic detection via the motor parameter identification is possible as well.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 A 320.00 8.50 A
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00097
C00098
Display of the rated inverter current which is defined by the integrated power section.
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 A 6000.0
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C00099
620 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00100
________________________________________________________________
C00100
C00101
The L_NSet_1: FB: Additional acceleration times for the main setpoint
• The additional acceleration times set here can be selected via the binary inputs bTI1 ... bTI8 of the L_NSet_1 FB.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.000 s 999.999
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00101/1 0.000 s Add. accel. time 1 ... 15
C00101/...
C00101/15
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C00103
The L_NSet_1 FB: Additional deceleration times for the main setpoint
• The additional deceleration times set here can be selected via the binary inputs bTI1 ... bTI8 of the L_NSet_1 FB.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.000 s 999.999
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00103/1 0.000 s Add. decel. time 1 ... 15
C00103/...
C00103/15
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C00105
The set deceleration time determines the ramp slope at quick stop
Activate/deactivate quick stop
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.000 s 999.900 2.000 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 621
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00106
________________________________________________________________
C00106
C00107
C00114
The polarity of each digital input of the device can be inverted via this bit field.
Digital terminals
Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value) Lenze setting
0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 (decimal: 0)
Value is bit-coded: ( = bit set) Info
Bit 0 DI1 inverted Inversion of digital input 1
Bit 1 DI2 inverted Inversion of digital input 2
Bit 2 DI3 inverted Inversion of digital input 3
Bit 3 DI4 inverted Inversion of digital input 4
Bit 4 Reserved
Bit 5 Reserved
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 CInh inverted Inversion of digital input RFR (controller enable)
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT
622 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00115
________________________________________________________________
C00115
C00118
The polarity of each digital output of the device can be inverted via this bit field.
Digital terminals
Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value) Lenze setting
0x00 0xFF 0x00 (decimal: 0)
Value is bit-coded: ( = bit set) Info
Bit 0 Relay inverted Relay inversion
Bit 1 DO1 inverted Inversion of digital output 1
Bit 2 Reserved
Bit 3 Reserved
Bit 4 Reserved
Bit 5 Reserved
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT
C00120
Operating threshold for the "OC6: Motor overload (I²xt)" error message
• The response for reaching the threshold can be selected in C00606.
• The current thermal motor load is displayed in C00066.
Motor overload monitoring (I2xt)
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 250.00 100.00 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 623
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00122
________________________________________________________________
C00122
C00123
Operating threshold for the "OC5: Device overload (Ixt)" error message
• The response for reaching the threshold can be selected in C00604.
• The current device utilisation is displayed in C00064.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 200.00 100.00 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00129
C00130
624 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00131
________________________________________________________________
C00131
C00133
C00134
The L_NSet_1 FB: Configuration of the ramp rounding for the main setpoint
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Info
0 Off Ramp rounding deactivated
1 PT1 behaviour Ramp rounding with PT1 behaviour
• The corresponding S-ramp time must be set in
C00182.
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 625
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00136
________________________________________________________________
C00136
626 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00137
________________________________________________________________
C00137
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 627
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00138
________________________________________________________________
C00138
628 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00142
________________________________________________________________
C00142
Starting performance of the controller after mains connection, undervoltage, loading of the Lenze setting as well as
a reset of "Trouble" or "Fault" can be parameterised individually.
Automatic restart after mains connection/fault...
Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value) Lenze setting
0x00 0xFF 0x19 (decimal: 25)
Value is bit-coded: ( = bit set) Info
Bit 0 Inhibit at power-on
Bit 1 Inhibit at trouble
Bit 2 Inhibit at fault
Bit 3 Inhibit at undervoltage
Bit 4 Inhibit at Lenze setting From version 06.00.00
Bit 5 Reserved
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT
C00144
Activation of the automatic switching frequency reduction if the temperature is too high
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Info
0 Off Automatic switching frequency reduction deactivated
1 On Automatic switching frequency reduction activated
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 629
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00148
________________________________________________________________
C00148
630 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00150
________________________________________________________________
C00150
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 631
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00155
________________________________________________________________
C00155
632 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00158
________________________________________________________________
C00158
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 633
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00159
________________________________________________________________
C00159
C00160
634 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00161
________________________________________________________________
C00161
C00162
C00163
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 635
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00163
________________________________________________________________
636 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00163
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 637
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00164
________________________________________________________________
C00164
638 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00165
________________________________________________________________
26 MCI word 11
27 MCI word 12
28 MCI word 13
29 MCI word 14
30 MCI word 15
31 MCI word 16
32 Current motor speed
33 Current motor torque
34 DC-bus voltage
35 Current motor current
36 Current motor voltage
37 Current motor frequency
38 Effective speed setpoint
39 Device utilisation
40 Motor utilisation
41 L_OffsetGainPar_1: Out
42 L_OffsetGainPar_2: Out
43 L_OffsetGainPar_3: Out
44 L_Aritmethik_1: Out
45 L_AnalogSwitch_1: Out
46 L_NSet_1: Out
47 L_MotorPoti_1: Out
48 L_PCTRL_1: Out
49 L_SignalMonitor_a: Out1
50 L_SignalMonitor_a: Out2
51 L_SignalMonitor_a: Out3
52 L_SignalMonitor_a: Out4
53 L_MulDiv_1: Out
54 L_NSet_1: Target setpoint
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00164/1 0: No signal Logbook - analog element 1
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00165
Display of the error number divided into sectors in the event of an error
Subcodes Info
C00165/1 Status determining error
C00165/2 Current error
Read access Write access CINH PLC-STOP No transfer COM MOT Character length: 14
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 639
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00166
________________________________________________________________
C00166
Display of details on the status determining error and on the currently pending error
Subcodes Info
C00166/1 Resp. to status det. error
• Response to the status determining error
C00166/2 Subj. - status det. error
• Subject area of the status determining error
C00166/3 Mess. - status det. error
• Textual message of the status determining error
C00166/4 Resp. to curr. error
• Response of the currently pending error
C00166/5 Subj. - curr. error
• Subject area of the currently pending error
C00166/6 Mess. - curr. error
• Textual message of the currently pending error
Read access Write access CINH PLC-STOP No transfer COM MOT Character length: 31
C00167
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00168
640 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00169
________________________________________________________________
C00169
C00170
C00171
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 641
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00173
________________________________________________________________
C00173
If the rated mains voltage differs from 230 V or 400 V, set the mains voltage the drive is operated with.
The set mains voltage influences the brake chopper threshold, the monitoring of the device utilisation (Ixt) and the
switch-off threshold in case of undervoltage in the DC bus.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Info
0 3ph 400V / 1ph 230V 3-phase 400 V or 1-phase 230 V
1 3ph 440V / 1ph 230V 3-phase 440 V or 1-phase 230 V
2 3ph 480V / 1ph 230V 3-phase 480 V or 1-phase 230 V
3 3ph 500V / 1ph 230V 3-phase 500 V or 1-phase 230 V
4 Reserved / reserved
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00174
The threshold from which on the brake chopper is controlled is reduced by the voltage value set here.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0 V 150 0 V
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00175
642 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00176
________________________________________________________________
C00176
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00177
C00178
C00179
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 643
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00180
________________________________________________________________
C00180
C00181
C00182
FB L_NSet_1: PT1 S-ramp time for the main setpoint ramp function generator
• Only effective with activated ramp rounding (C00134 = "1").
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.01 s 50.00 20.00 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00184
After the time set here has expired, an error message of an error that has occurred will be reset automatically if
"AutoFailReset" had been configured correspondingly in C00188.
AutoFailReset function
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
1 s 600 3 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
644 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00185
________________________________________________________________
C00185
C00186
C00187
C00188
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 645
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00189
________________________________________________________________
C00189
C00190
C00191
646 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00192
________________________________________________________________
C00192
Subcodes Info
C00192/1
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT
C00193
C00199
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 647
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00200
________________________________________________________________
C00200
C00201
Display of the firmware data of the control card and the power section
Subcodes Info
C00201/1 Firmware type - ctrl card
C00201/2 Firmware version - ctrl card
C00201/3 Firmware comp. file - ctrl card
C00201/4 Firmware type - power section
C00201/5 Firmware version - power sect.
C00201/6 Firmw. comp. file - power sect.
Read access Write access CINH PLC-STOP No transfer COM MOT Character length: 22
C00203
648 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00204
________________________________________________________________
C00204
C00205
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00206
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00210
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00219
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 649
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00220
________________________________________________________________
C00220
The L_NSet_1 FB: Acceleration time for the additional setpoint nNAdd_a
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.000 s 999.999 0.000 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C00221
The L_NSet_1 FB: Deceleration time for the additional setpoint nNAdd_a
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.000 s 999.999 0.000 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C00222
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Gain factor Vp for the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.1 500.0 1.0
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C00223
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Reset time Tn for the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
20 ms 6000 400 ms
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00224
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Derivative-action coefficient Kd for the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.0 5.0 0.0
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
650 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00225
________________________________________________________________
C00225
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Maximum output value of the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
-199.99 % 199.99 199.99 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00226
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Minimum output value of the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
-199.99 % 199.99 -199.99 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00227
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Acceleration time for the output value of the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.000 s 999.999 0.010 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C00228
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Deceleration time for the output value of the PID process controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.000 s 999.999 0.010 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C00231
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 651
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00233
________________________________________________________________
C00233
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Use of the root function at the actual value input
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Info
0 Off Root function inactive
• The actual value nAct_a remains unchanged for
further processing
1 On Root function active
• The root is extracted of the actual value nAct_a for
further processing
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00234
Oscillation damping
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 250.00 5.00 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00235
Oscillation damping
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
2 ms 250 32 ms
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00236
C00241
The L_NSet_1 FB: Hysteresis window for the zero detection of the speed output setpoint
• The speed threshold for the zero detection is 1 %
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 100.00 0.50 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
652 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00242
________________________________________________________________
C00242
C00243
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Acceleration time for showing the PID output value
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.000 s 999.999 5.000 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C00244
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Deceleration time for masking out the PID output value
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.000 s 999.999 5.000 s
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C00245
The L_PCTRL_1 FB: Display of the output value of the PID process controller
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.99 % 199.99
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 653
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00246
________________________________________________________________
C00246
C00247
C00249
C00254
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00265
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00270
Frequency to be inhibited by the current setpoint filter at sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM).
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
40.0 Hz 1000.0 200.0 Hz
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
654 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00271
________________________________________________________________
C00271
Frequency width of the current setpoint filter with sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
• Width around the frequency to be inhibited (C00270).
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.0 Hz 500.0 0.0 Hz
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C00272
Damping of the current setpoint filter with sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0 dB 100 0 db
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00273
C00274
Limitation of the acceleration change with sensorless control for synchronous motors (SLPSM)
• Setting in % of M_Nenn per ms.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.0 %/ms 400.0 400.0 %/ms
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C00275
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 655
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00276
________________________________________________________________
C00276
C00280
C00290
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00291
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00295
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00296
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00297
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00301
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
656 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00302
________________________________________________________________
C00302
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00304
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00305
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00306
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00307
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00308
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00309
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00310
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00311
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 657
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00312
________________________________________________________________
C00312
C00313
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00314
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00315
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00316
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00317
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00320
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
658 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00321
________________________________________________________________
C00321
Display of the current and the maximum runtime of the main program in the controller
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 ms 65535
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00321/1 0 ms Curr. runtime of main program
C00321/2 0 ms Max. runtime of main program
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00322
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 659
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00323
________________________________________________________________
C00323
C00324
Note:
If the "Asynchronous - manufacturer-specific/device profile-specific" transmisson type is set, the transmission cycle
timer is reset to 0 if event-controlled transmission has been triggered.
Example: Cycle time (C00356/x) = 500 ms, blocking time = 100 ms, data change sporadically:
• In the case of a sporadic data change < 500 ms, due to the blocking time set, transmission takes place every
100 ms (event-controlled transmission) as quickly as possible.
• In the case of a sporadic data change > 500 ms, due to the cycle time set, transmission takes place every 500 ms
(cyclic transmission).
System bus "CAN on board"
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 ms 6500
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00324/1 0 ms CAN emergency blocking time
C00324/2 0 ms CAN1_OUT blocking time
C00324/3 0 ms CAN2_OUT blocking time
C00324/4 0 ms CAN3_OUT blocking time
C00324/5 0 ms CAN4_OUT blocking time
• From version 15.00.00
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
660 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00338
________________________________________________________________
C00338
C00339
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 661
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00341
________________________________________________________________
C00341
662 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00342
________________________________________________________________
C00342
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 663
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00343
________________________________________________________________
C00343
664 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00344
________________________________________________________________
C00344
C00345
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 665
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00347
________________________________________________________________
C00347
C00349
666 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00350
________________________________________________________________
C00350
C00351
C00352
The drive starts as CAN master after mains switching if a value of "1" has been entered and saved here.
System bus "CAN on board"
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 Slave
1 Master
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 667
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00353
________________________________________________________________
C00353
C00354
668 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00355
________________________________________________________________
C00355
Display of the COBID of the PDOs that is active in the CAN stack
System bus "CAN on board": Identifier of the process data objects
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 2047
Subcodes Info
C00355/1 Active COBID CAN1_IN
C00355/2 Active COBID CAN1_OUT
C00355/3 Active COBID CAN2_IN
C00355/4 Active COBID CAN2_OUT
C00355/5 Active COBID CAN3_IN
C00355/6 Active COBID CAN3_OUT
C00355/7 Active COBID CAN4_IN
• From version 15.00.00
C00355/8 Active COBID CAN4_OUT
• From version 15.00.00
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00356
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 669
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00357
________________________________________________________________
C00357
C00358
C00359
670 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00360
________________________________________________________________
C00360
C00364
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 671
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00366
________________________________________________________________
C00366
C00367
672 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00368
________________________________________________________________
C00368
C00369
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 673
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00370
________________________________________________________________
C00370
C00371
C00372
C00381
Time interval for the transmission of the heartbeat telegram to the consumer(s).
• The heartbeat telegram is sent automatically as soon as a time > 0 ms is set.
• Mapping of the CANopen object I-1017 (see DS301 V4.02).
Heartbeat protocol
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0 ms 65535 0 ms
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
674 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00385
________________________________________________________________
C00385
C00386
C00387
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 675
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00400
________________________________________________________________
C00400
Note:
The real length of the low or high level at the bSquareWave output is always 1 ms higher than set here in subcode
1 or 2. If "0 ms" is set, a level with a length of 1 ms is created length, for instance, and if "1000 ms" is set, a level with
a length of 1001 ms is created.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 ms 60000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00400/1 1000 ms Length of the low level (break) + 1 ms
C00400/2 1000 ms Length of the high level + 1 ms
C00400/3 100 ms From version 06.00.00
Delay time for status signal bFirstCycleDone
• The bFirstCycleDone status signal is set to TRUE when
the first task cycle is complete and the time set here
has expired.
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00401
676 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00407
________________________________________________________________
C00407
C00408
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 677
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00409
________________________________________________________________
C00409
C00410
678 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00411
________________________________________________________________
C00411
C00412
C00413
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 679
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00420
________________________________________________________________
C00420
C00423
C00425
680 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00434
________________________________________________________________
C00434
C00435
C00436
C00439
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 681
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00440
________________________________________________________________
C00440
C00441
682 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00442
________________________________________________________________
C00442
C00443
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 683
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00444
________________________________________________________________
C00444
C00445
684 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00446
________________________________________________________________
C00446
C00447
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 685
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00448
________________________________________________________________
C00448
C00449
686 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00453
________________________________________________________________
C00453
C00455
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00456
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00458
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00459
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00460
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 687
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00461
________________________________________________________________
C00461
C00462
688 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00463
________________________________________________________________
C00463
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 689
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00464
________________________________________________________________
C00464
C00465
Time setting for the automatic change of the keypad display to the welcome screen
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 Never show welcome screen
5 5 min
15 15 min
30 30 min
60 60 min
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00466
C00467
C00468
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
690 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00469
________________________________________________________________
C00469
C00470
C00471
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 691
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00472
________________________________________________________________
C00472
C00473
C00474
692 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00480
________________________________________________________________
C00480
C00481
C00482
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 693
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00484
________________________________________________________________
C00484
C00485
C00486
694 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00487
________________________________________________________________
C00487
C00488
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 695
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00490
________________________________________________________________
C00490
C00495
Selection of the feedback system for the actual speed for motor control and display
Encoder/feedback system
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Info
0 No sensor No sensor available for the actual speed detection
1 Sensor signal FreqIn12 Speed sensor signal is fed via the digital DI1 and DI2
inputs
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00496
C00497
696 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00505
________________________________________________________________
C00505
C00506
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 697
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00507
________________________________________________________________
C00507
698 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00508
________________________________________________________________
C00508
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 699
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00509
________________________________________________________________
C00509
700 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00510
________________________________________________________________
C00510
C00516
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 701
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00517
________________________________________________________________
C00517
When a system is installed, parameters must be changed time and again until the system runs satisfactorily. The
user menu of a device serves to create a selection of frequently used parameters to be able to access and change
these parameters quickly.
• Format: <code number>,<subcode number>
• If "0.000" is set, no entry will be displayed in the user menu.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.000 16000.000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00517/1 51.000 C00051: Display of actual speed value
C00517/2 53.000 C00053: Display of DC-bus voltage
C00517/3 54.000 C00054: Display of motor current
C00517/4 61.000 C00061: Display of heatsink temperature
C00517/5 137.000 C00137: Display of device status
C00517/6 166.003 C00166/3: Display of current error message
C00517/7 0.000 User menu: Entry 7
C00517/8 11.000 C00011: Reference speed
C00517/9 39.001 C00039/1: Fixed setpoint 1
C00517/10 39.002 C00039/2: Fixed setpoint 2
C00517/11 12.000 C00012: Accel. time - main setpoint
C00517/12 13.000 C00013: Decel. time - main setpoint
C00517/13 15.000 C00015: V/f base frequency
C00517/14 16.000 C00016: Vmin boost
C00517/15 22.000 C00022: Imax in motor mode
C00517/16 120.000 C00120: Setting of motor overload (I2xt)
C00517/17 87.000 C00087: Rated motor speed
C00517/18 99.000 C00099: Display of firmware version
C00517/19 200.000 C00200: Display of firmware product type
C00517/20 0.000 User menu: Entry 20
C00517/21 0.000 User menu: Entry 21
C00517/22 0.000 User menu: Entry 22
C00517/23 0.000 User menu: Entry 23
C00517/24 105.000 C00105: Decel. time - quick stop
C00517/25 173.000 C00173: Mains voltage
C00517/26 0.000 User menu: Entry 26
C00517/27 0.000 User menu: Entry 27
C00517/28 0.000 User menu: Entry 28
C00517/29 0.000 User menu: Entry 29
C00517/30 0.000 User menu: Entry 30
C00517/31 0.000 User menu: Entry 31
C00517/32 0.000 User menu: Entry 32
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
702 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00560
________________________________________________________________
C00560
C00561
C00565
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 703
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00566
________________________________________________________________
C00566
C00567
C00569
704 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00570
________________________________________________________________
C00570
C00571
C00572
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 705
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00574
________________________________________________________________
C00574
Response which is triggered if the threshold set in C00572 for monitoring brake resistor utilisation is reached.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
5 Warning
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00579
Response when the max. speed limit (C00909) or output frequency limit (C00910) has been reached.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
5 Warning
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00580
706 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00581
________________________________________________________________
C00581
C00582
Response if the heatsink temperature has reached the switch-off temperature threshold.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
5 Warning
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00585
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 707
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00586
________________________________________________________________
C00586
Response to encoder feedback system failure or encoder feedback system track failure due to open circuit
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
5 Warning
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00588
Response if the maximum speed for the set inverter switching frequency is reached (C00018)
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
5 Warning
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00590
708 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00592
________________________________________________________________
C00592
C00593
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 709
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00594
________________________________________________________________
C00594
C00595
710 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00597
________________________________________________________________
C00597
C00598
C00599
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 711
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00600
________________________________________________________________
C00600
C00601
C00602
C00604
712 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00606
________________________________________________________________
C00606
Response when the motor load displayed in C00066 reaches the value "100.00 %".
Motor overload monitoring (I2xt)
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
5 Warning
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00607
Response when the maximum input frequency has been reached via the digital inputs.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
0 No Reaction
1 Fault
5 Warning
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00608
C00609
C00610
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 713
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00611
________________________________________________________________
C00611
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00612
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00620
714 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00620
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 715
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00621
________________________________________________________________
C00621
716 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00621
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 717
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00621
________________________________________________________________
718 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00621
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 719
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00621
________________________________________________________________
720 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00621
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 721
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00622
________________________________________________________________
C00622
C00632
722 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00633
________________________________________________________________
C00633
C00634
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 723
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00635
________________________________________________________________
C00635
The L_NSet_1 FB: Maximum speed setpoint for speed setpoint limitation
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
-199.99 % 199.99 199.99 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00636
The L_NSet_1 FB: Minimum speed setpoint for speed setpoint limitation
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
-199.99 % 199.99 -199.99 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00637
The L_NSet_1 FB: Speed setpoint is displayed after being processed by blocking zone function
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.99 % 199.99
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00638
The L_NSet_1 FB: Speed setpoint is displayed after being processed by PT1 filter function
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.99 % 199.99
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00639
The L_NSet_1 FB: Additional speed setpoint is displayed after being processed by the ramp generator
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.99 % 199.99
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
724 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00640
________________________________________________________________
C00640
The L_NSet_1 FB: Display of the generated main speed setpoint at the output nNOut_a
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.99 % 199.99
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00643
C00653
Note:
The most significant bit determines the sign of the value, the remaining bits determine the numerical value.
Selection list Info
0 Inactive
1 15 bits Bit 0 ... bit 14 are evaluated
2 14 bits Bit 0 ... bit 13 are evaluated
3 13 bits Bit 0 ... bit 12 are evaluated
4 12 bits Bit 0 ... bit 11 are evaluated
5 11 Bit Bit 0 ... bit 10 are evaluated
6 10 Bit Bit 0 ... bit 9 are evaluated
7 9 Bit Bit 0 ... bit 8 are evaluated
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00653/1 0: Inactive Sensibility - Setpoint feedforward control
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 725
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00654
________________________________________________________________
C00654
C00670
C00671
C00672
726 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00680
________________________________________________________________
C00680
C00681
The L_Compare_1 FB: Hysteresis for the comparison function selected in C00680
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 100.00 0.50 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00682
The L_Compare_1 FB: Window for the comparison function selected in C00680
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 100.00 2.00 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00685
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 727
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00686
________________________________________________________________
C00686
The L_Compare_2 FB: Hysteresis for the comparison function selected in C00685
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 100.00 0.50 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00687
The L_Compare_2 FB: Window for the comparison function selected in C00685
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 100.00 2.00 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00690
C00691
728 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00692
________________________________________________________________
C00692
C00696
C00697
C00698
C00699
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 729
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00700
________________________________________________________________
C00700
730 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00701
________________________________________________________________
C00701
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 731
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00701
________________________________________________________________
732 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00705
________________________________________________________________
C00705
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00706
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00720
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 733
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00725
________________________________________________________________
C00725
C00726
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
734 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00727
________________________________________________________________
C00727
C00728
C00729
C00730
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 735
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00731
________________________________________________________________
C00731
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00732
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00734
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00735
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00736
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00740
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00741
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00742
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00743
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
736 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00744
________________________________________________________________
C00744
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00746
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00747
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00748
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00749
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00750
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00751
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00753
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 737
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00760
________________________________________________________________
C00760
738 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00761
________________________________________________________________
C00761
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 739
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00761
________________________________________________________________
740 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00762
________________________________________________________________
C00762
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00765
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00766
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00767
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C00800
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 741
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00801
________________________________________________________________
C00801
C00802
C00803
C00804
The L_MPot_1 FB: Selection of the response if the motor potentiometer is deactivated via input bInAct
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Info
0 Retain value Keep output value
1 Deceleration to 0 Deceleration via ramp to 0
2 Deceleration to lower limit Deceleration via ramp to the lower limit (C00801)
3 Without ramp to 0 Step change to 0
4 Without ramp to lower limit Jump to lower limit (C00800)
5 Acceleration to upper limit Acceleration via ramp to upper limit (C00800)
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00805
742 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00806
________________________________________________________________
C00806
C00820
C00821
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 743
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00828
________________________________________________________________
C00828
C00829
C00830
744 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00830
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 745
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00830
________________________________________________________________
746 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00831
________________________________________________________________
C00831
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 747
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00831
________________________________________________________________
748 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00833
________________________________________________________________
C00833
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 749
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00833
________________________________________________________________
750 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00833
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 751
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00834
________________________________________________________________
C00834
752 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00840
________________________________________________________________
C00840
Display in percent of 16 bit input values of various blocks of the I/O level
• Non-listed subcodes are "reserved".
Display range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.99 % 199.99
Subcodes Info
C00840/1 LS_AnalogOutput: nOut1_a
C00840/2 LP_CanOut1: wState
C00840/3 LP_CanOut1: wOut2
C00840/4 LP_CanOut1: wOut3
C00840/5 LP_CanOut1: wOut4
C00840/6 LP_CanOut2: wOut1
C00840/7 LP_CanOut2: wOut2
C00840/8 LP_CanOut2: wOut3
C00840/9 LP_CanOut2: wOut4
C00840/10 LP_CanOut3: wOut1
C00840/11 LP_CanOut3: wOut2
C00840/12 LP_CanOut3: wOut3
C00840/13 LP_CanOut3: wOut4
C00840/14 LS_DisFree_a: nDis1_a
C00840/15 LS_DisFree_a: nDis2_a
C00840/16 LS_DisFree_a: nDis3_a
C00840/17 LS_DisFree_a: nDis4_a
C00840/18 LS_DisFree: wDis1
C00840/19 LS_DisFree: wDis2
C00840/20 LS_DisFree: wDis3
C00840/21 LS_DisFree: wDis4
C00840/22 LP_MciOut: wState
C00840/23 LP_MciOut: wOut2
C00840/24 LP_MciOut: wOut3
C00840/25 LP_MciOut: wOut4
C00840/26 LP_MciOut: wOut5
C00840/27 LP_MciOut: wOut6
C00840/28 LP_MciOut: wOut7
C00840/29 LP_MciOut: wOut8
C00840/30 LP_MciOut: wOut9
C00840/31 LP_MciOut: wOut10
C00840/32 LP_MciOut: wOut11
C00840/33 LP_MciOut: wOut12
C00840/34 LP_MciOut: wOut13
C00840/35 LP_MciOut: wOut14
C00840/36 LP_MciOut: wOut15
C00840/37 LP_MciOut: wOut16
C00840/49 LS_ParReadWrite_1: wParIndex
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 753
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00841
________________________________________________________________
C00841
Decimal/hexadecimal/bit coded display of 16 bit input values of various blocks of the I/O level
• Non-listed subcodes are "reserved".
Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000 0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0 Active
... ...
Bit 15 Active
Subcodes Info
C00841/1 LS_AnalogOutput: nOut1_a
C00841/2 LP_CanOut1: wState
C00841/3 LP_CanOut1: wOut2
C00841/4 LP_CanOut1: wOut3
C00841/5 LP_CanOut1: wOut4
C00841/6 LP_CanOut2: wOut1
C00841/7 LP_CanOut2: wOut2
C00841/8 LP_CanOut2: wOut3
C00841/9 LP_CanOut2: wOut4
C00841/10 LP_CanOut3: wOut1
C00841/11 LP_CanOut3: wOut2
C00841/12 LP_CanOut3: wOut3
C00841/13 LP_CanOut3: wOut4
C00841/14 LS_DisFree_a: nDis1_a
C00841/15 LS_DisFree_a: nDis2_a
754 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00841
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 755
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00843
________________________________________________________________
C00843
Display of the signal status of the binary inputs of different I/O level blocks
• Non-listed subcodes are "reserved".
Selection list
0 False
1 True
Subcodes Info
C00843/1 LS_DigitalOutput: bRelay
C00843/2 LS_DigitalOutput: bOut1
C00843/3 LS_DigitalInput: bCountIn1_Reset
C00843/4 LS_DigitalInput: bCountIn1_LoadStartValue
C00843/5 LP_CanOut1: bState_B0
C00843/6 LP_CanOut1: bState_B1
C00843/7 LP_CanOut1: bState_B2
C00843/8 LP_CanOut1: bState_B3
C00843/9 LP_CanOut1: bState_B4
C00843/10 LP_CanOut1: bState_B5
C00843/11 LP_CanOut1: bState_B6
C00843/12 LP_CanOut1: bState_B7
C00843/13 LP_CanOut1: bState_B8
C00843/14 LP_CanOut1: bState_B9
C00843/15 LP_CanOut1: bState_B10
C00843/16 LP_CanOut1: bState_B11
C00843/17 LP_CanOut1: bState_B12
C00843/18 LP_CanOut1: bState_B13
C00843/19 LP_CanOut1: bState_B14
C00843/20 LP_CanOut1: bState_B15
C00843/21 LS_DisFree_b: bDis1
C00843/22 LS_DisFree_b: bDis2
C00843/23 LS_DisFree_b: bDis3
C00843/24 LS_DisFree_b: bDis4
C00843/25 LS_DisFree_b: bDis5
C00843/26 LS_DisFree_b: bDis6
C00843/27 LS_DisFree_b: bDis7
C00843/28 LS_DisFree_b: bDis8
C00843/29 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B0
C00843/30 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B1
C00843/31 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B2
C00843/32 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B3
C00843/33 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B4
C00843/34 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B5
C00843/35 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B6
C00843/36 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B7
C00843/37 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B8
756 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00843
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 757
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00844
________________________________________________________________
C00844
758 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00866
________________________________________________________________
C00866
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 759
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00868
________________________________________________________________
C00868
760 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00876
________________________________________________________________
C00876
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 761
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00877
________________________________________________________________
C00877
C00890
762 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00905
________________________________________________________________
C00905
C00909
C00910
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 763
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00915
________________________________________________________________
C00915
C00916
C00917
C00919
C00922
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
764 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00937
________________________________________________________________
C00937
C00938
C00939
C00950
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 765
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00951
________________________________________________________________
C00951
C00952
C00953
C00965
C00966
766 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00967
________________________________________________________________
C00967
C00968
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 767
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00969
________________________________________________________________
C00969
C00971
Limitation of the output frequency of the slip regulator and limitation of the injected stator frequency for the V/f
control (VFCplus+encoder)
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 Hz 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C00971/1 10.00 Hz Maximum output / correcting variable of the slip
regulator
• The slip regulator output is limited to the value set
here in motor/generator mode.
• It is recommended to select 1 to 3 times the slip
frequency of the motor as limit value.
C00971/2 100.00 Hz Maximum frequency deviation between the rotational
frequency (speed) measured mechanically by the
encoder and the injected stator frequency.
• A limitation may e.g. avoid overcurrent interruption
when traversing to a fixed limit stop.
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00972
C00973
Integral time constant of the slip regulator for V/f control (VFCplus+encoder)
• In general, the time constant should be selected in a range of 20 ms (high dynamics) to 200 (low dynamics).
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.0 ms 6000.0 100.0 ms
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
768 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00975
________________________________________________________________
C00975
C00976
C00977
C00978
C00979
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 769
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00980
________________________________________________________________
C00980
C00981
C00982
C00983
770 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00985
________________________________________________________________
C00985
Gain of the direct-axis current difference (Id) between setpoint and actual current for the voltage model of the
sensorless vector control (SLVC)
• The gain should be selected in a range of 0 ...1 %.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 20.00 0.50 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00986
Gain of the cross current difference for the voltage model of the sensorless vector control (SLVC)
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.00 % 20.00 0.00 %
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C00987
C00988
C00989
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 771
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00990
________________________________________________________________
C00990
C00991
Selection of the starting value and the speed search range for the flying restart function
Flying restart fct.
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold) Info
0 0...+n | Start: +10 Hz Search positive speed range (0 ... +n) with a start
frequency of +10 Hz
1 -n...0 | Start: -10 Hz Search negative speed range (-n ... 0) with a start
frequency of -10 Hz
2 -n...+n | Start: +10 Hz Search negative and positive speed range (-n ... n) with a
start frequency of +10 Hz
3 -n...+n | Start: -10 Hz Search negative and positive speed range (-n ... n) with a
start frequency of -10 Hz
4 -n...+n | Start: Cx992 Search the negative and positive speed range (-n ... n)
with the start frequency set in C00992
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00992
Manual selection of the starting value for the flying restart function
• Only active if C00991 = 4
Flying restart fct.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
-200 Hz 200 10 Hz
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C00993
Time constant of the angular difference controller of the flying restart function
• The time constant is to amount between 60 ... 300 ms.
Flying restart fct.
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Lenze setting
0.0 ms 6000.0 300.0 ms
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
772 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00994
________________________________________________________________
C00994
C00995
C00996
C00997
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 773
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C00998
________________________________________________________________
C00998
C00999
774 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01000
________________________________________________________________
C01000
C01001
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 775
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01082
________________________________________________________________
C01082
C01083
C01084
776 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01085
________________________________________________________________
C01085
C01086
C01087
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 777
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01088
________________________________________________________________
C01088
C01089
C01090
778 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01091
________________________________________________________________
C01091
C01092
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 779
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01093
________________________________________________________________
C01093
C01094
C01095
780 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01120
________________________________________________________________
C01120
C01121
C01122
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 781
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01123
________________________________________________________________
C01123
C01124
C01138
782 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01139
________________________________________________________________
C01139
C01350
Selection list
1 Speed mode
3 Torque mode
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C01350/1 1: Speed mode ACDrive: Drive mode
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 783
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01351
________________________________________________________________
C01351
784 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01352
________________________________________________________________
C01352
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 785
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01353
________________________________________________________________
C01353
C01501
C01751
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C01752
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C01755
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
786 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01763
________________________________________________________________
C01763
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C01764
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C01765
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C01770
C01771
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C01772
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C01773
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C01774
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 787
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C01775
________________________________________________________________
C01775
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C01902
Maximally permissible baud rate in the standard device after determination of the baud rate at the diagnostic
interface X6
Selection list (Lenze setting printed in bold)
192 19.200 Bd
384 38.400 Bd
576 57.600 Bd
750 75.000 Bd
1152 115.200 Bd
1500 150.000 Bd
2500 250.000 Bd
3750 375.000 Bd
7500 750.000 Bd
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C01903
C01905
788 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02200
________________________________________________________________
C02200
C02210
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Selection list
3 SLPSM: Sensorless PSM
4 SLVC: Vector control
6 VFCplus: V/f linear
7 VFCplus: V/f linear + encoder
8 VFCplus: V/f quadr
9 VFCplus: V/f quadr + encoder
10 VFCplus: V/f definable
11 VFCplusEco: V/f energy-saving
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02210/1 6: VFCplus: V/f linear LS_WriteParamList: c6_val1
C02210/2 6: VFCplus: V/f linear LS_WriteParamList: c6_val2
C02210/3 6: VFCplus: V/f linear LS_WriteParamList: c6_val3
C02210/4 6: VFCplus: V/f linear LS_WriteParamList: c6_val3
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02212
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
7.5 Hz 2600.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02212/1 50.0 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c15_val1
C02212/2 50.0 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c15_val2
C02212/3 50.0 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c15_val3
C02212/4 50.0 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c15_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 789
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02213
________________________________________________________________
C02213
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02213/1 1.60 % LS_WriteParamList: c16_val1
C02213/2 1.60 % LS_WriteParamList: c16_val2
C02213/3 1.60 % LS_WriteParamList: c16_val3
C02213/4 1.60 % LS_WriteParamList: c16_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02214
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Selection list
1 4 kHz var./drive-optimised
2 8 kHz var./drive-optimised
3 16 kHz var./drive-optimised
5 2 kHz constant/drive-optimised
6 4 kHz constant/drive-optimised
7 8 kHz constant/drive-optimised
8 16 kHz constant/drive-optimised
11 4 kHz var./min. Pv
12 8 kHz var./min. Pv
13 16 kHz var./min. Pv
15 2 kHz constant/min. Pv
16 4 kHz constant/min. Pv
17 8 kHz constant/min. Pv
18 16 kHz constant/min. Pv
21 8 kHz var./drive-opt./4 kHz min
22 16 kHz var./drive-opt./4 kHz min
23 16 kHz var./drive-opt./8 kHz min
31 8 kHz var./min. Pv/4 kHz min
32 16 kHz var./min. Pv/4 kHz min
33 16 kHz var./min. Pv/8 kHz min
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02214/1 2: 8 kHz var./drive-opt. LS_WriteParamList: c18_val1
C02214/2 2: 8 kHz var./drive-opt. LS_WriteParamList: c18_val2
C02214/3 2: 8 kHz var./drive-opt. LS_WriteParamList: c18_val3
C02214/4 2: 8 kHz var./drive-opt. LS_WriteParamList: c18_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
790 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02215
________________________________________________________________
C02215
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 rpm 60000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02215/1 3 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c19_val1
C02215/2 3 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c19_val2
C02215/3 3 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c19_val3
C02215/4 3 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c19_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02216
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-100.00 % 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02216/1 2.67 % LS_WriteParamList: c21_val1
C02216/2 2.67 % LS_WriteParamList: c21_val2
C02216/3 2.67 % LS_WriteParamList: c21_val3
C02216/4 2.67 % LS_WriteParamList: c21_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02217
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 A 655.35
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02217/1 47.00 A LS_WriteParamList: c22_val1
C02217/2 47.00 A LS_WriteParamList: c22_val2
C02217/3 47.00 A LS_WriteParamList: c22_val3
C02217/4 47.00 A LS_WriteParamList: c22_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 791
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02218
________________________________________________________________
C02218
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02218/1 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c23_val1
C02218/2 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c23_val2
C02218/3 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c23_val3
C02218/4 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c23_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02219
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 200.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02219/1 50.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c36_val1
C02219/2 50.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c36_val2
C02219/3 50.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c36_val3
C02219/4 50.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c36_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02220
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 600.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02220/1 15.00 LS_WriteParamList: c70_s1_val1
C02220/2 15.00 LS_WriteParamList: c70_s1_val2
C02220/3 15.00 LS_WriteParamList: c70_s1_val3
C02220/4 15.00 LS_WriteParamList: c70_s1_val4
C02220/5 6.00 Reserved
C02220/6 6.00 Reserved
C02220/7 6.00 Reserved
C02220/8 6.00 Reserved
C02220/9 3.00 LS_WriteParamList: c70_s3_val1
C02220/10 3.00 LS_WriteParamList: c70_s3_val2
C02220/11 3.00 LS_WriteParamList: c70_s3_val3
C02220/12 3.00 LS_WriteParamList: c70_s3_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
792 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02221
________________________________________________________________
C02221
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 ms 6000.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02221/1 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c71_s1_val1
C02221/2 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c71_s1_val2
C02221/3 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c71_s1_val3
C02221/4 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c71_s1_val4
C02221/5 50.0 ms Reserved
C02221/6 50.0 ms Reserved
C02221/7 50.0 ms Reserved
C02221/8 50.0 ms Reserved
C02221/9 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c71_s3_val1
C02221/10 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c71_s3_val2
C02221/11 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c71_s3_val3
C02221/12 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c71_s3_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C02222
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 ms 3.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02222/1 0.00 ms LS_WriteParamList: c72_val1
C02222/2 0.00 ms LS_WriteParamList: c72_val2
C02222/3 0.00 ms LS_WriteParamList: c72_val3
C02222/4 0.00 ms LS_WriteParamList: c72_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 793
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02223
________________________________________________________________
C02223
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02223/1 0.25 LS_WriteParamList: c73_s1_val1
C02223/2 0.25 LS_WriteParamList: c73_s1_val2
C02223/3 0.25 LS_WriteParamList: c73_s1_val3
C02223/4 0.25 LS_WriteParamList: c73_s1_val4
C02223/5 1.25 LS_WriteParamList: c73_s2_val1
C02223/6 1.25 LS_WriteParamList: c73_s2_val2
C02223/7 1.25 LS_WriteParamList: c73_s2_val3
C02223/8 1.25 LS_WriteParamList: c73_s2_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02224
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 ms 9990
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02224/1 65 ms LS_WriteParamList: c74_s1_val1
C02224/2 65 ms LS_WriteParamList: c74_s1_val2
C02224/3 65 ms LS_WriteParamList: c74_s1_val3
C02224/4 65 ms LS_WriteParamList: c74_s1_val4
C02224/5 30 ms LS_WriteParamList: c74_s2_val1
C02224/6 30 ms LS_WriteParamList: c74_s2_val2
C02224/7 30 ms LS_WriteParamList: c74_s2_val3
C02224/8 30 ms LS_WriteParamList: c74_s2_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02225
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 V/A 500.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02225/1 7.00 V/A LS_WriteParamList: c75_val1
C02225/2 7.00 V/A LS_WriteParamList: c75_val2
C02225/3 7.00 V/A LS_WriteParamList: c75_val3
C02225/4 7.00 V/A LS_WriteParamList: c75_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
794 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02226
________________________________________________________________
C02226
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 ms 500.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02226/1 10.61 ms LS_WriteParamList: c76_val1
C02226/2 10.61 ms LS_WriteParamList: c76_val2
C02226/3 10.61 ms LS_WriteParamList: c76_val3
C02226/4 10.61 ms LS_WriteParamList: c76_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02229
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Selection list
0 Off
1 On
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02229/1 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c79_s1_val1
C02229/2 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c79_s1_val2
C02229/3 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c79_s1_val3
C02229/4 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c79_s1_val4
C02229/5 1: On LS_WriteParamList: c79_s2_val1
C02229/6 1: On LS_WriteParamList: c79_s2_val2
C02229/7 1: On LS_WriteParamList: c79_s2_val3
C02229/8 1: On LS_WriteParamList: c79_s2_val4
C02229/9 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c79_s3_val1
C02229/10 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c79_s3_val2
C02229/11 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c79_s3_val3
C02229/12 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c79_s3_val4
C02229/13 1: On LS_WriteParamList: c79_s4_val1
C02229/14 1: On LS_WriteParamList: c79_s4_val2
C02229/15 1: On LS_WriteParamList: c79_s4_val3
C02229/16 1: On LS_WriteParamList: c79_s4_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 795
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02230
________________________________________________________________
C02230
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-500 Hz 500
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02230/1 0 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c80_val1
C02230/2 0 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c80_val2
C02230/3 0 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c80_val3
C02230/4 0 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c80_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02231
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 kW 500.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02231/1 11.00 kW LS_WriteParamList: c81_val1
C02231/2 11.00 kW LS_WriteParamList: c81_val2
C02231/3 11.00 kW LS_WriteParamList: c81_val3
C02231/4 11.00 kW LS_WriteParamList: c81_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02232
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 mOhm 200000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02232/1 276 mOhm LS_WriteParamList: c82_val1
C02232/2 276 mOhm LS_WriteParamList: c82_val2
C02232/3 276 mOhm LS_WriteParamList: c82_val3
C02232/4 276 mOhm LS_WriteParamList: c82_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
796 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02233
________________________________________________________________
C02233
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 mOhm 200000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02233/1 330 mOhm LS_WriteParamList: c84_val1
C02233/2 330 mOhm LS_WriteParamList: c84_val2
C02233/3 330 mOhm LS_WriteParamList: c84_val3
C02233/4 330 mOhm LS_WriteParamList: c84_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02234
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 mH 650.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02234/1 3.50 mH LS_WriteParamList: c85_val1
C02234/2 3.50 mH LS_WriteParamList: c85_val2
C02234/3 3.50 mH LS_WriteParamList: c85_val3
C02234/4 3.50 mH LS_WriteParamList: c85_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02236
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
50 rpm 60000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02236/1 1460 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c87_val1
C02236/2 1460 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c87_val2
C02236/3 1460 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c87_val3
C02236/4 1460 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c87_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 797
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02237
________________________________________________________________
C02237
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.20 A 320.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02237/1 21.00 A LS_WriteParamList: c88_val1
C02237/2 21.00 A LS_WriteParamList: c88_val2
C02237/3 21.00 A LS_WriteParamList: c88_val3
C02237/4 21.00 A LS_WriteParamList: c88_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02238
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
1 Hz 1000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02238/1 50 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c89_val1
C02238/2 50 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c89_val2
C02238/3 50 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c89_val3
C02238/4 50 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c89_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02239
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 V 5000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02239/1 400 V LS_WriteParamList: c90_val1
C02239/2 400 V LS_WriteParamList: c90_val2
C02239/3 400 V LS_WriteParamList: c90_val3
C02239/4 400 V LS_WriteParamList: c90_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
798 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02240
________________________________________________________________
C02240
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.40 1.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02240/1 0.85 LS_WriteParamList: c91_val1
C02240/2 0.85 LS_WriteParamList: c91_val2
C02240/3 0.85 LS_WriteParamList: c91_val3
C02240/4 0.85 LS_WriteParamList: c91_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02241
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 mH 6500.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02241/1 81.0 mH LS_WriteParamList: c92_val1
C02241/2 81.0 mH LS_WriteParamList: c92_val2
C02241/3 81.0 mH LS_WriteParamList: c92_val3
C02241/4 81.0 mH LS_WriteParamList: c92_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C02242
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 A 320.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02242/1 8.50 A LS_WriteParamList: c95_val1
C02242/2 8.50 A LS_WriteParamList: c95_val2
C02242/3 8.50 A LS_WriteParamList: c95_val3
C02242/4 8.50 A LS_WriteParamList: c95_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 799
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02244
________________________________________________________________
C02244
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.000 s 999.000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02244/1 0.500 s LS_WriteParamList: c106_val1
C02244/2 0.500 s LS_WriteParamList: c106_val2
C02244/3 0.500 s LS_WriteParamList: c106_val3
C02244/4 0.500 s LS_WriteParamList: c106_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C02245
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.000 s 999.000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02245/1 998.999 s LS_WriteParamList: c107_val1
C02245/2 998.999 s LS_WriteParamList: c107_val2
C02245/3 998.999 s LS_WriteParamList: c107_val3
C02245/4 998.999 s LS_WriteParamList: c107_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C02246
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 250.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02246/1 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c120_val1
C02246/2 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c120_val2
C02246/3 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c120_val3
C02246/4 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c120_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
800 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02249
________________________________________________________________
C02249
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 250.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02249/1 5.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c234_val1
C02249/2 5.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c234_val2
C02249/3 5.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c234_val3
C02249/4 5.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c234_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02250
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
2 ms 250
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02250/1 32 ms LS_WriteParamList: c235_val1
C02250/2 32 ms LS_WriteParamList: c235_val2
C02250/3 32 ms LS_WriteParamList: c235_val3
C02250/4 32 ms LS_WriteParamList: c235_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02251
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 40
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02251/1 14 LS_WriteParamList: c236_val1
C02251/2 14 LS_WriteParamList: c236_val2
C02251/3 14 LS_WriteParamList: c236_val3
C02251/4 14 LS_WriteParamList: c236_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 801
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02256
________________________________________________________________
C02256
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 kg cm^2 6000000.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02256/1 0.00 kg cm^2 LS_WriteParamList: c273_val1
C02256/2 0.00 kg cm^2 LS_WriteParamList: c273_val2
C02256/3 0.00 kg cm^2 LS_WriteParamList: c273_val3
C02256/4 0.00 kg cm^2 LS_WriteParamList: c273_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02260
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Selection list
0 No sensor
1 Sensor signal FreqIn12
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02260/1 0: No sensor LS_WriteParamList: c495_val1
C02260/2 0: No sensor LS_WriteParamList: c495_val2
C02260/3 0: No sensor LS_WriteParamList: c495_val3
C02260/4 0: No sensor LS_WriteParamList: c495_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02264
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Selection list
0 Inactive
1 15 bits
2 14 bits
3 13 bits
4 12 bits
5 11 Bit
6 10 Bit
7 9 Bit
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02264/1 0: Inactive LS_WriteParamList: C653_s1_val1
C02264/2 0: Inactive LS_WriteParamList: C653_s1_val2
C02264/3 0: Inactive LS_WriteParamList: C653_s1_val3
C02264/4 0: Inactive LS_WriteParamList: C653_s1_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
802 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02272
________________________________________________________________
C02272
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Selection list
0 not inverted
1 inverted
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02272/1 0: Not inverted LS_WriteParamList: c905_val1
C02272/2 0: Not inverted LS_WriteParamList: c905_val2
C02272/3 0: Not inverted LS_WriteParamList: c905_val3
C02272/4 0: Not inverted LS_WriteParamList: c905_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02273
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 175.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02273/1 120.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c909_s1_val1
C02273/2 120.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c909_s1_val2
C02273/3 120.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c909_s1_val3
C02273/4 120.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c909_s1_val4
C02273/5 120.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c909_s2_val1
C02273/6 120.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c909_s2_val2
C02273/7 120.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c909_s2_val3
C02273/8 120.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c909_s2_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 803
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02274
________________________________________________________________
C02274
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 Hz 1300
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02274/1 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c910_s1_val1
C02274/2 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c910_s1_val2
C02274/3 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c910_s1_val3
C02274/4 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c910_s1_val4
C02274/5 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c910_s2_val1
C02274/6 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c910_s2_val2
C02274/7 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c910_s2_val3
C02274/8 1000 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c910_s2_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02275
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 m 1000.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02275/1 5.0 m LS_WriteParamList: c915_val1
C02275/2 5.0 m LS_WriteParamList: c915_val2
C02275/3 5.0 m LS_WriteParamList: c915_val3
C02275/4 5.0 m LS_WriteParamList: c915_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C02276
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.50 mm^2 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02276/1 6.00 mm^2 LS_WriteParamList: c916_val1
C02276/2 6.00 mm^2 LS_WriteParamList: c916_val2
C02276/3 6.00 mm^2 LS_WriteParamList: c916_val3
C02276/4 6.00 mm^2 LS_WriteParamList: c916_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
804 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02278
________________________________________________________________
C02278
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 500.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02278/1 30.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c938_val1
C02278/2 30.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c938_val2
C02278/3 30.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c938_val3
C02278/4 30.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c938_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02279
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 A 3000.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02279/1 3000.0 A LS_WriteParamList: c939_val1
C02279/2 3000.0 A LS_WriteParamList: c939_val2
C02279/3 3000.0 A LS_WriteParamList: c939_val3
C02279/4 3000.0 A LS_WriteParamList: c939_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C02280
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
50 rpm 65000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02280/1 60000 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c965_val1
C02280/2 60000 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c965_val2
C02280/3 60000 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c965_val3
C02280/4 60000 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c965_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 805
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02281
________________________________________________________________
C02281
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
1 ms 6000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02281/1 100 ms LS_WriteParamList: c966_val1
C02281/2 100 ms LS_WriteParamList: c966_val2
C02281/3 100 ms LS_WriteParamList: c966_val3
C02281/4 100 ms LS_WriteParamList: c966_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02284
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 Hz 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02284/1 10.00 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c971_s1_val1
C02284/2 10.00 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c971_s1_val2
C02284/3 10.00 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c971_s1_val3
C02284/4 10.00 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c971_s1_val4
C02284/5 100.00 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c971_s2_val1
C02284/6 100.00 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c971_s2_val2
C02284/7 100.00 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c971_s2_val3
C02284/8 100.00 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c971_s2_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02285
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.000 Hz/Hz 64.000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02285/1 0.100 Hz/Hz LS_WriteParamList: c972_val1
C02285/2 0.100 Hz/Hz LS_WriteParamList: c972_val2
C02285/3 0.100 Hz/Hz LS_WriteParamList: c972_val3
C02285/4 0.100 Hz/Hz LS_WriteParamList: c972_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
806 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02286
________________________________________________________________
C02286
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 ms 6000.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02286/1 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c973_val1
C02286/2 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c973_val2
C02286/3 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c973_val3
C02286/4 100.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c973_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C02287
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.000 Hz/Hz 64.000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02287/1 0.500 Hz/Hz LS_WriteParamList: c975_val1
C02287/2 0.500 Hz/Hz LS_WriteParamList: c975_val2
C02287/3 0.500 Hz/Hz LS_WriteParamList: c975_val3
C02287/4 0.500 Hz/Hz LS_WriteParamList: c975_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
C02288
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 ms 6000.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02288/1 200.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c976_val1
C02288/2 200.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c976_val2
C02288/3 200.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c976_val3
C02288/4 200.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c976_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 807
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02289
________________________________________________________________
C02289
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
20.00 % 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02289/1 20.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c977_val1
C02289/2 20.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c977_val2
C02289/3 20.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c977_val3
C02289/4 20.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c977_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02290
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 s 5.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02290/1 0.8 s LS_WriteParamList: c982_val1
C02290/2 0.8 s LS_WriteParamList: c982_val2
C02290/3 0.8 s LS_WriteParamList: c982_val3
C02290/4 0.8 s LS_WriteParamList: c982_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C02291
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 20.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02291/1 0.50 % LS_WriteParamList: c985_val1
C02291/2 0.50 % LS_WriteParamList: c985_val2
C02291/3 0.50 % LS_WriteParamList: c985_val3
C02291/4 0.50 % LS_WriteParamList: c985_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
808 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02292
________________________________________________________________
C02292
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 20.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02292/1 0.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c986_val1
C02292/2 0.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c986_val2
C02292/3 0.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c986_val3
C02292/4 0.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c986_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02293
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 rpm 1000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02293/1 80 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c987_val1
C02293/2 80 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c987_val2
C02293/3 80 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c987_val3
C02293/4 80 rpm LS_WriteParamList: c987_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02294
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 ms 100.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02294/1 0.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c988_val1
C02294/2 0.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c988_val2
C02294/3 0.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c988_val3
C02294/4 0.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c988_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 809
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02295
________________________________________________________________
C02295
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Selection list
0 Off
1 On
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02295/1 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c990_val1
C02295/2 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c990_val2
C02295/3 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c990_val3
C02295/4 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c990_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02296
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Selection list
0 0...+n | Start: +10 Hz
1 -n...0 | Start: -10 Hz
2 -n...+n | Start: +10 Hz
3 -n...+n | Start: -10 Hz
4 -n...+n | Start: Cx992
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02296/1 2: -n...+n | Start: +10 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c991_val1
C02296/2 2: -n...+n | Start: +10 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c991_val2
C02296/3 2: -n...+n | Start: +10 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c991_val3
C02296/4 2: -n...+n | Start: +10 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c991_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02297
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-200 Hz 200
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02297/1 10 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c992_val1
C02297/2 10 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c992_val2
C02297/3 10 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c992_val3
C02297/4 10 Hz LS_WriteParamList: c992_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
810 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02298
________________________________________________________________
C02298
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 ms 6000.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02298/1 300.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c993_val1
C02298/2 300.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c993_val2
C02298/3 300.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c993_val3
C02298/4 300.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c993_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C02299
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02299/1 25.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c994_val1
C02299/2 25.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c994_val2
C02299/3 25.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c994_val3
C02299/4 25.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c994_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02300
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
5.00 % 400.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02300/1 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c995_s1_val1
C02300/2 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c995_s1_val2
C02300/3 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c995_s1_val3
C02300/4 100.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c995_s1_val4
C02300/5 20.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c995_s2_val1
C02300/6 20.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c995_s2_val2
C02300/7 20.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c995_s2_val3
C02300/8 20.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c995_s2_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 811
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02301
________________________________________________________________
C02301
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02301/1 13.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c996_s1_val1
C02301/2 13.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c996_s1_val2
C02301/3 13.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c996_s1_val3
C02301/4 13.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c996_s1_val4
C02301/5 8.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c996_s2_val1
C02301/6 8.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c996_s2_val2
C02301/7 8.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c996_s2_val3
C02301/8 8.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c996_s2_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02302
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 100.00
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02302/1 5.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c997_val1
C02302/2 5.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c997_val2
C02302/3 5.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c997_val3
C02302/4 5.00 % LS_WriteParamList: c997_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02303
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.5 ms 20.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02303/1 3.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c998_s1_val1
C02303/2 3.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c998_s1_val2
C02303/3 3.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c998_s1_val3
C02303/4 3.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c998_s1_val4
C02303/5 5.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c998_s2_val1
C02303/6 5.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c998_s2_val2
C02303/7 5.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c998_s2_val3
C02303/8 5.0 ms LS_WriteParamList: c998_s2_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
812 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02304
________________________________________________________________
C02304
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 % 1000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02304/1 400 % LS_WriteParamList: c999_val1
C02304/2 400 % LS_WriteParamList: c999_val2
C02304/3 400 % LS_WriteParamList: c999_val3
C02304/4 400 % LS_WriteParamList: c999_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02305
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0 % 255
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02305/1 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s1_val1
C02305/2 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s1_val2
C02305/3 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s1_val3
C02305/4 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s1_val4
C02305/5 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s2_val1
C02305/6 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s2_val2
C02305/7 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s2_val3
C02305/8 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s2_val4
C02305/9 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s3_val1
C02305/10 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s3_val2
C02305/11 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s3_val3
C02305/12 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s3_val4
C02305/13 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s4_val1
C02305/14 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s4_val2
C02305/15 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s4_val3
C02305/16 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s4_val4
C02305/17 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s5_val1
C02305/18 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s5_val2
C02305/19 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s5_val3
C02305/20 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s5_val4
C02305/21 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s6_val1
C02305/22 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s6_val2
C02305/23 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s6_val3
C02305/24 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s6_val4
C02305/25 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s7_val1
C02305/26 100 % LS_WriteParamList: c2853_s7_val2
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 813
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02305
________________________________________________________________
814 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02306
________________________________________________________________
C02306
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.0 A 3000.0
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02306/1 3000.0 A LS_WriteParamList: c2855_val1
C02306/2 3000.0 A LS_WriteParamList: c2855_val2
C02306/3 3000.0 A LS_WriteParamList: c2855_val3
C02306/4 3000.0 A LS_WriteParamList: c2855_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 10
C02307
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Selection list
0 Off
1 On
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02307/1 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c2859_val1
C02307/2 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c2859_val
C02307/3 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c2859_val
C02307/4 0: Off LS_WriteParamList: c2859_val
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02311
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-10 10
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02311/1 0 LS_WriteParamList: c2872_s1_val1
C02311/2 0 LS_WriteParamList: c2872_s1_val2
C02311/3 0 LS_WriteParamList: c2872_s1_val3
C02311/4 0 LS_WriteParamList: c2872_s1_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 815
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02312
________________________________________________________________
C02312
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value)
0x0000 0xFFFF
Value is bit-coded:
Bit 0 for SLPSM with controller enable
Bit 1 for SC PSM with mains on
Bit 2 for SC PSM with controller enable
Bit 3 for SC PSM once after fault reset
Bit 4 Reserved
Bit 5 Reserved
Bit 6 Reserved
Bit 7 Reserved
Bit 8 Reserved
Bit 9 Reserved
Bit 10 Reserved
Bit 11 Reserved
Bit 12 Reserved
Bit 13 Reserved
Bit 14 Reserved
Bit 15 Reserved
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02312/1 0x0001 LS_WriteParamList: c2874_s1_val1
C02312/2 0x0001 LS_WriteParamList: c2874_s1_val2
C02312/3 0x0001 LS_WriteParamList: c2874_s1_val3
C02312/4 0x0001 LS_WriteParamList: c2874_s1_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT
C02313
From version 12.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-100 ° 100
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02313/1 0° LS_WriteParamList: c2875_s1_val1
C02313/2 0° LS_WriteParamList: c2875_s1_val2
C02313/3 0° LS_WriteParamList: c2875_s1_val3
C02313/4 0° LS_WriteParamList: c2875_s1_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
816 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02314
________________________________________________________________
C02314
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C02315
From version 14.00.00 onwards: Parameter values (1st value ... 4th value) for optional motor data change-over
Selection list
0 Automatic
1 ASM
2 PSM
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02315/1 0: Automatic LS_WriteParamList: c1001_s1_val1
C02315/2 0: Automatic LS_WriteParamList: c1001_s1_val2
C02315/3 0: Automatic LS_WriteParamList: c1001_s1_val3
C02315/4 0: Automatic LS_WriteParamList: c1001_s1_val4
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1
C02580
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 817
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02581
________________________________________________________________
C02581
Speed setpoint threshold and hysteresis for automatic holding brake control
Holding brake control
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
-199.99 % 199.99
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02581/1 5.00 % Holding brake: Switching threshold
• Switching threshold of the speed setpoint from which
on the holding brake is released/applied
automatically.
C02581/2 1.00 % Holding brake: Hyst.release
• Hysteresis for holding brake release.
• Release threshold = switching threshold + release
hysteresis
C02581/3 1.00 % Holding brake: Hyst. close
• Hysteresis for holding brake application.
• Application threshold = switching threshold -
application hysteresis
C02581/4 0.00 % Holding brake: FF control starting value 1
• From version 11.00.00
C02581/5 0.00 % Holding brake: FF control starting value 2
• From version 11.00.00
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
C02582
818 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02582
________________________________________________________________
Bit 2 with hoist inv. feedfwd. control Direction of feedforward control with vertical/hoist
technology:
• 0 ≡ Positive direction
• 1 ≡ Negative direction
Note:
Reversal (Ccw) is then considered.
Bit 3 Horizontal application Direction of movement of the axis
• 0 ≡ The axis performs vertical movements.
Gravitational acceleration causes movements.
• 1 ≡ The direction of the axis is horizontal or rotary. The
gravitational acceleration does not cause any
movement.
Bit 4 Feedforward control C2581 From version 11.00.00
Selection of the feedforward control value
• 0 ≡ Automatic selection.
• The torque saved at the last stop is used.
• 1 ≡ Manual selection.
• bMBrakeStartValue2 = FALSE: The feedforward
control value 1 set in C02581/4 is used.
• bMBrakeStartValue2 = TRUE: The feedforward
control value set in C02581/5 is used.
Bit 5 Feedback monitoring From version 11.00.00
Activation of status monitoring
• 1 ≡ The bMBrakeApplied input for status detection of
the brake (via a switching contact at the brake) is
monitored after the waiting time set in C02589/3 has
expired.
Bit 6 SyncRampe L_NSet_1 From version 11.00.00
Selection of the ramp time for the synchronisation
process to setpoint speed after the brake opening time
has elapsed
Revised behaviour from version 11.00.00:
• 1 ≡ The ramp time of the effective acceleration of the
ramp function generator (L_NSet_1) is used (Lenze
setting).
• 0 ≡ As before, the ramp time set in C02610/1 is used.
Note:
The changeover can be dynamically both via the ramp
parameter and via bit 6.
Bit 7 Reserved
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 819
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02589
________________________________________________________________
C02589
C02593
Time parameter for the delay of trigger signals of the holding brake control
Holding brake control
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.000 s 3600.000
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02593/1 0.000 s Holding brake: Actual value monitoring
• Time in which the actual value is supposed to reach
the threshold for closing the brake if the setpoint has
already reached the threshold.
• Time > 0 s: If the actual speed value has not reached
the threshold within the time for brake application,
the holding brake is applied by control.
• Time = 0 s: The brake is only applied by control when
the actual speed has reached the application
threshold.
C02593/2 0.000 s Holding brake: Application delay
C02593/3 0.000 s Holding brake: Reserved
C02593/4 0.000 s Holding brake: Reserved
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 1000
820 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02607
________________________________________________________________
C02607
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 821
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02610
________________________________________________________________
C02610
C02611
Note:
Traversing with setpoints through resulting blocking zones is executed with the ramp set in C02610/2.
Speed Min/Max
Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value)
0.00 % 199.99
Subcodes Lenze setting Info
C02611/1 199.99 % MCK: Pos. max. speed
• Upper limit of the speed setpoint limitation in
positive direction of rotation.
C02611/2 0.00 % MCK: Pos. min. speed
• Lower limit of the speed setpoint limitation in
positive direction of rotation.
C02611/3 0.00 % MCK: Neg. min. speed
• Lower limit of the speed setpoint limitation in
negative direction of rotation.
C02611/4 199.99 % MCK: Neg. max. speed
• Upper limit of the speed setpoint limitation in
negative direction of rotation.
C02611/5 0.50 % MCK: Max. speed
• From version 12.00.00
• Maximum value for transferring the current speed to
the speed setpoint when the internal operating mode
"StandBy" is exited.
Read access Write access CINH PLC STOP No transfer COM MOT Scaling factor: 100
822 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02830
________________________________________________________________
C02830
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 823
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02840
________________________________________________________________
C02840
C02841
C02842
C02843
824 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02844
________________________________________________________________
C02844
C02845
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 825
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02853
________________________________________________________________
C02853
C02855
C02859
826 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02864
________________________________________________________________
C02864
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 827
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02865
________________________________________________________________
C02865
828 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02866
________________________________________________________________
C02866
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 829
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02867
________________________________________________________________
C02867
C02870
C02871
830 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02872
________________________________________________________________
C02872
C02873
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 831
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02874
________________________________________________________________
C02874
C02875
832 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02879
________________________________________________________________
C02879
C02993
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C02994
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
C02995
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 833
15 Parameter reference
15.2 Parameter list | C02998
________________________________________________________________
C02998
This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user!
834 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.3 Selection list - analog signals
________________________________________________________________
This selection list is relevant for the following Selection list - analog signals
configuration parameters:
16000 LS_AnalogInput: nIn1_a
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 835
15 Parameter reference
15.3 Selection list - analog signals
________________________________________________________________
836 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.3 Selection list - analog signals
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 837
15 Parameter reference
15.4 Selection list - digital signals
________________________________________________________________
This selection list is relevant for the following Selection list - digital signals
configuration parameters:
1210 LA_SwitchPos: bSpeedSetReached
838 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.4 Selection list - digital signals
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 839
15 Parameter reference
15.4 Selection list - digital signals
________________________________________________________________
840 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.4 Selection list - digital signals
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 841
15 Parameter reference
15.4 Selection list - digital signals
________________________________________________________________
842 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.5 Selection list - angle signals
________________________________________________________________
Parameter
C00622 System connection list: Angle
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 843
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
The table of attributes contains information required for a communication with the controller via
parameters.
844 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 845
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
846 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 847
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
848 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 849
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
850 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 851
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
852 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 853
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
854 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 855
15 Parameter reference
15.6 Table of attributes
________________________________________________________________
856 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.1 Basics
________________________________________________________________
Functional range
The options for processing function block interconnections depend on the device version:
Note!
The illustrations of the FB Editor user interface and the dialog boxes in this
documentation are based on the »Engineer« V2.10.
16.1 Basics
Using the function block interconnection, any signal interconnection can be implemented. Various
FBs are available for digital signal processing, signal conversion and logic modules.
For special tasks it has proved of value to use the integrated technology applications as a basis for
modifications or extensions of the available FB interconnections. Depending on the device version
(see Functional range), the experienced user has the opportunity to implement own drive solutions
independent of the predefined technology applications by using the "free interconnection".
For this purpose, the FB Editor provides the following functions:
• Copying & pasting of interconnection elements (also device-independent)
• Export & import of the interconnection
• Comparison of two interconnections (also online <-> offline comparison)
• Overview window and zoom functions
• Comments on the signal flow
• Online monitoring
The option to mask out non-used inputs and outputs of modules is also sensible to minimise the
complexity of the FB interconnection and to adapt the clarity of the interconnection to the
customers need.
All graphical information of the FB interconnection view (positions of the FBs, line or flag
presentation of the connection, visibility of the inputs/outputs) are saved with the parameter set in
the memory module of the controller and can be uploaded any time into the FB Editor of the
»Engineer« even if the Engineer project is not available.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 857
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.1 Basics
________________________________________________________________
Setpoint Motion
M generator Control
Kernel
ç è
n
Process t
controller
Device Motor M
control control
Regarding the 8400 device series, these three components are available for the FB interconnection
and classified as follows:
Further information on the individual modules can be obtained from the following subchapters!
858 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.1 Basics
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
A detailed description of all available function blocks can be found in the main chapter
"Function library". ( 909)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 859
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.1 Basics
________________________________________________________________
• The icon in the head of the module, a double-click on the module, or the Parameter...
command in the Context menu of the module serve to open the parameterisation dialog or the
parameter list for the module.
Example
Parameterisation dialog for the FB L_DigitalDelay_2:
[16-3] Example: System block "LS_MotorInterface" for mapping the motor control
860 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.1 Basics
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
Every application block features so-called "free inputs and outputs" which you can use to
transfer signals from the I/O level to the application level and vice versa.
• In the Lenze setting, these connectors are hidden in the function block editor.
• These connections can be shown via the Connector visibilities command in the Context
menu of the application block.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 861
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.1 Basics
________________________________________________________________
This chapter describes the conventions used for the identifiers of the inputs/outputs of the blocks.
The conventions ensure a uniform and consistent terminology and make reading and
comprehending the interconnection and application easier.
Tip!
The conventions used by Lenze are based on the "Hungarian Notation". This ensures that
the most significant characteristics of the corresponding input/output (e.g. the data type)
can be instantly recognised from its identifier.
An identifier consists of
• a data type entry
• an identifier (the "proper" name of the input/output)
• an (optional) signal type specification
Identifier
The identifier is the proper name of the input/output and should indicate the application or
function.
• Identifiers always start with a capital letter.
• If an identifier consists of several "words", then each "word" must start with a capital letter.
• All other letters are written in lower case.
862 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.1 Basics
________________________________________________________________
With regard to the parameter setting & configuration of the controller it is very helpful to know the
signal types and their scaling listed in the following table, which are used to process physical values
(e.g. an angular velocity or position) in the function block interconnection.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 863
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
The user interface of the FB Editor includes the following control and function elements:
Tip!
Go to the »Engineer« toolbar and click the icon to hide the Project View and the Message
Window. This increases the Workspace available for the FB Editor. A renewed click on the
symbol shows the Project View and the Message Window again.
864 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
16.2.1 Toolbar
The FB Editor is provided with an individual toolbar in the upper position which in the following text
is called FB Editor toolbar.
• Click an icon to execute the corresponding function.
Icon Function
Insert function block or system block
Inserting a function block ( 879)
Inserting a system block ( 881)
Inserting a port block ( 883)
Correct interconnection
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 865
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
Use the search function to get quickly to a certain module of the interconnection.
• The list field of the search function contains all function blocks, system blocks, and port blocks
of the interconnection:
• When you select a module in the list field, this module is zoomed in and selected at the same
time (the following example shows the LS_DigitalInput system block):
866 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
You can also enter any search text in the input field.
• If you click the icon, the cutout is moved to the object which contains this search text.
• Another click on the icon leads to a new search. Thus, you can navigate successively
to all objects which contain the entered search text.
• The search text does not consider case sensitivity.
Go to the Level selection list field and select the interconnection level to be displayed.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 867
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
Every application block features so-called "free inputs and outputs" which you can use to
transfer signals from the I/O level to the application level and vice versa.
• In the Lenze setting, these connectors are hidden in the function block editor.
• These connections can be shown via the Connector visibilities command in the Context
menu of the application block.
Note!
When you select the "Free interconnection" level for the first time, you are prompted to
confirm whether the interconnection from the I/O level and the application level are to
be combined and copied into this level.
When you confirm this confirmation prompt with Yes, the I/O level and the application
level are not available anymore. This action can only be undone by resetting the
application to a predefined Lenze application! Resetting changed interconnection
( 901)
868 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
Use the list field at the top right to change from the Editor to the overview and vice versa.
The overview shows all function blocks used of the interconnection in the upper list field in the order
of their processing. The lower list field shows all used system blocks.
• The processing order of the function blocks can be optimised manually or according to an
automatically generated selection. Changing the processing order ( 896)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 869
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
You can open a context menu via the right mouse button for each object (function block, system
block, line, comment, etc.) and for the drawing area:
• The contents of the context menu depend on the type of object you click on.
• Example: Context menu for a function block:
The status bar of the FB Editor shows, among other things, information about the system load and
the error status of the interconnection:
Icon Meaning
System load
Here: out of the available computing time of 610 μs, 226 μs are required by the application.
Communication status
Offline
Online
Communication error
Adjustment status
Offline and online interconnection match
870 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
The overview window shows the drawing area in a reduced view. The overview window serves to
e.g. move quickly through a more complex interconnection.
• The green frame in the overview window indicates the interconnection cutout that is currently
displayed in the drawing area.
• Use the mouse pointer to shift and resize the cutout to be displayed.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 871
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.2 User interface
________________________________________________________________
• The aspect ratio of the frame is automatically adapted to the aspect ratio of the drawing
area.
• According to the size of the frame that is drawn, also the presentation size of the objects
in the drawing area changes.
Tip!
Go to the FB Editor toolbar and click the icon to adapt the view size so that all objects
included in the interconnection are visible in the drawing area.
Automatic scroll ("AutoScroll function")
If you reach a window limitation in the drawing area when shifting an object or in the
overview window when shifting the green frame, and if you then shortly hold the mouse
pointer in this position, an automatic scrolling into the corresponding direction is carried
out:
872 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.3 Using the FB Editor as "Viewer"
________________________________________________________________
The main purpose of the FB Editor is the individual configuration of the selected technology
application. However, you can also use the FB Editor to
• make a diagnosis of the application (when an online connection has been established),
• get a better understanding for the operating mode of the application,
• use the interconnection as an alternative parameterisation access.
• Process-scaled signals can be scaled in a "user-defined" way for easy diagnostics in the FB Editor.
Change online display format ( 876)
• The " symbol in the head of the block or the Help command in the context menu for the block
serve to open the online help for the block.
• The icon in the head of the module, a double-click on the module, or the Parameter...
command in the Context menu of the module serve to open the parameterisation dialog or the
parameter list for the module.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 873
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.3 Using the FB Editor as "Viewer"
________________________________________________________________
In addition to the Search function you can use the context menu of inputs and outputs to follow
connections and quickly reach certain signals.
874 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.3 Using the FB Editor as "Viewer"
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 875
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.3 Using the FB Editor as "Viewer"
________________________________________________________________
For online monitoring in the FB Editor the display format of the input and output data of a block can
be adapted individually. Process-scaled signals can be scaled in a "user-defined" way for easy
diagnostics in the FB Editor. Thus, the display of these signals gets a process reference.
2. Select the inputs/outputs from the list the display format of which is to be changed.
• Note: In the Global format setting list field the "---" entry must be selected so that the
display format can be changed.
• If you click further inputs/outputs while pressing <Ctrl> they are added to an already
existing selection (multi-selection).
• The <Shift> key serves to select a related area of inputs/outputs.
• More functions:
Display masked out connections
Display additional information
Select all inputs/outputs
Reset all format information
876 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.3 Using the FB Editor as "Viewer"
________________________________________________________________
3. Click the symbol to edit the display format of the selected inputs/outputs.
• The Edit display format dialog box is displayed:
4. Go to the Display format list field and select the "User-defined" entry.
5. Go to the Format template list field and select "No template".
6. Select the required scaling, unit, number of decimal positions, and sign handling.
7. Click OK to accept the settings and close the Edit display format dialog box.
• The Display format dialog box now displays the text "User-defined" for the changed
inputs/outputs in the Format column.
After all required formats have been changed:
8. Click Back to close the Display format dialog box.
• For online monitoring, the changed format is used.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 877
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
How to proceed:
1. Insert additionally required objects into the interconnection.
2. Hide unneeded inputs/outputs of function blocks and system blocks to obtain a clearly
arranged interconnection.
3. Arrange the objects in the drawing area in a reasonable manner.
4. Establish the connections required for the desired function.
5. If required, change (optimise) the processing order of the function blocks.
Tip!
Detailed information on the individual steps can be obtained from the following
subchapters!
Note!
With the "StateLine" version, the interconnection shown in the application level cannot
be edited.
Objects can be inserted in the interconnection via the FB Editor toolbar and the context menu of the
drawing area. The following subchapters provide detailed information on how to insert/delete the
different objects.
Icon Function
Inserting a function block ( 879)
Inserting a system block ( 881)
Inserting a port block ( 883)
Tip!
Use the context menu of the drawing area to insert a function block, system block, port
block or comment directly to the current position of the mouse pointer in the drawing area.
If you insert an object via the corresponding icon in the FB Editor toolbar, the object is
always placed at the top left corner in the drawing area.
Interconnection elements cannot only be copied within the same interconnection but also
across all devices within the same project, as long as the devices stem from the same
product family. Copying interconnection elements (across all devices) ( 898)
878 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Note!
In the FB Editor, function blocks are only available in the "Application interconnection"
level!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 879
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Command Function
Center Move the visible cutout of the drawing area so that the block is centred.
Related topics
Deleting objects that are no longer required ( 887)
Changing connector visibilities ( 888)
Arranging objects in the drawing area ( 889)
Creating/deleting connections ( 890)
Changing the processing order ( 896)
880 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 881
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
5. Select the system block to be inserted in the Search results list field.
6. Press Insert button.
• The dialog box is closed and the selected system block is inserted into the
interconnection.
Command Function
Center Move the visible cutout of the drawing area so that the block is centred.
Related topics
Deleting objects that are no longer required ( 887)
Changing connector visibilities ( 888)
Arranging objects in the drawing area ( 889)
Creating/deleting connections ( 890)
882 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
You can change between the Ports and FB Editor tabs at any time to define new ports and
afterwards insert them into the interconnection.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 883
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Command Function
Center Move the visible cutout of the drawing area so that the block is centred.
Related topics
Deleting objects that are no longer required ( 887)
Changing connector visibilities ( 888)
Arranging objects in the drawing area ( 889)
Creating/deleting connections ( 890)
884 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
[16-7] Example: Graphical arrangement of FBs by means of two comments that overlap.
Note!
The term "Arrangement" does not mean a logical arrangement of the function blocks.
The comments are only graphical presentation elements of the FB Editor.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 885
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
The Properties dialog box for a comment already available can be opened by double-clicking
the comment.
Related topics
Deleting objects that are no longer required ( 887)
Arranging objects in the drawing area ( 889)
Creating/deleting connections ( 890)
886 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Deleting an object cannot be undone.
Together with the object, all available connections to this object are deleted.
Related topics
Deleting connections that are no longer required ( 895)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 887
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Inputs and outputs that are not connected can be hidden for each block. This serves to reduce the
dimension of the block. The interconnection becomes clearer.
888 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
All objects can be freely arranged in the drawing area by dragging with the mouse.
We recommend to make an arrangement in which the required connections between the inputs
and outputs can be created easily. A division into functional areas may also be sensible to get a
better understanding of the application.
Objects which are already connected, can also be dragged to another (free) position in the drawing
area. The available connections will be automatically re-routed after dragging.
Note!
A red header indicates that the object overlaps with other objects in the drawing area!
Arrange the objects so that no overlap occurs.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 889
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
After adding objects and arranging them in a reasonable manner within the drawing area, you can
create the connections between the available objects which are required for the desired function.
A connection always has a direction and therefore always has a source and a target.
Permissible/impermissible connections
Several connections can lead from one output.
E,Q
From the »Engineer« V2.12 "Analog/scaled" (_a) and "Miscellaneous (WORD)" signal types can also
be interconnected.
E/LPLW$FWLYH Q,QBD
From the »Engineer« V2.13 "Analog/scaled" (_a) and "Angular velocity" (_v) signal types can also be
interconnected.
890 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Connection types
Connections can either be created by means of connection lines or port identifiers ("flags")
Tip!
The commands Show as flag or Show as line in the context menu of a connection serve to
change the representation of the connection at any time.
When an output is connected to several inputs via flags, three points are displayed ("...") at
the output instead of the concrete input identifier. The context menu of the port symbol
shows all inputs which are connected to the output.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 891
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
If you move the mouse pointer across the port symbol while drawing a new connection, you
can see whether the connection is permissible or not from the colour of the drawn line and
from the mouse pointer symbol.
• Permissible connection:
The command Show as flag in the context menu of a line serves to change the
representation of the connection at any time.
892 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
2. Drag the port segment to the required port while keeping the left mouse button pressed:
After releasing the mouse button, the connection via port identifiers (flags) is created. The
corresponding port identifier consists of the block name and the name of the input/output:
Tip!
The command Show as line in the context menu of a flag serves to change the
representation of the connection at any time.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 893
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
• In a tree structure all inputs and outputs of the application are shown to which a
connection is permissible.
• You can enter an optional text into the Filter input field to reduce the selection to the
blocks or ports which contain the entered text.
• If you activate the Show hidden ports control field, the hidden ports for system and
function blocks are shown as well.
3. Select the port where the connection is to end from the tree structure.
4. Activate the Add connection as flag control field if a port identifier (flag) is to be inserted
instead of a connection line.
5. Press OK to create the connection to the selected port and close the dialog box.
894 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Related topics
Deleting objects that are no longer required ( 887)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 895
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
If you insert a function block into the interconnection, an order index is automatically assigned to
this function block. By means of this order index it is defined in which order the individual function
blocks are calculated at runtime.
• The first function block inserted contains the order index "1", the next function block inserted
contains the order index "2", etc.
• The respective order index is displayed in the header of the function block in the rectangle after
the block name.
Note!
When a function block is shifted, its order index is maintained.
The processing order influences the result!
• In certain cases it may be sensible to change the processing order, but if you select an
unfavourable processing order, errors may arise!
896 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
3. Select the function block which is to receive a different position within the processing
order.
• If you click further function blocks while pressing <Ctrl> they are added to an already
existing selection (multi-selection).
• The <Shift> key serves to select a related area of function blocks.
4. Move the function block(s) to the desired position using the and buttons.
• The button serves to exchange two selected function blocks with regard to their
order.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the required processing order has been established.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 897
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Interconnection elements can be copied across the devices within the project if the devices belong
to the same product family (e.g. Inverter Drives 8400).
All types of blocks and comments can be copied to the clipboard via the Copy command or the
<Ctrl>+<c> shortcut and then be inserted into the FB interconnection of the same or another project
device of the same product family using the Paste command or the <Ctrl>+<v> shortcut.
• During the copy process into the clipboard, existing connections between copied blocks are
copied as well, and the layout is kept too. Moreover, the separate technical objects (e.g port
definition) are copied. Selected connections cannot be copied on their own.
• The Paste command is available if the clipboard is not empty and if it was copied from a device
of the same product family. Within this product family, all device types (e.g. 8400 xxxxLine
Vxx.xx) are permitted.
• After the Paste command has been selected, a dialog box is displayed which serves to select
which elements are to be inserted from the clipboard and how to solve name conflicts, if any.
• After inserting the elements, they are marked in the target interconnection in order to be
repositioned or deleted again to undo the insertion.
• Inserting from the clipboard can be repeated. The originally copied contents of the clipboard
remains unchanged when it is inserted.
898 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
6. Click Insert to insert the selected elements into the target interconnection as defined.
• Only possible if at least one element in the list has been selected for insertion.
• Insertion is also possible via the <Enter> button if at least one element is selected from
the list for insertion.
• The original layout and the relative position of the inserted blocks to each other are
maintained.
• When copying across the devices, you also insert the corresponding separate technical
objects (e.g. port definition).
• The inserted elements are deleted from the list. If the list is empty, the dialog box is
closed and the connections are inserted depending on the selected option.
7. If there are still elements to be entered in the list, repeat steps 5 and 6 until all elements are
inserted as intended.
8. Press Close to stop the insertion and close the dialog box.
• You can also use <Esc> or <Enter> to close the dialog box if "Insert" is not active.
• The elements inserted into the target interconnection so far are maintained.
• The connections for the blocks inserted so far are inserted depending on the selected
option.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 899
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
The list shows the elements which can be added to the target interconnection, and the elements
which cannot be added.
• In the "Selection" column, you can check/uncheck the elements to be added.
• Connections are only inserted when the dialog box is closed, which applies to all modules
inserted so far. They are displayed as lines or flags, like in the original, but re-routed.
• The symbols in the Toolbar serve to execute the following functions:
Icon Function
Add the selected elements to the interconnection
Show the elements to be added but are marked with an error or warning.
Show the elements not to be added and marked with an error or warning.
Show blocks
Show connections
Show parameters
Show comments
Show all
Print view
Print list
900 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.4 Reconfiguring the predefined interconnection
________________________________________________________________
Button Function
Insert Add elements selected in the list to the target interconnection
• Only possible if at least one element in the list has been selected for insertion.
• Insertion is also possible via the <Enter> button if at least one element is selected from
the list for insertion.
• The original layout and the relative position of the inserted blocks to each other are
maintained.
• When copying across the devices, you also insert the corresponding separate technical
objects (e.g. port definition).
• The added elements are simultaneously deleted from the list. The connections are added
depending on the selected option.
Close Close dialog box.
• You can also use <Esc> or <Enter> to close the dialog box if "Insert" is not active.
• The elements inserted into the target interconnection so far are maintained.
• The connections for the blocks inserted so far are inserted depending on the selected
option.
If you only made changes on the I/O level, you can reset them by selecting a predefined control
scheme in C00007. If you have also made changes on the application level, you must first reset the
changed application to a predefined application in C00005.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 901
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.5 Adjusting online and offline interconnection
________________________________________________________________
If the »Engineer« detects that online and offline interconnection differ from each other, the
Compare interconnection dialog box is displayed with various options for the adjustment:
Tip!
The dialog box can also be opened via the symbol in the FB Editor toolbar.
Button Function
Accepting the interconnection from Add the interconnection in the device to the FB Editor. The interconnection
the device existing in the FB Editor will be overwritten by this action.
Transferring the interconnection to Transfer the offline interconnection which is currently not visible in the FB
the device Editor to the device. The interconnection existing in the device will be
overwritten by this action.
Showing differences Showing differences between online and offline interconnection.
Cancel Close the Adjust interconnection dialog box without making an adjustment.
902 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.6 Printing the interconnection
________________________________________________________________
The interconnection can be printed for documentation purposes, optionally on one page, on four
pages, or not scaled.
Tip!
By clicking the icon in the FB Editor toolbar, you can get a print view before printing.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 903
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.7 Comparing interconnections
________________________________________________________________
The comparison operation serves to compare FB interconnections of 8400 devices within the
project. An offline<>online comparison and the comparison of two online devices are possible.
Note!
Only applications can be compared which have been enabled in the FB Editor!
Block positions, line representations, and connector visibilities are not compared.
2. Select the interconnections to be compared in the project view represented on the left and
right.
• In order to execute a comparison with an online device, select "Online" in one of the two
upper list fields. Then all available online devices are displayed for selection.
• If you select "Online" in one of the two upper list fields, you can also compare the
interconnections of two available online devices.
3. Click Compare.
• If the comparison was executed successfully, the comparison result is displayed as a list
(see the following section).
• If a comparison of the selected interconnections is not possible, a corresponding
message is displayed.
4. In order to stop the comparison operation and close the dialog box: Press
Back.
904 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.7 Comparing interconnections
________________________________________________________________
• The symbols in the Toolbar serve to show or hide different details and export and print the
shown list.
Icon Function
Only show differences
• Button can only be activated in expert mode.
Show blocks
Show connections
Show summary
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 905
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.7 Comparing interconnections
________________________________________________________________
Icon Function
Activate expert mode
• In the expert mode, also non-functional differences are shown.
Apply filter
• Only show list entries which contain the text entered in the input field.
• Function is only available in expert mode.
Export shown list as comma-separated list (*.csv)
Print view
Print list
906 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.8 Copying an interconnection
________________________________________________________________
In contrast to copying/inserting selected interconnection elements via the clipboard, the function
described in this chapter serves to replace the current FB interconnection of a device completely by
the FB interconnection of another project device.
Note!
The complete FB interconnection can only be copied between devices of the same device
type and version (e.g. 8400 HighLine C V1.0).
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 907
16 Working with the FB Editor
16.9 Exporting/Importing an interconnection
________________________________________________________________
The interconnection existing in the project can be exported to a file for reuse/transfer to other
devices.
Note!
The file can only be imported to devices of the same device type and version (e.g. 8400
HighLine C V1.0).
908 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17 Function library
This chapter describes the function blocks which are available for the controller in the FB Editor.
The system blocks are described in the following chapter "System blocks". ( 990)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 909
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Related topics:
Overview of system blocks available ( 990)
Working with the FB Editor ( 857)
910 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.1 L_Absolut_1
/B$EVROXWB
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 911
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.2 L_AddSub_1
This FB is provided with two adding inputs and one subtracting input.
• The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to ±32767.
/B$GG6XEB
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
Q,QBD
r
Q,QBD r
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
912 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.3 L_AnalogSwitch_1
This function block switches between two analog input signals. The switching is controlled via a
boolean input signal.
/B$QDORJ6ZLWFKB
Q,QBD
Q2XWBD
Q,QBD
E6HW
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 913
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.4 L_AnalogSwitch_2
This function block switches between two analog input signals. The switching is controlled via a
boolean input signal.
/B$QDORJ6ZLWFKB
Q,QBD
Q2XWBD
Q,QBD
E6HW
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
914 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.5 L_AnalogSwitch_3
This function block switches between two analog input signals. The switching is controlled via a
boolean input signal.
/B$QDORJ6ZLWFKB
Q,QBD
Q2XWBD
Q,QBD
E6HW
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 915
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.6 L_And_1
/B$QGB
E,Q E2XW
E,Q
E,Q
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
Inputs Output
bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
FALSE FALSE TRUE
FALSE TRUE FALSE
FALSE TRUE TRUE
TRUE FALSE FALSE
TRUE FALSE TRUE
TRUE TRUE FALSE
TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE
916 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.7 L_And_2
/B$QGB
E,Q E2XW
E,Q
E,Q
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
Inputs Output
bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
FALSE FALSE TRUE
FALSE TRUE FALSE
FALSE TRUE TRUE
TRUE FALSE FALSE
TRUE FALSE TRUE
TRUE TRUE FALSE
TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 917
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.8 L_And_3
/B$QGB
E,Q E2XW
E,Q
E,Q
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
Inputs Output
bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
FALSE FALSE TRUE
FALSE TRUE FALSE
FALSE TRUE TRUE
TRUE FALSE FALSE
TRUE FALSE TRUE
TRUE TRUE FALSE
TRUE TRUE TRUE TRUE
918 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.9 L_Arithmetik_1
/B$ULWKPHWLNB
Q,QBD & 2XW Q2XWBD
,Q
Q,QBD ,Q
,Q r
,Q,Q
,Q,Q
,Q ,Q
,Q
_,Q_
,Q
,Q
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 919
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.10 L_Arithmetik_2
/B$ULWKPHWLNB
Q,QBD & 2XW Q2XWBD
,Q
Q,QBD ,Q
,Q r
,Q,Q
,Q,Q
,Q ,Q
,Q
_,Q_
,Q
,Q
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
920 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.11 L_Compare_1
This FB compares two analog signals and can be used e.g. to implement a trigger.
• Comparison operation, hysteresis and window size can be parameterised.
/B&RPSDUHB
& )XQFWLRQ
Q,QBD E2XW
Q,QBD &
&
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 921
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
nIn2_a nIn1_a
C00681: Hysteresis
C00682: Window
nIn1_a
nIn2_a
t
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
t
C00681: Hysteresis
C00682: Window
922 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
nIn1_a
nIn2_a
C00681: Hysteresis
Functional sequence
1. If the value at nIn1_a exceeds the value nIn2_a, bOut changes from FALSE to TRUE.
2. Only if the signal at nIn1_a falls below the value of nIn2_a - hysteresis again, bOut changes back
from TRUE to FALSE.
nIn1_a
nIn2_a
t
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
t
C00681: Hysteresis
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 923
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
nIn1_a
nIn2_a
C00681: Hysteresis
Functional sequence
1. If the value at nIn1_a falls below the value at nIn2_a, bOut changes from FALSE to TRUE.
2. Only if the signal at nIn1_a exceeds the value of nIn2_a - hysteresis again, bOut changes back
from TRUE to FALSE.
nIn1_a
nIn2_a
t
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
t
C00681: Hysteresis
924 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 925
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.12 L_Compare_2
This FB compares two analog signals and can be used e.g. to implement a trigger.
• Comparison operation, hysteresis and window size can be parameterised.
/B&RPSDUHB
& )XQFWLRQ
Q,QBD E2XW
Q,QBD &
&
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
926 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.13 L_Compare_3
This FB compares two analog signals and can be used e.g. to implement a trigger.
• Comparison operation, hysteresis and window size can be parameterised.
/B&RPSDUHB
& )XQFWLRQ
Q,QBD E2XW
Q,QBD &
&
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 927
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.14 L_DFlipFlop_1
/B')OLS)ORSB
E' E2XW
' 4
E&ON
E&OU E1HJ2XW
&/5 4
Inputs
bD Data input
BOOL
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
If the bClr input = FALSE, a signal edge at the bClk input switches the static input signal bD to the
bOut output, where it is retained:
bD
TRUE
FALSE
t
bClk
TRUE
FALSE
t
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
t
928 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 929
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.15 L_DigitalDelay_1
/B'LJLWDO'HOD\B
E,Q ,Q
2XW E2XW
& &
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
930 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Function
bIn
TRUE
FALSE
t
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
t
0
t
1
t
ON delay
OFF delay
Internal timing element for ON delay (retriggerable)
Internal timing element for OFF delay (retriggerable)
1. A FALSE-TRUE edge at bIn starts the internal timing element for the ON delay.
2. After the defined ON delay, the input signal bIn is output at bOut.
3. A TRUE-FALSE edge at bIn starts the internal timing element for the OFF delay.
4. After the defined OFF delay, the input signal bIn is output at bOut.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 931
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.16 L_DigitalLogic_1
This FB provides a binary output signal created by a logic operation of the input signals. Optionally,
one of the constant binary values independent from the input signals can be output.
• Output of a constant binary value
• AND operation of the inputs
• OR operation of the inputs
• Output depending on the combination of the input signals
/B'LJLWDO/RJLFB
E,Q
E,Q E2XW
E,Q
! &
&
&
&
&
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
932 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 933
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.17 L_DigitalLogic_3
This FB provides a binary output signal created by a logic operation of the input signals. Optionally,
one of the constant binary values independent from the input signals can be output.
• Output of a constant binary value
• AND operation of the inputs
• OR operation of the inputs
• Output depending on the combination of the input signals
/B'LJLWDO/RJLFB
E,Q
E,Q E2XW
E,Q
! &
&
&
&
&
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
934 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 935
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.18 L_GainOffset_1
This FB can amplify an analog input signal and then add an offset to it. Preferably to be
interconnected directly after the analog input terminals.
• The internal calculations (addition and subtraction) are carried out with 32 bits without
overflow/underflow. Division is not remainder considered.
• Gain and offset are selected via FB inputs.
• The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to ±199.99 %.
/B*DLQ2IIVHWB
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
Q*DLQBD
Q2IIVHWBD
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
936 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.19 L_GainOffset_2
This FB can amplify an analog input signal and then add an offset to it. Preferably to be
interconnected directly after the analog input terminals.
• The internal calculations (addition and subtraction) are carried out with 32 bits without
overflow/underflow. Division is not remainder considered.
• Gain and offset are selected via FB inputs.
• The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to ±199.99 %.
/B*DLQ2IIVHWB
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
Q*DLQBD
Q2IIVHWBD
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 937
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.20 L_GainOffset_3
This FB can amplify an analog input signal and then add an offset to it. Preferably to be
interconnected directly after the analog input terminals.
• The internal calculations (addition and subtraction) are carried out with 32 bits without
overflow/underflow. Division is not remainder considered.
• Gain and offset are selected via FB inputs.
• The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to ±199.99 %.
/B*DLQ2IIVHWB
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
Q*DLQBD
Q2IIVHWBD
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
938 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.21 L_Interpolator_1
This FB interpolates a position setpoint and/or an analog value e.g. to compensate for larger bus
transmission cycles or to continue signal characteristics if data telegrams are missing.
/B,QWHUSRODWRUB
GQ3KL,QBS GQ3KL2XWBS
Q3KG,QBY Q3KG2XWBY
Q1,QBD Q12XWBD
&
E6SHHG$FW 1RRILQWHUSRODWLRQF\OHV E3XOVH
$FWLYDWH E6LJQDO(UURU
& ,QWHUSRODWLRQ
& 0RQLWRULQJ
& 0D[1RRI
HUURUF\FOHV
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
dnPhOut_p Output of the dnPhIn_p position setpoint which, if applicable, has been interpolated
DINT and completed
nPhdOut_v Output of the nPhdIn_v angular velocity
INT
nNOut_a Output of the nNIn_a analog value which, if applicable, has been interpolated
INT
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 939
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Parameter
Dy from cycle 2
Dy from cycle 1
t
5 10 15
ms
Setpoint signal
Interpolated setpoint signal
Receive cycle in [ms] = Number of interpolation steps (in our example: 5)
940 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Note!
Do not change the number of interpolation steps during operation. Otherwise the
interpolation becomes inaccurate.
Note!
The nNIn_a analog value is not monitored!
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 941
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.22 L_JogCtrlExtension_1
This FB can be connected upstream to the L_NSet ramp function generator/setpoint generator to
implement a switch-off positioning at limit switch.
• Detailed information on this operating mode can be found in the description of the "Switch-off
positioning" TA.
/B-RJ&WUO([WHQVLRQB
E,QSXW6HO '08;
E,QSXW6HO
E5IJ,Q E5IJ2XW
E-RJ,Q E-RJ2XW
E-RJ,Q
&75/ E-RJ2XW
E6ORZ'RZQ
E6WRS
E6ORZ'RZQ
E6WRS
E6ORZ'RZQ
E6WRS
Inputs
bRfgIn Ramping down of the setpoint generator in the downstream L_NSet FB according to
BOOL the Truth table
bJog1In Selection inputs for setting fixed speeds in the setpoint generator
bJog2In • If the pre-switch off is inactive (bInputSel1 and bInputSel2 are both set to FALSE),
BOOL the two control signals are output one-to-one at the bJog1Out and bJog2Out
outputs.
• To achieve the desired behaviour (starting at high speed, pre-switch off at low
speed), both inputs must be set to TRUE.
• Fixed setpoint 2 must be less than fixed setpoint 3!
Otherwise, the drive will start at a low speed and accelerate after the pre-switch
off.
• If, in addition to the bJog1In and bJog2In inputs, other jog signals are set at the
L_NSet FB, new fixed setpoints are reached, and the drive traverses at speeds that
differ from the selection via bJog1In and bJog2In.
bSlowDown1 Activation of fixed setpoint 2 in the downstream L_NSet FB
bSlowDown2 • These inputs only fulfil a function if they have been activated via bInputSel1 and
bSlowDown3 bInputSel2 previously (see Truth table).
BOOL
bStop1 Ramping down of the ramp function generator in the downstream L_NSet FB
bStop2 • These inputs only fulfil a function if they have been activated via bInputSel1 and
bStop3 bInputSel2 previously (see Truth table).
BOOL
942 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Truth table
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 943
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.23 L_MPot_1
This FB replaces a hardware motor potentiometer and can be used as an alternative setpoint source
which is controlled via two inputs.
• The signal is output via a ramp function generator with linear ramps.
• The acceleration and deceleration times are set via parameters.
• Constant ramping even with speed limit values changed online.
• The motor potentiometer function can be switched on/off online.
/B03RWB
&
E(QDEOH
& 'HDFWLYDWLRQIXQFWLRQ
& ,QLWLDOL]DWLRQIXQFWLRQ Q2XWBD
Q,QBD
Inputs
944 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 945
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
nOut_a
nHighLimit
wTir
wTir wTif
0
t
wTir
nLowLimit
bUp
TRUE
FALSE
t
bDown
TRUE
FALSE
t
946 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
nOut_a
nHighLimit
wTif
0 1 wTir
wTif
nLowLimit
wTif wTir
0
t
bUp
TRUE
FALSE
t
bDown
TRUE
FALSE
t
bInAct
TRUE
FALSE
t
When the motor potentiometer is deactivated, nOut_a is reduced to 0 % with the deceleration time wTif.
If it is activated again, nOut_a is increased again to nLowLimit with the acceleration time wTir.
[17-12] Example: Deactivation of the motor potentiometer when the Function = 1 has been selected
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 947
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.24 L_MulDiv_1
/B0XO'LYB
Q,QBD & Q2XWBD
&
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Function
C00699/1
nOut_a = nIn_a × -------------------------
C00699/2
948 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.25 L_Negation_1
This FB converts the sign of the input signal, i.e. the input signal is multiplied by the value -1 and is
then output.
• With the value - 32768 at the nIn_a input, the value + 32767 is provided at the nOut_a output.
/B1HJDWLRQB
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
Inputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 949
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.26 L_Not_1
/B1RWB
E,Q E2XW
Inputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
17.1.27 L_Not_2
/B1RWB
E,Q E2XW
Inputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
950 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.28 L_Not_3
/B1RWB
E,Q E2XW
Inputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 951
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.29 L_NSet_1
This FB is used for general signal processing of process values and is provided with the following
functions:
• Ramp function generator
• With linear ramps for main and additional setpoint path
• With S-shaped ramp (PT1 rounding)
• Setting and holding
• Internal limitation of the input signal
• 3 adjustable blocking zones
• Arithmetic function
• 15 fixed setpoints (JOG setpoints)
• 15 acceleration and deceleration times
/B16HWB
Q&,QK9DOBD Z6WDWH
& 2XW
E5IJ6WRS
6HW
E5IJ
6HW$GG
E16HW,QY 6HW$GG
Q16HWBD & & & 6HW $GG
& & & r
E-RJ
E-RJ 6HW 6HW Q12XWBD
&
_$GG_
E-RJ & &
6HW
E-RJ & & &
$GG
Q6HWBD
E/RDG
E1$GG,QY
Q1$GGBD
&
E([WHUQDO&,1+
&
&
952 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Inputs
nCInhVal_a Main setpoint signal which is to be accepted by the main setpoint integrator when
INT the controller is inhibited.
bRfgStop Holding (freezing) of the current value of the main setpoint integrator
BOOL
TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is held.
bRfg0 Leading the main setpoint integrator to 0 within the current Ti times
BOOL
TRUE The current value of the main setpoint integrator is led to "0" within
the Ti time set.
bNSetInv Signal inversion for the main setpoint
BOOL
TRUE Main setpoint signal is inverted.
nNset_a Main setpoint signal
INT • Other signals are also permitted
bJog1 ... bJog8 Selection inputs for fixed changeover setpoints (JOG setpoints) for the main setpoint
BOOL • Selection inputs are binary coded.
bTI1 ... bTI8 Selection inputs for alternative acceleration/deceleration times for the main
BOOL setpoint
• Selection inputs are binary coded.
nSet_a Starting value which is loaded into the main setpoint integrator by setting bLoad to
INT TRUE.
bLoad Control of both ramp function generators in special situations, e.g. QSP
BOOL
TRUE The nSet_a input signal is loaded into the main setpoint integrator
and the additional setpoint integrator is set to "0".
bAddInv Signal inversion for the additional setpoint
BOOL
TRUE Additional setpoint signal is inverted.
nNAdd_a Additional setpoint signal
INT • Other signals are also permitted
bExternalCINH Additional load input for the main setpoint integrator and the additional setpoint
BOOL integrator
TRUE The main setpoint integrator is set to the value applied at
nCInhVal_a.
The additional setpoint integrator is set to "0".
Application example for the additional load function ( 962)
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 953
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
954 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 955
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
• The number of selection inputs to be assigned depends on the number of JOG setpoints
required:
Number of JOG setpoints required Number of selection inputs to be assigned (bJog1 ... bJog8)
1 At least 1
2 ... 3 at least 2
4 ... 7 at least 3
8 ... 15 4
956 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Note!
• Skip frequencies only affect main setpoints.
• It is not possible to exclude "0" speed if there is a sign reversal of the speed setpoint.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 957
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Output [%]
C00632/2
199.99 C00633/2
1
C00632/1
C00633/1
Input [%]
-199.99 48 104 138 178 199.99
1
-199.99
Blocking zone 1
Blocking zone 2
• The parameterised blocking zones have the same effect on negative input signals.
• A blocking zone is deactivated by entering identical limit values (in our example: blocking zone
3).
958 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Tip!
As described above, the acceleration phase starts after the blocking zones have been
passed through. The ramp function generator integrated in the L_Nset function block
limits the progression of the speed. For this reason, the time values set for the integrated
ramp function generator should be as low as possible whereas the setpoint for the L_NSet
function block should be generated by a ramp function generator with higher time values
(e.g. L_MPot function block).
RFG-OUT
100 %
w2
w1 t ir t ir
0%
t
Tir Tir
• tir and tif are the desired times for changing between w1 and w2.
• S-ramps are possible by selecting S-ramp times.
• The tir/tif values are converted into the required Ti times according to the following formula:
100 % 100 %
T ir = t ir ⋅ ----------------------- T if = t if ⋅ -----------------------
w2 – w1 w2 – w1
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 959
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Function
• When the controller is inhibited (CINH), the ramp function generator accepts the value applied
at nCInhVal_a and transfers it to the downstream function. This function has priority over all
other functions.
• bRfgStop = TRUE
• The ramp function generator is stopped. Changes at the input of the ramp function generator
have no effect on the output signal.
• bRfg0 = TRUE
• The ramp function generator runs to 0 along its deceleration ramp.
• Furthermore it is possible to load the ramp function generator online with a defined value. For
this purpose, bLoad must be set to TRUE. As long as this input is set, the value at nSet_a is
transferred to the ramp function generator and provided at the output.
960 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Priorities:
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 961
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
962 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.30 L_OffsetGain_1
This FB can add an offset to an analog input signal and then amplify it. Preferably to be
interconnected directly after the analog input terminals.
• The internal calculations (addition and subtraction) are carried out with 32 bits without
overflow/underflow. Division is not remainder considered.
• Offset and gain are selected via FB inputs.
• The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to ±199.99 %.
/B2IIVHW*DLQB
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
Q2IIVHWBD
Q*DLQBD
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 963
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.31 L_OffsetGain_2
This FB can add an offset to an analog input signal and then amplify it. Preferably to be
interconnected directly after the analog input terminals.
• The internal calculations (addition and subtraction) are carried out with 32 bits without
overflow/underflow. Division is not remainder considered.
• Offset and gain are selected via FB inputs.
• The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to ±199.99 %.
/B2IIVHW*DLQB
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
Q2IIVHWBD
Q*DLQBD
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
964 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.32 L_OffsetGainP_1
This FB can add an offset to an analog input signal and amplify it afterwards. Preferably to be
interconnected directly after the analog input terminals.
• The internal calculations (addition and subtraction) are carried out with 32 bits without
overflow/underflow. Division is not remainder considered.
• Offset and gain are selected via parameters.
• The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to ±199.99 %.
/B2IIVHW*DLQ3B
2IIVHW *DLQ
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
& &
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Function
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 965
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.33 L_OffsetGainP_2
This FB can add an offset to an analog input signal and amplify it afterwards. Preferably to be
interconnected directly after the analog input terminals.
• The internal calculations (addition and subtraction) are carried out with 32 bits without
overflow/underflow. Division is not remainder considered.
• Offset and gain are selected via parameters.
• The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to ±199.99 %.
/B2IIVHW*DLQ3B
2IIVHW *DLQ
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
& &
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Function
966 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.34 L_OffsetGainP_3
This FB can add an offset to an analog input signal and amplify it afterwards. Preferably to be
interconnected directly after the analog input terminals.
• The internal calculations (addition and subtraction) are carried out with 32 bits without
overflow/underflow. Division is not remainder considered.
• Offset and gain are selected via parameters.
• The value provided at the nOut_a output is internally limited to ±199.99 %.
/B2IIVHW*DLQ3B
2IIVHW *DLQ
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
& &
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Function
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 967
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.35 L_Or_1
/B2UB
E,Q E2XW
E,Q
E,Q
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
Inputs Output
bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE
FALSE TRUE FALSE
FALSE TRUE TRUE
TRUE FALSE FALSE
TRUE FALSE TRUE
TRUE TRUE FALSE
TRUE TRUE TRUE
968 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.36 L_Or_2
/B2UB
E,Q E2XW
E,Q
E,Q
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
Inputs Output
bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE
FALSE TRUE FALSE
FALSE TRUE TRUE
TRUE FALSE FALSE
TRUE FALSE TRUE
TRUE TRUE FALSE
TRUE TRUE TRUE
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 969
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.37 L_Or_3
/B2UB
E,Q E2XW
E,Q
E,Q
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
Inputs Output
bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE
FALSE TRUE FALSE
FALSE TRUE TRUE
TRUE FALSE FALSE
TRUE FALSE TRUE
TRUE TRUE FALSE
TRUE TRUE TRUE
970 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.38 L_Or_4
/B2UB
E,Q E2XW
E,Q
E,Q
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
Inputs Output
bIn3 bIn2 bIn1 bOut
FALSE FALSE FALSE FALSE
FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE
FALSE TRUE FALSE
FALSE TRUE TRUE
TRUE FALSE FALSE
TRUE FALSE TRUE
TRUE TRUE FALSE
TRUE TRUE TRUE
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 971
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.39 L_PCTRL_1
This FB is a PID controller and can be used for various control tasks (e.g. as dancer position controller,
tension controller, or pressure controller).
The FB is provided with the following functions:
• Adjustable control algorithm (P, PI, PID)
• Ramp function generator for preventing setpoint step-changes at the input
• Limitation of the controller output
• Factorisation of the output signal
• Vp adaptation
• Integral action component can be switched off
• Comparison function "Actual value = setpoint"
/B3&75/B
Q$GDSWBD
Q16HWBD ___
_ 9S &
7Q & &
& & &
.G & _
_ Q2XWBD
Q6HWBD ___
___
&
& & &
Q$FWBD E6HW(T$FW
&
& Q3,'2XWBD
E,Q$FW Q3,'2XWBD
&
E,2II &
Q,QIOXHQFHBD Q,QIOXHQFH2XWBD
E(QDEOH,QIOXHQFH5DPS
E,6HW &
Q,6HWBD
E3,'2II
Inputs
nAdapt_a Percentage adaptation of the gain Vp set in C00222 and the reset time Tn set in
INT C00223.
Then, the adapted reset time is as follows:
Vp C222 ⋅ nAdapt_a [%] ⋅ Tn C223 [ms]
Tn = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
100 [%]
• Internal limitation to ± 199.99 %
• Changes can be done online.
• Display parameter: C00830/62
nNset_a Speed setpoint
INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %
• Internal limitation to ± 199.99 %
• Display parameter: C00830/89
972 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 973
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
974 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 975
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Gain (P component)
The input value is controlled by a linear characteristic. The slope of the characteristic is determined
by the controller gain Vp.
The controller gain Vp is set under C00222.
• The controller gain can be adapted via the input nAdapt_a (also possible in online mode).
• The input value nAdapt_a has a direct effect on the controller gain:
P = nAdapt_a ⋅ C00222
Example: With the parameterised controller gain Vp = 2.0 and nAdapt_a = 75 %, the resulting gain
factor is as follows:
75 [%]
P = ------------------- ⋅ 2.0 = 1.5
100 [%]
Reset time
The adjustment time Tn is set under C00223.
976 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
RFG-OUT
100 %
w2
w1 t ir t if
0%
t
Tir Tif
• tir and tif are the desired times for changing between w1 and w2.
• The ramps for acceleration and deceleration can be set individually.
• C00227: Acceleration time tir
• C00228: Deceleration time tif
• The tir/tif values are converted into the required Ti times according to the following formula:
100 % 100 %
T ir = t ir ⋅ ----------------------- T if = t if ⋅ -----------------------
w2 – w1 w2 – w1
• The ramp function generator is immediately set to "0" by setting bInAct to TRUE.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 977
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
bSetEqAct
TRUE
FALSE
Set value Act value
Hysteresis (1 %, fixed value)
C00247: Window
Act value
Set value
t
bSetEqAct
TRUE
FALSE
t
Hysteresis (1 %, fixed value)
C00247: Window
978 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 979
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.40 L_PT1_1
/B37B
& )LOWHUWLPH
Q,QBD Q2XWBD
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Function
Vp = 1
T t
980 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.41 L_RLQ_1
This FB links a selected direction of rotation to the quick stop function with wire-break protection.
/B5/4B
,QLW
,QLW
E&Z
E&FZ
6 E&Z&FZ
)$/6(
5
E4VS
758(
Inputs
bCw Input
BOOL • TRUE = CW rotation
bCCw Input
BOOL • TRUE = CCW rotation
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Function
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 981
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.42 L_SignalMonitor_a
This FB outputs four analog signals which can be selected from a list of analog output signals of all
function blocks provided in the device.
• Offset and gain of the source signals are adjustable.
/B6LJQDO0RQLWRUBD
& & &
Q2XWBD
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
982 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.43 L_SignalMonitor_b
This FB outputs four binary signals which can be selected from a list of binary output signals of all
function blocks provided in the device.
• Inversion of the output signals can be set.
/B6LJQDO0RQLWRUBE
& &%LW
E2XW
& &%LW
E2XW
& &%LW
E2XW
& &%LW
E2XW
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 983
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.44 L_Transient_1
This FB serves to evaluate digital signal edges and convert them into timed, retriggerable pulses.
Rising signal edges, falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated.
/B7UDQVLHQWB
E,Q W E2XW
& &
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
984 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
bIn
TRUE
FALSE
t
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
t
Pulse duration
Functional sequence
1. A FALSE-TRUE edge at the bIn input sets the bOut output to TRUE.
2. After the parameterised pulse duration has elapsed, the bOut output is reset to FALSE unless
another FALSE/TRUE edge has been set at the bIn input.
• If an additional FALSE-TRUE edge occurs at the bIn input, the pulse duration starts again from
the beginning, i.e. the bOut output can be retriggered.
bIn
TRUE
FALSE
t
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
t
Pulse duration
Functional sequence
1. A TRUE-FALSE edge at the bIn inputs sets the bOut output to TRUE.
2. After the parameterised pulse duration has elapsed, the bOut output is reset to FALSE unless
another TRUE/FALSE edge has been set at the bIn input.
• If an additional TRUE-FALSE edge occurs at the bIn input, the pulse duration starts again from
the beginning, i.e. the bOut output can be retriggered.
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 985
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
bIn
TRUE
FALSE
t
bOut
TRUE
FALSE
t
Pulse duration
[17-26] Switching performance for function selection "2: High and low edge"
Functional sequence
1. A signal change (FALSE/TRUE edge or TRUE/FALSE edge) at the bIn input sets the bOut output to
TRUE.
2. After the parameterised pulse duration has elapsed, the bOut output is reset to FALSE unless
another signal change has taken place at the bIn input.
• In case of another signal change at the input bIn, the pulse time restarts to elapse, i.e. the
output bOut can be retriggered.
986 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.45 L_Transient_2
This FB serves to evaluate digital signal edges and convert them into timed, retriggerable pulses.
Rising signal edges, falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated.
/B7UDQVLHQWB
E,Q W E2XW
& &
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 987
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.46 L_Transient_3
This FB serves to evaluate digital signal edges and convert them into timed, retriggerable pulses.
Rising signal edges, falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated.
/B7UDQVLHQWB
E,Q W E2XW
& &
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
988 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.1 Function blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.1.47 L_Transient_4
This FB serves to evaluate digital signal edges and convert them into timed, retriggerable pulses.
Rising signal edges, falling signal edges or both signal edges can be evaluated.
/B7UDQVLHQWB
E,Q W E2XW
& &
Inputs
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 989
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
This chapter describes the system blocks which are available for the controller in the FB Editor.
The function blocks are described in the previous chapter "Function blocks". ( 909)
990 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
Related topics:
Overview of function blocks available ( 909)
Working with the FB Editor ( 857)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 991
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.1 LS_AnalogInput
17.2.2 LS_CANManagement
Control of internal functions of the CAN driver and display of the "Operational" status as well as the
node address.
For a detailed description see the main chapter "System bus CAN on board":
Internal interfaces | System block "LS_CANManagement" ( 567)
17.2.3 LS_DataAccess
17.2.4 LS_DeviceMonitor
For a detailed description see the main chapter "Motor control (MCTRL)":
Internal status signals | System block "LS_DeviceMonitor" ( 257)
17.2.5 LS_DigitalInput
17.2.6 LS_DigitalOutput
992 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.7 LS_DisFree
This system block displays 4 arbitrary 16-bit signals of the application on display codes.
/6B'LV)UHH
Z'LV
&
Z'LV
&
Z'LV
&
Z'LV
&
Inputs
wDis1 ... wDis4 Inputs for any 16-bit signals of the application
WORD
From version 11.00.00 onwards:
Note: From version 11.00.00 the inputs are named according to the display
wC481_1 ... wC481_4_a parameter for an easier allocation.
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 993
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.8 LS_DisFree_a
This system block displays 4 arbitrary analog signals of the application on display codes.
/6B'LV)UHHBD
Q'LVBD 2IIVHW 8VHUXQLW
& & 'LVSOD\IDFWRU 7H[W &
& > & @
Inputs
nDis1_a ... nDis4_a Inputs for arbitrary analog signals of the application
INT
From version 11.00.00 onwards:
Note: From version 11.00.00 the inputs are named according to the display
nC482_1_a ... nC482_4_a parameter for an easier allocation.
Parameter
994 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
In addition to the display in percent in C00482/1...8, for the first four analog signals
nDis1_a ... nDis4_a the configurable display parameters C00487/1...4 are provided. Via these
display parameters, internal process variables can be displayed, e.g. on the keypad, with an
individual scaling and an individual unit (from keypad version 02.01).
Example 1:
• Input variable nDis1_a = 100 %
• Offset 1 (C00484/1) = 0 %
• Display factor 1 (C00485/1) = 123.45
• Text 1 (C00486/1) = "parts"
Example 2:
• Input variable nDis2_a = 40 %
• Offset 2 (C00484/2) = 35 %
• Display factor 2 (C00485/2) = 20
• Text 2 (C00486/2) = "kg"
40 [%] + 35 [%]
User unit 2 = --------------------------------------- ⋅ 20 [kg] = 15.00 kg
100 [%]
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 995
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.9 LS_DisFree_b
This system block displays 8 arbitrary digital signals of the application on a bit coded display code.
/6B'LV)UHHBE
E'LV
%LW
E'LV
%LW
E'LV
%LW
&
E'LV
%LW
E'LV
%LW
Inputs
bDis1 ... bDis8 Inputs for arbitrary digital signals of the application
BOOL
From version 11.00.00 onwards:
Note: From version 11.00.00 the inputs are named according to the display
bC480_B0 ... bC480_B7 parameter for an easier allocation.
Parameter
17.2.10 LS_DriveInterface
996 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.11 LS_Keypad
This system block is used on I/O interconnection level if the "Keypad" control mode has been
selected in C00007.
In the "Keypad" control mode, the LS_Keypad system block passes on various setpoints and control
commands to the technology application which can be selected/activated via codes using the
keypad.
/6B.H\SDG
E6HW4XLFNVWRS
&
E6HW'&%UDNH
&
Q7RUTXH0RW/LP
&
Q7RUTXH*HQ/LP
&
E6HW6SHHG&FZ
&
Q0DLQ6HW9DOXH
&
E-RJ6SHHG
&
E-RJ6SHHG
&
E03RW(QDEOH
&
E03RW8S
&
E03RW'RZQ
&
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 997
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
Parameter
17.2.12 LS_MotionControlKernel
Interface to the basic drive functions implemented in Motion Control Kernel (MCK).
For a detailed description see the main chapter "Basic drive functions":
Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotionControlKernel" ( 392)
17.2.13 LS_MotorInterface
For a detailed description see the main chapterl "Motor control (MCTRL)":
Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotorInterface" ( 251)
998 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.14 LS_ParFix
This system block outputs various fixed values (constants) to be used in the interconnection.
/6B3DU)L[
E7UXH
758(
Q3RVBD
Q1HJBD
Q3RVBBD
Q1HJBBD
Z
[))))
Z'ULYH&WUO
[
6ZLWFK2Q 758(
(QDEOH2SHUDWLRQ 758(
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
bTrue 1 ≡ TRUE
BOOL
wDriveCtrl 9 ≡ 0x0009
WORD • Bit 0, SwitchOn = TRUE
• Bit 3, EnableOperation = TRUE
• All others: FALSE
See also:
wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 101)
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 999
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.15 LS_ParFree
/6B3DU)UHH
Z3DU
&
Z3DU
&
Z3DU
&
Z3DU
&
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
1000 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.16 LS_ParFree_a
/6B3DU)UHHBD
Q3DUBD
&
Q3DUBD
&
Q3DUBD
&
Q3DUBD
&
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1001
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.17 LS_ParFree_b
/6B3DU)UHHBE
E3DU
&
E3DU
&
E3DU
&
E3DU
&
E3DU
&
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
bPar1 ... bPar16 Output of the signal levels (FALSE/TRUE) parameterised in C00470/1...16
BOOL
From version 11.00.00 onwards:
Note: From version 11.00.00 the outputs are named according to the respective
bC470_1 ... bC470_16 setting parameter for an easier allocation.
Parameter
1002 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.18 LS_ParFree_p
/6B3DU)UHHBS
GQ&BBS
&
GQ&BBS
&
GQ&BBS
&
GQ&BBS
&
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1003
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.19 LS_ParFree_v
/6B3DU)UHHBY
Q3DUBY
&
Q3DUBY
&
Q3DUBY
&
Q3DUBY
&
Outputs
Parameter
1004 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.20 LS_ParReadWrite_1-3
The LS_ParReadWrite_1 ... LS_ParReadWrite_3 system blocks are used for reading and writing local
parameters.
• If several system blocks are activated at the same time, the blocks will be processed one at a
time every time the main program is executed.
• The SB supports one-time and cyclic reading/writing in an adjustable time interval.
/6B3DU5HDG:ULWHB[
E([HFXWH &[ &\FOHWLPH E'RQH
E5HDG:ULWH &[ 6WDWH E)DLO
&[ 3DU,QGH[
3DU6XELQGH[
Z3DU,QGH[
Z3DU6XELQGH[ &
&[ &[
Z,Q+:RUG :ULWH 5HDG Z2XW+:RUG
Z,Q/:RUG Z2XW/:RUG
$ULWKPHWLF &[ 1XPHUDWRU $ULWKPHWLF
PRGH &[ 'HQRPLQDWRU PRGH
Inputs
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1005
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Parameter
1006 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1007
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
The implemented arithmetic function enables easy arithmetic conversion of the process values to
be written or read via parameterisable factors into the format of the target parameter without the
need of an additional arithmetic function block.
• In C01093, the interpretation of the wInHWord and wInLWord inputs can be set to be able to
write to parameters:
Internal conversion
If arithmetic modes 1 ... 3 are selected in C01093, the input value / read parameter value is
internally converted via parameterisable factors.
• Division is not remainder considered.
Counter [16]
parameter value to be written = Input value [32] ⋅ -------------------------------------------
Denominator [16]
C01094: Numerator
C01095: Denominator
Counter [16]
Output value [32] = Read parameter value ⋅ -------------------------------------------
Denominator [16]
C01094: Numerator
C01095: Denominator
1008 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
17.2.21 LS_PulseGenerator
This system block outputs 9 different fixed frequencies and 1 frequency with parameterisable
pulse/dead time.
From version 06.00.00 onwards, the SB provides a TRUE signal at the bFirstCycleDone output when
the first 1-ms processing cycle is completed and the time set in C00400/3 has expired. This status
signal can e.g. be used for the delayed enable of peripheral devices or motor control setpoints so
that all required initial values are calculated first after the controller switch-on.
/6B3XOVH*HQHUDWRU
E+]
+]
E+]
E+]
E+]
E+])ODVK
E+])ODVK
E6LQJOH)ODVK
E6LQJOH)ODVK
E'RXEOH)ODVK
E6TXDUH:DYH
& &
E)LUVW&\FOH'RQH
&
Outputs
Identifier Value/meaning
Data type
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1009
17 Function library
17.2 System blocks
________________________________________________________________
Parameter
Note!
The real length of the low or high level at the bSquareWave output is always 1 ms higher
than set in C00400/1 or C00400/2. If "0 ms" is set, a level with a length of 1 ms is created
length, for instance, and if "1000 ms" is set, a level with a length of 1001 ms is created.
17.2.22 LS_SetError_1
For a detailed description see the main chapter "Diagnostics & error management":
"LS_SetError_1" system block ( 471)
17.2.23 LS_SyncManagement
For a detailed description see main chapter "Synchronisation of the internal time base of
the controller":
Internal interfaces | System block "LS_SyncManagement" ( 576)
17.2.24 LS_WriteParamList
For a detailed description see the main chapterl "Parameter change-over". ( 577)
1010 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Index
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1011
Index
________________________________________________________________
1012 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Index
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1013
Index
________________________________________________________________
1014 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Index
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1015
Index
________________________________________________________________
1016 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Index
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1017
Index
________________________________________________________________
1018 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Index
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1019
Index
________________________________________________________________
1020 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Index
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1021
Index
________________________________________________________________
1022 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Index
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1023
Index
________________________________________________________________
1024 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Index
________________________________________________________________
V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) 154 oC5: Ixt overload (error message) 455
Motor control (C00006) 601 oC6: I2xt overload - motor (error message) 461
Motor cosine phi (C00091) 619 oC7 241
Motor current (C00054) 612 oC7: Motor overcurrent (error message) 455
Motor data 105 oH1: Heatsink overtemperature (error message) 454
Motor data changeover 577 oH3: Motor temperature (X106) triggered (error message) 454
Motor data parameter list 577 oH4: Heatsink temp. > shutdown temp. -5°C (error message)
Motor holding brake 402 454
Motor load monitoring (I2xt) 239 Open-circuit monitoring - encoder 250
Motor magnetising current (C00095) 620 Operating conditions (CAN on board) 489
Motor magnetising inductance (C00092) 619 Operating mode
Motor overcurrent monitoring 241 Speed follower 400
Motor parameter identification 111 StandBy 398
Motor parameter identification is active 87 Operation with increased rated power 206
Motor phase direction of rotation (C00905) 763 Operation with safety module 399
Motor phase error monitoring before operation 246 Optical location 83
Motor phase failure monitoring 245 Optimising the response to setpoint changes (SLVC) 171
Motor phase failure threshold (C00599) 711 Option "Lock bFail at TroubleQSP" 101
Motor rotor resistance (C00082) 618 Original application|control source (C00008) 604
Motor rotor time constant (C00083) 618 oS1: Maximum speed limit reached (error message) 457
Motor selection 105 oS2: Max. motor speed (error message) 457
Motor speed monitoring 249 Oscillation damping 216
Motor stator leakage inductance (C00085) 618 Oscillation damping filter time (C00235) 652
Motor stator resistance (C00084) 618 Oscillation damping influence (C00234) 652
Motor temperature monitoring (PTC) 242 Oscilloscope function 472
Motor voltage (C00052) 612 ot1: Maximum torque reached (error message) 455
Motorparameter (C00969) 768 ot2: Speed controller output limited (error message) 459
Multilingualism 30 oU: DC bus overvoltage (error message) 455
Output frequency (C00058) 613
N Output power (C00980) 770
Network management telegram (NMT) 501 Override point of field weakening (C00080) 617
NMT (network management) 501
Node address 497
P
Node ID 497 Parameter change-over 577
Number of CAN SDO channels (C00366) 672 Parameterisable function blocks 860
Number of encoder increments (C00420) 680 Password data (C00505) 697
Password protection 36
O PC manual control 67
O1U PDO mapping 505, 507, 509, 511
Gain (C00434) 681 PDO synchronisation 521
Input value (C00439) 681 Peak current limitation 123
Offset (C00435) 681 Phase sequence reversal 219
Voltage (C00436) 681 Plant parameters 110
oC1: Power section - short circuit (error message) 456 PLI without motion
oC10: Maximum current reached (error message) 457 Adaptation of ident angle (C02875) 832
oC11: Clamp operation active (error message) 459 Adaptation of time duration (C02872) 831
oC12: I2xt overload - brake resistor (error message) 458 Ident. el. rotor displ. angle (C02873) 831
oC13: Maximum current for Fch exceeded (error message) 459 Optimisation factor (C02870) 830
oC14: Direct-axis current controller limitation (error message) Running time (C02871) 830
460 PLI without motion (C02874) 832
oC15: Cross current controller limitation (error message) 460 Pole position identification 197
oC16: Torque controller limitation (error message) 460 Port block "LP_CanIn1" 505
oC17: Clamp sets pulse inhibit (error message) 457 Port block "LP_CanIn2" 507
oC2: Power section - earth fault (error message) 456 Port block "LP_CanIn3" 509
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1025
Index
________________________________________________________________
Port block "LP_CanIn4" 511 Resp. to brake resist. overtemp. (C00574) 706
Port block "LP_CanOut1" 513 Resp. to CAN bus connection (C00592) 709
Port block "LP_CanOut2" 514 Resp. to CANx_IN monitoring (C00593) 709
Port block "LP_CanOut3" 515 Resp. to communication error with MCI (C01501) 786
Port block "LP_CanOut4" 516 Resp. to control word error (C00594) 710
Position encoder selection (C00490) 696 Resp. to controller limitations (C00570) 705
Power section ID (C00093) 620 Resp. to DC-bus voltage (C00600) 712
Power-on time meter (C00179) 643 Resp. to device overload (Ixt) (C00604) 712
Pre-defined error field (I-1003) 545 Resp. to earth fault (C00602) 712
Printing the interconnection 903 Resp. to fan failure (C00566) 704
Process data objects, identifiers 517 Resp. to heatsink temp. > shutdown temp. -5°C (C00582) 707
Processing time 491 Resp. to LS_SetError_x (C00581) 707
Producer heartbeat time (I-1017) 549 Resp. to mains phase failure (C00565) 703
Product type code (C00203) 648 Resp. to max. freq. feedb. DIG12/67 (C00607) 713
PS01: No memory module (error message) 464 Resp. to max. speed at switching freq. (C00588) 708
PS02: Par. set invalid (error message) 465 Resp. to max. speed/output freq. reached (C00579) 706
PS03: Par. set device invalid (error message) 465 Resp. to maximum current (C00609) 713
PS04: Par. set Mci invalid (error message) 465 Resp. to maximum torque (C00608) 713
PS07: Par. memory module invalid (error message) 465 Resp. to motor overload (I²xt) (C00606) 713
PS08: Par. device invalid (error message) 466 Resp. to motor overtemp. PTC (C00585) 707
PS09: Par. format invalid (error message) 466 Resp. to motor phase failure (C00597) 711
PS10: Memory module binding invalid (error message) 466 Resp. to open circuit AINx (C00598) 711
PSM Resp. to open circuit HTL encoder (C00586) 708
Activate Lss sat. char. (C02859) 826 Resp. to operating system error (C00580) 706
Imax Lss saturation characteristic (C02855) 826 Resp. to peak current (C00569) 704
Lss saturation characteristic (C02853) 826 Resp. to PLI monitoring (C00643) 725
Maximum motor current field weakening (C00938) 765 Resp. to speed controller limited (C00567) 704
PTC 242 Resp. to switching frequency reduction (C00590) 708
PW protection config MCI (C00510) 701 Resp. to too frequent AutoFailReset (C00189) 646
PW protection config X1(CAN) (C00509) 700 Resp. to wrong controller setting (C00571) 705
PW protection config X6(DIAG) (C00508) 699 Reversing the phase sequence 219
PW protection internal config (C00506) 697 Rotor displacement angle detection after controller enable 197
RPDO1 communication parameter (I-1400) 553
R
RPDO1 mapping parameter (I-1600) 557
Rated device current (C00098) 620
RPDO2 communication parameter (I-1401) 554
Rated heat amount of brake resist. (C00131) 625
RPDO2 mapping parameter (I-1601) 558
Rated motor current (C00088) 619
RPDO3 communication parameter (I-1402) 555
Rated motor frequency (C00089) 619
RPDO3 mapping parameter (I-1602) 558
Rated motor power (C00081) 617
RPDO4 communication parameter (I-1403) 556
Rated motor speed (C00087) 618
RPDO4 mapping parameter (I-1603) 559
Rated motor torque (C00097) 620
Running time (C00180) 644
Rated motor voltage (C00090) 619
Rated power - brake resistor (C00130) 624 S
Reduc. brake chopper threshold (C00174) 642 Safety functions 399
Reference project 908 Safety instructions 19
Remote Safety module 399
Acceleration/deceleration time (C00461) 688
Saturation characteristic 193
Control (C00462) 688
SC
MCK control (C00463) 689
Depth of current setpoint filter (C00272) 655
Monitoring timeout (C00464) 690
Filter time const. DC detection (C00280) 656
Setpoint selection (C00729) 735
Freq. current setpoint filter (C00270) 654
Reset error message 448
Max. acceleration change (C00274) 655
Reset node (CAN) 495 max. output voltage (C00276) 656
Reset time Imax/M controller (C00074) 616 Settings (C00079) 617
1026 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Index
________________________________________________________________
Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14 1027
Index
________________________________________________________________
U
Ultimate motor current 241
Ultimate motor current (C00939) 765
USB diagnostic adapter 26
User data 525
User error 1 (error message) 469
User error 2 (error message) 469
User error 3 (error message) 469
User error 4 (error message) 470
User menu 34
User menu (C00517) 702
User-definable V/f characteristic 140
Userlevel 29
V
V/f base frequency 133
V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) 119, 126
V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) 154
V/f emergency operation in case of encoder open circuit 154,
259
Validity 15
VFC
Frequency interpol. point n (C00967) 767
Limitation V/f + sensor (C00971) 768
Ti V/f +sensor (C00973) 768
Time const. slip comp. (C00966) 766
V/f base frequency (C00015) 606
Vmin boost (C00016) 607
Voltage interpol. point n (C00968) 767
Vp V/f +sensor (C00972) 768
VFC-ECO
Minimum voltage V/f (C00977) 769
Ti CosPhi controller (C00976) 769
Voltage reduction (C00978) 769
Voltage reduction ramp (C00982) 770
Vp CosPhi controller (C00975) 769
Vmin boost 135
Vp current controller (C00075) 616
Vp speed controller (C00070) 615
1028 Lenze · 8400 StateLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Your opinion is important to us
)(('%$&.
These instructions were created to the best of our knowledge and
belief to give you the best possible support for handling our product.
If you have suggestions for improvement, please e-mail us to:
feedback-docu@Lenze.de
1029
8400 StateLine · Reference manual · EDS84AVSCxx · 13465122 · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2014 · TD05/TD14
Lenze Drives GmbH
Breslauer Straße 3
D-32699 Extertal
Germany
+49 5154 82-0
lenze@lenze.com
www.lenze.com
Service
Lenze Service GmbH
Breslauer Straße 3
D-32699 Extertal
Germany
008000 24 46877 (24 h helpline)
+49 5154 82-1112
service@lenze.com